Home

Style Edit - Just Music

1. Selecting a Sound and playing it on the keyboard 1 Be sure the Upper 1 track is selected and set to play no chord Se Day A selected track is shown with a white background In this example the Upper 1 track is selected If it is not selected press it once to select it The absence of the FTE icon over the bank icon shows that the Upper 1 track is set to play If it is muted press the bank icon to set it to play MIC IM LOWER UPPERS UPPER2 UPPER STS Sub Hama Scale 2 If you want to play the Sound on the whole keyboard be sure the key board is in Full Upper mode If it is split in two parts press the FULL UPPER button in the KEYBOARD MODE section on the control panel KEYBOARD MODE SPLIT FULL UPPER
2. Effect and Harmony switches Connecting a microphone To sing along with the Pa800 you must first connect a suitable microphone to AUDIO INPUT 1 the one that goes to the Voice Processor Any dynamic microphone is directly supported To connect a phantom powered condenser microphone you need an external phantom power supply You can also connect the microphone though an external mixer and connect one of the mixer s line outputs to the AUDIO INPUT 1 of the Pa800 1 Lower the Mic In track volume by using the dedicated slider on the con trol panel STYLE PLAY S no chord MIC IM OWER UPPERS UPPER2 UPPER To control the Mic volume the Qu MIC LED must be turned on If C5 ASSIGN A it is off repeatedly press the SLIDER MODE button to CO ASSIGN B change it Please note that the SLIDER MODE status is saved with each Performance SLIDER MODE 2 Connect a microphone 3 Press the EFF
3. Selecting the desired entry from the Main List A large database is already included with the instrument and you can later customize it You may browse through this database in a variety of ways 1 While you are in Style Play or Song Play mode press the SONGBOOK button to open the SongBook window Style or Standard MIDI File s currently assigned to the arranger or sequencer s SONGBOOK l SONGEOODKE T B no chord B e benre Use the scroll bar to see all Songs in the list Keep SHIFT pressed and touch the Up Down arrow to ey 2much afterworld Ballad duo A day in Paradise liada scroll to the next previ MEO Une Ballad ous alphabetic section SongBook Main GERDA hard day night PoP As an alternative you List GD A whiter shade Ballad can use the DIAL Press this check Select box to turn the Book Book tust t Lyri EE ie Ee ES view filter on Press this button to Press this button Adds the selected entry select the current entry to edit the view to the Custom List if to play
4. 36 Playing Sounds Changing the split point 5 Play the keyboard Note how the keyboard once again plays the Upper tracks for the entire length of the keyboard a Upper no Changing the split point If you are not comfortable with the selected split point you may set the split point to any key 1 Press the Split tab to see the Split Point panel Sprit Point A e Gor Bra E Hame 2 Touch the keyboard in the display then play a note on the keyboard Or press the Split Point parameter to select it and use the DIAL to select the new split point TEMPO VALUE A SS N D n MICA IM LOWER UPPERS UPPERZ UPPERI STS Sub e ane J_tt le J Pas Lan Playing Sounds 37 Raising or lowering the Upper octave Raising or lowering the Upper octave If all Upper tracks sound too high or too low you can quickly change which octave they are playing 1n 1 Use the UPPER OCTAVE buttons on the control panel to transpose all Upper tracks at the same t
5. Style Controls Style Elements Selecting and playing Styles 43 Selecting and playing a Style Selecting and playing a Style 1 Press the Style area in the display The Style Select window appears Set of banks 1 10 corresponds to the top row 0 Note You can open of Styles on the control panel 11 20 to the the Style Select window lower row Favorite to the Favorite Styles also by pressing one of the buttons in the STYLE SELECT section This will STYLE SELECT Fast ie let you jump directly to E Bo _ the desired idi bank E3 Seen EE eer E The selected Style is highlighted a E 94 Press a Style s name to select it Press one of the side tabs to select a different Style bank Press one of the lower tabs to select a different Style page O Note You DISPLAY HOLD 2 Select a Style from the Style Select window can leave the Style Select window open in the display even after selecting a Style Just press the DISPLAY HOLD button to turn its LED on In this case press the EXIT button to exit from a window
6. O Note Be sure tracks Upper 2 and Upper 3 are muted and are not play ing If you hear more than one sound see also page 33 for how to mute tracks 32 Playing Sounds Selecting a Sound and playing it on the keyboard 3 Press the Upper 1 track s area in the display to open the Sound Select window O Note You can also open the Sound Select window by pressing one Set of banks 1 10 corresponds The triangle means to the top row of Factory Sounds The currently ow cam touch this on the control panel selected Sound ardet track for dde to open a 11 17 to the lower row User also appears on Nai ud of the buttons in the salece window Sound s name are the User Sounds the page header sound PERFORMANCE SOUND SELECT section pro vided the LED on the SOUND Grand Piano RX Trk Upper 1 SOUND SELECT button is A on This will let you jump Di directly to the desired Grand Piano Rx y Sound bank Pa Trumpet pum a LI Eee Grand Piano Rx Sound bank icon SOUND SELECT The selected Sound is high lighted Press a Sound s name to select it PERFORMANCE SELECT O
7. Style Select section The SEQUENCER button ta KORG cata D amp Style Elements Style Controls Sequencer 1 controls Entering Backing Sequence Quick Record mode 1 Press the SEQUENCER button to switch to the Sequencer mode MODE STYLE SONG SEQUENCER 7 PLAY PLAY SEQUENCER SOUND Pm aaa Eeer Jt NEWSONG B Piano 121 883 888 MOL Bop Io s eo r iar After pressing the SEQUENCER See button the main page of the LPI RPIERTPJ au 30 au Sequencer mode appears Tad T85 THE Ta Tas 2 Press the RECORD button to open the Song Record Mode Select dialog box RECORD Press the RECORD button to open the Song Record Mode Select dialog box Recording a new Song 73 Preparing to record 3 Select the Backing Sequence Quick Record option and press OK to enter the Backing Sequence Record mode SONG RECORD B SEQ RECORD Free M
8. Sequencers controls Selecting a Song to play 1 Press the SONG PLAY button to switch to the Song Play mode MODE O Hint In Style Play STYLE SONG SONG PLAY eno chord mode you can pre select PLAY M PLAY U SOUND l Aben song gt EE DEE A E E m mi Meter d d Hn 1 128 to both sequencers This way you will be ready to start them as soon as you switch to Song Play mode After pressing the SONG PLAY button the main page of the Song Play mode appears MIC IM LOWER UPPERS UPPER UPPER STS Sub ane J te J saie ros J sett J The Songs area of the Style Play main page 0 Hint As an alterna 5 au Sony SEQUENCERS Song Selection tive you can open the aF T palme oe Meter d E BACKLIP B4 B8 B6 11 14 Song Select window Dy ater i Hio lt pressing the SELECT but MIDIFILE 11 08 06 18 18 ton in the SEQUENCER 1 Canyon 11K 03 88 06 11 21 section on the control panel MySun 3 3K 03 88 06 11 21 ar CN MightDay 6 2K H3 B8 B6 11 21 7 cl C SI MIC IM LOWER UPPERS UPPER UPPER SELECT lt lt Juke Lyrics STS Sub sur Met Name Me f sose Pas een
9. 3 Activate the MIDI Thru function on the external sequencer 4 Press GLOBAL and go to the MIDI MIDI Setup General Controls page uncheck the Local Control On parameter see page 203 This is called the Local Off status 5 Press SEQUENCER to go to the Sequencer mode Go to the Preferences Global Setup page see page 191 Select the Extern Seq MIDI Setup Note Settings may change when new Global data is loaded from disk To protect settings from loading use the Global Protect function see Global Protect on page 235 6 Select the Write Global Seq Setup command from the page menu to save the assigned MIDI Setup to the Global 7 Play the keyboard Notes played on the keyboard go from the MIDI OUT of the Pa800 to the MIDI IN of the com puter MIDI interface or go from the USB port of the Pa800 to the USB port of the computer Notes generated by the computer i e a song played by its sequencer are sent through the MIDI OUT of the MIDI interface to the MIDI IN connector of the Pa800 or go from the USB port of the computer to the USB port of the Pa800 MIDI Connecting the Pa800 to an external sequencer 243 The Local Off When the Pa800 is connected to an external sequencer we rec ommend yo
10. E Lyrics Markers Seq 2 Link Mode gt GBL The two onboard Sequencers can work each one with a different Tempo Off or use both the same Tempo various Link modes You can turn the Link Mode on by pressing the TEMPO LOCK button and turning its LED on by default Beat mode is selected the first time This also turns the Tempo Lock function on Hint You can always start both sequencers simultaneously by keeping the SHIFT button held down while pressing one of the gt E PLAY STOP controls Off The sequencers Tempo are not linked Each sequencer uses its own Tempo Measure The two sequencers Tempo are linked together The Tempo data written into the Songs are Song Play operating mode 159 Preferences General Control ignored Adjust the Tempo using the TEMPO VALUE controls Start one of the sequencers by pressing its own P N PLAY STOP control Then start the other sequencer by pressing the other FIR PLAY STOP control the second sequencer starts at the next measure Beat The two sequencer s Tempo are linked together The Tempo data written into the Songs are ignored Adjust the Tempo using the TEMPO VALUE controls Start one of the sequencers by pressing its own P N PLAY STOP control Then start the other sequencer by pressing the other P N PLAY STOP control the second sequencer st
11. 242 Connecting the Pa800 to an external sequencer 243 Playing another instrument with the Pa800 244 Appendix Factory data usurpar lcd terra 246 SI rro reseteo dee 246 Style Plements Arr duode reda D es 250 Single Touch Settings ST 250 Sounds bank Orde vasc Ge ge dao rondas 25 Sounds Program Change order 260 Drum Miera eT pe Ep 268 Multisamples carro parao 269 Ree TEE 273 EE oa wes ee Wee ohms aa sos 279 PA Ro eee ee E 281 EE EE NEE 284 Assignable parameters 286 List of Footswitch and EC5 functions 286 List of Assignable Pedal and Assignable Slider functions 287 List of Assignable Switch functions 288 Se ee ee ee a ee ee ee eee nee ee 289 MIDI Dala EE EE 290 MIDI GET EEN 290 Program Change messages used as remote commands 291 MIDI Implementation Chart 292 Recognized chords 293 Installing the Korg USB MIDI Driver 295 Connecting the Pa800 to a personal computer 295 KORG USB MIDI Driver system requirements 295 Please note DeloFe USE ie gie eedem ER E wee ar ER 295 Windows Installing the KORG USB MIDI Driver 295 Mac OS X Installing KORG USB MIDI Driver 296 iai d amp 297 Troubleshooting 298 Technical specifications 300 ll dee EDITT 302 uononpoaju 6 Easy Mode Eas
12. N Slap Bass 4 Picked E Bass 4 Z 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 I Fretless Bass 3 3 258 Factory data Sounds Bank order Name ES More mides AA Fmetss O AA wooer A CTE EN CIN E Fmesw SCS 3 mus St B etms mr W amp wems E 3 EA ETS NN MEN ETA o fao ETS fae MEN EMEA ws SES SES 35 FingerB amp Guitar E Basa Da Pron A pres 0 ECN EN DRESCH CS EA EIN EN Mower aa OS MATO EEREECR CT m 9 3 DECKER Emme aaa 30303 square CY yn Bases aa a Hammer apa poses apa pa Poinker Bas aa a Domus m n3 Digi Bass 2 Techno Orgs fmt ESCH Organ Pegai2 m n 3 BmWemem EEN 36 SlapPick Bass RX 5 3 3 Bank Drum amp Perc N I N Agogo GM pr o 113 Log Drum z f oa 12 Castanets pda p oa 115 ON SR sl zi Oo 3 A Ei 3 O o D g c 3 c 9 QO 3 A el G lt lt Concert BassDrum 121 Melodic Tom GM m o Melodic Tom 2 m 1 Reverse Tom Synth Drum GM Rhythm Box Tom Electric Drum Reverse Snare 3 m Ew me Ew pe 121 Reverse CymbalGM Reverse Cymbal 2 Dragon Gong Do y 3 A m x Goblins GM Echo Drops GM Screaming 2 Star Theme GM Gtr FretNoise GM Breath Noise GM Seashore GM Bird Tweet GM 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 103 120 121 122 123 120 124 125 126 127 2 Helicopter GM Gun Shot GM Synth Mallet Echo
13. Ve Ve 52 Song Play Selecting a Song to play 3 Scroll through the list and select the Song to play SEQUENCER 1 Song Selection Type Hame The selected Song is highlighted Press a Song s name to select it Use the Device pop up menu to select one of the available mass storage devices SSD U hard drive BACKUP MIDIFILE Canyon MySun MightDay Use the Open and Close buttons to browse through the folders Use the scroll bar to see all Songs in the list Keep SHIFT pressed and touch the Up Down arrow to scroll to the next previous alphabetic section As an alter native you can use the DIAL Press the Select button to select the highlighted Song and assign it to Sequencer 1 Use the Sync P Synchronized Path button to see the selected Song again 4 When the Song is selected press the Select button to confirm your selec tion and close the Song Select window SEQUENCER 1 Song Selection Type Mame Si BACKUP 94 85 66 11 14 MIDIFILE 11 88 86 18 18 Canyon BH3 Ha B6 11 21 MySun i H3 Ha B6 11 21 03 08 06 11 21 MightDay SONG PLAY db Canyon Meter 37d H Selected Song MIC IM LOWER UPPERS UPPER UPPER Juke Lyrics STS Bou amp Mark A Mame Sub sede Pas f Spit After pressing the Select button in the display the main page of the Song Play mode appears again Song Play 53 Playing back a Song Playing back a Song Once a Song has been
14. wo wo smesso o pomo om o Tage ne seres Ga wgess e O Telstar eese s smesavoa 264 Factory data Sounds Program Change order xm REO EE CI 3 5 5 A xm 9 5 Sumetezew eene Y m e 5 Dual Trumpets Trumpetatibn xm 1 a Swemerums _ stingsavoct at 7 58 Iden neen wn 5 fs fsa at 8 58 Wemmeed Trumpet ation a eene stings Vocal rs Movestrings 1 stings vocal rs Weiesrnesz stings a Vocal MOE ECETIA NONE um INEA SS RSC SS SS NN xm Ta lange CC Y m M 5 e TT xm 2 59 l nner meest vat 55 58 TWumetbeci Trumpet ation _ xm 3 59 analog velo seek vo vat 36 55 remeros fruman wn 5 odisey ees at 7 58 Aptrumpet Trumpet ation xm 5 59 l nner eene e 3 trumpetshake vs Trumpet ation xm 9 t masias sngsavoca Y iat 20 5 Concerttipiro Trumpet ation xm 1 5t sms siros m om 5 comes neen xm 9 s EZ UCI Y m om 5 loop TE wm 1 leen ees Y m m 5 XemeBer emesimhe _ xm z 5 oeweies serosa tat o 57 trombone GM Trumpetatibn v _ xm 3 5 oonstowvoie seek vo D i S7 Ise nem Lx s 5 Tete voices CI xm 5 5 ievos eene ia 57 ard trombone Trumpet ation Pre s 5 lenger ees ia 57 _ SoftTrombone neen xm 7 5 Acer ees is 57th trombone Trumpet ation L
15. NECE MEME IE MEME CS 7 CE METE 5 organ osa 36 eroonsa Natural Bossa 12 Cool Latin Jazz Cha Cha 1 lege Cha Cha 3 Cuban Cha Cha Dem 7 popa a leegen 35 ame E ar tte Beguine DEE a umso eam m o ooo ES KA Jee 1 eemawau 3 eemawau 3 vewewau 4 u nwau Musette Waltz French Waltz MA Irish Waltz 8 Laendler Waltz German Polka Italian Polka 1 T Rain roe a relian Mazra March 3 French March ESL AAA EE EE p AAA AAA pep 2 3 5 7 EE BEN E EN EN MON ER EN NUS 0 BrazilianSamba Samba ME 3 mme 3 Samba be sol 4 Biscosamba 3 Mambo Mamboxo 7 Mambo Pare E 8 mmi 3 wm2 30 Merengue ibd eie 2 5 Tap Dance Movie Ballad 7 Movie Swing 3 Western Movie ae Em Cinema Ballad 15 fives Factory data 249 PC CCO CC32 PC CC32 Bank User 1 Funky R amp B 17 SEU ETE AAA EA M one oe pego peque ET ME M WER px AO Eug AAA EE EAN MM EN MM AE AAA Lugo pup EE AA We BP pep pep AAA EG MEEEMEMEMEEN 8 A EE Na E a SR WER HE PC 2 3 5 7 12 13 15 1 20 21 22 NJ A D 5D 5 5 2 25 5 25 5 5 nm 2 OI 5 5 5 5 9 ojojoj o oc o o o o oj o o 9 9 9 9 3 u c c c c amp ielele te sels e C4 e ce e e X gt ja oo O jo jo jo o oO v o0 O O O0 Wo IO OO O ojo
16. While in Media mode you can load any Style into the Favorite folders as an alternative to the User Style banks See the Media chapter for more information on the Load Operations Renaming the Favorite banks While the Style Select window is in the display you can choose the Rename Favorite Bank command from the page menu and assign the Favorite Style banks any name you like see Rename Favorite Bank on page 79 The assigned name can be spanned over two lines by separating them with the paragraph character 9 For example to write World Music on two lines enter World Music Be careful not to write words exceeding the width of the side tabs of the Style Select window Q V c Q i o Ser Q cc 106 Style Record mode The Style structure Style Record mode By entering the Style Record mode you can create your own Styles or edit an existing Style The Style structure The term Style relates with music sequences automatically played by the arranger of the Pa800 A Style consists of a pre defined number of Style Elements E Pa800 features thirteen different Style Elements Variation 1 4 Intro 1 3 Fill 1 3 End ing 1 3 When playing these Style Elements can be selected directly from the control panel using the corresponding but tons To explain the Style structure we can use a tree structure as shown in the following diagram PR Pop Ballad L_ Variatio
17. by pressing the New Song button while in the Edit 1 page Creating a Custom List You can create several Custom Lists in the SongBook to make a set of entries suitable for your various shows Before starting a new Custom List be sure you have added all needed entries to the SongBook main database see Adding entries above 1 While in SongBook mode open the page menu and check the Enable List Edit item SONGBOOK Type Mame EA day in paradise Pop zen BP Ebony amp white Pop ee CER Light my inferno Pop E Long train going Pap wee After you check the ef S9seadone PP Enable List Edit item the List Edit page becomes Bel Song available Book Bek f Sot custom ka Into 2 Select a Custom List to be edited To edit an existing list press the Custom List tab to open the Custom List page and select one of the available Custom Lists To create a new list press the List Edit tab to open the List Edit page and press the New List button to create a new blank list 3 Press the Book tab to open the Book page and see the full database Use the various sorting searching and filtering options seen above to find 66 The SongBook Creating a Custom List the entries you are looking for Press the Add to List button when the desired entry has been selected SONGBOOK H anao chord d Use the scroll bar to see all Songs in the list Keep SHIFT pressed an
18. the veloc ity will not change With a setting of 100 the velocity will be changed the most Curve Only available in Advanced mode Use this parameter to select one of the six curves and to specify how the velocity will change over time Start Value 0 End Value 100 Curve 1 Curve 2 Curve 3 127 127 127 Velocity Velocity Velocity 1 1 1 Start End Start End Start End Value Value Value Value Value Value Curve 5 Curve 6 127 127 127 Velocity Velocity Velocity RANDOM 1 Start 1 Start End Start Value Value Value Value Start End Vel Value Only available in Advanced mode Velocity change at the start ing and ending ticks of the selected range 0 100 Velocity change in percentage Execute Press this button to execute the operation set in this page Track status icon Status of tracks Press this icon to change the status Play status The track can be heard Track names Mute status The track cannot be heard Under the buttons a label for each track is shown Style Edit Cut This function lets you quickly delete a selected measure or a series Of measures from the selected Chord Variation All fol lowing events are moved back to replace the cut measure s STYLE REC Edit FERC BASS ACEi ACC ACCS INN ACCS d Trans gt Delete f Copy fm Copy fm Coe ees After setting the various parameters press Execute E CV Style Element Chord Variation Us
19. CEN ening Same functions of the control panel but tons with the same name Upper Octave Down pa mute BW S xeme CCT 000000 oo Ale le Upper Mute 1 le Upper2 Mute 1 le Upper3 Mute 1 nice 1 SSC Sole Percussion Mute Ste mas mute SSC SS SSC SSC AAA Style Acc1 5 Mute Mute of Song track 4 usually the Mel ody track Song Drum amp Bass Mode Mute of all tracks apart for track 2 usu ally Bass and 10 usually Drum Mutes all tracks except for Bass and Lower Ensemble On Off QuarterTone Turns Quarter Tone on off Chord Latch Holds the recognized chord until the pedal is released Chord Latch Damper Holds the recognized chord until the pedal is released and sustains the tracks where the Damper has been turned on Glide When the pedal is pressed affected notes on Upper tracks are bent down according to settings for the Pitch Bend on the same tracks When the pedal is released notes return to the normal pitch at the speed defined by the Time parameter see Glide on page 197 Song Melody Mute Damper Pedal Soft Pedal Sostenuto Pedal Bass amp Lower Backing Assignable parameters 287 List of Assignable Pedal and Assignable Slider functions Function Microphone Talk Mic Lead On Off Mic Harmony On Off Mic Effects On Off Mic Latch On Off FX CC12 Switch FX CC13 Switch Rotary Spkr On Off Rotary Spkr Fast Slow Drawbar Perc On Off Drawbar Noise On Off Text Page Up
20. FX A D PERF STS gt GBLS 9 Effects assigned to the corresponding effect processors Usually A and C are reverbs while B and D are modulating effects cho rus flanger delay For a list of the available effects see the Advanced Edit addendum in the Accessory CD FX Amount PERF STS GR Volume of the effect that is added to the dry uneffected signal B to A D to C PERF STS GBL Amount of the B effect going back to the input of the A effect or of the D effect going back to the input of the C effect Mod Track Modulating Track PERF GBLS Source track for modulating MIDI messages You can modulate an effect parameter with a MIDI message generated by a physical controller or a Song track Effects in Song Play mode Pa800 is equipped with four effect processors or DSPs Digital Signal Processors to process MIDI tracks In Song Play mode you can have two or four effects at the same time depending on the midifile you are reading Effects A and B are usually reserved to both sequencers and Pads while effects C and D are usually reserved to Keyboard tracks Depending on the status of the Seq 2 FX Mode parameter each effect pair could be reserved to a different Sequencer see page 159 You can also create Songs that make use of all four effects in Sequencer mode A Song created on the Pa800 in Sequencer mode can use up to 4 effects usually 2 reverbs 2 modulating effects
21. Move it fully right to set Sequencer 1 to zero and Sequencer 2 to the maximum level Move it to the center to set both Sequencer at the same level Note When turning the instrument on move this slider to the cen ter to avoid starting a Song at the minimum level Headphones Connect a pair of headphones to the HEADPHONES output under the left part of the keyboard just under the joystick You can use headphones with an impedance of 16 200 50 2 sug gested Use a headphone splitter to connect more than one pair of headphones Audio Outputs Audio outputs allows you to connect the Pa800 to an external amplification system Stereo Connect two mono cables to the main LEFT RIGHT OUTPUTS Connect the other end of the cables to a stereo chan nel of your mixer two mono channels two powered monitors or the CD LINE IN or TAPE AUX input of your audio system Don t use the PHONO inputs of your audio system c io ie YU 3 H ES e 24 Start up Audio Inputs Mono Connect a mono cable to either the LEFT or RIGHT OUTPUT alone Connect the other end of the cable to a mono channel of your mixer a powered monitor or a single channel of your CD LINE IN or TAPE AUX input of a hi fi system you will hear that channel only unless you can set the amplifier to Mono mode Separate outputs You can connect your Pa800 to four channels of a mixer This is very useful when recording or if you want to
22. Note USB connection is also automatically discon nected when disconnecting the USB communica tion on the personal computer side To disconnect USB communication on a PC you usually select the dedicated command by clicking on the USB device icon with the right mouse but ton On the Mac select the USB device icon then select the Eject command or drag it to the eject icon in the Dock Hint We suggest to disconnect USB connection from the personal computer instead of pressing this button on the Pa800 Caveat Do not disconnect USB communication before the personal computer has really finished transferring files Sometimes the on screen indica tor tells the procedure has been completed BEFORE tt ts actually finished Disconnecting USB communication or discon necting the USB cable before data transfer has been completed may cause loss of data Media edit mode Page menu 237 Page menu Press the page menu icon to open the menu Press a command to select it Press anywhere in the display to close the menu without selecting a command Esc Create New Folder This command lets you create a new generic folder in the root of any device or inside any other generic folder You can t create a SET folder with this command since this type of folder is reserved to the Save operations and can be created with the New SET button in any Save page Create Hew Folder cancer Jo By pressing the T
23. See page 19 for more information on the INPUTS and volume control Front panel 15 MIC Press this button to turn the microphone input on or off The LED shows the status of the microphone section On The microphone input is turned on Off The microphone input is turned off SHIFT If you keep the SHIFT button pressed and press this but tons the Voice Processor Setup gt Setup page will appear see Voice Processor Setup Setup on page 212 CHORD SCANNING section PERF STS STSS In Style Play and Sequencer Backing Sequence mode use these buttons to define the way chords are recognized by the arranger LOWER Chords are detected below the split point The number of notes you should play to form a chord is defined by the Chord Scanning Mode parame ter see Chord Recognition Mode on page 101 UPPER Chords are detected above the split point You must always play three or more notes to let the arranger recognize a chord FULL both LEDs On Chords are detected on the full keyboard range You must always play three or more notes to let the arranger recognize a chord You can use this mode even when the Split Keyboard Mode is selected OFF No chords detected After pressing START STOP only the Drum and Percussion accompaniment tracks can play D KEYBOARD MODE section PERF STS STSS These buttons define how the four Keyboard tracks are posi tioned on the keyboard SPLIT The Low
24. 9 SINGLE TOUCH SETTING buttons These buttons allow to select up to four Single Touch Settings Each of the Styles and SongBook entries includes a maximum of four Single Touch Settings STS to automatically configure Keyboard tracks and effects and the Voice Processor at the touch of a finger When the SINGLE TOUCH LED is lit an STS is automatically selected when selecting a Style If you keep the SHIFT button pressed and press one of the buttons of this section the Write STS window appears in the display with the current STS already selected and you can save the current keyboard track settings in a STS see Write Sin gle Touch Setting dialog box on page 104 9 HELP Press this button to open the context sensitive Help 9 SHIFT With this button held down pressing certain other buttons gives access to a second function SEQUENCER 1 TRANSPORT CONTROLS Pa800 is equipped with two sequencers Sequencer 1 and Sequencer 2 each with its own set of transport controls The Sequencer 1 group is also used for the Sequencer mode lt lt and gt gt Rewind and Fast Forward commands If you use them while the Song is in play they make it scroll back or forward When pressed once these buttons move the Song to the previous or following measure When kept pressed they make the Song scrolling continu ously until you release them In Sequencer mode if you set a Locate Measure other than 1 the Song goes back
25. Copy FX and Paste FX commands from the page menu of the Style Play Song Play or Sequencer modes To copy a single effect 1 Select the source Song Performance Style or STS then go to the page of the single effect you want to copy FX A FX B FX C or FX D or go to the Effects FX Select page to copy all four effects This may be useful if you want to copy two or three of the four effects into different Performances Styles or STSs 2 Choose the Copy FX command from the page menu 3 Select the target Performance Style or STS then go to the page of the single effect you want to paste FX A FX B FX C or FX D 4 Choose the Paste FX command from the page menu To copy all four effects 1 Select the source Performance Style or STS then go to the Effects gt FX Select page to copy all four effects 2 Choose the Copy FX command from the page menu 3 Select the target Performance Style or STS then go to the page of the Effects gt FX Select page 4 Choose the Paste FX command from the page menu Easy Mode Easy Mode allows you to use the Style Play and Song Play modes with an easier to use user interface It is recommended to begin ners and to professionals alike that do not want to deal with the extra parameters of the Advanced mode At any time you can manually turn the Easy Mode on off with the Easy Mode command in the page menu of the Style Play and Song Play mode
26. Each entry of this database may include the song s author name genre original key tempo and meter When selecting one of the entries the associated Style or Standard MIDI File is automati cally recalled The List Header may change depending on the type of data associated with the selected entry e When a Style is associated to the entry the currently selected entry s name is shown on the left N and the associated Style is shown on the right Style e SS Style Funky Ballad e When a Standard MIDI File is associated to the entry the list header is split into two parts with the left half referring to Sequencer 1 and the right one referring to Sequencer 2 Information for the selected entry s name N and asso ciated Standard MIDI File S1 or S2 is given for each sequencer ipee SECRMVOM H Se PIHBRLL Note If you select a different Style or Standard MIDI File the entrys name field N returns blank meaning the entry has been modified Main list Full list of the SongBook database Use the scrollbar to browse through the list You can touch one of the heading labels above the list to change the order in which entries are shown For example by touching the Name label the list is alphabetically re ordered according to the file names The selected label turns red showing the cur rently selected ordering benre Typa Mame fe 2m
27. Mic Lead On Off Momentary switch controls assigned to Mic Latch On Off the Voice Processor Press to activated release to deactivate FX CC12 Switch Standard FX controllers FX CC13 Switch Drawbar Perc On Off Drawbar Noise On Off Scales The following is a list of scales or tunings you can select in var ious operating modes Equal Pure Major Pure Minor Arabic Pythagorean Werckmeister Kirnberger Slendro Pelog Stretch User Equal tuning the standard scale for modern Western music It is made of 12 identical semi tones Major chords in the selected key are perfectly tuned Minor chords in the selected key are perfected tuned An arabic scale using quarters of tone Set the Key parameter as follow C for the rast C bayati D scale D for the rast D bayati E scale F for the rast F bayati G scale G for the rast G bayati A scale A for the rast Bb bayati C scale Pythagorean scale based on the music theories of the great Greek philosopher and matematician It is most suitable for melodies Late Baroque Classic Age scale Very suitable for XVIII Century music Harpsichord scale very common during the XVIII Century Scale of the Indonesian Gamelan The octave is divided in 5 notes C D E G A The remaining notes are tuned as in the Equal tuning Scale of the Indonesian Gamelan The octave is divided in 7 notes all white keys when Key
28. Press the page menu icon to open the menu Press a command to select it Press anywhere in the display to close the menu without selecting a command Insert Measure Cut Measure Delete All from Selected Delete All Styles Perts from Slected Delete All Style Elements from Selected Delete 411 Chords from Selected Delete 411 Tempos from Selected Insert Measure Use this command to insert an empty measure starting from the current measure All Chord Acc events contained in the current measure will be moved to the following measure The event at the Mxxx xx 000 position e exactly at the beginning of the measure like a Time Signature or Style change will not be moved Cut Measure Use this command to delete the current measure All Chord Acc event contained in the following measures will be moved one measure back Delete All from Selected Use this command to delete events of all types starting from the current position Note All events on the very first tick M001 01 000 like Perf Style Tempo Chord Style Element selection cannot be deleted Delete All Styles Perfs from Selected Delete All Styles Elements from Selected Delete All Chords from Selected Delete All Tempos from Selected Select one of these commands to delete all events of the corre sponding type starting from the current position to the end of the Song To delete all events of the same type from the whole Song go back to the M001 01 000 posit
29. Settings memorized in the selected STS have been selected Sounds effects and other settings have been recalled 3 Try all the other STSs and see how settings change with each of them The Pads When the STYLE CHANGE LED is turned on each Performance and STS can assign different sounds or patterns to the four PADS These sounds or patterns can be played along with the Keyboard and Style tracks 1 Press one of the four PADS 2 If the selected PAD triggers an endless sound or pattern i e an applause or a guitar arpeggio pressing STOP will stop that sound STOP 3 Select a different Performance and see how the sounds or patterns assigned to the PADS change You can even press more Pads at once and play two or more sounds or patterns at the same time Pressing STOP stops them all at the same time Keeping STOP pressed and pressing one of the PAD buttons only stops that sound or pattern Li Note STSs are very similar to Performances but they are fine tuned to the Style they are associated to Li Hint You may see the name of the four available STSs for the current Style by pressing the STS Name tab 0 Hint You can see which sounds or patterns are associated to the four Pads for the current Performance or STS by pressing the Pad tab 0 Hint You can open the Pad Select window to assign a different sound or pattern to the Pads by pressing SHIFT one
30. Text Page Down SongBook Next Pad 1 Pad 2 Pad 3 Pad 4 Pad Stop Turns all Voice Processor effects down to let you address the audience See Voice Processor Setup Talk on page 213 Momentary switch controls assigned to the Voice Processor Press to activated release to deactivate Standard FX controllers These options let you move to the previ ous or next page when reading a text file loaded with a Song see Text files loaded with Standard MIDI Files on page 150 or Song Book entry see Lyrics as text files associated to a SongBook entry on page 168 Moves to the next SongBook entry in the selected Custom List Same functions of the control panel but tons with the same name List of Assignable Pedal and Assignable Slider functions The following functions can be assigned to a continuous pedal or to the Assignable Sliders Off No function assigned Master Volume Joystick X Joystick right Joystick X Joystick left Joystick Y Joystick forward Joystick Y Joystick backward Upper VDF Cutoff Filter cutoff for Sounds assigned to the Upper tracks Upper VDF Resonance Filter resonance for Sounds assigned to the Upper tracks Mic Lead Voice Volume Continuous controls assigned to the Mic Harmony Output Voice Processor Volume Mic Lead to Delay Mic Harmony to Delay Mic Reverb Level Mic FX Level FX CC12 Ctl Standard FX controllers FX CC13 Ctl Pad Volume With th
31. en e ira British Ep 1 The Style Select window closes and the main screen appears I again with the selected Style ready to go EEES UE A zt At At HMIC IM LOWER UPPERS UPPERZ UPPERL Hama Scale 3 Be sure one of the Chord Scanning modes is selected CHORD SCANNING i LOWER UPPER For chord scanning to work either of both LEDs must be turned on Lower chords are recognized on the left of the split point Upper chords are recognized on the right of the split point Full chords are recognized on the whole keyboard Off only the Drum track can be heard 44 Selecting and playing Styles Tempo 4 Press the SYNCHRO START button to turn its LED on SYNCHRO START STOP 5 Play the keyboard starts playing as soon as you play a note or chord in the chord recognition area Play chords with your left hand and the melody with your right hand The arranger will follow your playing When the Syncho Start function is turned on the Style 6 Press START STOP to stop the Style START STOP Y Tempo While a Tempo setting is saved with each Style or Performance you can change it to be whatever you like You can use either of the following two methods e While the Tempo parameter is selected use the TEMPO VALUE controls to change its value TEMPONALUE Pir N 7 gt N 04 Es e When the Tempo paramet
32. C Open op Prefer Load Save Erase Format f Utility SE USE Copy To Copying a folder s content If nothing is selected while a folder is open in the display you can copy the folder s content without copying the folder itself Note During the Copy procedure you can t open a SET folder You can however open any generic folder 1 If copying from or to an external device connect the device to one of the USB Host ports 2 Select the source device by using the Device pop up menu 3 If the folder you are looking for is inside another folder select this latter and press the Open button to open it Press the Close button to go back to the parent folder 4 To copy the current folder s content without copying the folder itself do not select anything in the display 5 Press Copy To to confirm The target device appears Note If the selected device is not available the Device not found or unknown format message will appear A different device will be automatically selected 6 If needed select the target device by using the Device pop up menu 7 If you want to select a different folder use the Open and Close buttons to move through the directories e To copy into an existing generic folder not a SET folder select that folder To copy into the current folder do not select anything 8 Once the target is selected press Copy If a file or folder with the same name of t
33. CN LCE CR Tad THS THE Tar Trans After selecting the Start and Length parameters press Execute to start the operation After the Cut the following measures are moved back to fill the cut measures After the Insert the following measures are pushed forward to accommodate the inserted measures Start First measure where to begin cutting inserting Length Number of measures to be cut inserted Meter Meter of the measures to be inserted Song Edit Delete This page is where you can delete MIDI events from the Song SEQUENCER Edit Tal Tae THs Tad THS THE Tar THE Trans i Cut After setting the various parameters press Execute to start the operation Track Use this parameter to select a track All All tracks selected Track 1 16 Selected track Master Master track This is where the Tempo Scale and Effect events are recorded Event Type of MIDI event to delete All All events Measures will not be removed from the Song and will remain empty Note All notes in the selected range Dup Note All duplicate notes When two notes with the same pitch are encountered on the same tick the one with the lowest velocity is deleted After Touch After Touch events Pitch Bend Pitch Bend events Prog Change Program Change events excluding the bundled Control Change 00 Bank Select MSB and 32 Bank Select LSB Ctl Change All Control Change events for example Bank Select M
34. JdaS5Sutedde E 9LICOISS s JoJ 1CH Important safety instructions Read these instructions Keep these instructions Heed all warnings Follow all instructions Do not use this apparatus near water Mains powered apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and that no objects filled with liquids such as vases shall be placed on the apparatus Clean only with dry cloth Do not block any ventilation openings install in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators heat regis ters stoves or other apparatus including amplifiers that produce heat Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding type plug A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet for U S A and Canada Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particu larly at plugs convenience receptacles and the point where they exit from the apparatus Only use attachments accessories specified by the manufacturer Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time Turning off the power switch does not completely isolate this product from the power line so re
35. Q y c Q i Q Q ec 54 Song Play operating mode Mixer Tuning EQ Control Play status The track can be heard Mute status The track cannot be heard Mixer Tuning EQ Control This page lets you reset or bypass track equalization pro grammed in the previous page Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from the Keyboard to the Song tracks and vice versa SONG PLAY SEQ1 Mixer Tuning zi Trk Upper 1 b Grand Piano E Piana 121 883 888 Track Reset Reset All Tracks SONG PLAY SEQ1 Mixer Tuning Ea Trk Upper 1 Grand Piano E Piana 121 883 888 Track Reset Reset All Tracks O Input Trim V s A A A SONG PLAY SEQ1 Hixer Tuning as Trk Upper 1 Grand Piano E Piano 121 883 888 Track Reset ED ED END NND NR m mm mm mmm Input Trim Track Reset buttons Use these buttons to reset i e flatten equalization for the corresponding track Reset All Tracks button Press this button to reset i e flatten equalization for all tracks Bypass PERF STS Check any of these checkboxes to bypass equalization for the corresponding track When bypassed equalization has no effect on the track but all parameters are preserved When the box is unchecked equalization is activated again with the original set tings Input Trim PERF STS This knob allows you to limit the level of the signal passing through the equalizer Extreme equalization v
36. The Keyboard Range automatically transposes any pattern note that would otherwise play too high or too low in pitch com pared to the original acoustic instrument when transposed by the arranger This will result in a more natural sound for the Pad instrument Note The Keyboard Range is ignored while recording The Pad track can play on the full range of the keyboard Trigger Mode gt PAD Not available if Track Type Drum This setting lets you define how Bass and Acc type tracks are retriggered when the chord is changed Off Each time you play a new chord current notes will be stopped The track will remain silent until a new note will be encountered in the pattern Rt Retrigger The sound will be stopped and new notes matching the recognized chord will be played back Rp Repitch New notes matching the recognized chord will be played back by repitching notes already playing There will be no break in the sound This is very useful on Guitar and Bass tracks Track Type PAD Use this parameter to set the type of the Pad track Drum Drum track This type of track is not transposed by the arranger and is used for Drum Kits or for tracks that you don t want to be transposed when playing a different chord Bass Bass track This type of track always plays the root when changing chord Acc Accompaniment track This type of track can be used freely for melodic or harmonic accompani ment patterns Tensi
37. The list of reverb types includes the following acoustic simula tions Wet Plate Dry Plate GBL P Pre Delay Reverb Pre delay time Sets the delay time prior to the reverb output Large rooms typically have reverbs that start much later than the initial signal Reverb Time gt GBL PP Reverb Decay Time Length or the Reverb Pre LEQ Gain GBLP Reverb pre equalization of the low frequencies Specifies the characteristics of the reverbs low frequencies Pre HEQ Gain GBL PP Reverb pre equalization of the high frequencies Specifies the characteristics of the reverbs high frequencies Harmony and Tuning with the Voice Processor Harmony Here s where we can go into a little more depth about harmo nies We ve tried to keep it practical focusing on what Voice Pro cessor can do for you Harmony Modes The Voice Processor has four different harmony modes which give four unique methods of creating harmony Once we get into describing the more complex harmony modes we ll be showing you examples based on the C major scale If you are unfamiliar with this scale we ve shown C major here Notes Mode In this mode you provide the Voice Processor with specific note information to determine the pitch of the harmony voices This is the most direct and flexible way of creating harmonies allow ing you to weave complex melodies and counter harmonies irre spective of your lead vocal Shift Mode Also known as
38. This parameter sets the way tempo events are read or recorded Manual Manual reading The latest manual Tempo setting made using the TEMPO VALUE controls is considered the current Tempo value No Tempo change events will be recorded This is very useful to record the Song much slower than its actual Tempo Auto Auto reading The Sequencer plays back all recorded Tempo events No Tempo change events are recorded Record All Tempo changes made during recording will be recorded to the Master Track Note The tempo is always recorded in overwrite mode old data is replaced by the new data Selected track info area This line lets you see the Sound assigned to the selected track See Selected track info area on page 171 for more information Sounds area This area lets you see Sounds and octave transposition for the eight tracks currently displayed See Sounds area on page 171 for more information Track volume status area This area is where you can set the volume of each Song track and change track status See Track volume status area on page 172 Track status icons Play mute record status of the current track Select the track then press this area to change its status D Play status The track can be heard EI Mute status The track cannot be heard Record status After pressing gt M PLAY STOP to start recording the track will receive notes from the keyboard and the MIDI IN or USB Dev
39. Turning the instrument on and listening to the demos Turning the instrument on and viewing the main screen Turning the instrument on and listening to the demos First of all turn the instrument on and familiarize yourself with the main screen You can also listen to the demos Power switch Demo buttons Display 7 Lo e cesto UNOS CT m KORG MAIL wur pe EE y S a me csp Turning the instrument on and viewing the main screen Turn the Pa800 on by pressing the POWER button located on the back panel After you turn the POWER on a welcome screen is shown for a few seconds and then the main dis
40. and Paste FX commands from the page menu of the Style Play Song Play or Sequencer modes To copy a single effect 1 Select the source Song Performance Style or STS then go to the page of the single effect you want to copy FX A FX B EX C or EX D or go to the Effects FX Select page to copy all four effects This may be useful if you want to copy two or three of the four effects into different Performances Styles or STSs 2 Choose the Copy FX command from the page menu 3 Select the target Performance Style or STS then go to the page of the single effect you want to paste FX A FX B FX C or FX D 4 Choose the Paste FX command from the page menu To copy all four effects 1 Select the source Performance Style or STS then go to the Effects gt FX Select page to copy all four effects 2 Choose the Copy FX command from the page menu 3 Select the target Performance Style or STS then go to the page of the Effects gt FX Select page 4 Choose the Paste FX command from the page menu Exit from Record Only available in Record mode Select this command to exit the Record mode and go back to the Main page of the Sequencer Play mode see Sequencer Play Main page on page 170 Sequencer operating mode 193 Write Global Sequencer Setup dialog box Write Global Sequencer Setup dialog box Open this window by selecting the Write Global Song Setup item from the pa
41. e Operating System updates to load new features from disk Dont let your instrument get old e Optional hardware expansions to add a video out board and an internal hard disk Get more and more for the money e Solid State Disk SSD for any system update a smart way to replace the usual ROM memory Custom Style banks to create your own collections of Styles e General MIDI Level 2 Sound compatible e More than 1 030 Sounds including 63 Drum Kits Four multieffect processors for the internal MIDI tracks with 125 effects including a Vocoder and a selection of fine guitar effects created using Korgs REMS Resonant structure and Electronic circuit Modeling System technol ogy to deliver truly great sounding effects e 320 Performance locations and more than 1 600 preloaded Single Touch Settings STS for fast setting of keyboard sounds and effects 419 preloaded Styles Style Record and Edit Pad Record and Edit XDS Double Sequencer with Crossfader Full featured 16 track sequencer Fully editable music database for fast song retrieving sup plied by the SongBook Onboard sampling to create and edit new sounds and audio grooves Sophisticated Voice Processor with effects and a 3 voice harmonizer featuring voice technologies by TC Helicon High quality microphone preamplifiers with 0 40dB of gain The same inputs double as line inputs High quality input ADC and outp
42. filter activated see page 65 The SongBook 59 Displaying Artist or Genre 2 Browse through the entries Icons in the Type column will help you identify the type of the entry The Genre column is shown by default but you can switch to the Artist column see Displaying Artist or Genre below 3 When the entry is visible in the display select it and press the Select but ton in the display After selecting an entry the corresponding Style SMF or KAR file will be recalled together with the relevant operating mode Style Play or Song Play Up to four STSs will also be recalled Any TXT file associated with the entry can be seen in the Lyrics STS page The selected Style SMF or KAR file is shown in the higher part of the screen Displaying Artist or Genre For space matter either the Genre or Artist column can be seen in the display You cannot see both at the same time 1 Press the page menu icon to open the page menu 2 Choose Show Artist now Genre to switch from Genre to Artist in the List view The Artist column will be shown Name Genre ja Y ame Ardit TTT 3 Open the page menu again and choose the Show Genre now Artist item The Genre column will be shown again CET Name Genre ja Li Note The Artist and Key fields of all supplied entries have been inten tionally left empty 60 The SongBook Sorting entries Sorting entries You can change th
43. play appears Tempo and beat counter Style Element Recognized chord Page menu length in measures Style name p R 7 _ Sounds assigned to the STYLE PLAY PLAY na chord y Upper Keyboard tracks Style bank t Grand Piano RA 4 Upper Keyboard tracks Style meter Sound bank icon Sound name Songs assigned to Sequencer 1 and Sequencer 2 Sound assigned to the Lower Keyboard track Selected Performance or STS Lower Keyboard track Volume sliders They can be controlled by selecting one of them and using the DIAL to change the value Play Mute status IL IN LOWER UPPERS Tabs Playing the demos A variety of demo songs have been included to demonstrate the sonic power of the Pa800 1 To open the Demo page press the STYLE PLAY and SONG PLAY buttons at the same time 2 Follow the instructions in the display That s it Playing Sounds 31 Selecting a Sound and playing it on the keyboard Playing Sounds You can play up to three sounds at the same time on the keyboard You can also split the keyboard into two parts to play up to three sounds with your right hand Upper and one with your left hand Lower Sound Select section Keyboard mode split full select buttons
44. 1 Goto the Song Play gt Mark Seq 1 Seq 2 page 2 Start the Song by pressing the SEQ 1 SEQ 2 PLAY STOP button 3 When you reach the position you want to save as a marker press the Add button in the display f you press Add within the first beats of the measure the beginning of the current measure is saved as a marker f you press Add within the last beat of the measure the beginning of the following measure is saved as a marker 4 Do the same for any following marker Stop the Song by pressing the SEQ 1 SEQ 2 PLAY STOP button How to jump to a saved marker 1 Start the Song again 2 When you want to jump to a saved marker touch it in the display The Song will jump to the saved position at the beginning of the next measure How to edit a marker 1 Touch the marker to be edited in the display 2 Press the Edit button in the display to set the marker to edit The Edit Marker window will appear 3 While in Edit Marker window you can edit the name and position of the marker being edited 149 Song Play operating mode Lyrics amp Markers panel How to delete a marker 1 Touch the marker to be deleted in the display 2 Press the Delete button in the display to delete the selected marker How to save the markers Press the Save Mk button in the display to save all markers If you are not in the Lyrics amp Markers page choose from the page menu the Save Song Marker Seq 1 or Sa
45. 102 Pan Reso 102 3 Auto Pilot 1 Metallic Rez Square Bass 3 2 Rezbo 12 5 3 Synth Pianoid Brian Sync 24 21 0 0 0 0 5 27 20 21 8 24 27 21 24 Arp Twins 24 28 Arp Angeles Factory data 257 Sounds Bank order Big amp Raw 27 Caribbean 3 Lead Square GM Lead Saw GM Calliope GM Chiff GM Charang GM Fifths Lead GM Bass amp Lead GM New Age Pad GM Polysynth GM Bowed Glass GM Metallic Pad GM Crystal GM RS KE 3 m aja DE aja ME m EN aa N eo 2 2 2 NJ 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 BR Ww DI w NI O CO N Brightness GM 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Lead Square 2 eo Lead Sine Lead Saw 2 Lead Saw Pulse ech Lead Double Saw N Seq Analog Wire Lead Soft Wrl OB Lead LoFi Ethnic Port Whine 2VCO Planet Lead N M P IA 3 5 2 2 3 ojo Bank Bass 3 3 N Jazz Bass 3 3 3 33 3 3 3 3 3 LA Finger Bass GM LA Finger Bass 2 N Finger Slap 1 Pick Bass 1 Fretless Bass GM UJ N N Finger Bass 3 UJ Finger Bass 4 Super Bass 1 Super Bass 2 Pick Bass 2 EE Sweet Fretless Bass amp Ride 1 se Finger Bass 5 D Bright Finger B Slap Bass 1 GM Slap Bass 2 GM Picked E Bass GM Fretless Bass 2 Bass amp Ride 2 5 2 7 7 2 5 2 2 Finger E Bass1 p Finger E Bass2 p N p EE Slap Bass 3
46. 170 Entering Record ee EE 172 Record mode Multitrack Sequencer page 173 Record mode Step Record page eee eee 175 Record mode Backing Sequence Quick Record page 177 Record mode Step Backing Sequence page 179 lun Mu 182 Edit E EE 182 Mixer Tuning Volume Pad camaras e ram 182 Mixer Tuning FX Send EE 183 Mixer Tuning BO GI serer aot cha ia E o bain ee hed 184 Mixer Tuning EQ Control 184 Mixer Lunas TUNDE estatal ddr 185 Mixer Tuning Sub Scale Aa eg es Sand ENER E EEN 185 te doa NP o macceuedereenuuemeaas 185 E T on Dee m 186 Track Controls Mode vota arabes 186 Track Controls Drum Volume 186 Track Controls Easy Edit vor e 186 Event Edit Event Edil iuis renun enie phe E E 186 Event Edit PE oues acp iere 6g nhe 9 99 9 ace ceri pi 188 Klee E e KEE 188 Song Edit E EE 189 Song Edit Velocity EP AE L nn pm 189 Song Edit Cut Insert Measures 0 000 essen 190 sono Edit RER 190 Song Editi COPY EE 190 bone Pd MOVE porosa rodante ss 191 Song Edit RX Coves sara risas ova 191 Preferences Global Setup eg die erect SEN de EEN 191 Page ment CO C dopado sais 192 Write Global Sequencer Setup dialog box 193 Song Select window 193 Save Song window 194 Global edit mode leessse 196 What is it and how the Global is structured 196 Wail Dase Dr 196 Et Et NEEN 196 Tabl
47. Auto Octave 199 Midi In 204 U Upper Volume Link 89 102 USB 236 V Variation 13 Velocity Curve 197 Video Interface 19 209 Voice Processor Harmony Track 158 166 192 MIDI channel 204 Note Input Source 215 Voice Processor Preset Editing 214 304 Index Lock 200 Writing 211 Voice Processor Setup Editing 208 212 Writing 211 Volume Balance 142 Balance Keyboard Style or Seq 10 23 Balance Sequencer 23 Individual tracks Sequencer 182 Song Play 151 Style Play 89 Master 10 23 142 Address KORG ITALY Spa Via Cagiata 85 140027 Osimo An Italy Web servers www korgpa com www korg co jp www korg com www korg co uk www korgcanada com www korgfr net www korg de www korg it www letusa es PART NUMBER MANOO10002 KORG Italy 2006 All rights reserved
48. Connecting Pa800 to a Master keyboard You can control the Pa800 with a master keyboard or any other MIDI keyboard You only need to connect the MIDI OUT con nector of the master keyboard to the MIDI IN connector of the Pa800 The master keyboard will become the integrated key board of the Pa800 if it transmits over the same channel pro grammed as Global in the Pa800 ffr MIDI IN MIDI OUT El A L If the master keyboard transmits over the Global channel of the Pa800 the split point and the status of the KEYBOARD MODE section in the control panel will affect the notes received from the master keyboard Connections and settings To connect the master keyboard to the Pa800 follow this proce dure 1 Connect the MIDI OUT connector of the master keyboard to one of the MIDI IN connectors of the Pa800 IN A sug gested 2 Program the master keyboard
49. Ea Jazz Kit GM Jazz Kit RX3 39 120 120 120 120 120 120 C v oo N N N N AIA A D x lt XxX N 2 o D 3 3 Di lo 3 W XN N N N ojoj o N oj o N DI w U2 W Ww 5 c c c c c L L L L L 2 25 5 5 2 ee ee y a DINIA X X XxX UJ N mmm wem Lee ME s pemwmeump ws e a poms 5 of e s oms 1220 O0 50 Bdrum amp Sdrum Kit 120 5 Arabian Kit 1 52 55 remap to 48 56 SFXKit GM 5 SFX Kit 2 58 63 remap to 56 EE o 12 N o gt N o N gt N o ech o Percussion Kit Latin Perc Kit1 Trinity Perc Kit i30 Perc Kit Latin Perc Kit2 N N oj o o LI N Oo o N ala N oj o 69 71 72 73 4 gt emap to 64 Hip Hop Kit RX Techno Kit RX Dance Kit RX Electro Kit RX1 Electro Kit RX2 N o N o N O N N N ui o N 77 88 gt emap to 7 Pop Std Kit 1 Pop Std Kit 2 91 remap to 3 92 remap to 6 93 95 remap to 1 Elektro Kit 1 97 Elektro Kit 2 98 115 remap to 1 116 remap to 51 117 Arabian Kit 2 Turkish Kit Oriental PercKit 120 Room Kit 1 121 ala NJI N oj o N o N Oo N o ala NJI N oj o sch N N OO oj N o Power Kit 1 120 122 Electro Kit 120 123 Analog Kit o o femen
50. End Tick Use these parameters to set the starting and ending points of the range to transpose If you wish to select a four measure sequence starting at the beginning of the Song the Start will be positioned at 1 01 000 and the End at 5 01 000 Bottom Top Note Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard range to transpose If you select the same note as the Bottom and Top parameters you can select a single note or a single percus sive instrument in a Drum track Song Edit Velocity Here you can change the Velocity value for the notes An Advanced mode is available allowing you to select a velocity curve for the selected range This is useful to create fade ins or fade outs SEQUENCER Edit Tad THS THE Tar THe Cut Ki Buantize Trans pose Sequencer operating mode 189 Song Edit Transpose After setting the various parameters press Execute to start the operation Track Use this parameter to select a track All All tracks selected Track 1 16 Selected track Value Velocity change value Start End Tick Use these parameters to set the starting and ending points of the range to edit If you wish to select a four measure sequence starting at the beginning of the Song the Start will be positioned at 1 01 000 and the End at 5 01 000 Bottom Top Note Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard range to edit If you select the same note as the
51. Euro Hit 9 9 5 55 55 55 55 55 5 5 7 Alto Sax RX NI N Sweet Soprano 1 Soprano Pro Baritone Sax Pro Breathy Baritone 7 256 Factory data Sounds Bank order CO EI A E sofa sa aa 5 Tenor Sax Expr 1 121 8 6 mure CS 5 Swespan as a SweetSoprnos CL 2 5 mwmnesmau DS A ME Alto Sax Pro 121 121 Breathy Alto Sax 121 Folk Sax 121 Baritone Growl 2 121 12 121 3 121 12 CD gt m gt UU e o D D C lt N Ol Ul U1 Ul Reed of Power L un un L el als ala o o 2 2 2 x16 Lo 3 7 3 5 5 ei 5 o o D m se SE O O O O Db Al ve 2 E D Y D w H 5 2 o OI x SD ei2is g x o 3 m A ollo X E ojx ala 3 gt 2 S Q 4 my gt a S Q 2 Z Et D lt N N QD ty 3 23 3 O Q 3 Q lt gt A lt lt lt Pi gt Alo e un O Ge y 5 5 x c lt 5 ct oO ov 3 D D A D o 2 vijo Wel U n D D D gt y 0 ol o o o o o g a D AMS o a lt D S Z o EE aL z 3 E zii E M o Lo N N NI NIL MIMI MIb NIN Flute Switch 3 Flute Frullato 5 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 Pan Flute GM g oja D Segel N Oo 2 N 13 m 0 0 92 y Z vu T x O JJ EN X 3 2 Z Di lt Flute Dyn 5th F
52. Grand Piano E Piano 121 003 088 Easy Sound Edit e k 6 SH Sp 2d Reset Track Reset All Tracks Drum Volume STYLE PLAY Track Controls Trk Upper 1 Grand Piano E Piano 121 003 088 Easy Sound Edit Attack Decay Release Cutott HAH o 9 Reset Track Reset All Tracks Drum Volume gt PERF PERF STS Attack time This is the time during which the sound goes from zero at the moment when you strike a key to it s maximum level Parameters Attack Decay Decay time Time to go from the final Attack level to the beginning of the Sustain Release Release time This is the time during which the sound goes from the sustaining phase to zero The Release is triggered by releasing a key Cutoff Filter cutoff This sets the sound brightness Resonance Use the Filter Resonance to boost the cutoff fre quency LFO Depth Intensity of the Vibrato LFO LFO Speed Speed of the Vibrato LFO LFO Delay Delay time before the Vibrato LFO begins after the sound starts Select Use these buttons to select the track to edit The button corre sponding to the selected track turns green Reset Track Press this button to reset all changes to Sound parameters in the selected track Reset All Tracks Press this button to reset all changes to Sound parameters in all tracks Play Mute icon PERF gt PERF STS Track s play mute status Play status The track can be heard Mute status The t
53. H3 BHa B6 49 21 With the Erase function you will be able to select the internal system memory SSD S device and erase files from there You cannot however delete folders from the internal memory since they are used by the operating system Erase procedure 1 If erasing from an external device connect the device to one of the USB Host ports 2 If needed select a different device by using the Device pop up menu 3 If the file or folder you are looking for is inside another folder select this latter and press the Open button to open it Press the Close button to go back to the parent folder 4 Select the file or folder to erase Press Erase to delete the selected item During erase a dialog box shows the progress of the opera tion Erase Progress Multiple file selection See Multiple file selection on page 232 for information on how to select more files or folders to be erased at the same time Q V c Q i o Ser Q cc 234 Media edit mode Format Format The Format function lets you initialize a device Pa800 uses a MS DOS compliant device format Warning When formatting a device all data it contains is lost for ever Volume Label Use this parameter to assign a name to the device to be format ted Press the T Text Edit button to open the Text Edit window Enter the name then press OK to confirm and close the Text Edit window Execute button Press
54. Note Song parameters cannot be saved when saving to a Perfor mance or STS Note A muted track may be reset when selecting a different Song o Y c o i o EM Q cc 152 Song Play operating mode Mixer Tuning FX Send Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from the Keyboard to the Song tracks and vice versa SONG PLAY SE01 Mixer Tuning sz Trk Upper 1 b Grand Piano E Piana 121 883 888 Volume 20 IS n pe gu MIC IM LOWER UPPERS UPPER2 UPPERI r amp te Ee SONG PLAY SEQ1 Mixer Tuning Trk Upper 1 Grand Piano E Piano 121 883 888 VIII 30 30 30 30 12 3 la Tal Ta TH T8d THS THE Ter THE Fra EG EG SONG PLAY SEQ1 Mixer Tuning a Trk Upper 1 b Grand Piano E Piana 121 883 888 Volume 30 30 30 30 IS 8 p 0 n TH3 Tis Til Tiz 2 Ti3 Fa Eu EL Tid T15 T16 Upper Volume Link gt GBLSY This parameter allows you to define if changing the volume for one of the Upper tracks proportionally changes also the volume for the other Upper tracks To save this parameter status go to the Style Play mode then select the Write Global Style Play Setup from the page menu see Write Global Style Play Setup dialog box on page 105 Note This parameter is the same you can find in the Preferences Global Setup page of the Style Play mode see page 102 On When changing volume to one of the Upper tracks volume for the other Upper tracks changes
55. Pa800 The MIDI messages received over a Global channel and not over a standard channel are affected by the buttons of the KEY BOARD MODE section as well from the split point Therefore if the SPLIT button LED is lit up the notes that arrive to the Pa800 over this channel will be divided by the split point into the Upper above the split point and Lower below the split point parts The notes that arrive to a Global channel are used for the chord recognition of the automatic accompaniment If the KEY MIDI Standard MIDI Files 241 BOARD MODE is SPLIT only the notes below the split point will be used These notes will be combined with the ones of the special Chord 1 and Chord 2 channels The Chord 1 and Chord 2 channels You can set two special Chord channels see page 204 to send to the Pa800 notes for the chord recognition The notes will be combined with the notes that go through the channel set as Glo bal Global notes are recognized only under the split point if the SPLIT LED is lit up The Chord channels are not affected by the split point and the KEYBOARD MODE section of the control panel All the notes both above and below the split point will be sent to the chord recognition The buttons of the CHORD SCANNING section have a particu lar effect on the Chord channels if you have selected LOWER the chord recognition mode will be set by the Chord Recognition Mode parameter in the Style Play mode
56. Steel Drums GM Warm Steel Vs Bell Boy 5 LA 00 LA Church Bell 1 Church Bell 2 Krystal Bell 3 LA 00 121 121 112 lt lt gt 5 mr A S o oio D o o w gt o w Ojo D 313 O D D lt e indi Ee lt G lt oom N nK oom UJ al al al a 00 Al Wl N N N N N Carillon 252 Factory data Sounds Bank order vn EIA CO IN CIN MIN O A 3 IT Kalimba GM 121 0 108 Emm SSS Bank Accordion Harmonica AT 2 121 4 2 Harmonica GM 121 O0 22 n EECHER xosmi LI SweetMusette RRE Sweameka Leli lz Cassotto NorTune 321 4 2 Acc Clarinet OT 024 ji te Acc Clarinet NT 121 Acc Piccolo OT KEN Acc Piccolo NT Accordion 16 E EN EH E EC French Musette 21 2 2 Voices Musette 3 Voices Musette 17 Detune Accordion 15 Fisa Master Fisa 16 Accordion 16 Fisa 16 Musette Clar Musette 1 Musette 2 Accordion GM 721 0 21 Tango Accord GM 124 LE Age Tango Accordion2 1201 10 23 1 NI N N E Akordeon Accordion 2 2 Accordion 3 24 2 Acc 16 NEN Acc amp Acc Bass 23 Accordion Bass 5 23 2 2 2 2 2 2 Arabic Accordion Steirisch Akk 1 Steirisch Akk 2 Steirisch Akk 3 Steirisch Akk 4 Acc Voice Change apa m mpm oz LA Bank Organ Jimmy Organ V Perc Organ GM Perc Organ 2 Perc Organ 3 Perc Organ 4 V a NI NI N N N Perc Organ 5
57. This deactivates the Voice proces heard sor Voice processor effects an only be applied to the microphone input Troubleshooting 299 D n Te s the USB device covey powered o isthe deve inserte core isthe write protect tab ofthe dik nthe protect postion isthe device inserte come SSCS the rt protect tab ofthe dik nthe protetpostion The message Over Current Con The USB device is probably defective due to a short circuit and cannot be used While this will dition Detected on USB port not damage the Pa800 it is advisable to remove the device please remove the USB media appears in the display 300 Technical specifications Technical specifications KORG Pa800 KEYBOARD Keyboard 61 keys with Velocity and Aftertouch Le O S O gt 120 Voices 120 Oscillators EQ for each track Filters with Resonance Internal 40 channels Midi 16 channels 970 incl Stereo Piano and GM2 sounds 63 Drum Kits 256 Sounds 64 Drum Kits Multitimbral Parts Factory Sounds User Sounds Digital Drawbars 8 Footages On board full editing for Sounds and DrumKits 64 MB Record Edit Time Slice Load Import Export PCM RAM Memory 64MB standard 4 Stereo Master TC Helicon for Vocal FX 4 Upper 1 2 3 Lower 4 Pads 320 User Programmable PCM RAM memory Sampling Effects Real Time Tracks Performances L o c 2 gt D o Q m D o 5 D O DI O Le
58. Write Single Touch Setting dialog box on page 104 for more information Write Global Style Setup Select this command to open the Write Global Style Setup dia log box and save global settings that are unique to the Style Play mode These settings are programmed on the Preferences Glo bal Setup page see page 102 See Write Global Style Play Setup dialog box on page 105 for more information Solo Track Select the track to be soloed and check this item You will hear only the selected track and the Solo warning will flash on the page header Uncheck this item to exit the Solo function Style Play operating mode 103 Page menu The Solo function works in a slightly different way depending on the selected track Keyboard track The selected Keyboard track is the only track you can hear when playing on the keyboard All other Keyboard tracks are muted The status of the Style tracks is unaffected Style track The selected track is the only Style track you can hear All other Style tracks are muted The status of the Keyboard tracks is unaffected Grouped Style tracks The Solo function does not work on these special tracks SHIFT Keep the SHIFT button pressed and touch one of the tracks to solo it Do the same on a soloed track to deactivate the Solo function Copy Paste FX You can copy a single or all four effects between Styles Perfor mances STSs and Songs To do this choose the
59. after saving the new Style please don t forget to check the Original Style Sounds parameter in the Style Play mode see page 85 to let the Style select the Sound bypassing the Style Performance settings In this page you can also modify the Expression CC 11 value for each of the Style Element tracks This lets you reduce the rel ative level of a track in a single Style Element without reducing the overall Volume of the Style This is a very useful control when you have different Sounds assigned to the same track in different Style Elements and the internal level of these Sounds must be different STYLE REC SE Track Controls E Yar 1 Es Trk Drum bdazz Kit Rx1 B Drum amp Perc 128 888 833 Expression Iri DRUM FERC BASS ACCS ACCS RCEd ACCS Ebd Range When in this page press the corresponding button on the con trol panel to select a Style Element VARIATION1 ENDING3 To copy the settings of this page to another Style Element use the Copy Sound and Copy Expression commands from the page menu see Copy Sounds dialog box and Copy Expres sion dialog box starting from page 128 Selected Track Info area gt STYLE See Selected track info area on page 110 for detailed informa tion Sounds area STYLE See Sounds area on page 112 for detailed information o v c o i o Ser Q cc 124 Style Record mode Style Element Track Controls Keyboard Range Expressi
60. amp Bell 121 Vintage EP E Emm aa Emm SS Emme 2 Marimba key Malt amp tel Emm 2 es Maite Y wn m Inn pe fae 3 ewesez E LI wm w 4 Wwiwu deviant 9 lr Inge wai eet Y 15 wr remoto way wr 3 rama 05 Sw ora wn om easicwory Jens Il 7 16 L nsen oem Y xm e 4 WetBamesk tmo 2 36 eomm foren wn os inet reno levine ma os l sseg Owen Y xm 3m 4 ant tmo D ll osmtwv foren wm memes je mis 1emv ow Factory data 261 Sounds Program Change order ccoo ccs2 Pc Name E E ccoo EME wee Bank Tee Ca 7 e pon oen GROS m eoon omen wr s eege oe D m efowe owen IC wr s 5 feor oen 9 2 m meme owen wr e esmkiv TS 3m 3 m few omm wr n oe voeem oem ra om meme r omm wm u s Arbian organ Jorgen tat 5 m meme JI xm 5 EII rem tet 0 2 ECT CCC IC xm w 16 rats organ em O tat 4 Iesst Amen wm 5 ommiwiv oem tat 2 2 orden eege 1 wm 3e 5 ownw v oen S tat 3 m wemer eege wr m po ownsv oen D l steg 1 38 5 oras reservo m tat 5 21 Memecan Accordion 1 39 messem Jorgen GM 6 m re e Accordion m w eren oem G7 mo meme Aem em n e sGsmev own
61. and EC5 A E parameters to which you can assign the Quarter Tone function While still in Global mode select the Write Global Global Setup command from the page menu to save these settings to the Global see Write Global Global Setup dialog box on page 210 2 Lower some note pitches Keep the Quarter Tone pedal pressed The keyboard will not play at this time Press the notes you want to lower a quarter tone Release the pedal Style Play operating mode 93 Effects FX Select 3 Play with your new scale Notes you pressed on step 2 are now lowered of a quarter tone 4 Reset the original scale Press and release the Quarter Tone pedal again without playing any note All pitches will be reset and the scale selected by the Performance STS will be recalled Effects FX Select This page allows you to select the A B Style and Pads and C D Keyboard effects STYLE PLAY Effects a FX A H T Reverb wet Plate Fs Amount 16 FH E H 26 Stereo Chorus Fa Amount S8 Mod Track Off F E H 71 Reverb SmoothHall Fx Amount 2H FR D H Stereo Chorus Fs Amount H Mod Track Upperd J FX A D PERF PERFS erg Effects assigned to the corresponding effect processors Usually A and C are reverbs while B and D are modulating effects cho rus flanger delay For a list of the available effects see the Advanced Edit addendum in the Accessory CD Effects from A to D can
62. and set global parameters for the MIDI communication GLOBAL HIDI ln DI Default m ue Midi In Midi In hit Out f Control Channel Current MIDI Setup MIDI Setup gt GBLSY gt GBLS 9 GBL MIDI channels can be automatically configured by selecting a MIDI Setup Each of them lets you assign the best values to vari ous MIDI parameters to allow an easier connection with a par ticular MIDI controller See MIDI on page 240 for more information on using MIDI Setups A different MIDI Setup may be automatically selected when entering the Style Play Song Play or Sequencer modes To select a MIDI Setup for these modes see Midi Setup on page 102 for the Style Play mode Midi Setup on page 158 for the Song Play mode and Midi Setup on page 191 for the Sequencer mode For detailed information on MIDI Setup settings see MIDI Setup on page 285 Note After selecting a MIDI Setup you can apply any changes to each channel s settings To store the changes in memory select the Write Global Midi Setup command in the page menu to save it to memory see Write Global Midi Setup dialog box on page 210 Hint To restore the original MIDI Setups load the original Fac tory data again downloadable from www korgpa com Note to RX Noise RX Noises are special sounds that make Sounds be more realis tic They are usually located above C7 depending on the Sound Enable When this parameter is
63. ar 8 21 EI ee m ow meweogmi oem D n n eem Deeg xm m 5 rmeweomm omm 38 9 zi Arabicaccoraion Awoden _ a m 5 w SS NEON m Sr E Te Se T seeMeene Accordion T leen ECTS T Teens Accordion Emu Par w zr cessotonortune Jeer xm 5 zr pesame Acorion Accordion xm m s fetHem em oem tat 16 3 ETT Accordion 1 xm s 5 Wamemeog foom D n z ETT Dese xm s 16 bie Kimura oem rie zo French musette Deeg xm s 16 evas orem 3 5 leger Jee apo aa EE Acordion 1 apa Par mn a EC Jeer Paar om oz E CN wr s v owwes oem ra Master Accordion Accoraion wr s v ommtew mv oem Gm pom om Iesst CCC 1 wr s v wow ve tet fas wai eege 1 wr s v mmeogms feos mos on meer CCC 1 wr 7 v ppes oem a laan eege wr s v langer oen 3m 5 laang eege wr s leegent oem O 3 9 22 EII Amoden wm 9 Rockoren em oem D n 2 fememeA i Accordion TI wr 1 we ssmaiv em Gm o4 Demenz jeden TI wr mes joe 34 9 Seer an Aon wr s 5 pus oem tet ft S feewe CCT wr 5 esed oem D 5 ewe Jeden wr s emaiv oem S tet 3 28 EEC CCT x s 5 seres oem S tat 4 S EII accorion 1 x 7 5 poezon oem
64. board tracks Upper 1 3 and Lower You can edit the Volume and Play Mute status for these tracks on the main page of the Song Play mode see illustration below While in Song Play mode you can still select Performances or STSs from the latest selected Style To select a different set of STSs you must first select a different Style SONG PLAY no chord A Ee Ee pr Meter 3 4 M d 8H ALO ELO E Ge Wo Press here to select a Style Press here to select a Per formance Keyboard track s vol ume and Play Mute status MIC IM LOWER UPPERS UPPER UPPER Gel Me f saie Paa f sei In addition to Keyboard tracks selecting a different Style or SongBook entry may change sounds assigned to the PADs When you enter Song Play mode from the Style Play mode Key board and Pad tracks are the same as in Style Play mode o v c Q i o tim Q cc 144 Song Play operating mode Main page Main page Press SONG PLAY to access this page from another operating mode Note When switching from Style Play to Song Play the Song Setup is automatically selected and various track parameters and settings may change To return to this page from one of the Song Play edit pages press the EXIT or SONG PLAY button To switch between Keyboard tracks Normal view and Song tracks Song Tracks views use the TRACK SELECT button Pressed a first time you will see tracks 1 8 a second press will show tracks
65. device You can touch one of the heading labels above the list to change the order in which files are shown For example by touching the Name label the list is alphabetically re ordered according to the file names The selected label turns red showing the cur rently selected ordering 44 00 46 11 14 11 45 46 18 18 If you touch the red label again the alphabetic order changes from ascending to descending or vice versa The small arrow next to the label name shows the selected order The corresponding items in the page menu are automatically updated to reflect these changes see Ordered by Name and Ordered by Type on page 238 Scrollbar Use the scrollbar to scroll the list Touching the arrows will scroll one step at a time while touching the bar will scroll one page at a time Pressing the arrows while SHIFT is kept pressed jumps to the previous or next alphabetical section or file folder type depending on the selected display order Device pop up menu Use this menu to select one of the available storage devices Commands Commands may be different depending on the shown page They are detailed in each relevant section Tabs Use tabs to select one of the edit pages of the current edit section Navigation tools When in a Media page you can use any of the following com mands to browse through the files and folders Scrollbar See Scrollbar above TEMPO VALUE controls
66. mance name to select it A Brass Press one of the side tabs to select a different Performance bank Press one of the lower tabs to select a different Performance page 0 Note You can open the Performance Select window also by pressing one of the buttons in the PERFORMANCE SOUND SELECT section pro vided the LED on the PERFORMANCE SELECT button is on This will let you jump directly to the desired Performance bank STYLE CHANGE PERFORMANCE Selecting and saving Performances 39 Saving your settings to a Performance 2 Select one of the Performances in the Performance Select window PERFORMANCE SELECT Piano Yibes Jazz STYLE PLAY ITE chord ooo Mallet aut The Performance Select win v amp Trbn dow closes and the main screen T gm appears again provided the El h DISPLAY HOLD LED is turned E LPSE LPS EJE LPJ IS l au off Sounds effects and other ese sl settings change according to the setting memorized in the selected Performance sl MIC IM LOWER UPPERS UPPER UPPER Sub Name Mo f see Pas f seit 3 Play the keyboard Settings memorized in the selected Performance have been selected Sounds effects and other settings have the LED of been recalled the STYLE 2 CHANGE button is turned on selecting a Performance may a
67. on disk If you are saving a new list the NEWNAME JBX name is auto matically assigned and you can edit it Note You can save your JBX file only in the same folder as the Song files included in the list Groove Quantize You can apply a realtime groove quantization to Sequencer 1 Groove quantization is a way of changing the music groove dur ing the playback moving notes to the nearest axis of a rhythmic grid Please feel free to experiment this function is a great source of musical inspiration To enable groove quantize you can either use the command in this page or check the Groove Quantize Enable command in the page menu SONG PLAY SE0Q1 Groove Quantize a Note Groove Quantize parameters are not saved as they are only intended for realtime use Enable Enables disables quantization It is automatically set to Off each time the instrument is turned on or when selecting a different Song Hint You can enable disable the Groove Quantize also by selecting the Seq 1 Groove Quantize Enable command from the page menu Song Play operating mode 157 Groove Quantize Note Start Enables disables quantization of the Note On event i e begin ning of the note Note Duration Enables disables quantization of the Note Off event i e the length of the note Resolution Coarse quantize grid resolution This parameter is the main quantization value to be varied with the Acc
68. orr wrr F i Series area area IRUM FERC BASS ALCA ACCS ACCS ALCA RECS Record Track volume status area Page header This line shows the current operating mode and transposition 3TYLE RECORD T 6 Master Transpose in semitones Operating mode name Operating mode name Name of the current operating mode Master transpose Master transpose value in semitones This value can be changed using the TRANSPOSE buttons on the control panel Page menu icon Press this icon to open the page menu See Page menu on page 127 Page sub header This area shows some performing info on the Style pz Style Funky Ballad Style in record edit Beat counter Measure number Style in record edit Name of the Style currently in edit or record Beat counter This indicator shows the current beat inside the current mea sure Measure number Current measure you are recording Style Record mode 109 Main page Record 1 Recording parameters area Element Style Element This parameter lets you select a Style Element for editing Each Style Element corresponds to a button on the control panel car rying the same name After selecting a Style Element select a Chord Variation for actual editing see below Varl End3 This is the selected Style Element Chord Var Chord Variation This parameter lets you select a Chord Variation for editing after selecting the Style Element this Chord V
69. sd pep D ro ES II ES II O MN mE NB ld IO PS MS A KT Ld ha a IS i DS NENNEN A El EJ LI E ai INM E E a E Sa Si El A A pp MA 280 Factory data Performances ees wc sacs cca cama sc Banie 10 cce ccm KT ren coo ema Teen DE Pr HL CI O IO a eem a e REL Il a es HL REL TI a es ma es REL mI FeO HL DI KAES KASS age B Cm d oL pL b ele sc ana cnm cc Sc Feta cu m Sc aen CUm ccm masc JO IE O NE So o PET ooo a EE NENNEN NE e PO ar a A BS E KE Ed REN LE MEN JR Da o JN e A a C NT A NA NENNEN EX NENNEN BN NN A 51 A Tp A Be WE AE EMEN KERN BH NNNM KE NEN a E Ad JN LL BE laf LI UJ NJ ul N N Gel Gel Get fei EE Lo KENNEN KM NN Ga A NA Sr NN a BS Ed EN ro Ed uM ES d Bt ME C 5 eg A DO KH NN EE NE 5 aa ie AS RA NEN A LU ES NEN a TI E LA y _ _ C KENNEN BS SE C i SE St e _ _ mech _ _ _ mech Factory data 281 Pads Pads You can assign the following Hits or Sequences to the four Pads Older sounds might be still assigned to the Pads when loading musical resources generated with an older operating system see the following section OA O AA gend T mee Uer lei foreman tome i crash ES ve oam Ja Brightness 6 ore sn o 6 fnew aae rea ide Ex ICC EN len 8 eee Ride Bell EN ES Darbuka 6 EZ Rik 1 9 Timp
70. selected Chord Variation When playing a Style this will be the length of the accompaniment pattern when the chord corre sponding to the Chord Variation is recognized on the keyboard Warning If you reduce the Chord Variation Length after recording any measure after the selected length will be deleted Be very careful when setting the CV Length to a lower value after recording If it happens we suggest to exit from record without saving see Exit from Record on page 128 Metro Metronome This is where you can set the metronome Off No metronome click will be heard during record ing In any case a one bar precount will be played before starting recording Onl Metronome on with a one bar precount before starting recording On2 Metronome on with a two bar precount before starting recording Tempo Select this parameter to use TEMPO VALUE controls to set the tempo Hint You can always change the Tempo when other parameters are selected by keeping the SHIFT button pressed and rotating the DIAL Note When recording tempo old data is always replaced by the new data Note The actual tempo of the Style will be the one shown when saving the Style Performance in Style Play mode see Current tempo on page 84 Meter gt STYLE This is the meter time signature of the Style Element You can edit this parameter only when the Style Element is empty i e before you begin recording anything NTT Note T
71. set the Pan to Off see Pan above Out L R There are four Internal FX processors in Song Play mode Usu ally they are arranged as follows FXA Reverb processor for Sequencer 1 and 2 FX B Modulating FX processor for Sequencer 1 and 2 FX C Reverb processor for Keyboard tracks FX D Modulating FX processor for Keyboard tracks Depending on the status of the Seq 2 FX Mode parameter Sequencer 2 might use the C D effect pair see page 159 Furthermore in Sequencer mode you can create Songs using all four effects see Effects FX Select on page 185 Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from Keyboard to Song tracks and vice versa SUNG PLAY SEUQ1 Hixer Tuning ges Trk Upper 1 Grand Piano E Piana 121 883 888 SONG PLAY SEQ1 Mixer Tuning za Trk Upper 1 Grand Piano E Piano 121 883 888 SC Tan THE Tur THs SONG PLAY SEQ1 Mixer Tuning pem Trk Upper 1 b Grand Piano E Piana 121 883 888 Note When you stop then start the Song again or select a different Song the default Song track settings are selected again You can however pause the Song change the effects then exit from pause and start the Song again Edit the Song in Sequencer mode to per manently change the effects Send level A D D 127 PERF STS Level of the track direct signal sent to the effect processor Play Mute icon PERF STS GBL 9 Track s play mute status See Keyboard track status o
72. sorting is selected Sends the Sound assigned to the selected track to the Sound mode Selects the Setup General Controls page MIDI section of the Global mode This is a quick way to jump to MIDI editing pages Selects the Preferences page of the Media mode Panic Selects the Assignable Sliders page Control lers section of the Global mode Scroll Arrows or Up Down Start Stop Slider Mode Fade In Out Selects the Fade In Out parameter in the Basic page Preferences section of the Global mode Synchro either Selects the MIDI Setup parameter in the Setup General Controls page MIDI section of the Global mode Selects the Lock page General Controls sec tion of the Global mode Selects the Interface page General Controls section of the Global mode Selects the Custom List page of the SongBook mode Transpose either Selects the Transpose Control page General Controls section of the Global mode Mic Selects the Voice Processor Setup page of the Global mode Harmony Selects the Voice Processor Preset page of the Global mode Effects Selects the Voice Processor Effects page of the Global mode Style Play mode Style Play Selects the Style Setup page Preferences sec tion Selects the Style Preferences page Prefer ences section Selects the corresponding Style Element in the Drum Fill page Style Controls section Selects the Chord Recognition parameter in the Split panel Main Page Selects the Key
73. the Sequencer Setup is automatically selected and various track parameters may change To return to this page from one of the Sequencer edit pages press the EXIT or SEQUENCER button To switch between Song tracks 1 8 and 9 16 use the TRACK SELECT button Song area E T 8 Page header Page menu icon 1120 at NEWSONG d pue ey i DW L Auto Trk 51T1r 61 t Grand Piano B Fiana LE TOL MOL no or m o d T E a Volume Selected track info area 121 083 088 Sounds area PLEJEPLP Track volume status area Page header This line shows the current operating mode transposition and recognized chord SEQUENCER IR Operating mode Master Transpose name in semitones Operating mode name Name of the current operating mode Master Transpose Master transpose value in semitones This value can be changed using the TRANSPOSE buttons on the control panel Note Transpose may be automatically changed when loading a Standard MIDI File generated with an instrument of the Korg Pa series The Master Transpose Lock parameter in the Global see General Controls Lock on page 199 has no effect on the Sequencer Page menu icon Press the page menu icon to open the menu See Page menu on page 192 for more information Song area This is where the Song name is shown together with its tempo and meter parameters and the current measure Beat counter Measure number 5 dr HEWSONG IB Met
74. wr s 5 seeker ja S at 5 m EI em wm o9 5 wemeiKeot Ra _ at 3 m Ditomute In wn w 5 WemeiTem outer vat to om leger cuter uM D E Lx n 5 GennekRG outer Talent ea MOI m sedens ae Par mu 5 EI outer wm 5 5 ECETIA a pa OM Om GenesWarm eem AO e II EE ea wn m 75 Immens ja Gm e om Geessemo em wn s 5 use am tet ON om Gees amp ama om wn m 5 sedGwrbe four fat we om Gema ea m m 5 aen ja fat 5 m TIT cuter wn m 5 posen am tat 5 om Geessame em wr m 5 posera four 3m n om sees Ins wr s 5 lena Wa O pa 9 28 ss outer wn m 5 leng am 3m ft m eem em Y wr s 5 fesedewma Wa 3m 2 28 ECETIA nm xm m 5 Mandotin rs1 outer IRE 0 9 Distorion rem eda IC wn om 5 Wwemeits outer at 30 ECT cuter Y allan leese am wn 1 0 pease Jam D ller outer Pre E eez ee O a CO om ETT em wn 3 5 foe Wa E 3m E o TC outer Pre 4 26 pease a D n wets cuter Ier wn s 5 oezo Wa at 7 30 E cuter wn s 5 EEC CS 3m o8 o ET eem wn 9 z dense je fv Pat o3 30 ET am Pre 1 x pecene je D n ETC ea FE wr n 3 EAT CE wr 3 z leen outer D ller em FE wn s x Wemes outer et o9 os EEE cuter wr s m mwetGWa our at 31 CEEI ear Y wr s m secs outer a o5 ETE cuter wn 7 x Wwewses
75. wrong way This way the Upper 1 track usually the most important one for solo playing will sound with the needed effect while the other Keyboard tracks will just sound dry Style Preferences Bass Inversion Manual Bass Fill Mode Style Element When locked selecting a Performance or STS will not change the value of parameters contained in the Style Preferences pages See Preferences Style Preferences on page 101 and Preferences Global Setup on page 102 When locked selecting a Performance or STS will not change the Bass Inversion status See BASS INVERSION on page 12 When locked selecting a Performance or STS will not change the Manual Bass status See MANUAL BASS on page 12 When locked the selected Fill Mode will not change when selecting a different Performance or Style See Fill Mode 1 3 on page 99 When locked selecting a different Style does not cause selecting a different Style Element Style Tracks Play Mute Lock When closed this lock prevents a Style or Perfor mance change to modify the Play Mute status of the Style tracks This way you can for example turn the bass track off during a whole show to allow your bassist to play it live Also you could mute all Acc tracks to only play with the Drum and Bass tracks See Track status icons on page 87 Style Tracks Volume When this lock is closed the volume of the Style tracks rem
76. 1 Darbuka6 Mute M E 1 Darbuka6 Open 820 MEI Darbuka6 Rim 821 M E 1 Darbuka6 Dom Ak 822 M E 1 Kup1 823 M E 1 Kup2 824 M E 1 Ramazan Davul1 825 M E 1 Ramazan Davul2 826 M E 1 Ramazan Davul3 827 M E 1 Tef1 828 M E 1 Tef2 829 M E 1 Tef3 830 M E 2 BD Kick 831 M E 2 SD 832 M E 2 Asagum 833 M E 2 Asmatek 834 M E 2 Bendirgum 835 M E 2 Bendirtek1 836 M E 2 Bendirtek2 837 M E 2 Dm1 838 M E 2 Findik 839 M E 2 Gum 840 M E 2 Hollotokat M E 2 Islik1 842 M E 2 Islik2 843 M E 2 Kapalit 844 M E 2Kasik1 845 M E 2 Kasik2 846 M E 2 Kasik3 847 M E 2Kasik4 848 M E 2 Kemik 849 M E 2 Kenar1 850 M E 2 Kenartek 812 813 817 818 851 M E 2 Ramazangum 852 M E 2 Ramazantek Factory data 277 Drum Samples Sampie Family wennt IT mueren Ir mue JI mueres JL EON IN EX NN EN E EN EN EN EM KE NN EN WE KE ELA NN NC E EAT ONE NK NC M E HIN IN EN NC 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 867 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 M E 2 Toprtek1 mezon e e M E 2 Zilgit DEER mean e ore en e OMC NC o ems CN o CN e p 3 ws usd NC sw mise ON ws mum NC ws mms 8 wy Gem EC ws msg 3 meet CN wo esse CN wm CN mre CN Paes fee EC ww foo CN ws mh CN we ees 8 mrs EC e oom CN ws Wenn CN 300 jm CN 9 fied w mmuk CN 303 Boortreak 5 3w pem 8 ws crm Sd ws jore NC pel ESCHER o mm Sd wo recoge
77. 10 Track status icons gt PERF PERF ere Play mute status of the current track Select the track then press the track area again to change its status a LX Track names Play status The track can be heard Mute status The track cannot be heard Under the sliders a label for each track is shown Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between the various track views DR PERC 99 Grouped Drum and Percussion tracks Accomp C Grouped Accompaniment tracks BASS Bass Style track MIC IN Microphone Voice Processor Sources connected to the Audio Inputs and directly sent to the outputs are not con trolled by this slider LOWER UPPER1 3 Upper tracks Style Tracks View Style Tracks View O a Volume for these tracks is a global offset and is not memorized STS Name panel Press the STS Name tab to select this panel Single Touch Set tings STS are memory locations for quickly choosing Keyboard Sounds contained in each Style or SongBook entry While in this panel you can see the name of the four STSs belonging to the latest selected Style or SongBook entry Touch one of the names to select the corresponding STS Steel Guitar Distortion Organ Electric Guitar Electric Piano Note You cannot edit STS names with this panel To edit a name select the STS to be renamed then select the Write Single Touch Setting command from the page menu see Write Single Touch Setting dialog box on pa
78. 2 Select the source device by using the Device pop up menu When the device is selected its content will appear in the display 3 If the folder you are looking for is inside another folder select the latter and press the Open button to open it Press the Close button to go back to the parent folder 4 Select the SET folder containing the data you wish to load and press Open to open the SET folder A list of User data appears Global Performance SongBook Sounds Style 4 88 06 11 88 44 45 46 11 05 44 45 46 11 88 B4 Ba B6 11 05 B4 Ba a6 11 88 RER Prefer Save Copy Erase f Format Utility neos USE 5 Select the folder containing the type of data you are looking for and press Load to confirm your selection Note Data loaded from a storage device and data already in memory are merged For example if there is data in all three USER Style banks in memory USERO1 USERO2 USERO3 and there is only the USERO1 Style bank on a storage device the USERO1 bank is overwritten while USERO2 and USERO3 banks are left unchanged As a result you will have a STYLE folder in memory contain ing the USEROI bank you just loaded and the old USERO2 and USEROS banks o V c Q i o Ser Q cc 226 Media edit mode Load Loading a single bank You can load a single bank of User data User Sounds User Styles Performances with a single operation A bank corre sponds to a STYLE SELECT or PERFO
79. 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 Doo Voice Doo VoiceLP Solo Violin Vibrato Violin Viola Expressive mf Viola Expressive ff Viola Cello amp Contrabass Violin amp Cello Strings Quartet Strings Quartet Vibratol Strings Quartet Vibrato2 Pizzicato StereoStrings Ensemble_L StereoStrings Ensemble_R Strings Ensemble Strings Ensemble Tremolo Pizzicato Ensemble Harp Steel Guitarl Pick p Steel Guitarl Pick mf Steel Guitarl Pick f Steel Guitar1 Mute Steel Guitarl Slide Steel Guitar2 p Steel Guitar2 mf Steel Guitar2 f Steel Guitar2 Slap Steel Guitar2 Slide Nylon Guitar mp Nylon Guitar mf Nylon Guitar ff Nylon GuitarAtk Ac Guitar 12 Strings Ac Guitar Harmonics1 Ac Guitar Harmonics2 Ac Guitar Noise Guitar Fret Noise Off Guitar Noise Off Guitar Body Guitar Noise Attack Off El Guitar Stra 54 p El Guitar Stra 54 mf El Guitar Stra 54 f El Guitar Tel Mid p El Guitar Tel Mid mf El Guitar Tel Mid f 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 924 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 El Guitar Tel Bridge p El Guitar Tel Bridge mf El Guitar Tel Bridge f El Guitar Fend Slide Clean Guitar Str p Clean Guitar Str f Clean Guitar Mu
80. 48 for more information edit the Song in Sequencer mode Soloing a track Contrary to the above you may want to make a single track play alone This is called the Solo func tion 1 While the Song is playing keep the SHIFT button pressed and touch the track you want to listen to in Solo mode NJ To set all tracks back to the Play status keep the SHIFT button pressed again and touch the track currently in Solo mode You can use the Solo function also in Style Play and Sequencer mode The Solo command can also be selected from the page menu Song Play 57 Mixing two Songs Mixing two Songs You can select two Songs at the same time and mix between them using the BALANCE slider 1 Press the Sequencer 1 area to open the Song Select window and select the Song to be played by Sequencer 1 Press Select to confirm SONG PLAY MT ano chord gt SEQUENCER 1 Song Selection Type Hame Abano song gt b Grand Piano Ra m Meter d M 12B un MEN afl 84 88 86 11 14 MIDIFILE 11 88 86 18 18 canyon 11K 03 08 06 11 21 MySun 3K 03 88 06 11 21 NightDay pk H3 Bg B6 11 21 MIC IM LOWER UPPERS UPPER UPPER Juke Lyrics STS M J Box IS Marki Hame E 2 Once a song is assigned to Sequencer 1 press the Sequencer 2 area once to select it and a second time to open the Song Select window Select a Song to be assigned to Sequencer 2 and press Select to confirm SEQUENCER Z Song Selection Type Mame Size p MIDIFILE Ca
81. 9 5 EIC hei a 1 pw pew e D i o5 EI amt wr 9 Wemewd en D i 5 Wee ET wr 3 9 Aie famine 34 3 5 ET m2 FE wn CA CTE fama D i 5 Melowred ET wr 5 9 ewsied mn 3 5 5 ewm Pd mhi Ca s 9 posre fama fat 8 5 voubecde amt Pre 3 eed mi et 0 eRmew sme wn 9 leed fama O 3 88 Motion ocean amt wr m 9 Awdex mz 3m po o eme am xm 9 s Wewemdsw amma v m 9 5 ReeWekew sym IC wn 1 8 Wustade amni et ft 8 CI ETS wr 5 l nner fama a 2 feste m wr 9 9 Wemmdew mi v fet 3 5 wWnmes gi wr 1 9 semd mi II A O p wy eemmb e wn 9 wee mees 3m O5 5 o wWemd mi wr 3 9 wee mz S et fs y ee sm FE Pre 4 9 memd jm D 5 femp sn a 5 9 wmemd mi 3 9 5 enero gi 3 wr s 9 mmd mr YS et ft om ewe sme wn 7 9 memm amr at 2 o EIC CTC 1 wm s 9 Amari mi at 3 5 ET meng wn s 9 wora aer D i 5 pese mier m 9 9 Ames amni LI at 5 9 Memes mi wr w 9 vintoserod fmt S et 8 58 footrest Pre a e emi jer Il 37 5 eee amt wr s 9 mwkAms mi at 0 o9 mese gz IC m w 9 Simohonictrs mi D i 9 CT gz IC xr 9 9 pomen mz LI O3 99 tees ET Factory data 267 Sounds Program Change order ccoo ccs2 Pc Name E E ccoo EME wee
82. 93 IAN AS MD AP AP ee 94 Track Controls TEE 94 Track Controls Drum Volume 95 Track Controls Easy Edit 96 Keyboard Ensemble Keyboard Control 97 Keyboard Ensemble Key Velocity Range 97 Keyboard Ensemble Ensemble o oooo ooooooooo 98 Style Controls Druma Fill e 5 Sa ret RR Eee mes 99 Style Controls Keyboard Range On Off Wrap Around 99 Pad Wiel Paid radio dpi a 100 Pad Switch Assignable Switch 100 Preferences Style Preferences oooooooommommomoo s 101 Preferences Global Setup 102 Pase MENU een e ee as 103 Write Performance dialog bas 104 Write Single Touch Setting dialog box 104 Write Style Performance dialog box 105 Write Global Style Play Setup dialog box 105 The Favorite Danks secrasiiartibeia nin REPRISES 105 Style Record mode aia ree re aaa 106 RE EE 106 Style Impornt EXport carivsssaci ns daba ee das dees 107 Entering the Style Record mode 107 Exit by saving or deleting changes s luus 108 Listening to the Style while in Edit mode 108 List of recorded events uses usos eme isso 108 Main page Record L essere EE ERES 109 Main page Record 112 Main page QUE ueque tes Sakae tienes OR Rao 112 Style Record procedure 0 cee eee cee cee eee lees 113 ETA aco ten ESO AIR ORE RT eee as 115 Edit page SUC Oca Sew REPOS EE 115 Event Edit Event EE 116 Event E
83. Amm E nemmen B nemmen M emmer Kbd Pad This Backing Sequence track includes the four Key board tracks and the four Pads After finishing recording they will be saved as Song tracks 1 8 as in the following table Kbd Pad track Song track Channel o Jg c Q ez o tia Q cc 178 Sequencer operating mode Record mode Backing Sequence Quick Record page Kbd Pad track Song track Channel mda 8 Metro Metronome This parameter sets the metronome mode during recording Off No metronome click will be heard during record ing A one bar precount will be played before starting recording Onl Metronome on with a one bar precount before starting recording On2 Metronome on with a two bar precount before starting recording Tempo Metronome tempo Select this parameter and use the TEMPO VALUE controls to change the tempo As an alternative when a different parameter is selected or you are in a different page keep the SHIFT button pressed and use the DIAL to change the tempo of the sequencer Meter Non Editable This parameter shows the Time Signature of the selected Style for reference PERF or STS Performance or STS This parameter shows the selected Performance or STS depend ing on the latest item selected To select a Performance either press it or press one of the PER FORMANCE SOUND buttons provided the PERFORMANCE SELECT LED is turned on to open the S
84. Basic Voice On Off gt GBL P This checkbox allows enabling disabling of the selected Har mony Voice It is the same control found on the Preset page Gender GBL PP This parameter sets the formant of the Harmony Voice Use it to alter the character of the voice ranging from 50 a big person with a deep voice to 0 no change to 50 mice alien sound gt GBLY This parameter is used to set the voicing of the selected voice This parameter means different things depending on the har mony mode of the preset Voicing Scalic Mode Presets In this mode the Voicing parameter specifies the interval of the harmony note with respect to the input note in the scale The range of values goes from 8 which is 2 octaves below the input note to 8 which is two octaves above the input note For example a setting of 3 will result in a harmony voice a third above the input voice related to the current scale Chord Mode Presets In this mode the Voicing parameter specifies the relation of the harmony note to the input note with respect to the current chord In Chord mode presets the harmony voices are always notes in the chord A setting of Up1 will result in the harmony voice being the next note above the input voice in the chord For instance if the chord was C Major and the input note was an E an Upl setting would produce a G harmony voice just above the input E The range of values goes from Down 5 to Unison
85. Bass tracks Tension gt STYLE Tension adds notes a 9th 11th and or 13th that have actually been played to the accompaniment even if they haven t been written in the Style pattern This parameter specifies whether or not the Tension included in the recognized chord will be added to the Acc type tracks On The Tension will be added Off No Tension will be added Style Record mode 125 Import Import Groove Import Import Groove The Import Groove function allows the loading of MIDI Grooves GRV files generated by the Slice function see the Time Slice page of the Sampling mode in the Advanced Edit addendum in the Accessory CD By importing these data to a track and assigning the Sound based on the sliced samples to the same track you can play the original audio groove and freely change its tempo STYLE REC Import Note After importing a groove generated by a melody line not by a percussive groove the imported groove and samples will not be transposed together with the other Style tracks Audio data cannot be transposed by the arranger Note Please execute the Import Groove operation before turning the instrument off All GRV files generated by a Time Slice oper ation are deleted when turning the instrument off From Use this parameter to select one of the MIDI Groove patterns GRV files generated when saving data after a Time Slice operation To E CV Style Elem
86. Bottom and Top parameters you can select a single percussive instrument in a Drum track Advanced When this checkbox is checked the Intensity Curve Start Velocity Value and End Velocity Value parameters can be edited Intensity Only available in Advanced mode Use this parameter to specify the degree to which the velocity data will be adjusted toward the curve you specify in Curve 0 100 Intensity value With a setting of 0 the veloc ity will not change With a setting of 100 the velocity will be changed the most Curve Only available in Advanced mode Use this parameter to select one of the six curves and to specify how the velocity will change over time Start Value 0 End Value 100 Curve 1 Curve 2 Curve 3 127 127 127 Velocity Velocity e 1 1 1 Start End Start End Start End Value Value Value Value Value Value Curve 4 Curve 5 Curve 6 127 127 127 Velocity Velocity Velocity RANDOM 1 1 1 Start End Start End Start End Value Value Value Value Value Value Start End Vel Value Only available in Advanced mode Velocity change at the start ing and ending ticks of the selected range 0 100 Velocity change in percentage o v c Q i o Ser Q cc 190 Sequencer operating mode Song Edit Cut Insert Measures Song Edit Cut Insert Measures In this page you can cut or insert measures from the Song SEQUENCER Edit
87. Chord Variation will be generated If so change the CV Length value to reset the Chord Variation length The exceeding note will be cut to fit the new pattern length When programming a Chord Variation on an external sequencer please assign each Style track to the correct MIDI channel according to the following table Pa800 Track MIDI Channel s Accompaniment 1 5 Note Only SMF in format 0 can be loaded From Song This is the name of the Standard MIDI File to be loaded Press the Select button to open the file selector and select an SMF file Select Press this button to open the file selector and load the SMF Initialize Check this parameter if you want all settings of the target Style Element ie Key Chord Chord Table Sounds are reset when loading the SMF Hint It is a good idea to check the Initialize parameter when importing the first Chord Variation of a Style Element and uncheck it when importing the following Chord Variations To E CV Use this parameter to select a target Chord Variation Execute After setting all parameters in this page press this button to import the Standard MIDI File into the target Chord Variation Export SMF The Export SMF function allows you to export a Chord Varia tion as a Standard MIDI File SMF and edit it on your pre ferred external sequencer STYLE REC Export To Song This non editable parameter shows the name of the Sta
88. Ew s mms Lue s merced AAA AO 20 6 068 Jem 69 O N o EN EN E Eo WS HA E EN EON Eu E KCN E E EX EEE Eom E E WE WS ET NN Ex E AEN EN Eo a EA a Ew Eo Multisamples Factory data 269 Multisamples The following table lists all Pa800 Factory Multisamples OrigTune Original Tune i e samples use the natural tuning of the original instrument instead of the equal tuning Beating may occur at the extreme pitch when the sound is used in conjunction with other sounds GrandPiano_L GrandPiano_R Tailpiece_L Tailpiece_R AcousticPiano_L Oo 0 NA Ui dH WO NH C AcousticPiano_R 10 FX Pedal On_L 11 FX Pedal On_R 12 FX Pedal Off_L 13 FX Pedal Off R 14 FX Key Off L 15 FX Key Off R 16 MI Piano 17 E GrandPiano 18 E Piano FM 1 19 E Piano FM 1LP 20 E Piano FM 2 21 E Piano Suit Bright mp 22 E Piano Suit Bright mf 23 E Piano Suit Bright f 24 E Piano Dyno mf 25 E Piano Dyno f 26 E Piano Dyno ff 27 E Piano Dyno Soft 28 E Piano Dyno SoftLP 29 E Piano Stage Hard 30 E Piano Stage HardLP 31 E Piano Wurly Soft 32 E Piano Wurly Hard 33 E Piano Pad 1 34 E Piano Pad 1LP 35 E Piano Pad 2 36 Clavil 37 Clavi2 38 Clavi3 39 Clavi4 40 Harpsichord 41 Harpsichord Key off GrandPiano_L OrigTune GrandPiano R OrigTune Tailpiece_L OrigTune Tailpiece R OrigTune Gospel Organ Slow L Gospel Organ Slow R Gospel Organ Fast L
89. Fixed Interval this takes the pitch of your lead voice and creates harmonies a set number of semitones away based on that pitch The method of creating harmonies using a fixed number of semitones relative to an input note or pitch is called chromatic harmony the theory of which well go into later We consider this type of harmonizing to be non intelligent because Voice Processor is not set to any particular key or scale These are pure parallel harmonies The most common shift har mony voices are the 5th 7 semitones and octave 12 semi tones ranging from two octaves below the input to two octaves above the input pitch Below is the C Major scale showing third above chromatic scale harmony as used in Voice Processor Shift Mode Black Lead Grey Harmony Chord Chordal Mode Chordal harmonies take your chord information to create intel ligent diatonic harmonies based on your voice To make Chordal harmonies you need to input in real time the chords of the song This may be done either by playing on the keyboard via MIDI or through a programmed sequence of chords included in the Harmony Track of a Song In Chordal mode the Voice Processor will only create harmony voices that fall on the notes of the chord Chordal harmonies are intelligent because they decipher the chord you re playing and the note you re singing to produce musically pleasing harmonies When one note above is defined as a harmony voice Up1 the
90. Global edit mode Page menu Page menu Press the page menu icon to open the menu Press a command to select it Press anywhere in the display to close the menu without selecting a command Se Write Global Global Setup Select this command to open the Write Global Global Setup dia log box and save global settings that are not tied to a single operative mode These settings are programmed in the Global edit mode See Write Global Global Setup dialog box on page 210 for information on the dialog box Write Global Midi Setup Select this command to open the Write Global Midi Setup dia log box and save the current MIDI settings to a MIDI Setup See Write Global Midi Setup dialog box on page 210 for more information Write Global Talk Configuration Only available when the Talk is activated Select this command to open the Write Global Talk Configuration dialog box and save the current Talk settings see Voice Processor Setup Talk on page 213 See Write Global Talk Configuration dialog box on page 211 for more information This parameter is automatically set to off when turning the instru ment off Write Global Voice Processor Setup Select this command to open the Write Global Voice Processor Setup dialog box and save the current Voice Processor Setup set tings see from page 208 See Write Global Voice Processor Setup dialog box on page 211 for more information W
91. Gospel Organ Fast R 16 8 LF_L 16 8 LE R 16 8 LS L 16 8 LS R 16 8 51 3 LF_L 16 8 51 3 LF_R 16 8 51 3 LS_L 16 8 51 3 LS_R 4 22 3 2 LF_L 4 22 3 2 LF_R 4 22 3 2 LS_L 4 22 3 2 LS_R LS 13 5 1 LF_L 11 3 13 5 1 LF_R 11 3 13 5 1 LS_L 11 3 13 5 1 IS R 16 8 51 3 Perc LF L 16 8 51 3 Perc LE R 16 8 51 3 Perc LS L 16 8 51 3 Perc LS R Theater Organl Theater Org2 E Organ CX 3 E Organ Perc OIW E Organ Fast Click E Organ Perc 1 E Organ Perc 2 E Organ Perc 3 E Organ Perc 4 M1 Organl M1 Organ2 Organl Organ2 Organ2LP Organ3 Jazz BX3 amp Perc 3rd E Organ Vox E Organ Soft 84 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 E Organ Full E Organ Dist Rotary Organ 1 Rotary Organ 1LP Rotary Organ 2 Super BX3 Super BX3LP LeslieNoise LF_L LeslieNoise LF_R LeslieNoise LS_L LeslieNoise LS_R ON Click Organ OFF Click Organ Pipe Flute_L Pipe Flute_R Pipe Positive Pipe Mixture Pipe Full 1_L Pipe Full 1_R Pipe Full 2 E Organ Church Pipe Organ Tuentiana Pipe Organ Reed Music Box Music BoxLP Kalimba Marimba MarimbaLP Xylophone Balaphone Vibraphonel VibraphonelLP Vibraphone2 Celesta CelestaLP Glockenspiel GlockenspielLP Tubular Bell Log Drum Steel Drum Hard Steel Drum HardLP Gamelan 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152
92. Keyboard track name Non editable Name of the corresponding track CI CN om we Lower Sound bank s icon PERF STS This picture illustrates the bank the current Sound belongs to Keyboard track status PERF STS Play mute status of the current track Select the track then press this area to change the track status No icon Play status The track can be heard MUTE Mute status The track cannot be heard Panels The lower half of the main page contains the various panels you can select by pressing the corresponding tabs See more informa tion in the relevant sections starting from page 86 Volume panel DRUF PERC BASS ACC 1 ACCS ACCS ACC ACCS Yoli iae ln Jl scale J Paa sen Tabs Style Play operating mode 85 Style Tracks view page Style Tracks view page Press the TRACK SELECT button to switch from the Normal view to the Style Tracks view In this view individual Style tracks are shown in the lower half of the display while the upper half of the main page changes to show parameters for the Style tracks STYLE PLAY no chord amp Selected track info area A Trk Upper 1 Sweet Fretless B Bass mo K No Ma mo mo Ma mo innad dus 001 om F e E 1 D Sounds area pr ERUH FERC BASS ACC 1 ACCS ACCS ACCA ACCS STS Sub Hama Scale Press TRACK SELECT again to return to the Normal view Key board tracks grouped Style tracks Mic In controls Origin
93. Le a file with the MID extension and play it back either in Song Play or Sequencer mode or on any external sequencer Transport controls To play back a Song use SEQUENCER 1 transport controls 1 e the one on the left side of the SEQUENCER area While in Sequencer mode you can only use Sequencer 1 controls Sequencer 2 controls are deactivated See SEQUENCER 1 TRANSPORT CONTROLS on page 14 for more information The Songs and the Standard MIDI File format The native Song format for Pa800 is the Standard MIDI File When saving a Song as a SMF an empty measure is automati cally inserted to the beginning of the Song This measure con tains various Song initialization parameters When an SMF is loaded the empty measure is automatically removed Songs and Voice Processor Presets You can use the Voice Processor while in Sequencer mode For this just two settings are needed e Select the Song track where you are recording chords for the Voice Processor see Harmony Track on page 192 Select the desired Voice Processor Preset in the Voice Pro cessor Preset section of the Global mode see page 214 Sequencer Play Main page Press SEQUENCER to access this page from another operating mode In this page you can load a Song and play it back using the transport controls for SEQUENCER 1 see Transport con trols above Note When switching from Style Play to Sequencer mode
94. Loading the Operating System 22 Loading the Musical Resources 22 STATE UD sir EORERA EAS EDUC a Rcx 23 Connecting the AC power cord 23 Turning the instrument on and oft 23 Controlling the Melmer erer baste KEE Ee EE 23 The Sequencer s BALANCE slider ooooooooooooom o 23 Rica do OCS otro ed 23 Audio OULPUIS 12 2p Sheet Se Pira boda 23 te CEET 24 MIDI COMNCCHONS AAA nnrir EROR E Hd Ioa 644 24 Damper Pedal eege eg 24 uc M PD saab ease dae EE 24 RTE MER 24 Glossary of Terms 25 Se 25 c P e eg 25 A Ee Re 23 Keyboard EEN 25 POrformalee sisas usc een vd RR RA a WES dud ERE 26 GEIER osea 26 The LOGO decoder esvunicod sones LEE SERES 26 Interface basics 27 The Color TouchView graphical user interface 27 Operative modes cece eee eee 28 Selected highlighted items cee eee ee eee 28 Non available grayed out parameters 28 A ee eege 28 Quick Guide Turning the instrument on and listening to Ihe del S ebe dee Derek 30 Turning the instrument on and viewing the main screen 30 Playing the de MOS erat see 30 W dote KT DEE 31 Selecting a Sound and playing it on the keyboard 31 Playing two or three Sounds at the same time 33 Playing different Sounds with your left and right hand 35 Changing the split Pomt EE 36 Raising or lowering the Upper octave o oooomommoo 37 Selecting and saving Performances 38 Sel
95. N ee Famiy MEM ETC NET ERC RER 236_ Sdesick F Ts ses Dance Tm siesta ass sasian Tao prms o m m ER N 236 237 238 i 239 240 zs rom OpenFioorp 4 Tom1 Open Floor p flam a Tom1 Open Floor f MEM 25 romt Open oran 4 eleene m went fa m5 fomm a m omma a KERGER 266 fomo J7 KSE KERGER m pem A mo roma m pow 0 4 m mmus a ms romeros leen a ms eum 4 me Tom vintage 4 ur Tom Vintage Himf a ms tom Vintage 0 a zs Tom vintage widme a 15 Tom Vintage Midimf 4 281 frome Vintage mat 4 Tom6 Vintage Lo mp Za s roms Vintagetomf 4 m emgeet 4 ms pommeeed A me mmmam a 297 pomme mm romers edon 17 9 TomBrusht Gdclose 4 ze rombusz opera mi fomBrasha Gaos 4 m msi f 4 m5 fromen a KERGER o e ren s fomm a MEE 17 Tom Brush3 Low ff 320 HH3 Closed1 3 HH3 Closed2 21 a moen a mo NE ERGOE ERGOE xr CC NE xs CN NE e H 8 9 0 1 2 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 Ww II w Wy UY sea IC 3 35 bomgegt NET 3q women 3 35 uhi NET 39 ET 5 ao fren rese ss feres 7 ss femen NET MEM emoe NET Psa CS RER ss um NET sw ume NET 32 33 33 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 Ale ola o ooo MES 677 ss CTE NET kamen 7 88 Crash son 35 fpes NC vI vI un eic AE CHE 313 o o olo oigo Dja z o
96. NoteOff OmniOff Omni On Mono On Poly On The following NRPN messages are recognized by the Pa800 CC 99 MSB CC 98 LSB CC 06 Data Entry Vibrato Rate 0 127 Vibrato Depth 0 127 8 Vibrato Decay 0 127 8 Filter Cutoff LA N UJ O 0 127 9 UJ Resonance 0 127 8 EG Attack Time 0 127 EG Decay Time 100 0 127 EG Release Time 1 0 127 9 Drum Filter Cutoff 0 127 9 dq dq dq b dq dd dd dq dd dd dd b 0 127 9 Drum Filter Resonance 0 127 Drum EG Attack Time 0 127 Drum EG Decay Time 0 127 Drum Coarse Tune 0 127 8 NJ Ul N Drum Fine Tune 0 127 8 Drum Volume 26 0 127 N Drum Panpot 8 0 127 9 Drum Rev Send FX 1 29 O N 0 127 9 Drum Mod Send FX 2 30 a 64 No change to the original parameter s value b dd Drum Instrument No 0 127 CO C8 Note These controls are reset when stopping the Song or choosing a new Song MIDI Data 29 7 Program Change messages used as remote commands Program Change messages used as remote commands The following is a table including all Program Change messages used as remote Style and Sequencer controls These messages are to be sent on the Control channel see MIDI MIDI In Channels on page 204 KLEER EE Style Elements ECKER Style and Sequencers Control Lo ECC AECI ues ICI CC 59 CTC A IN NES Single Touch NES Style
97. O W CO NI oi UI BI N O N ul UJ N O O CO NI wo UI BI N O 250 Factory data Style Elements Style Elements Note You can remotely select the various Style Elements on the Pa800 by sending it Program Change messages on the Control channel see MIDI MIDI In Channels on page 204 PC Style Element Style Element Style Element Style Element Style Element 89 Fill 3 Break as Neraton3 meni IS Sr an NN IINE M TRA OL A Note The above Program Change numbers are given according to the 0 127 numbering system Single Touch Settings STS Note You can remotely select Single Touch Settings STS on the Pa800 by sending it Bank Select MSB CC 0 Bank Select LSB CC 32 and Program Change messages on the Control channel see MIDI MIDI In Channels on page 204 If a Style is already selected just send the Program Change message CC 0 CC 32 STS STS STS STS The same as the Style to which the STS belongs oi STS 1 STS 2 66 STS 3 STS 4 Sounds Bank order The following table lists all Pa800 Factory Sounds as they appear in the Banks accessed by pressing the SOUND buttons on the control panel Legend The table also includes MIDI data used to remotely select the Sounds CC00 Control Change 0 or Bank Select MSB CC32 Control Change 32 or Bank Select LSB PC Program Change Bank Sound Performance Select button Bank Piano MR Sandino 3 3 9 um
98. On Off gt GBL On off switch for the Talk function This is the same switch you can find in the Mic panel of the Style Play and Song Play modes This parameter is automatically set to off when turning the instru ment off Note When you deactivate the Talk function the Voice Processor Preset is recalled Any unsaved change to the Preset will be lost o v c o i o tia Q cc 214 Voice Processor Voice Processor Preset Preset Mode Auto AutoTalk KGBUk When this parameter is checked the Talk function automatically engages when the Sequencer or Arranger is stopped This way you can talk to the audience between two songs without the need to press the Talk On Off button Mixer FX Level knob gt GBL Use this knob to attenuate the effects level OdB corresponds to no attenuation Master Volume Attenuation knob GBL Use this knob to reduce the volume of all tracks Keyboard Style Sequencer Pad OdB corresponds to no level reduction Reverb Type gt GBL Use this parameter to choose a reverb to be automatically selected when turning the Talk function on These reverbs can not be edited Hall Smooth Hall Wet Plate Dry Plate Voice Processor Preset Preset This page allows you to select a Voice Processor Preset as well as turning on or off the various Voice processor modules Preset Voice Processor Preset PERF STS STS Use this parameter to select
99. PLAY no chord While in an edit page press EXIT to go back to the main page of the current operating UPPERZ mode UFFER 1 MIC IM LOWER UPPERS STS Su scale Hama 6 Press the ENSEMBLE button again to turn its LED off The automatic har monization will be turned off ENSEMBLE Song Play 5 1 Selecting a Song to play Song Play Pa800 is equipped with two onboard sequencers that can be run at the same time to mix between dif ferent Songs Pa800 can read Songs in Standard MIDI File SMF and Karaoke KAR format It may be of great interest to singers and guitar players to know that if a midifile contains lyrics and chords they can be seen in the display Lyrics can also be seen on an external video monitor provided you have the optional VIF4 Video Interface installed The SONG PLAY button 1 amp 3 Ne c rS BERE CET mes EA jid TCHELICON CZE SE E 770770717707 Pam Tm
100. Performance or select a different Song the tempo does not change You can still manually change it by using the DIAL The Link Mode is also turned on for the Song Play mode Tempo is the same for both Sequenc ers Off When you select a different Style or Performance or select a different Song the memorized tempo is automatically selected The Link Mode is also turned off for the Song Play mode so each Sequencer plays with its own Tempo 9 DISPLAY HOLD This button turns the Display Hold function on or off On When you open a temporary windows like the Sound Select window it remains in the display until you press EXIT or an operating mode but ton Off Any temporary window closes after a certain time amp AUDIO IN LED This LED shows the level of the audio signal entering the INPUT connectors Three different colors green orange red show the level Iry to keep the level so that this LED remains on green most of the time with orange appearing at signal peaks Never go to red Off No signal entering Green Low to mid level signal entering If the LED turns off too often the input gain is too low Use the GAIN controls and or the source device s vol ume to raise the input level Orange Slight overload in the signal path This is fine if it turns on only on signal peaks Red Clipping is occurring in the signal path Use the GAIN controls and or the source device s volume to lower the input level
101. RECORD Overdub Step Position Hote Ranoise Mel Dur X Step time Event list Buttons See Step Record procedure below for information on the record procedure Page header This line shows the current operating mode Page sub header Track Name of the selected track in record S1Tr01 Tr16 Sequencer 1 track In Sequencer mode you always work with Sequencer 1 Pos Position This is the position of the event note rest or chord to be inserted Step Time area Step Time Length of the event to be inserted od Standard Note value Standard value of the selected note Dot Augments the selected note length by one half of its value Triplet 3 Triplet value of the selected note Sequencer operating mode 175 Record mode Step Record page Note parameter area Meter Time signature of the current measure This parameter cannot be edited You can set a Meter change by using the Insert func tion of the Edit menu and inserting a new series of measures with a different Meter see Song Edit Cut Insert Measures on page 190 Free Memory Available memory for recording Duration Relative duration of the inserted note The percentage is always referred to the step value 50 Staccato 85 Ordinary articulation 100 Legato Velocity Set this parameter before entering a note or chord This will be the playing strength e velocity value of the event to be in
102. Record mode Event Edit Event Edit Other pages have a slightly different structure Operating mode Edit section Page menu icon E EA STYLE REC Edit LA Crum LA Parameters area Track status SINN DRUM PER BASS D I D I D I ACCA ACCS Tabs KE Operating mode This indicates that the instrument is in Style Record mode Edit section This identifies the current edit section corresponding to one of the items of the edit menu see Edit menu on page 115 Selected Style Element In Style Record mode edits always happen on the selected Style Element Page menu icon Press this icon to open the page menu see Page menu on page 127 Parameters area Each page contains various parameters Use the tabs to select one of the available pages For detailed information on the vari ous types of parameters see sections starting from page 116 Track status Use these buttons to mute unmute tracks while editing Tabs Use tabs to select one of the edit pages of the current edit section Event Edit Event Edit The Event Edit is the page where you can edit each single MIDI event of the selected Chord Variation You can for example replace a note with a different one or change its playing strength 1 e velocity value See Event Edit procedure on page 117 for more information on the event editing procedure Page sub header Page menu icon GE REC Event Edit Valuel Value2z Length P
103. SET folder see Creating a new SET folder on page 231 or is cl Save T Select an existing SET folder and press Save to confirm Open EE BANKBS STY 4 3 Select the desired bank and press Open to gain access to the single files Bal 01 01 standard 8 Beat 21 88 06 18 05 41 82 Standard 16 Beat 71 88 06 18 85 41 63 Kool Beat 41 04 Guitar Beak 41 05 Easy Beak 1 Once you have selected the file that you want to save press Save To to confirm the selection The list of files of the tar get device is shown 4 85 86 11 14 11 45 46 18 18 a4 a5 46 11 05 If needed select a different target device by using the Device pop up menu When the target device is selected its content will appear in the display At this point you can e Press the New SET button and create a new SET folder see Creating a new SET folder on page 231 or Select an existing SET folder and press Save to confirm A dialog box appears asking you to select one of the avail able User or Favorite Style locations inside the selected folder i a1 41 Standard 8 Beat In the above dialog box the previously selected Style will be saved to location 01 inside the bank U01 corresponding to the USERI button inside the selected folder Press OK to confirm or Cancel to abort Warning After confirming the same item in the target folder is deleted Media edit mode Save 23
104. Standard MIDI File This way you can leave for example the bass track in mute and let you bassist play it live for the whole show Play status The track can be heard Mute status The track cannot be heard However the above is not true when reading a Standard MIDI File created with a Pa Series instrument These files do include special commands to force the Play Mute status of each track Song Play operating mode 147 Volume panel Track names Under the sliders a label for each track is shown Use the TRK SEL button to switch between the various track views MIC IN Audio inputs UPPERI 3 Upper tracks LOWER Lower track TO1 T16 Song tracks Volume for these tracks is not memorized Jukebox panel When a Jukebox JBX file is assigned to Sequencer 1 you can use the list shown in this panel to browse the Jukebox list and press the Select button in the display to select a Song to play This way you can select any Song in the list as your starting Song and manually change the order of the Songs to play Note A Jukebox file can be assigned to Sequencer 1 only Note This panel is only available after loading a Jukebox file Hint To create or edit a Jukebox file go to the Jukebox Edit page see page 156 A quick way to create a Jukebox list is to press the Play All button in the Song Select window see page 81 Warning If you delete a Song included in the Jukebox list currently in pl
105. Swing and Win dow values Aan Ju Grid resolution in musical values a 3 after the value means triplet For example when you select 1 8 all notes are moved to the nearest 1 8 division When you select 1 4 all notes are moved to the nearest 1 4 division samy A y 1 4 Accuracy Accuracy percentage of quantize For example if Acc 50 and the note is 20 tics away from the coarse grid it is moved to the grid of only 10 tics 0 No accuracy The quantize is not executed 100 Maximum accuracy The note is moved exactly at the grid position Swing Asymmetry of quantization Grid axis are moved to the nearest grid axis 0 Even numbered axis are totally moved over the previous odd numbered axis 50 Axis are perfectly equidistant 100 Even numbered axis are totally moved over the following odd numbered axis Swng 50 Swng 25 Swng 75 Window Area of quantize intervention bordering the grid axis o V c Q i o im Q cc 158 Song Play operating mode Preferences Track Settings 0 The quantize window corresponds to the axis No quantization happens 100 The quantize window extends to the nearest win dow all events are quantized Win 0 Win 50 DPC OOOOOS Win 100 Preferences Track Settings In this page you can set various general parameters referred to Song tracks SONG PLAY SE01 Preferences Maa KI Note These sett
106. TY TY TY TY TY MY m oO og OPO OPO 2 2 2 2 2 EMA 3E ees ojo qu Qij uo uq m io 25 25 25 25 5 25 5 22 ll g Zl lololol o al xl AA zi Ss gt eal ae are AN ee DG d Re a Di gt 0 0 o0 DLO P S ol al wl sl ol o wo gt nlun u wil n 2 2 3 SIS Blk Choir C Horse Gallop Drum Brush Shuff 15 Perc Shak Tamb 2 16 Bik choir Del efren fie Dramtatin 16 Perc shakCona e KJ KJ E Starship Drum Progressiv1 Perc Shak Cong 2 18 Thunder 18 Drum Progressiv2 18 Perc Tambourine1 19 Train E Drum Fill 1 19 Perc Tambourine2 Drum Fill 2 Perc Tamb Conga1 a N NIE NIT NI Lol Lol UN e e e e e e ol ai al ai al a ojojoj ojojo j c e e A A A A J 3 J J J 25 gt OI un Pi DI N 282 Factory data Pads N N NI N N N N LAT Wi w N N NINININ 00 Oli P N N O W 0 NM vu AJW tadium Perc Cowbel Tamb N LA wI W W NI NI N N N N AU W Wi NINI NI N NIN N Oil 0 rd Oli UI A N O W Oil a oy P N I d Y D D B D I I Y I I I Y I I I Y I mms UN A 2 2 3 3 y9 o o ojo o o o o o o o o o o o o o o s m O O 2 231 15 51 531 531 51 53 51 353 531 51 53 551 531 3531531 5 5 O Cl Di Gul Gul OiODiOoiOoiOol Olio OO Ol Oli Oo OO OO OO OO nN L l EI EE EE EI DEED DEED 212 2 3 S 2l 2 5 2 mia ea e e e ce epS o S ajo E Co ni 23 3 S5 8 ope 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 35 3 s of S 3 C
107. Text Edit button you can open the Text Edit window Enter the name then press OK to confirm and close the Text Edit window Rename Available only when an item is selected in a file list Use this function to change the name of an existing generic file or folder To preserve consistency through the data structure you cannot rename single files inside a SET folder Also you cannot change the 3 character extension of files and SET fold ers since they are used to identify the type of file or folder Rename Press the Ti Text Edit button to open the Text Edit window Enter the new name then press OK to confirm and close the Text Edit window Q V c Q i o EM Q cc 238 Media edit mode Page menu Object s info Select this command to see the size of any selected file or folder Also the number of files and directories folders it contains are shown Objects Info Note The single file size is always shown to the right of the file name in any file list Type Hame EN HONEST EAR Device Info Select this command to see various info on the selected device To select a different device use the Device pop up menu on the lower left corner of most Media pages Device Information T By pressing the T Text Edit button you can open the Text Edit window Enter the name label of the selected device then press OK to confirm and close the Text Edit window Warnin
108. Track 1 16 Selected source and target tracks Start Measure End Measure These parameters are the starting and ending measure to copy For example if From Measure 1 and To Measure 4 the first four measures are copied To Measure This parameter is the first of the target measures Repeat Times Number of times the copy must be executed Copies will be con secutive Song Edit Move Here you can shift a track forward or backward by just a few ticks or whole measures SEQUENCER Edit LT rack 1 The TA Tad LE THE Tar Trans Cut Tas Ra Convert After setting the various parameters press Execute to complete the operation Track Use these parameters to select the track you want to move Track 1 16 Selected track Start End Tick These parameters set the starting and ending point of the range to move To Tick This parameter allows you to set the target starting point of the moved track 191 Sequencer operating mode Song Edit Move Song Edit RX Convert You can use the RX Convert page to convert notes of the midifile into RX Noises and vice versa This will help programming Songs on an external sequencer SEQUENCER Edit HA Track 1 CN LCE IEE Tad THS THE Tar THE Tranz Cut After having chosen a track to convert press Execute to complete the operation Track Use these parameters to select the track containing the notes or RX Noises you
109. Use these controls scroll the list up or down Device pop up menu See Device pop up menu above Load Save Copy Erase button Executes the media operation Open button Opens the selected folder or directory whose name begins with the EN icon Close button Closes the current folder or directory returning to the parent upper level Load In this page you can load User data files Performances User Sounds User Styles the SongBook User PCM the Global from an external device to the internal memory SSD and RAM a 80 66 11 14 11 45 46 18 18 EN MIDIFILE SET MYSHOW SET 4 88 86 11 88 RER Prefer Copy Erase f Format Utility Bn ss USE Note While in this page only data allowed for loading are shown All other files are hidden Warning When loading a SET folder containing Sounds associ ated with PCM data samples all existing PCM data in memory are deleted Save the data already in memory before loading the new data To see if a SET folder contains PCM data open it and look for a PCM folder Hint Load single Sounds if you want to load new PCM data with out deleting the ones already contained in memory This will merge the existing data with the new ones Loading all the User data You can load all the User data with a single operation 1 If loading from an external device connect the device to one of the USB Host ports 2 Select the source
110. Use these tabs to select one of the available pages in the selected bank Pad Press one of these buttons in the display to select a Pad Unless the DISPLAY HOLD LED is turned on the window automati cally closes short after you select a Pad STS Select Use the four SINGLE TOUCH SETTING button on the control panel to select one of the four STS associated with the current Style or the selected SongBook entry Press the STS name tab in the main page of the Style Play or Song Play mode or the Lyrics STS tab in the SongBook mode to see the name of the available STSs InStyle Play and Song Play mode Steel Guitar STS 2 Distortion Organ STS 4 Electric Piano Electric Guitar Song Select window This page appears when you press one of the Song areas in the display or one of the SELECT buttons in one of the SEQUENCER sections on the control panel Press EXIT to exit from this page and go back to the main page of the Song Play operating mode without selecting a Song Song path Directory Page menu icon SEUUENCEI 1 Song Selection Type Hame Size E BACKUP MIDIFILE 11 85 86 18 18 84 86 06 11 14 Canyon 11K 83 88 86 11 21 MySun 3 3K H3 B8 B6 11 21 NightDay 6 2K 83 08 06 11 21 Storage device While in this page select a Standard MIDI File or Karaoke file for the selected Sequencer A Jukebox file may only be assigned to Sequencer 1 Note There is a separate working directory
111. User scale the keyboard diagram on the right becomes active see How to fine tune each note of the User scale below Key PERF gt STS il This parameter is needed by some scales to set the preferred key see Scales on page 289 Quarter Tone ia Check the Quarter Tone parameter to make the keyboard dia gram active In the display touch any note you want to lower a quarter tone making a big dot appear on the note diagram Touch the note again to make the dot disappear a bL This control is momentary and not saved to memory to allow for fast scale alteration while playing You can assign the Quarter Tone function also to a footswitch an EC5 switch or an Assign able Switch See below How to use the Quarter Tone function with a foot switch EC5 switch or Assignable Switch for information on the use of this function Keyboard diagram PERF STS When Quarter Tone is checked or a User scale is selected this diagram allows you to modify each notes pitch Scale lock icon gt GBL When locked Scale parameters remain unchanged when select ing a different Performance or STS This lock is reset when turning the instrument off unless you write Global settings to memory see Write Global Global Setup dialog box on page 210 For more information on parameter locks see General Con trols Lock on page 199 How to fine tune each note of the User scale When the User scale is selected th
112. Velocity page Keyboard Ensemble section Selects the Ensemble Type parameter in the Ensemble page Keyboard Ensemble section Tempo Lock Display Hold SongBook Memory Var or Fill Chord Scanning either Keyboard Mode either Ensemble Shortcuts 297 Shift Pad any Selects the Pad page Pad Assignable Switches section Assignable Switch Selects the Switch page Pad Assignable any Switches section Upper Octave Selects the Tuning page Mixer Tuning sec tion either Style Opens the Write Current Style Performance window Sound Perfor mance ST Opens the Write STS window S Song Play mode Song Play Selects the General Control page Preferences section Play Stop Seq 1 Sync Start of either sequencers or 2 Upper Octave Selects the Tuning page Mixer Tuning sec either tion Keyboard Mode Selects the Key Velocity page Keyboard either Ensemble section Selects the Pad page Pad Assignable Switches section Assignable Switch Selects the Switch page Pad Assignable any Switches section Pad any Style Opens the Write Current Style Performance window Opens the Write Performance window Sound Perfor mance STS Opens the Write STS window gt lt Sequencer Selects the Sequencer Setup page Prefer ences section Selects the Tuning page Mixer Tuning sec tion Another available shortcut is the following one not requiri
113. Voice Processor possible harmony modes Not only will you develop an intuitive sonic sense of what works best where but by investigating different permutations and combina tions you could discover some delightful sounds you might oth erwise have missed Voice Processor Harmony and Tuning with the Voice Processor 221 o v c Q i o tim Q cc 222 Media edit mode Storage devices and internal memory The Media edit mode is the place where you can manage files This edit environment overlaps the current operating mode Style Play Song Play Sequencer Sound Edit Storage devices and internal memory User accessible storage devices During a Media operation files are usually exchanged between a storage device and the internal memory You can access the fol lowing mass storage device types Abbreviation Media type SSD U ser User reserved area of the internal SSD Flash ROM memory Similar to a hard disk SSD S ystem Factory area of the internal SSD Flash ROM mem ory Only accessible when updating the Operat ing System and Musical Resources or exchanging Factory Sound Styles and Pads Internal Hard Disk optional with the HDIK 1 kit USB F ront USB memory device like a pen drive connected to the front USB Host port USB R ear USB memory device like a pen drive connected to the rear USB Host port A device can be selected by using the Device pop up menu shown in the lower left corner
114. When linking a TXT file to a Song you scroll the text by using the Text Down and Text Up assignable commands Unlike the reading of Lyrics events contained in a Standard MIDI File there is no automatic scrolling that makes the current verse start on top of the internal and the external display at the same time Therefore text shown in the internal display and in the external video might begin with a different verse This parameter lets you choose the internal or the external display as the one that must be perfectly lined Internal Video When pressing the control corresponding to the Text Down command the first line of the current page of text is shown on top of the internal video The external video might not be perfectly lined Choose this option if you are reading verses from the internal display External Video When pressing the control corresponding to the Text Down command the first line of the current page of text is shown on top of the external video The internal video might not be perfectly lined Choose this option is your audience is reading verses from an external video Note When this option is selected the text scrollbar disappears from the internal display Text files loaded with Standard MIDI Files When a TXT file exists in the same directory as a Standard MIDI File and shares exactly the same name it will be loaded with the MID file and can be seen in the Lyrics page As an examp
115. a Pad is a matter of recording a single track inside a series of Chord Variations inside the Pad itself You don t need to record all Chord Variations It is often only needed to record just a Chord Variation Pattern data vs track data While the Pad Record mode is where you can create or edit music patterns for the Pad track parameters like Volume Pan FX settings have to be edited in Style Play mode After creating or editing music patterns in Pad Record mode save them by selecting the Write Pad command from the page menu of the Pad Record mode see Write Pad dialog box on page 141 After editing Pad Track parameters in Style Play mode save them to the Performance or Style Performance by selecting the Write Performance or Write Current Style Performance command from the page menu of the Style Play mode see Write Performance dialog box on page 104 or Write Style Performance dialog box on page 105 Entering the Pad Record mode To enter Pad Record mode go to the Style Play mode and press RECORD The Style Pad Record Select window appears STYLEZPAD RECORD Select Record Edit Pad to select an existing Pad to edit If it is a Factory Pad you may not be able to save it at the origi nal location depending on the status of the Factory Style and Pad Protect parameter in the gt Disk gt Preferences page you will select a User Pad location instead e Select Record New Pad to start
116. a Voice Processor Preset A Preset is the programming of all Voice Processor s harmony and effect parameters A Preset is always saved in a Performance or STS It is therefore recalled when selecting a Performance or STS If you wish to save your Preset settings just select the Write Global Voice Processor Preset command from the page menu see page 210 The saved Preset will appear in the list of avail able Presets Harmony On Off These are switches for the voices generated by the Harmony section V1 V3 gt GBL r These checkboxes allow turning each of the three Harmony Voices On or Off independent of the Level knob in the Har mony Voice page see Level knob on page 216 This is the same as the Voice On Off checkbox see page 216 Master On Off These are switches for the various Voice Processor sections Lead GBLY This checkbox allows turning the lead voice On or Off indepen dent of the Lead Level knob in the Voice Processor Setup section see Level knob on page 213 This is useful in creating presets where you want to hear harmony voices only Note This parameter is only available when the Harmony section is turned on If it is turned off the Lead parameter is automatically set to On gt GBL P This checkbox allows the enabling disabling of the Harmony module Harmony Effects gt GBL P This checkbox allows the enabling disabling of the Voice Proces
117. and press OK to confirm Note When saved the text file will be named after the selected Jukebox file For example a Jukebox file named Dummy jbx will generate a Dummy txt file A new unnamed Jukebox file will generate a New_name txt file If a file with the same name already exists on the target device 1t will be overwritten without waiting for any confirmation The list will include the progressive number assigned to each Song the file names the total number of files in the list For the correct display and printing of the list on a personal com puter use a fixed size 1 e non proportional character in your text editor Seq 1 Groove Quantize Enable Enables disables the groove quantize see Groove Quantize on page 157 It is automatically unchecked each time the instru ment is turned on or when selecting a different Song Note Groove Quantize only works on Sequencer 1 Solo Track Select the track of the current Sequencer to be soloed and check this item You will hear only the selected track and the Solo warning will flash on the page header Uncheck this item to exit the Solo function The Solo functions works in a slightly different way depending on the selected track Keyboard track The selected Keyboard track is the only track you can hear when playing on the keyboard All other Keyboard tracks are muted Sequencer tracks are left in play status Song track The selected
118. be saved to a Performance Effect A B Style and Pad tracks can be saved to a Style Performance Effects C D Keyboard tracks can be saved to an STS FX Amount PERF gt PERF sTS Volume of the effect that is added to the dry uneffected signal Bto A DtoC gt PERF PERF sTS Amount of the B effect going back to the input of the A effect or of the D effect going back to the input of the C effect Mod Track Modulating Track PERF PERF STS Source track for modulating MIDI messages You can modulate an effect parameter with a MIDI message generated by an inter nal physical controller o Jg c Q i o tia Q cc 94 Style Play operating mode Effects FX A D Effects FX A D These pages contain the editing parameters for the four effect processors Here is an example of the FX A page with the Reverb Smooth Hall effect assigned Selected effect FX param eters select J Selected effect PERF gt PERF STS STSS Select one of the available effects from this pop up menu This is equivalent to the FX A D parameters found in the Effects FX Select page see above Note Effects can be different for each of the four editing pages FX parameters PERF gt PERF STS STS 2 Parameters may be different depending on the selected effect See the Advanced Edit addendum in the Accessory CD for a list of available parameters for each effect ty
119. box on page 128 Chords and second voices in Step Record mode You are not obliged to insert single notes in a track There are several ways to insert chords and double voices Lets look at some Entering a chord Simply play a chord instead of a single note The event name will be the first note of the chord you pressed followed by the abbreviation Entering a chord made of notes with different velocity values You can make the upper or lower note of a chord for example louder than the remaining ones to let the most important stand out from the chord Here is how to insert a three note chord 1 Edit the first notes Velocity value 2 Press the first note and keep it pressed 3 Edit the second notes Velocity value 4 Press the second note and keep it pressed 5 Editthe third note s Velocity value 6 Press the third note then release all notes Entering a second voice You can insert passages where one note is kept pressed while another voice moves freely Ex I Step Time J On Off Press E and C Release E continue holding C Step Time i On Off Press G Release G and C Ex 2 Step Time E C Ex 3 Step Time Press F 8 C continue holding C Step Time Si 50 e G continue holding C E Step Time HE Off Press G Dud holding C Release G and C Step Time A Wn NO AE SSC F Step Time J ras D continue holding C Step Tim
120. by Date Select this display option to see the list of files and folders ordered by date The Date label above the file list is shown in red EE EN ate 13k 6 05 03 19 This command is the same as directly touching the Date label above the file list Ascending Descending Use this command to switch between the ascending Numbers A Z and descending Z A Numbers order This is the same as directly touching the red label above the file list Write Global Media Preference Select this command to open the Write Global Media Prefer ences dialog box and save settings made in the Preferences page see Preferences on page 235 Write Global Media Preferences Parameters saved in the Media Preferences area of the Global are marked with the gt GBL symbol through the user s manual Care of mass storage devices The Pa800 can save most of the data contained in memory on the internal hard disk 1f fitted or to external devices like pen drives connected to one of the USB Host ports Here are some precautions when handling these devices Hard disk write protection You can protect your hard disk from writing by using the soft ware protection found in Media mode see Hard Disk Protect on page 235 SSD U write protection You can protect the SSD U memory from writing by using the software protection found in Media mode see SSD User Pro tect on page 235 Precautions Do not rem
121. by choosing the Copy Sounds item from the page menu Here you can copy all Sounds assigned to the cur rent Style Element tracks to a different Style Element Copy Sounds From Style Element Non editable Currently selected Style Element To Style Element Target Style Element All Settings will be copied to all Style Element of the Style in edit Varl CountIn Single Style Element where to copy settings to Copy Expression dialog box Open this window by choosing the Copy Expression item from the page menu Here you can copy all Expression values assigned to the current Style Element tracks to a different Style Element Copy Expression From Style Element Non editable Currently selected Style Element To Style Element Target Style Element All Settings will be copied to all Style Element of the Style in edit Varl CountIn Single Style Element where to copy settings to Copy Key Range dialog box Open this window by choosing the Copy Keyboard Range item from the page menu Here you can copy all Keyboard Range val ues for the current Style Element tracks to a different Style Ele ment Copy Key Range From Style Element Non editable Currently selected Style Element To Style Element Target Style Element All Settings will be copied to all Style Element of the Style in edit Varl CountIn Single Style Element where to copy settings to Style Record mode 129 Copy Expressio
122. change the effects then start the Song again Save the Song to per manently change the effects FX A D SONG Effects assigned to the corresponding effect processors Usually A and C are reverbs while B and D are modulating effects cho rus flanger delay For a list of the available effects see the Advanced Edit addendum in the Accessory CD FX Amount gt SONG Volume of the effect that is added to the dry uneffected signal B to A D to C gt SONG Amount of the B effect going back to the input of the A effect or of the D effect going back to the input of the C effect SONG Source track for modulating MIDI messages You can modulate an effect parameter with a MIDI message generated by a physical controller Mod Track Modulating Track Q v c o i o Ser Q cc 1 86 Sequencer operating mode Effects FX A D Effects FX A D These pages contain the editing parameters for the four effect processors Here is an example of the FX A page with the Reverb Smooth Hall effect assigned SEQUENCER Effects I i Reverb SmoothHall FR Select Selected effect SONG Select one of the available effects from this pop up menu This is equivalent to the FX A D parameters found in the Effects FX Select page see above gt SONG Parameters may differ depending on the selected effect See the Advanced Edit addendum in the Accessory CD for a list of avallable
123. clockwise to decrease the value or tempo SHIFT When used while pressing the SHIFT but 8 ton this control always acts as a Tempo control MENU When used while pressing the MENU button this control always acts as a Display Con trast control DOWN and UP DOWN decreases the value or tempo UP increases the value or tempo Press both buttons together to reset the Tempo to the value memorized in the selected Style ES EXIT Use this button to perform various actions leaving from the cur rent status exit the edit menu page without selecting any item make the page menu disappear without selecting any item return to the main page of the current operating mode e exit the Global or Media edit environment and return to the current page of the current operating mode exit from a Style Performance or Sound Select window MENU This button opens the edit menu page for the current operating mode or edit mode After opening an edit menu you can jump to one of the edit sections by touching the corresponding button in the display Otherwise press EXIT to return to the main page of the current operating mode or the current page of the underlying operating mode See the relevant chapter devoted to each operating mode or edit environment to see their maps in detail EY TEMPO LOCK This button turns the Tempo Lock and Link Mode functions on or off On When you select a different Style or
124. common format and 1 multitrack It can read the SMF in Song Play mode and mod ify save them in Sequencer mode It can save a song in SMF 0 format in the Sequencer mode When in Song Play mode the Pa800 can also display SMF lyrics in Solton M Live Midisoft Tune1000 Edirol GMX HitBit and XF formats and the chord abbreviations of SMF in Solton M live Midisoft GMX and XF format Note The above trademarks are the property of their respective holders No endorsement 1s intended by inclusion in this list Standard MIDI Files usually have the MID or KAR filename extension The General MIDI standard Some years ago the musical instruments world felt a need for some further standardization Then the General MIDI Standard GM was born This extension of the basic MIDI sets new rules for compatibility between instruments A minimum of 16 MIDI channels was required A basic set of 128 Sounds correctly ordered was manda tory The Drum Kit had a standard order Channel 10 had to be devoted to the Drum Kit A most recent extension is the GM2 that further expands the Sounds database The Pa800 is soundwise compatible with the GM2 standard The Global channel Any channels with the Global option assigned see MIDI MIDI In Channels on page 204 can simulate the Pa800 integrated keyboard When the Pa800 is connected to a master keyboard transmission should take place over the Global channel of the
125. current beat inside the current mea sure Measure number Current measure you are recording Recording parameters area Rec mode Recording mode Set this parameter before starting record to select a recording mode Sequencer operating mode 173 Record mode Multitrack Sequencer page Overdub The newly recorded events will be mixed to any existing events Overwrite The newly recorded events will replace any exist ing events Auto Punch Recording will automatically begin at the Start position and stop at the End position Note The Auto Punch function will not work on an empty Song At least one track must already be recorded PedalPunch Recording will begin when pressing a pedal set to the Punch In Out function and will finish when pressing the same pedal again Note The Pedal Punch function will not work on an empty Song At least one track must already be recorded Locate measure When checked the measure shown by this parameter is a tem porary start point of the song instead of measure 1 When you press the KI PLAY STOP button to stop recording or use the lt lt REWIND button to go back to the beginning the Song returns to this point Resolution Use this parameter to set the quantization during recording Quantization is a way of correcting timing errors notes played too soon or too late are moved to the nearest axis of a rhythmic grid set with this parame
126. each Performance or STS When selecting a different Per formance or STS the Voice Processor Preset may change depending on the Mic panel lock sta tus changing the type of processing applied to your voice Mic panel lock oye Mid Hi q h m Use this pop up menu Sub Val to select a Voice Pro cessor Preset Scale L If you like start the Style Be sure the HARMONY LED is turned on on the control panel Play some chords to let the Voice Processor create new voices with them Sing along with the chords and melody you play on the keyboard If it is playing stop the Style O Note By default Pre set 1 is a solo voice Pre set 2 contains a three voice harmony Li Note By default the first Performance and STS have the harmony effect turned off to avoid any unwanted processing from being applied to the micro phone When you select a Preset you like you can save it to a Performance or STS see Saving your settings to a Perfor mance on page 39 Singing with a connected microphone Soloing your voice TalkBack Soloing your voice TalkBack Sometimes during a live show you might like to talk to your audience Use the TalkBack function to attenuate the music and let your voice pass through clean and clear 1 While in the main page of the Style Play or Song Play mode press the Mic tab to see Voice Processor s settings 2 During playback press the Talk button making i
127. each track may use the A B or C D pair e A Standard MIDI File or Karaoke file will only use 2 effects usually 1 reverb 1 modulating effect This lets you use the remaining 2 effects for the Realtime tracks e When using both sequencers at the same time and the Seq 2 FX Mode is set to AB mode see page 159 they only use the A B pair while the C D pair is reserved to the Keyboard tracks e When using both sequencers at the same time and the Seq 2 FX Mode is set to CD mode see page 159 Sequencer 1 uses the A B pair while Sequencer 2 uses the C D pair sharing it with Keyboard tracks Effects FX A D These pages contain the editing parameters for the four effect processors Here is an example of the FX A page with the Reverb Smooth Hall effect assigned Selected effect SONG PLAY SEQ1 Effects everb SmootnHall FX param eters Fn El pepe 0 Song Play operating mode 155 Effects FX A D Selected effect gt PERF STS gt GBLS 9 Select one of the available effects from this pop up menu This is the same as the FX A D parameters found in the Effects FX Select page see above FX parameters PERF STS GPL Parameters may differ depending on the selected effect See the Advanced Edit addendum in the Accessory CD for a list of available parameters for each effect type FX Amount PERF STS KGR Volume of the effect that is added to the dry
128. ec After Touch After Touch events Note This kind of data 1s automatically removed during recording Pitch Bend Pitch Bend events Prog Change Program Change events excluding the bundled Control Change 00 Bank Select MSB and 32 Bank Select LSB Note This kind of data 1s automatically removed during recording Ctl Change All Control Change events for example Bank Select Modulation Damper Soft Pedal CC00 32 CC127 Single Control Change events Double Control Change numbers like 00 32 are MSB LSB bun dles 122 Style Record mode Style Edit Delete All Note Some CC data are automatically removed during recording See the table on page 108 for more information on the allowed data Start End Tick Use these parameters to set the starting and ending points of the range to delete If a Chord Variation is four measures long and you want to select it all the Start will be positioned at 1 01 000 and the End at 5 01 000 Bottom Top Note Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard range to delete If you select the same note as the Bottom and Top parameters you can select a single percussive instrument in a Drum or Percussion track Note These parameters are available only when the All or Note option is selected Execute Press this button to execute the operation set in this page Track status icon Status of tracks Press this icon to change the status
129. ences Select button Press this button to open the Pad Select window and select a tar get location Q V c Q i o Ser Q cc 142 Song Play operating mode Transport controls Song Play operating mode The Song Play operating mode is where you can listen to Songs Since the Pa800 is equipped with two onboard sequencers you can play two Songs at the same time This is very useful to mix between two Songs during a live performance Songs can be in Standard MIDI File or Karaoke You can play along with the Song with up to four Keyboard tracks Upper 1 3 Lower You can select different Sounds and Effects for Keyboard tracks by selecting Performances and STSs A different Voice Processor Preset may be selected by a Perfor mance or STS While in Song Play you can use the SongBook to automatically select Songs for a desired music genre With each Song entry in the SongBook up to four STSs are associated Song Play mode can also be used in Easy Mode see page 6 Transport controls You can use the separate transport controls for each of the two onboard sequencers Use the SEQUENCER 1 controls for Sequencer 1 and SEQUENCER 2 controls for Sequencer 2 See SEQUENCER 1 TRANSPORT CONTROLS on page 14 for more information MIDI Clock In Song Play mode the MIDI Clock is always generated by the internal sequencer even if the Clock parameter is set to MIDI or USB see Clock Source on page 2
130. es ro 5 raro woa wr 9 9 smiwesiw ews CO E 3 8 pemmeeBer woodwind wr 1 9 smwess es D In Iessen TI Lm 3 75 Rees eeng Ca s 9 wmmd IS D i 5 fee woodwind wr 9 samme enr D In EEC woodwind _ Ca s 9 smmess pes Gm fe 5 eene Is xm 9 Soprenosaxem er rr 5 Wooden ute woodwind 1 xm 1 Sweetsopranos Ee rra B rambo Jess wr r p soprano rro eil tet 8 8 Ines wr 3 s sweesemwer be LIOS T8 Pre 9 5 Mess fie DELI Per 1 5 atoarea m A RC SS SS SS ES 7 7 7 7 7 67 67 67 0 1 1 1 1 1 71 71 1 71 71 S E ES EM E late Garinet Weed 1 E ENE 3 NN EN Se A mE E EN SS SS NN m NM Tan Weieng Y Sek ein SS i NM NM Se E wr 5 sememie bel i Par RESCH liegen fie as sme fix se enos fix wr 7 5 nnes m YS tet 0 28 white woodwind 7 wr s 5 legen el tet e TC 1 wr s 5 EEE fie O PO tet e EEC woodwind wie 5 Mesmm fee O e 28 whiten fwo IZ IC eose m Gm 4 28 wesesa woodwind Pret 9 s EI fee Gm 9 79 Ocarina cn exei PC leegent m o GE 0 om ETC gz 3 wr 5 sme CCOO o tet tm reise ETC xr s s were ei D o eese gi IT wr s 5 mers m D m fold roramento ez TI wr s 5 fk ee o GIG p m eea ez xr s s mero m YS tet o9 weeed ez Par 7 5 werten e
131. example play C3 B2 Bb2 for a C min 7 Expert This mode is an extension of the Fingered 2 add ing rootless and slashed chord recognition often used in Jazz fusion modern pop and light music This type of chord recognition is very useful to play piano chords typical of jazz piano players You don t need to play the root note doubling the note already played by the bass track Style Play operating mode 101 Preferences Style Preferences PERF gt STS ini Set this parameter to trigger one of the following functions sim ply by playing louder with your left hand When playing with a velocity value higher than the value set by the Velocity Control Value parameter see page 102 the selected function will be activated Velocity Control This function only works in SPLIT Keyboard Mode with the LOWER or no Chord Scanning mode selected t does not work in FULL Chord Scanning mode or in SPLIT Keyboard Mode with the UPPER Chord Scanning mode selected Off The function is turned off Break Fill In 1 Fill In 2 When playing with a velocity higher than the trigger value on the Lower track the selected ele ment is automatically triggered Start Stop You can start or stop the Style by playing harder on the keyboard Dass Inversion When playing with a velocity higher than the trigger value the Bass Inversion function will be activated or deactivated Memory When playing with a velocity higher than
132. in the SEQUENCER 1 section to listen to the recorded Song Again the Backing Sequence Song has been converted to an ordinary Song Saving a Song to disk After recording a Song that you like it is a good idea to save it to disk to avoid losing it when the instrument is turned off 1 While in the main page of the Sequencer mode press the page menu icon to open the page menu 76 Recording a new Song Saving a Song to disk 2 Select the Save song command to open the Save Song window SEQUENCER 1 Save Song Type Hame BACKUP 94 45 66 11 14 MIDIFILE 11 45 66 18 18 Canon 11K 83 88 86 11 21 MySum 3 3K 83 66 86 11 21 MightDay 6 2K 03 88 06 11 21 After you select the Save song command the Save Song page appears 3 Select a device and folder where you want to save your Song SEQUENCER 1 Save Song Type Hame Use the scroll bar to see all Songs in the list Keep SHIFT pressed and touch the Up Down arrow to scroll to the next previous alphabetic sec tion As an alternative you can use the DIAL If a Song is selected high lighted it will be overwritten If MIDIFILE no Song is selected a new Song file will be created on the target device To deselect a selected Song press anywhere else in the Song EE EE Press the Save button to save the Song device again Opn Sun to the current folder V In case you prefer to exit this page without saving the Song press the EXIT button NightDay 6
133. like to be automatically selected when turning the instrument on Global edit mode Write Global Talk Configuration dialog box 211 Write Global Voice Processor Preset dialog box Only available when the Talk function is NOT activated Open this window by selecting the Write Global Voice Processor Preset item from the page menu Here you can save current settings for the Voice Processor Preset edit section see starting from page 214 Write Voice Preset I D AZ Concert Hall Rvb Parameters saved in the Voice Processor Preset area of the Global are marked with the GBL symbol through the user s manual Name Name of the VP Preset to be saved Press the T Text Edit button next to the name to open the Text Edit window and mod ify the name Voice Preset One of the 128 available Voice Preset locations where to save current VP Preset settings o v c o i Q ia Q cc 212 Voice Processor Accessing the Voice Processor edit pages Voice Processor The Voice Processor applies effects and three part harmony to your voice Some dedicated controllers on the control panel allows you to quickly access the most often used functions MIC On Off button MIC volume slider e MIC FX slider HARMONY on off button EFFECT on off button In addition you can edit the Voice Processor Setups general set tings for the singer s voice and Presets programming of various effects and ha
134. mode can also be used in Easy Mode see page 6 Start up settings Since Performance 1 of Bank 1 Performance 1 1 is automati cally selected when turning the instrument on you can save to it your preferred start up settings Select the Sounds Effects Voice Processor Preset and other set tings you would like to see automatically selected when turning the instrument on Then select the Write Performance com mand from the page menu When the Write Performance win dow appears save the settings to Performance 1 of Bank 1 See Write Performance dialog box on page 104 Note If you like some settings to be preserved even when choosing different Performances STSs and Styles turn on the desired locks to avoid changes to the selected parameters see General Controls Lock on page 199 Save these locks to the Global see Write Glo bal Global Setup dialog box on page 210 How Styles Performances and STSs are linked together Styles Performances and STSs are linked in many ways When the SINGLE TOUCH LED is steadily on or blinking selecting a Style also changes Keyboard tracks STS 1 is automat ically selected Performance settings are overridden When the STYLE CHANGE LED is on selecting a Performance also selects a Style the one whose number is memorized with the Performance Current track settings can be saved either in a Performance an STS or a Style Performance dependin
135. modulating effect for each of the four Pad tracks Pad lock icon gt GBL This lock avoids selecting a different Performance or STS changes also the Hit or Sequence Pads assigned to the Pads This lock is reset when turning the instrument off unless you write Global settings to memory see Write Global Global Setup dialog box on page 210 For more information on parameter locks see General Con trols Lock on page 199 Pad Switch Assignable Switch This page lets you select a different function for each of the two ASSIGNABLE SWITCH buttons located near the joystick STYLE PLAY Pad Assign Switch a P Switch Z H orr Switch 1 2 PERF gt STS ini Each of the ASSIGNABLE SWITCH buttons Use these pop up menus to assign a function to each switch See List of Assign able Switch functions on page 288 Assignable Switch lock icon gt GBL amp This lock avoids selecting a different Performance or STS changes also the functions assigned to the switches This lock is reset when turning the instrument off unless you write Global settings to memory see Write Global Global Setup dialog box on page 210 For more information on parameter locks see General Con trols Lock on page 199 Preferences Style Preferences In this page you can set various general parameters for the Style play mode Settings can be saved to a Performance or STS EEE L L Setup Ch
136. o clu dE aj D D 3 h vI Ride Jazz Ride Brush1 Ride Brush2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 361 70 E 88 Claves 88 Cowbell 7 xs ascom T 39 39 4 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 5 6 7 bam 03 4 MEE E L2 Jom ES E EUN Eca Syn Perc Ahh MES pel ws Emp e mom NC T wem CIN IONES 5 95 Vmisked f 8 aia DVmiskeds f 8 95 vinse 9 ms DVmiskeds 8 DJ Vinyl Sliced 06 MEA IAE 8 DJ Vinyl Sliced 08 420 DJ Vinyl Sliced 09 421 DJ Vinyl Sliced 10 422 DJ Vinyl Sliced 11 423 DJ Vinyl Sliced 12 424 DJ Vinyl Sliced 13 425 DJ Vinyl Sliced 14 426 DJ Vinyl Sliced 15 427 DJ Vinyl Sliced 16 428 DJ Vinyl Sliced 17 429 DJ Vinyl Sliced 18 430 DJ Vinyl Sliced 19 431 DJ Vinyl Sliced 20 432 DJ Vinyl Sliced 21 433 DJ Vinyl Sliced 22 434 DJ Vinyl Sliced 23 435 DJ Vinyl Sliced 24 436 DJ Scratch 01 437 DJ Scratch 02 438 DJ Scratch 03 439 DJ Scratch 04 DJ Scratch 05 DJ Scratch 06 442 DJ Hit Rub 443 DJ Vocal Rub1 DJ Vocal Rub2 DJ BD Rub DJ SD Rub Guiro Long Guiro Short 445 447 448 450 451 Cuica Hi 452 Cuica Lo 453 Tumba Open1 mf 454 Tumba Open1 f 455 Tumba Open2 mf 456 Tumba Open2 f 457 Tumba Open Flam 458 Tumba Glissando 459 Tumba Basstone Tumba O Slap Flam mf 462 463 Congal Lo Basstone Conga1 Lo Open mf 465 Conga1 Lo
137. of important operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the literature accompa nying the product THE FCC REGULATION WARNING for U S A This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the user s authority to operate this equipment CE mark for European Harmonized Standards CE mark which is attached to our company s products of AC mains operated apparatu
138. older i Series instru ments You can load them as if they were ordinary Pa800 data 1 Copy the old i Series data into an USB device or transfer them to the internal SSD U area or hard disk of the Pa800 2 Press MEDIA to go to the Media mode Select the Load page if needed 3 While in the Load page select the device containing the i Series data from the Device pop up menu 4 If you are reading an 130 file select the SET folder and press the Open button in the display 5 Select the STY folder 6 At this point you can load the whole STY folder or open it and select a single Style To load the whole folder press the Load button in the dis play If 1t contains more than 16 Styles they will be loaded into the USER banks sequentially otherwise you will be prompted to select one of the three USER Style banks or the ten FAVORITE Style banks in memory Once the target bank is selected press Load to load the bank The Are you sure message will appear Press OK to confirm or Cancel to abort To load a single Style press Open in the display to open the STY folder Since a conversion will be started at this point please wait some seconds for the operation to be completed Select the Style to load then press Load You will be prompted to select a target location in memory Once the target location is selected press Load to load the Style The Are you sure message will appear Press OK
139. open Sw Triangle mute 95 ems r er meter 95 Wem 7 9o Vane 17 9m jvacmes LJ e ee 7 9s Jeninese ong 5 ea fomen 95 denos Jr 9 dera 6 sar Jue 5 sas faves o 95 Wedmekis 5 650 besen Jr 651 woodsiokze Jr e besen JL Wood Block 3 a I9 Sw woods 6 5 woode JL 656 woods JL e woodsiockse f 5 KERGER 5 WoodBiocksa 17 mm woessie lr s earen JL KREE 99 costanera EC ea costanerrb 6 665 easonette 95 lee Lt N Sample Leen AE NI EEN e 99 mmm 1 ew mmm 7 em eben NN ere Jose do emu feasa rcon ew obser e obse atom 17 we fearsa em obse boom r Cabasa 2 L Roll 682 Cabasa 2 S Stack a Cabasa 2 S Stack b NI NI NI NI NI NIN 678 679 680 Cabasa 2 S Roll 704 Shaker1 Slow b 705 Shaker1 Slow c Shaker slowe pp NC Ts Jbmbka Ir Tm bmbkh Jr m mbi ECT mrpmkj CI m5 mk Jr Tm jDemwlmsson 5 T5 BjembeLBastoneb 5 Tu Djembe LBasstonec 5 Tm jbemwlomn Jr T Djembe opene 5 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 692 693 695 697 698 700 701 702 703 706 707 708 709 14 reme o em RRE 759 Djembe SBassionea Djembe S Basstone b 38 732 Djembe season 6 DimeOpn f e open iembesiap fe Diembesopen f e iembes Open sepa 6 Djembe SOpensipb 6 jembes closed tapa 6 Diembes losedsiapb 6 Di
140. pages For detailed information on the vari ous types of parameters see sections starting from page 89 Tabs Use tabs to select one of the edit pages of the current edit section Mixer Tuning Volume Pan This page lets you set the volume and pan for each of the Key board or Style tracks Volume settings are the same as in the Vol ume panel of the main page Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from the Keyboard to the Style tracks and vice versa STYLE PLAY Mixer Tuning Es Trk Upper 1 Grand Piano E Piana 121 083 088 MIC IH_ LOWER UPPERS UPPER UPPERI wm 4 mmm p EG LII nas LiJE S m Keyboard tracks Grouped Style tracks STYLE PLAY Mixer Tuning Em Trk Upper 1 Grand Piano E Piana 121 883 888 Individual Style tracks Upper Volume Link gt GBLSY This parameter allows you to define if changing the volume for one of the Upper tracks proportionally changes also the other Upper tracks Note This parameter is the same you can find in the Preferences Global Setup page see page 102 On When changing volume to one of the Upper tracks volume for the other Upper tracks changes in proportion Off When changing volume to one of the Upper tracks only that track s volume is changed Other Upper tracks are left unchanged Pan PERF PERF9 STS Track position in the stereo field L 64 L 1 Left stereo channel o Y c o i o Mim Q cc 90 Style Play op
141. parameter is ignored and the Global is overwritten by the loaded data Note This parameter is saved to memory but not to a target device Hard Disk Protect gt GBLMed When on this parameter protects the hard disk from writing Note This parameter is saved to memory but not to a target device SSD User Protect gt GBLMed When on this parameter protects the User area on the SSD from writing Note This parameter is saved to memory but not to a target device Factory Style and Pad Protect When On this parameter protects the Factory Styles from the 8 16 BEAT to the CONTEMP bank and Factory Pads named Hit and Sequence in the Pad Select window from being overwritten when loading data from a device Further more you can t access these banks when saving data When Off you can load or save User Styles or Pads even into the Factory Style banks from 8 16 BEAT to CONTEMP and Factory Pad banks named Hit and Sequence in the Pad Select window This way you customize personalize your Fac tory Style and Pad banks Please note that the Save All procedure always saves only the USER and FAVORITE Style banks Note This parameter is automatically set to On when turning the instrument off Note Should your accidentally delete some Factory Data reload the Backup data find the original Musical Resources in the sup plied CD or download the data from www korgpa com o
142. parameters for each effect type Parameters Track Controls Mode Parameter SONG See Track Controls Mode on page 94 Track Controls Drum Volume Parameter SONG See Track Controls Drum Volume on page 186 Track Controls Easy Edit Parameter See Track Controls Easy Edit on page 96 Event Edit Event Edit The Event Edit is the page where you can edit each single MIDI event of the selected track You can for example replace a note with a different one or change its playing strength See also Event Edit procedure on page 187 for more information on the event editing procedure SEQUENCER Event Edit asition pe Usluel Value Length H 061 61 006 Note H ena aa M 06l g2 poa Note H ana aa H Don ga Scroll bar M 06l 03 660 Note M DI gd 660 Hote H BA aa Track 1 orcaton Insert Petete Position Position of the event expressed in the form aaa bb ccc aaa is the measure bb is the beat ccc is the tick each quarter beat 384 ticks You can edit this parameter to move the event to a different posi tion You can edit a position in either of the following ways a select the parameter and use the TEMPO VALUE controls to change the value or b select the parameter then touch it again the numeric key pad will appear Enter the new position by dialing in the three parts of the number separa
143. play Setup item from the page menu Here you can save various Style Pref erence settings see Preferences Global Setup on page 102 that are saved to the Global file Write Global Style Play Setup Parameters saved in the Style Play Setup area of the Global are marked with the GBL symbol through the user s manual Style Play operating mode 105 Write Style Performance dialog box The Favorite banks You can create a custom set of Styles made of up to ten Favorite banks You can assign a different name to these banks in order to add musical genres not included among the Factory Styles When both LEDs of the leftmost STYLE button are lit the FAVORITE banks are selected No loading is required Each bank can include up to 32 Styles browse them using the PAGE but tons The Favorite Styles are contained in ten folders automatically created by the Pa800 inside the FAVORITE folder in the SSD s root Even if different names can be shown in the display these folders have fixed names FAVORITE 02 09 STY Bank 2 9 FAVORITE10 STY Bank 10 Hint New Styles are released from time to time on our website www korgpa com Creating the Favorite banks There are two ways to create the Favorite banks While in Style Record mode you can write the new or edited Style in the Favorite banks as an alternative to the User Style banks See the Style Record chapter for more information on saving a Style e
144. play more than one note at the same time Mono Tracks of this kind are monophonic i e each new note stops the previous note Mono Right A Mono track but with priority assigned to the rightmost highest note Play Mute icon PERF PERF STS Track s play mute status Play status The track can be heard Mute status The track cannot be heard Style Play operating mode 95 Track Controls Drum Volume Track Controls Drum Volume In this page you can adjust the volume for each family of Drum and Percussion instrument for the selected track A list of fami lies is shown below These parameters can be accessed only on tracks set in Drum mode see above Use them on tracks with a Drum Kit assigned or you will not be able to hear any change Note All values are referred to the value of the original Sounds STYLE PLAY Track Controls pasas Trk Upper 1 Grand Piano E Piana 121 883 888 BED EAM Yolume Snare oni Hi Hat HA e z Ferc 2 EJEIHEI Reset Track Reset All Tracks STYLE PLAT Track Controls Trk Upper 1 Grand Piano E Piano 121 883 888 m Family TYolume P3 e e e Dat gt Cumbal Perc 1 Perc 2 Reset Track ar s Reset All Tracks GC Seen Select Select Select Select ESA Select Select Select Drum families gt PERF PERF STS Kick Kick drums volume o Snare Snare drums volume c Tom Toms volume E HiHat Hi Hat volume amp Cymbal Ride Cra
145. points of the range to be transposed If a Chord Variation is four measures long and you want to select it all the Start will be positioned at 1 01 000 and the End at 5 01 000 120 Style Record mode Style Edit Velocity Bottom Top Note Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard range to be transposed If you select the same note as the Bottom and Top parameters you can select a single percussive instru ment in a Drum or Percussion track Since in a Drum Kit each instrument is assigned to a different note of the scale transpos ing a percussive instrument means assigning the part to a differ ent instrument Execute Press this button to execute the operation set in this page Track status icon Status of tracks Press this icon to change the status Play status The track can be heard Mute status The track cannot be heard Track names Under the buttons a label for each track is shown Style Edit Velocity In this page you can change the velocity dynamics value of notes in the selected track An Advanced mode is available allowing you to select a velocity curve for the selected range This is useful to create fade ins or fade outs STYLE REC Edit ACCS ACCd Delete f Copy fm All Style Fad After setting the various parameters press Execute Note When an RX Sound is assigned to the track being edited the resulting sound may change since this kind of Soun
146. quarter beat 384 ticks You can edit this parameter to move the event to a different posi tion You can edit a position in either of the following ways a select the parameter and use the TEMPO VALUE controls to change the value or b select the parameter then touch it again the numeric key pad will appear Enter the new position by dialing in the three parts of the number separated by a dot Zeroes at the beginning can be omitted as well as the least important parts of the number For example to enter position 002 02 193 dial 2 2 193 to enter position 002 04 000 dial 2 4 to enter position 002 01 000 simply dial 2 Type Value 1 Value 2 Type and values of the event shown in the display Depending on the selected event the value may change This parameter also shows the greyed out so non editable CC 11 Expression event at the beginning of the pattern and the End Of Loop marking when the end of a track is reached Event type Note Ctrl Control Change number Control Change value Bend To change the event type select the Type parameter then use the TEMPO VALUE controls to select a different event type A set of default values will be automatically assigned to the event To select and edit the event s value select the corresponding parameter and use TEMPO VALUE controls Length Length of the selected Note event The value format is the same as the Position value T
147. remaining tracks 1f any use the basic scale set in Global mode see Main Scale on page 198 SEQUENCER Mixer Tuning Trk 51Tr 01 b Grand Piano B Piana 121 883 888 e El D Tai T 2 T83 SOT Tav Tog FA EG EG sina E A rns J Note Quarter Tone selection and activation of the Sub Scale on each track of a Song can be received by MIDI 1 e by an external sequencer or controller Conversely selection of Quarter Tone set tings or activation of the Sub Scale on each track of the Song can be sent by the Pa800 to an external MIDI recorder as System Exclu sive data Parameters SONG See Mixer Tuning Sub Scale on page 92 Track Assign SONG Check the parameter corresponding to each track where the Sub Scale must be used Play Mute icon SONG Track s play mute status Play status The track can be heard Mute status The track cannot be heard Sequencer operating mode Mixer Tuning Tuning 185 Effects FX Select This page allows you to select effects to be assigned to the four Internal FX processors A D SEQUENCER Effects Bd FX A 71 Reverb SmoothHall Fs Amount 20 Fa E H 26 Stereo Chorus Fa Amount 34 Mod Track Off F E H 71 Reverb SmoothHall Fx Amount 20 Fa O D zb Stereo Chorus Fa Amount 58 Mod Track Off Note When you stop the Song or select a different Song the default effects are selected again You can however stop the Song
148. see page 101 if you have selected UPPER or FULL the chord recognition mode will always be Fingered 2 you need to play at least three notes in order for the chord to be detected These two channels are especially useful for accordion players to assign a different Chord channel to the chords and the bass played with the left hand In this way chords and bass will par ticipate to the creation of chords for the chord recognition of the automatic accompaniment The Control channel You can set a MIDI IN channel as the Control channel see page 205 to select Styles and Performance from an external device See the Appendix for a list of messages corresponding to Pa800 internal data MIDI Setup You can play Pa800 with an external controller and use it simply as a powerful sound generator To help you configure the MIDI channels we have provided a set of MIDI Setups see Midi Setup on page 102 for the Style Play mode Midi Setup on page 158 for the Song Play mode and MIDI Setup on page 203 for the Global mode We recommend you to consider each MIDI Setup as a starting point you can freely tweak Once you have selected the most appropriate MIDI Setup for the connection to be made you can modify the parameters as necessary and save them in a MIDI Setup see Write Global Midi Setup dialog box on page 210 o i c Q i o Ser Q cc 242 MIDI Connecting Pa800 to a Master keyboard
149. slider UPPERS UPPER2 UPPERL Sub sce Pas lem Grouped Style Tracks Changing the volume of the grouped Style tracks Dr Perc Accomp Bass is a global offset When you choose a different Style this offset does not change and the average volume of the Style tracks remains the same Changes are not memorized to a Performance or Style Perfor mance They can be memorized to the Global Style Play Setup i e the preferences of the Style Play mode see Write Global Style Setup on page 103 The Style Tracks view shows the separate Style tracks 0 30 DRUM PERC BASS ACEI REC ACCS ACC ACCS Here you can change the volume of each individual Style track This mix is saved into each Style Performance and Performance and can change when choosing a different Style Grouped Style tracks gt GBL PP These special sliders control several Style tracks at the same time Virtual slider track volume PERF PERF sTS Virtual sliders are a graphical display of each tracks volume Touch the track s area to select a track and use TEMPO VALUE controls to change the value Hint You can change the volume of all Keyboard or Style tracks at once by using the Assignable Sliders Select a track of the same type of the tracks whose volume you want to change e g the Upper 1 track to modify all Keyboard tracks Then keep the SHIFT button pressed and move one of the Assignable Sliders See ASSIGNABLE SLIDER on page
150. tat 5 28 AccordionBass CC xm s 5 Percshor Decay oem D n 2 Aavoxechange eege _ xm 39 5 Wwowenv oem tet 8 S EI CCC 1 wr n te omni oen 3 3 S A sAwRes Accordion wr u 5 erea oem 2X 9 8 CTE Accordion x 9 5 ewehomensw oem tat 0 2 Wenewersw Jam wr j e eweonws oem tet ft IN Dee Jam Par 5 etaned church foroen Lx 3 5 meMwue Jorgen wr s 5 ewe omm Uma om weneeme outer ls 5 mie oen D nn amp eWerkaot outer wr s s mew oen D nn mge em wn 7 8 Postveorsen Jorgen sings outer wr s s perm oen ra M Wenermer outer wr s 5 perms oen 3 3 M TEC outer TI wwen jon 1 D n mens outer 262 Factory data Sounds Program Change order cco ccs2 Pc Name Jet E ccoo ccs2 pc mame pank Tee wo m woe eme O a me IE ee CCT a e fa wne r a a e E el wr s E wone ee O pa me a EEC o ar a m wonse outer 3m Om 27 enes outer wr 5 E wener fee O pa ae a am em wr 9 5 feeen feer y sm av a7 Ines eme wr 1 75 eee e D Om uted citer CTA IC wr 1 5 ever CU Y Ca s 5 Seer am wr s 5 seus ja O o4 om mee em a s 5 ewe Re HILOS om Sire chime em wr 7 5 ETC je at 8 om 9eeweess cuter wr s 5 mee outer a Om rms outer
151. the trigger value the Memory function will be acti vated or deactivated Scale Mode PERF STS il This parameter defines which tracks are affected by the selected alternative scale see Scale on page 92 Keyboard tracks The scale will only affect Keyboard tracks Uppertracks The scale will only affect Upper 1 3 Keyboard tracks All Tracks The scale will affect all tracks Keyboard Style Pads PERF STS i This parameter sets the way the MEMORY button works Chord When its LED is on the MEMORY button keeps the recognized chord in memory When its LED is off the chord is reset when raising the hand from the keyboard Memory Mode Chord Lower When its LED is on the MEMORY button keeps the recognized chord in memory and keeps the Lower track held until the next note or chord is played When its LED is off the chord is reset when raising the hand from the keyboard and the Lower track is not sustained Fixed Arr Lower When its LED is on the MEMORY button keeps the Lower track held until the next note or chord is played When off the Lower track is not sus tained when raising the hand from the keyboard The chord is always kept in memory o Jg c o i Q ja Q cc 102 Style Play operating mode Preferences Global Setup Lock icon GEILEN All parameters in this page may be protected from selecting a different Performance or STS This lock is reset when turning the inst
152. the STYLE SELECT section Note Any Style Change inserted after the beginning of the measure i e to a position other than Mxxx 01 000 will be effective at the following measure For example 1f a Style Change event has been inserted at M004 03 000 the selected Style will be effectively selected at M005 01 000 This works exactly as in Style Play mode Note When inserting a Style Change you may also insert a Tempo Change at the same position A Style Change will not automati cally insert the Style s Tempo Performance This is the latest selected Performance Select a Performance to recall the Style it links to To insert a Performance change at the current position touch the Performance name to open the Per formance Select window or follow the standard selecting proce dure using the PERFORMANCE SOUND SELECT section Note The STYLE CHANGE LED 1s automatically turned on when entering the Chord Acc Step Mode This means that selecting a Per formance automatically selects the Style memorized in the Perfor mance The SINGLE TOUCH and STS buttons are automatically dis abled meaning that you can t change Keyboard tracks while in Chord Acc Step Mode Tempo This is the Tempo Change parameter To insert a Tempo Change event at the current position select this parameter and use the TEMPO VALUE controls to change its value Chord The chord parameter is divided in four separate parts md Maj 911 L Name Type Te
153. the Upper tracks Drum Percussion Bass Acc 1 5 Drum track Percussion track Bass track One of the Auto accompaniment tracks Seq 1 Tr 01 16 One of Sequencer 1 tracks Seq 2 Tr 01 16 Global Control One of Sequencer 2 tracks Special channel to simulate the Pa800 s integrated controls keyboard pedals joystick with an external keyboard or controller MIDI messages coming on this channel are seen as if they were generated by Pa800 s integrated controllers On this special channel the Pa800 receives MIDI messages to remotely select Styles Performances STS and Style Elements See tables on page 246 and following for more information on the received data MIDI MIDI Out Channels In this page you can assign Pa800 tracks to any of the MIDI OUT channels GLOBAL MIDI Setup 1 Midi In Midi In Gen Ctl A Control B Channel Channels Dapper 1 gt GBLMs You can assign to each channel one of the following tracks Off Lower Upper 1 3 Drum Percussion Bass Accl 5 No track assigned Lower track One of the Upper tracks Drum track Percussion track Bass track One of the Auto accompaniment tracks Seq 1 Tr 01 16 One of Sequencer 1 tracks Seq 2 Tr 01 16 One of Sequencer 2 tracks Global edit mode MIDI MIDI Out Channels 205 Seq 1 2 Tr 01 16 Use these channels to send data generated by a track with the same name on either or both onboa
154. this button after setting all the options in this page to exe cute the Format command Format procedure Here is how to format a device 1 If formatting an external device connect the device to one of the USB Host ports 2 Press the Execute button in the display to confirm format ting 3 The If you confirm all data in the media will be lost Are you sure message appears in the display Press Yes to con firm or No to cancel Note When formatting the hard disk or an external USB device an additional warning appears to avoid accidental data loss Utility This page includes a set of backup utilities set save J ors J erase rot Backup OS This command allows you to make a backup of the Operating System on a target device A PKG file will be created Note Should you not do a backup and your internal data becomes damaged you can download the most up to date data from www korgpa com A copy of the original OS 1s also contained in the Accessory CD that comes with your Pa800 1 In case you are making the backup on an external USB device connect the device to one of the USB Host ports Be sure there is enough free space in your target device or the Backup procedure will not be completed The OS backup file requires about 6 MB 2 Select the Backup OS command then press the Execute button in the display The target device appears 06 40 45 18 35 open J cose cance Preter S
155. this option for classic multitrack recording See Record mode Multitrack Sequencer page on page 173 Backing Sequence Quick Record Easy way of recording Just play with Styles and record your realtime performance Step Backing Sequence Step record Edit chords and controls for the Style Very useful if you are not a keyboard player Record mode Multitrack Sequencer page While in Sequencer mode press the RECORD button and select the Multitrack Sequencer option The Multitrack Sequencer page appears Page sub header i 9 Recording SONG RECORD T B no chord A Il Es parame ES ters area Rec Mode Overdub Start Tempo d 1268 Locate meas 1 Meter 4 4 Resolution F High Metra Off Tempo D Record Page header Page menu icon Selected track info area b rk S51Tr81 Grand Piano E Piano 121 003 000 MOL Ao Aoa LI c MOL Sounds area Tracks volume status area See Multitrack recording procedure on page 174 for informa tion on the record procedure Page header See Page header on page 170 Page menu icon See Page menu icon on page 171 Page sub header This area shows some performing info on the Song Song name Free memory Beatcounter Measure number Song name Name of the Song in record Free memory Percentage of remaining memory available for recording Beat counter This indicator shows the
156. this parameter to select a different split point A full range piano keyboard is shown in the display divided at the selected split point Upper tracks play on the right of this point while the Lower track plays on the left Split Point Keyboard diagram Touch anywhere on the keyboard diagram A message will appear asking you to press the new split point on the keyboard of your Pa800 or to press the EXIT button to close the message with no changes PERF gt STS ini This parameter allows you to decide how chords are recognized by the auto accompaniment engine Please note that when in Full or Upper Chord Scanning mode the Fingered 3 mode is always selected and you must always play at least three notes to let a chord be recognized Chord Recognition Mode For more information on the various options see Chord Rec ognition Mode on page 101 Note This parameter is the same you can find in the Preferences Style Preferences page see page 101 Split Point and Chord Recognition lock icons gt BL When locked Split Point and Chord Recognition mode remain unchanged when selecting a different Performance or STS These locks are reset when turning the instrument off unless you write Global settings to memory see Write Global Global Setup dialog box on page 210 For more information on parameter locks see General Con trols Lock on page 199 Edit menu From any page press the MENU butt
157. to Up6 Addi tional values are Root and Root which give the root of the rec ognized chord as the harmony voice and Bass1 and Bass2 bass voicing which give the lowest note received Root2 and Bass2 are the higher pitch Root and Bass settings Shift Mode Presets In this mode the voices are shifted relative to the input note The values range from 24 semitones to 24 semitones Notes Mode Presets In this mode there is no selectable voicing since harmony voices exactly play received notes Smooth gt GBL P Sets how much of the input pitch nuance is applied to the output voice Pan Level Level knob gt GBL PP Sets the output level of the selected voice Please note that there is also a master harmony voice level found in the Harmony page Pan knob gt GBL PP Adjusts the pan for the selected voice L64 panned fully left to R63 panned fully right Custom Voice Mapping This area is only available in Scalic Mode when Type is Custom see Voice Processor Preset Harmony on page 215 Scale mode harmonies are basically pitch maps For each input note in a scale you can define a resulting harmony note The Voice Processor has pre defined pitch maps for all the offered scale roots types and intervals The Custom voicing feature allows you to create your own pitch maps For example you could define a pitch map so that a C input produces an E output and a D input produces an A output The best way to
158. to be sure no USB activities will interfere with other media operations HD and SSD U Connection Normally the USB Device port is not enabled for file transfer on the Pa800 it is always on however for MIDI connection Press the Enable button to turn it on or the Disable button with all the caveats to turn it off Enable After connecting Pa800 to a personal computer by using a standard USB cable press this button to enable file transfer In this case Pa800 is the B USB device called Device or Slave while the personal computer is the A USB device called Host or Master Macintosh Disable The MEDIA LED will start blinking while the personal computer reads the internal SSD U memory and the internal hard disk of the Pa800 When finished this may take some minutes depending on the hard disk size the icons of the SSD U and the hard disk will appear among the other storage devices connected to the computer Caveat Do not modify SET folders or you will no longer be able to use them on the Pa800 Only use the USB connection for backup purpose or to modify ordinary folders Note After starting the USB connection accessing Pa800 data from the computer may take some time depending on the size of the hard disk and the data contained in the SSD U or hard disk Press this button to disconnect the USB file trans fer Be careful to press it only when you are abso lutely sure data transfer has been completed
159. to execute the operation set in this page Pad Edit Copy from Style Here you can copy a track from a Style and transform it into a Pad pattern Warning The Copy operation deletes all data at the target location overwrite PAD REC Pad Edit no stule gt Trans Delete Pose All After setting the various parameters press Execute Note If you copy too many events on the same tick the Too many events message appears and the copy operation is aborted Note When you copy over an existing Chord Variation Program Change data 1s not copied to leave the original Sounds unchanged for that Chord Variation From Style Choose this option to select the source Style to copy the track from Press the Select button to open the Style Select window and select the source Style From E CV Style Element Chord Variation Use this parameter to select the source Style Element and Chord Variation Varl End2 A single Style Element i e all Chord Variations V1 CV1 E2 CV2 A single Chord Variation From Track Use this parameter to select the source track to copy Drum Acc5 Single track of the selected Style Element or Chord Variation To CV Chord Variation Use this parameter to select a target Chord Variation inside the current Pad CV1 CV6 Target Chord Variation Execute Press this button to execute the operation set in this page Pad Edit Copy from Pad Here you can copy a Chord
160. track can play on the full range of the keyboard When in this page press the corresponding button on the con trol panel to select a Style Element VARIATION1 ENDING3 To copy the settings of this page to another Style Element use the Copy Keyboard Range command from the page menu see Copy Key Range dialog box on page 129 Top Bottom STYLE Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard range for the corresponding track of the current Style Element Volume area Use these controls to set the volume and status of each track See page 111 for more information Style Element Chord Table Chord Table This is the page where you can assign a Chord Variation to each of the most important recognized chord When a chord is recog nized the assigned Chord Variation will be automatically selected by the arranger to play the accompaniment STYLE REC SE Chord Table ha h hd a Let Ll Ll a cl FA haa h ha D N ha ha Ra Ba VO a Bd When in this page press the corresponding button on the con trol panel to select a Style Element VARIATION1 ENDING3 Chord Chord Variation gt STYLE Use these parameters to assign a Chord Variation to each of the most important chords Style Track Controls Type Trigger Tension In this page you can set the Mode Retrigger mode for the Style tracks and activate deactivate the Tension for the Accompani ment tracks Jiu Trk Drum buazz Kit
161. track is the only Song track you can hear All other Song tracks are muted Keyboard tracks are left in play status SHIFT Keep the SHIFT button pressed and touch one of the tracks to solo it Do the same on a soloed track to deactivate the Solo function Copy Paste FX You can copy a single or all four effects between Styles Perfor mances STSs and Songs To do this choose the Copy FX and Paste FX commands from the page menu of the Style Play Song Play or Sequencer modes To copy a single effect 1 Select the source Song Performance Style or STS then go to the page of the single effect you want to copy FX A FX B FX C or EX D or go to the Effects gt FX Select page to copy all four effects This may be useful if you want to copy two or three of the four effects into different Performances Styles or STSs 2 Choose the Copy FX command from the page menu 3 Select the target Performance Style or STS then go to the page of the single effect you want to paste FX A FX B FX C or FX D 4 Choose the Paste FX command from the page menu To copy all four effects 1 Select the source Performance Style or STS then go to the Effects gt FX Select page to copy all four effects 2 Choose the Copy FX command from the page menu 3 Select the target Performance Style or STS then go to the page of the Effects gt FX Select page 4 Choose the Paste FX command from the page men
162. tracks See Keyboard Ensemble Keyboard Control on page 97 Parameters gt PERF STS Keyboard Ensemble Key Velocity Range These parameters let you select a note and velocity range for the Keyboard tracks See Keyboard Ensemble Key Velocity Range on page 97 Parameters PERF STS Keyboard Ensemble Ensemble See Keyboard Ensemble Ensemble on page 98 Parameters gt PERF STS Pad Switch Pad See Pad Switch Pad on page 100 Parameters PERF STS Pad Switch Assignable Switch See Pad Switch Assignable Switch on page 100 Parameters PERF STS Jukebox Editor The Jukebox function lets you play a list of Songs 127 max at the simple touch of a button You can play a Jukebox file by assigning it to Sequencer 1 after having selected it in the Song Select page just as if it was an ordinary Song see Jukebox panel on page 147 SONG PLAY SEQ1 JukeBox Editor Type Hum Hame dm 1 CAHYOH MID dp 2 PIMBALL MID dm 3 MYSUHLMID dp d MIGHTDRV MID a m c cr In this page you can create edit and save a Jukebox file A Juke box list can contain Standard MIDI Files and Karaoke files If a Jukebox file is already selected into a Sequencer you will enter this page with that file ready to be edited Otherwise you will enter this page with an empty list To create a new Jukebox file press Del All to remove all Songs from t
163. turned on notes received from MIDI or performed by one of the internal sequencers in the RX Noises range are recognized and converted to RX Noises When off notes are not recognized Note This parameter is automatically turned off when turning the instrument on again General Controls Use these parameters to set MIDI Clock and Local Off Global edit mode MIDI MIDI Setup General Controls 203 Clock Send gt GBLMd Use this parameter to turn the clock information on the MIDI OUT or USB Device port on or off This parameter is common to all MIDI Setups Note In Song Play mode only the Tempo of Sequencer 1 will be sent to the MIDI OUT or USB Device port Off The Pa800 cannot send the MIDI Clock signal You cannot slave another instrument to the Pa800 even when connected to the MIDI OUT or USB Device port On The Pa800 can send the MIDI Clock signal You can slave another instrument to the Pa800 Tempo Start Stop and Play Stop commands Connect the other instrument to the Pa800 MIDI OUT or USB Device port Clock Source This parameter selects the MIDI Clock source for the Style Play and Sequencer modes Note In Song Play mode the Internal clock is always used Note The Clock parameter is always set to Internal each time you turn the instrument on Internal Internal i e the clock generated by the Pa800 Sequencer 1 internal metronome Ext MIDI External from the MIDI IN port In Style Play or Seq
164. uneffected signal Src Source PERF STS GPL Modulation source To select the track generating this message see the Mod Track Modulating Track parameters found in the Effects FX Select page see above For a list of modulation sources see the Advanced Edit addendum in the Accessory CD Track Controls Mode These parameters let you set the Internal External and the Poly Mono status of Song tracks See Track Controls Mode on page 94 Parameters PERF STS gt GBLS 9 Note These parameters can be saved to the Global Song Play Setup by selecting the Write Global Song Play Setup command from the page menu Track Controls Drum Volume These parameters let you adjust the volume for each percussive instrument family See Track Controls Drum Volume on page 155 Parameters gt PERF STS Note Song track values edited in this page are not saved and are only intended for realtime use Track Controls Easy Edit These parameters let you fine tune edit parameters for Sounds assigned to the tracks See Track Controls Easy Edit on page 96 Parameters gt PERF STS Note Song track values edited in this page are not saved and are only intended for realtime use o v c Q i o EM Q cc 156 Song Play operating mode Keyboard Ensemble Keyboard Control Keyboard Ensemble Keyboard Control These parameters let you set parameters for the Keyboard
165. used to say the note has been released In some case a Note On with value 0 is used instead Together with the Note On message a Velocity value is always sent This value tells the instrument how loud the note must play After Touch This message is generated by pressing on the key board after the note has been struck It usually activates vibrato or other sound parameters Pitch Bend PB You can generate this message acting on the Joystick X direction The pitch is translated up or down Program Change PC When you select a Sound a Program Change message is generated on the channel Use this message together with Control Change 00 and 32 to remotely select Pa800 data from a sequencer or a master keyboard Control Change CC This is a wide array of messages con trolling most of the instrument parameters Some examples e CC00 or Bank Select MSB and CC32 or Bank Select LSB This message pair is used to select a Sound Bank Together with the Program Change message they are used to select a Sound A CCOI or Modulation This is the equivalent of pressing up the joystick A vibrato effect is usually triggered on CCO07 or Master Volume Use this controller to set the channel s volume e CCI0 or Pan This one sets the channel s position on the stereo front e CCII or Expression Use this controller to set the relative volume of tracks with the maximum value matching the curr
166. v c o i o Ser Q cc 236 Media edit mode USB Factory Sound Protect When On this parameter prevents writing edited Sounds from the Edit Sound mode When Off you can freely save edited Sounds either in the Factory or User Sound area Note This parameter is automatically set to On when turning the instrument off Note If your accidentally delete some Factory Data reload the Backup data find the original Musical Resources in the supplied CD or download the data from www korgpa com PCM Autoload p GBL e When you import a Sound based on PCM Samples or create a new Sound with Samples recorded in the Sampling mode the Samples are stored in the SSD S ystem internal memory When this parameter is set to On these User PCM Samples are automatically loaded when turning the instrument on so that you don t have to worry and deliberately load them However since loading may take some time you can choose whether to automatically load these Samples or not in case you don t need these Sounds If Samples have not been automatically loaded when turning the instrument on you can press the Load PCM button in this page to load them On When turning the instrument on User Samples used by some Sounds are automatically loaded from the SSD S memory to the RAM memory Off When turning the instrument on external Sam ples used by some Sounds are not automatically loaded Therefore these Sounds will not sound until
167. voice see Chords and sec ond voices in Step Record mode on page 114 of the Style Record mode chapter 6 After inserting a new event you may go back by pressing the Back button in the display This will delete the previ ously inserted event and set the step in edit again 7 When finished recording press the Done button in the dis play The main page of the Multitrack Recording mode will appear again 8 From the main page of the Multitrack Recording mode either select the Exit from Record command from the page menu or press the RECORD button to exit the Record mode While in the main page of the Sequencer mode you may press the P ll PLAY STOP button in the SEQUENCER 1 section to listen to the Song or select the Save Song command from the page menu to save the Song to a storage device see Save Song window on page 194 Chords and second voices With Pa800 you are not obliged to insert single notes in a track There are several ways to insert chords and double voices For more information see Chords and second voices in Step Record mode on page 114 of the Style Record mode chapter Record mode Backing Sequence Quick Record page Backing Sequence Quick Record mode allows you to quickly record your live performance with the Styles To make things easier just two grouped tracks are provided Kbd Pad Keyboard and Pads to record keyboard and pads and Ch Acc Chords Accompaniment to record St
168. will be automatically selected and MIDI channels will be automati cally configured To assign a MIDI Setup to each of the two operating modes n Style Play mode go to the Style Play gt Preferences gt Style Setup page and select a MIDI Setup Select the Write Global Style Setup command from the page menu Q v c Q i o EM Q cc 164 SongBook Book Edit 1 n Song Play mode go to the Song Play gt Preferences gt Gen eral Control page and select the same MIDI Setup assigned to the Style Play mode Select the Write Global Song Play Setup command from the page menu Selecting SongBook entries via MIDI When you are ready to remotely select SongBook entries switch to the Style Play or Song Play mode At this point Pa800 must receive on the special Control channel the NRPN Control Change messages 99 MSB with value 2 and 98 LSB with value 64 in fast succession as an initializa tion string This string must be sent only once unless another NRPN control is sent on the same MIDI channel before selecting a different SongBook entry After the initialization string has been sent you must send the selection string made of two Control Change messages CC 06 Data Entry MSB for the thousands and hundreds and CC 38 Data Entry LSB for the tens and units The range of the Data Entry controls in this case is 0 99 instead of the typical 0 127 The following examples show some typical situati
169. work with custom voicing is as follows For a given harmony voice select the scale root type and interval that most closely matches the desired voicing Go to the Note In parameter and select the input note that requires a different harmony note Go to the Note Out parameter and change the harmony note as desired Select various other input notes and remap as desired Repeat the above steps for each harmony voice You can also copy a map from a voice to other voices The custom map can be transposed under the Harmony page by changing the Root parameter Note In GBL P Incoming note C B Original note Note Out gt GBL P Resulting note when applying the custom map 24 Number of semitones above or under the received note UNI Unison The same note received on the input is sent to the output NC No Change The harmony voice will keep its pre vious pitch until the lead voice pitch changes to a non NC note Copy to button Use this button to copy the current custom map to another voice When you press the button the Copy Custom Voice Map ping dialog box appears Copy Custom Yoice Mapping Check all desired target voices then press OK to confirm the copy 217 Voice Processor Voice Processor Preset Effects Voice Processor Preset Effects This page allows to adjust the various effect parameters for the Voice Processor GLOBAL Yoice Processor Preset j
170. you select a song in any of the SongBook lists its name appears in reversed text over a dark blue background While in this situation the song is selected but not yet loaded When you press the Select button in the display the song will be loaded The blue background turns to green to show the Song has been loaded and ready to play Numeric selection of entries When in SongBook mode you can select a SongBook entry by means of an unique number Numbers associated with each entry are added in the Book Edit 2 page see Book Edit 2 on page 166 To see the numbers while in the Book page select the Show Song Numbers now Key command from the page menu SongBook 163 Book After you select this command the Num column appears SI ID T 8 na chord E Type Hame Genre Hum Fy 2much afterworld Ballad ED A day in paradise ED A gigolo Pop crab H groovy lowe Ballad GABP A hard day night Pop E A whiter shade Ballad ageet Fitter eoa to nist Select Book Book Custom List Lyrics Edit 1 A Edit 2 List Edit STS To see the Key column again select the Show Key now Song Numbers command from the page menu To select a SongBook entry by entering its number press the SONGBOOK button again while you are in any page of the SongBook mode The numeric keypad will appear allowing you to enter the number corresponding to the desired entry Selecting SongBook entries via MIDI S
171. you use the Load PCM button to load them to RAM Load PCM button Press this button to load to RAM all PCM Samples used by some User Sounds loaded from an external device or created in Sam pling mode Not available if no User PCM Samples are used by any Sound PCM Autoload is selected or if the PCM Samples have already been loaded either by pushing this button or by entering the Sam pling mode Hide Unknown Files When this option is checked non proprietary files are hidden when using Media operations therefore making browsing direc tories easier USB Use this page to enable or disable the USB Device port for file transfer The USB Device port allows you to access the internal SSD U and the optional internal hard disk from a personal computer Windows or Macintosh by just connecting the Pa800 to the computer s USB interface This way you can exchange files between the Pa800 and a personal computer for example for making a quick backup of Pa800 data on your computer or moving midifiles to your Pa800 Note Windows 2000 and XP as well as Mac OSX can be directly connected to the Pa800 To connect a Windows 98 computer you need a dedicated driver available from www korgpa com Hint While USB file transfer 1s enabled you cannot access other functions on the Pa800 We suggest you use the USB just after turn ing the instrument on and turn the instrument off and on again after using and disconnecting it
172. z 2 S 8 g3 S 9 mm 2 2 v n ul el o D o 3 0 B y T o o o O ml 3 o o S m m a D lt w N O L o D o o SEA lt o lt m o o 9 gt Pu sz E w N o 2 Si 4 D OI Es UJ cul d 5 2 lt D N 5 N ss Factory data 255 Sounds Bank order AAA EI a a m Dmm m Dm Dm Dm Dm ms aan a a a aa Dm mw DR mw a KS SS SS RS SS NM SS SS SS SS E EN NM EN SS Trombones Fat Brass Dyna Brass 1 N Dyna Brass 2 Glen amp Friends Glen amp Boys Sax amp Brass Brass amp Sax 5 5 Mute Ensemble 1 Mute Ensemble 2 Flute Muted Double Brass French Horn GM French Horn 2 French Section Horns amp Ensemble Classic Horns Attack Brass ala NI N Brass of Power N Sforzato Brass Brass Section GM als N N xls Brass Section 2 N Power Brass N Brass Expr N Film Brass N Movie Brass N Brass Slow NJ Fanfare Synth Brass 1GM Synth Brass 2GM Synth Brass 3 Synth Brass 4 Synth Brass 5 Synth Brass 6 EM EZE EZS EZE EZE MEN MEN MEN RSR EZE EE KE Bass Hit Plus Netherland Hit 6th Hit Bank Sax EN EN KE NI N NI N N N N N Electrik Brass N Jump Brass Brass Pad NI N i Brass Section 3 Orchestra Hit GM 5 Brass Fall Tight Brass 3 Tight Brass 4 Brass Impact Brass Hit
173. 03 While in this mode Pa800 cannot receive MIDI Clock messages from the MIDI IN Pa800 transmits to the MIDI OUT and USB port only the MIDI Clock messages generated by Sequencer 1 For MIDI Clock mes sages to be sent the Clock Send parameter must be activated see Clock Send on page 203 Tempo Lock and Link Mode If you don t want the Tempo to change when selecting a new Song turn on the TEMPO LOCK function When the LED of this button is turned on you can still manually change the Tempo with the DIAL When the Tempo Lock is activated the Link Mode is also acti vated see Link Mode on page 159 This makes both Sequenc ers use the same Tempo Master Volume Balance Sequencer Balance While the MASTER VOLUME slider controls the general volume of the instrument you can use the BALANCE slider next to the MASTER VOLUME slider to balance the Song tracks against the Keyboard and Pad tracks MASTER VOLUME BALANCE RT Balance of Song and RealTime tracks Key board and Pads MAX Overall instrument s S volume A KC SEQ MIN Use the SEQUENCER BALANCE slider to mix between Sequencer 1 and Sequencer 2 Move it to the center for the maxi mum volume of both sequencers BALANCE Sequencer 1 Sequencer 2 Track parameters Keyboard track settings made in Son
174. 1 Creating a new SET folder Pa800 proprietary data must be saved in special folders with the SET extension These special folders can be saved inside ordi nary folders When saving you can save onto existing SET folders or you can create a new folder of this type Here is how to do it 1 When the directory of the target device is shown in the dis play the New SET button appears among the buttons below the file list crose ffnewser Save 2 Press the New SET button A dialog box appears asking you to enter a name for the new SET folder Create Hew SET Folder 3 Press the T Text Edit button to open the Text Edit win dow Enter the name then press OK to confirm and close the Text Edit window 4 Press OK to create the new folder and exit the dialog box o v c Q i o tim Q cc 232 Media edit mode Copy Copy In this page you can copy files and folders Folders can be generic or SET folders In addition you can copy the content of the generic folder you are in You can copy inside the same device or from a device to a different one To preserve data structure integrity during Copy operations you can t open SET folders and copy only one of the files it con tains You can only open and go inside generic folders BACKLIP 84 45 66 11 14 MIDIFILE 11 88 85 18 18 MYSHOW SET 64 05 86 11 88 Canyon mid 11K 83 88 66 11 2 MySun mid 3j 3K H3 BB8 B6 11 2
175. 1 NJ w wi MI MI NINI MIMI nin N w wl N N la el w l el Jl oi ul a w n gt ron Z Slo Q QO S lt lt O QO zc cgion m iaA z co Ig z iz m ojl uj olola To TS ulojo w w w ujm qu ololnl3la3lnilololoioJjo 318 lolol loi o HE ew gjge glga c o c e g 9g g glololala alajaj o 2 y gt N 9 20 ul 6 6 2 2 2 ke 1 5 alul mi o 2 5 6 S Q u0 elcisialae Al3ls lt s e ao s lt 3 olola alo lt i sis F 2 A 2 a Co A x See a 2 ojo o Sl A uj uj s s DI wl w w x s s 21s s 3 9 22 2 22 ol Dis zl mm t Qo o a 212 135 am m 35 4 5 3 E32 E EA a gjg gjj 5 SEA 3 u c m S Ol n y sl Al a4 SIE IRAK qi cq mn 2 2 2 m 4 3 3 n vol o A c 3 c o S ol m a a Ais SES EE ajajajls5 0 vl ul 0 0 gt s sd K 1 s c em E F o 5 5 9 x l9 227 SIRIE X pl nj lal S 2 3 3 5 Ojo vs ole gt a c Zu 5 5 2 3 2 2 3E Is a s o e e ed td dE o o Qo 2lu gt i E 9 mo ul n o 3 o c A e Q N W W NI N NI NI N NI N N N N W w N N N N N Ww O W CO J Oil vil BY W N O N O W CO NI o gt UJ N 5 7 Modern Country Bar Country Bluegrass 12 13 Country Shuffle 1 Country Shuffle 2 5 Cl C CY CY Cl Oil Oli OO Oil OO UN ojo O O ojojojojojojo D o el E c ec ierlc ie cie e gt 5 31 3 5 5 3 3 3 3 3 5 5 5 ct ct ct ck let e e e e U s o 7 31 351 31 31 31 5 O lt lt lt lt SE
176. 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 FM Bell Flute Flute Frull Voice Flute Jazz Flute Flute Vibrato Flute Attack p Flute Attack f Piccolo Pan Flute Pan Flute Attack Tin Whistle Tin Whistle Voice Tin Whistle Attack Whistle Gliss Whistle No Vibr Whistle Sforz Vibr Whistle Sforz No Vibr Whistle Slow Atk Vibr Whistle Breath Shakuhachi Shakuhachi Atk Bottle Bottleizer Recorder Ocarina Solo Clarinet Clarinet Bass Clarinet M1 DoubleReed Oboe English Horn Bassoon Woodwind Ensemble Baritone Sax mf Baritone Sax f Baritone Sax Growl Tenor Sax Vibrato Tenor Sax Expressive Tenor Sax mp Tenor Sax mf Tenor Sax Straight 270 Factory data 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 Multisamples Tenor Sax M1 Alto Sax Vibratol Alto Sax Vibrato2 Alto Sax Vibrato2 Drive Alto Sax p Alto Sax mf Alto Sax Growl Soprano Sax Vibrato Soprano Sax Straight Sax Family Vibrato French Musette Musettel Musettel LP Accordion 16 Accordion 16 OrigTune Accordion 8 Accordion 8 OrigTune Accordion 4 Accordion 4 OrigTune Accordion 1 Accordion2 Fisa Bassoon Fisa Clarinet Bandoneon Volkst Accordion Accordion Bass Accordion Noise KeyOn Accordion Noise KeyOff Acco
177. 2 8 B o o o o o lalaa d alol F T oz 5 Wl oi Al ol ul Pl Gil oO g _ NJ IA Perc ae Perc 6 8 NJ A Y ul wl rm Ww W w N NJ Ww Wi W N N2 N N LI W N wi 21S Sl alla ol A1S Sl PIANI ala N LA N Ww Wi W N N2 N o DIISI DI BIANI AIA N LAT w W N N SEQ Bass SEQ Orchestral Gtr Steel Strum1 Solo Marimba Gtr Steel Strum2 Gtr Steel Strum3 Gtr Steel Strum4 Gtr Steel Strum5 Gtr Steel Strum6 GtSteelStrum N N 2 2 3 2 3 2 3 Solo Kalimba 1 Solo Kalimba 2 Solo Steel Drums Solo Vibes Solo Gtr Dist Solo Slide Steel LA LA Wi Wl WI NI N N N NI NI NI NI NIN LAT Wi WI N NI NI NI NI N N N O O 0 oi oO B WI NI O N Ui N O W Di dj vu BY Ww LA 5 5 5 LI 5 5 7 7 7 7 7 7 Solo Banjo Solo Violin Solo Harpsi ae Solo Harpsi 4 4 12 12 12 12 12 French Horns 1 12 Solo Gtr Funk 13 13 13 13 13 13 Solo Piano 1 Solo Piano 2 15 15 15 15 15 Solo Piano 3 Solo Piano 4 17 17 17 17 17 Solo Synth 1 Solo Synth 2 Solo Synth 3 20 20 20 20 20 Solo Synth 4 21 Pno GlissDwnWhit Solo Synth 5 22 Solo Synth 6 23 Pno GlissDwnBlak 23 Solo Guitar 1 Solo Guitar 2 Honky End Solo Guitar 3 2 2 27 27 28 29 29 30 31 32 32 QO O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O LO OI GO Gul Gay Gi E un m lt e lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt
178. 2 PLAY when pressing one of the PAD buttons it will play in sync with Sequencer 2 About Pads and the Sequencers Play command When you press one of the PLAY buttons to start the corresponding Sequencer all Pads will stop playing UPPER OCTAVE PERF STS STS These buttons transpose the selected track in steps of a whole octave 12 semitones max 2 octaves The octave transposition value is always shown in octaves next to the Sound s name gt Grand Piano R p Lt piano nrc fg Press both buttons together to reset the Octave Transpose to zero Note The Octave Transpose has no effect on tracks set to Drum mode and even if set in a different status on the Drum and Per cussion tracks Lowers the selected track an octave Raises the selected track an octave TRANSPOSE PERF gt PERFSY gt SB These buttons transpose the whole instrument in semitone steps Master Transpose The transposition value is usually shown on the page header in the display STYLE PLAY HIN no chord B Press both buttons together to reset the Master Transpose to zero Note The Master Transpose has no effect on tracks set to Drum mode and even if set in a different status on the Drum and Per cussion tracks See Track Controls Mode on page 94 and Track Controls Mode on page 155 b Lowers the Master Transpose in steps of a semi tone 4 Raises the Master Transpose in steps of a semi to
179. 2 Tr 10 Drum S1 Tr 10 51 Tr 11 12 13 51 Tr 12 S1 Tr 13 51 Tr 14 15 S1 Tr 15 Lower S1 Tr4 S2 Tr4 Lower Si Tr4 S2 Tr4 MIDI OUT Channel A EIN NL EN pe c es EE NN NE M Le ur NN EE MN EE 3 NE NN NL E MEL EE M m En A E SC E ae Ul L Ul L N ul Off Off el w CY Normal Normal 286 Assignable parameters List of Footswitch and EC5 functions Assignable parameters List of Footswitch and EC5 functions The following functions can be assigned to a footswitch or Korg EC5 s switch pedal Off Style Start Stop Play Stop Seq1 Play Stop Seq2 Pause Seq1 Same functions of the control panel but Pause Seq2 tons with the same name Synchro Start Synchro Stop Tap Tempo Reset Tempo Lock Ritardando Accelerando Tempo Up Tempo Down Intro 1 Intro 2 Intro 3 Count In Ending 1 Ending 2 Fill 1 Same functions of the control panel but Fill 2 tons with the same name Fill 3 Break Variation 1 Variation 2 Variation 3 Variation 4 Selects the next Variation Selects the previous Variation Variation Up Variation Down Fade In Out Memory Same functions of the control panel but Bass Inversion tons with the same name Manual Bass Style Up Selects the next Style Single Touch STS1 STS2 STS3 STSA STS Up STS Down Same functions of the control panel but tons with the same name Perform Up Perform Down
180. 21 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 23 Movie Strings 1 LI 22 LI N 17 LI N Ensemble amp Solo Movie Strings 2 LI 1 N 13 Strings Femal amp Male Scat LA Full Strings LA Master Pad LA N LD N Strings LI N 12 7 Chamber Strings Legato Strings 121 121 un un un Nn un un un un Lo CH S F ea F O S Sia TEEGEE E S S g S 2 5 S 0 S S a v Se Sch olojoal cels olo 39 O 0 ef 21 S gt a ee E SB 3 2 3 lt e Q O S lt i gt 5juolo OD 5 gt 5 51 10 un gt lt O n lt gt o olo e ago E e im la a 2 g2 m m A OIO lt L x Min X 2 5 5 ww A O ct O coi2i5i 2z uic ol ct To S o ms A 3 g 9 2 A w 5 E SEAN a 2 m 5 JJ alius 21 9 Ls o 2 N Uu c n Q 210 x D 4 Vi NJ N N N N LI Ol Ul LI Ul Mme ESA Steen S COTO E e orroe faee orso Ec Sings mom O A CTO A MEN IEA amsaa A a picaro Seg mr CTI EN INC IE Mas NN INC ICI CI NN ICI CEI E EE SMA a EII E ICI ICA Puewsuw Ec CN EIN Pie Ensemble mr odevestings SC e ESCHER EU EN INC ICI CUE mr fe sings 3S KS 9 9 SES s 9 Strings Ens 4 3 Synth Strings1GM Bmhzes A menge A Weise E Fdo SS tO dk A maen LEIT mae ET ES AA Bede m IS SIT pede E CI men NN INC NC Ser NN ANC NC CEI NN CN EIA Meuede A CC EN 3 E IO STI atvorred A Hehe EN 8 EN amm AA CTE EN EN CIA CCOO CC32 PC Class
181. 21 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 UJ UJ o o Cross Sweep Digi Ice Pad N N o Crimson 5ths NJ w Freedom Pad Noble Pad Mellow Pad Lonely Spin ul LA LI LA LI LA LA LA LAV wy Ww DU Wy UY LA LI o N O O J wy UN N Cinema Pad N 00 Synth Ghostly Motion Ocean Moon Cycles 102 LA CH Farluce Bell Pad Bell Choir UJ UJ 00 00 121 121 N w Sweep Pad GM Mme ee en mengn E T A Itopia Pad 121 2 Big Panner Dance ReMix Rave 7 Elastick Pad Moving Bell Analog Pad 3 Big Sweep Stab Bank Synth 2 piiPotimento 0000 E o EA Powersaw mg 6 21 Electro Lead Rich Lead MEME Thin Analog Lead Dance Lead 5 Wave Lead ee LIES KNEE EDEN EAEE 9 20 EAE ESES N gt mn 3 9 O xe o gt a S 3 g O 3 lt Sine Wave Synchro City Wild Arp Express Lead HipHop Lead Old amp Analog Phat Saw Lead Glide Lead Gliding Square Analog Lead Seq Lead Flip Blip Power Synth Sineswitch 0 m p BmSweer 00 S EIN moore m 3 9t gt gt gt gt gt n a a A gt A O Ojo D O es c cic O c C L L L L n ct Cu c c s SE e p w y Salt o a N Lo un A N n Un D O D N o o e gt Digital PolySix 121 8 30 Noisy Stabb Pars ww ww we ws wr ap Square Rez E MEM ES NN MEA EE EN 3 Mega Synth 3 Tecno Phonic 3 Dark Element 3 Band Passed Cat Lead
182. 2K Use the Device pop up menu to select Use the Open and Close buttons EXIT one of the available storage devices to browse through the folders SSD U hard drive 4 Press the Save button in the display to open the Save Song dialog box Save Song Press the Text Edit icon to edit the Song s name 5 Press OK in the display to save the Song to disk or Cancel to stop the Save operation 93U9 9 9Y 78 Selecting elements Sound Select window Selecting elements Sounds The following windows are shown in the various operating modes whenever you try to select a Sound Performance Style or Song Sound Select window Press the Sound area whereas it appears in the display or one of the SOUND SELECT buttons on the control panel provided the SOUND SELECT LED is lit to open the Sound Select window Use the SOUND SELECT buttons to go directly to the selected bank Press EXIT to exit from this page and go back to the previous page without selecting any Sound Side tabs banks N E _ ON EN E SELECT Grad Piano RX Tok Upper 1 Lx T Digi ial Piano RX Bank sets A amp Tr Le al Z If more than four pages are available the Previous Next tabs are shown in this area Sounds Lower tabs pages Note Depending on the status of the Auto Performance Sound Select parameter see page 201 a Sound may be immediately selected when pressing one of the SOUND S
183. 488 DWGS Organl 537 Gun Shot 392 E Bass12 440 Chrom Res 489 DWGS Organ2 538 Machine Gun SlapBassThumb 441 Detuned Super 490 DWGS Bell 539 Laser Gun sum la 442 Detuned PNM 491 DWGS Bell2 540 Explosion SlapBassThumbLP 443 Synth Brass 492 DWGS Bell3 541 Wind 394 Fretless Bass 1 444 An Stringsl 493 DWGS Bell4 542 Timpani 395 Bass Harmonics 445 An Strings2 494 DWGS Clav 543 Crash 396 Bass HarmonicsLP 446 Analog Vintage 495 DWGS Digil 544 Crash Reverse 397 Sitarl 447 White Pad 496 DWGS Digi2 545 Orchestra Crash 398 Sitar2 448 NI Air Vox 497 DWGS Wirel 546 Ride Jazz 399 Sitar amp Tambura 449 Ether Bell 498 DWGS Wire2 547 Ride Edgel 400 Santur 450 Ether BellLP 499 DWGS Syncl 548 Ride Edge2 401 SanturLP 45 Lore 500 DWGS Sync2 549 HiHat Closed 402 Tambura 452 Lore NT 501 DWGS Sync3 550 88 HiHat Open 403 TamburaLP 453 Space Lore 502 Orchestra Hit 551 88 Cowbell 404 Bouzouki 454 Wave Sweepl 503 Band Hit 552 88 Tom 405 BouzoukiLP 455 Wave Sweep2 504 Impact Hit 553 88 Conga 406 Mandolin 272 Factory data Multisamples 554 88 Crash 567 Temple Blocks 580 Cowbell amp Claves 593 Stereo Snarel_L 555 Tom 568 Orchestra BD 581 Cabasa 594 Stereo Snarel_R 556 Tom Brush 569 Castanet 582 Shaker 595 Stereo Snare2_L 557 Tom Process 570 Taiko 583 Cabasa amp Shaker 596 Stereo Snare2 R 558 Electric Tom 571 Djembe Open 584 Dumbek Djambe Udu 597 Largel L 559 Flexatone 572 Djembe Mute 585 Caxixi 598 Largel R 560 Tambourine 573 Chinese Gong 586 Tab
184. 5 you wish to playback Have the Styles or Performances been modified Load the appropriate data Styles or Perfor mances 225 225 02 Sound does not stop Make sure that the damper switch polarity parameter is set correctly 2 The selected Style or Song cannot Make sure that the Clock parameter is set to Internal If you are using the MIDI Clock of 203 start another device you must set the MIDI Clock parameter to MIDI or USB depending on the port the Pa800 is hooked to the other device through and make sure that the external device trans mits MIDI Clock data Does not respond to MIDI mes Make sure that all MIDI or USB cables are connected correctly 240 en Make sure that the external device is transmitting through MIDI channels enabled to receive in 204 the Pa800 05 Make sure that the MIDI IN Filters of the Pa800 do not prevent the reception of messages 2 Percussive instruments are not Make sure that the Drum track is set to Drum Mode and the external device has not transposi 94 186 played correctly tion applied Some clicks can be heard when This is part of the sound and not a problem playing a percussive instrument A background noise can be heard The selected Performance Style or STS recalled the effect 17 St Analog Record simulating after selecting a Performance the noise of a old vinyl recording Style or STS The Voice Processor cannot be The Vocoder effect has been assigned to the D FX processor
185. 70dB to 0dB EQ The Voice Processor has an extremely flexible 3 band EQ with frequency and gain adjustable high and low shelving bands as well as a fully parametric band with Q control Low Gain knob gt GBL Low Shelving Frequency cut boost Range 12 dB Low Frequency knob gt GBL Low Shelving Frequency center frequency Range 80Hz 16kHz Voice Processor Voice Processor Setup Dynamics EQ 213 Mid Gain knob gt GBL 5 Mid Band Frequency cut boost Range 12 dB Mid Frequency knob KRUS Mid Band Frequency center frequency Range 80Hz 16kHz Mid Q knob KGBUP Resonance of the midband Range is 1 wide band to 10 very narrow band High Gain knob gt GBL 5 High Shelving Frequency cut boost Range 12 dB High Frequency knob gt GBL s High Shelving Frequency center frequency Range 80Hz 16kHz Voice Processor Setup Talk This page is where you can set the Talk function to be used to address the audience speaking over the background music Parameter contained in this page are relative to programming parameters and are used to attenuate the music when speaking After editing you can save the Talk settings in memory by choosing the Write Global Talk Configuration dialog box command from the page menu see Write Global Talk Config uration on page 210 Note The Write Global Talk Configuration command is only available when the Talk 1s activated Talk Talk
186. 8 Entry s parameters Entry s progressive number UE sent to the Voice Harmony p Vr ST US Track from which to take notes to be E Press New Song to create a new entry 7 Press the New Song button in the display to add a new item to the Song Book list 8 Press the T Text Edit button next to the field s you want to edit Set all other parameters You can write the genre artist name and name of the associated STS Select a Tempo matching the song s tempo and select the Meter and Key of the song You can also specify a Master Trans pose value to be automatically selected when selecting the entry 9 After having filled up all the desired fields be as comprehensive as you can press the Write button in the display to open the Write dialog box SONGBOOK S no chord i zx Write Song Custom List Lyric List Edit ST The SongBook 65 Creating a Custom List 10 Press the T Text Edit button to assign a name to the new entry then press OK to save the entry to the SongBook database Entry s name A good idea is to assign the entry the same name of the associated Standard MIDI File or a name suitable for the use of the associated Style Select Rename Overwrite to over write an existing entry Warning the older entry will be deleted Write 50ng Select New Song to add a new entry to the SongBook database This option is automatically selected when a new entry has been created Cancel
187. 9 Midi In 204 Operating Modes 11 OS Operating System Backup 22 234 Update 22 Outputs 19 23 206 208 P Pads 16 100 Pan Pads 100 Song tracks 152 182 Style tracks 89 PANIC SHIFT START STOP 13 PCM Autoload 236 Pedals 202 Performance 16 83 Selecting 16 78 Selecting Auto 201 Writing 104 Pitch Bend 92 185 Program Change 243 Q Quarter Tone 88 92 R RX 191 S Scale Main scale 198 Sequencer Link mode 159 Sequencer 2 FX mode 159 Transport controls 14 Sequencer mode 170 195 Shift 14 Single Touch 12 14 Single Touch Setting STS 14 Selecting 14 80 Writing 104 Song Markers 149 Play from disk 80 193 Recording 172 181 Selecting 80 193 Standard MIDI File 241 Song Play mode 142 161 SongBook 162 169 Sound Editing 96 155 186 Selecting 16 78 Selecting Auto 201 Split Point 88 241 Standard MIDI File 142 170 241 STS See Single Touch Setting Style Ending 13 Fill 13 Intro 13 Recording 106 130 Selecting 12 79 Selecting Auto 201 Style Performance 83 Variation 13 Style Performance Selecting see Style Writing 105 Style Play mode 83 105 Style Record mode 106 130 Synchro Start Stop 13 T Talk Auto On Off 214 On Off 87 Settings 213 Write settings 211 Tap Tempo 13 Tempo Value section 14 Touch Panel Calibration 209 Track Select 14 Tracks Drum Percussion 95 99 207 Keyboard tracks 16 83 143 Octave Transpose 16 Sounds 16 Volume 89 151 182 Transpose 16 92
188. 9 16 pressed again you will go back to Keyboard tracks See Song Tracks 1 8 and 9 16 pages and Volume panel starting from page 146 Songs area SONG PLAY MT 8 diurno song gt Page header Page menu icon no chord B t Grand Piano RA Meter d d H J 128 U LE Key board tracks area MIC IM LOWER UPPERS UPPERZ UPPER Juke Lyrics STS Sub tos Metodo Name Me sea Paa seit Panels Page header This line shows the current operating mode transposition and recognized chord SONG PLAY NIR na chord B Operating mode Master Transpose Recognized name in semitones chord Operating mode name Name of the current operating mode PERF STSS8 ii Master Transpose value in semitones This value can be changed using the TRANSPOSE buttons on the control panel Master Transpose Note Transpose may be automatically changed when selecting a different Performance It may also be changed when loading a Standard MIDI File generated with an instrument of the Korg Pa series To avoid transposing lock the Master Transpose parameter in the Global see General Controls Lock on page 199 then write the Global to memory see Write Global Global Setup dialog box on page 210 Recognized chord Displays the recognized chord when you play a chord on the keyboard If no chord abbreviation is shown no chord recogni tion mode has been selected by using the CHORD SCAN
189. AY STOP button to start the Song SEQUENCER 1 gt gt SELECT lt lt Ee gt G o p p D 6 While listening to the Song switch from Normal view to Track 1 8 and Track 9 16 view to see which tracks are playing To see if a track is playing look at its name and see if it changes color e Touch each track s channel strip to see each track s detail in the Track Info line SONG PLAY Gb Canyon Meter 34d M Trk Upper 1 EGrand Piano RX E Piano 121 818 8868 CR Tad THS THE Juke Lyrics SA Mi Sub Bou amp Mark A Mame i Scale Trk Upper 1 b Grand Piano RA D Piano 121 818 888 Selected track Assigned Sound Press it to Sound bank Program Change open the Sound Select win dow 56 Song Play Turning Song tracks on off e Alternatively you can see which type of Sound is assigned to each track in the Sound area of the Track 1 8 and Track 9 16 views Trk Upper 1 b Grand Piano RX B Piana 121 010 006 I Lyrics Bos amp Mark A H M o Octave Transpose Sound Bank icons Press to open the Sound Select window Turning Song tracks on off During playback you may wish to mute one or more tracks for example to sing along with the Song Note These changes or play an instrumental part live on the keyboard 0 will not be saved to the Muting unmuting Song tracks works exactly as with Style tracks See Turning Style tracks on off on Song To save changes page
190. AY THE WORK ELL MY FRIENDS THE TIME HAS COME STS Either touch them to select or use the SINGLE TOUCH SET TING buttons under the display page 14 TO RAISE THE ROOF AND Flute Ed Vibes Eg Mylon Guitar ElPiano Name of the Song in play Notes Exit from this page by pressing the EXIT button e When you switch to a different Sequencer using the SEQUENCER BALANCE slider the Lyrics shown in the display may change see Lyrics Markers Balance Link on page 159 Introduction Use these tabs to see Lyr ics of the Song assigned to Sequencer 1 Sequencer 2 or the Style page 148 Use these tabs to see Markers set for the Song assigned to Sequencer 1 or Sequencer 2 gt page 149 Use this tab to set the display options page 149 10 Front panel Front panel 7 r o 8 16 BEAT FADE IN OUT ASSIGNABLE SWITCH 2 1 O JOYSTICK This joystick triggers different functions depending on the direction it is moved towards X Move the joystick towards the left to lower the pitch or towards the right to raise it This is also called Pitch Bend Y Move the joystick forward to trigger Modulation Y Move the joystick backward to trigger the func tion assigned in Sound mode ASSIGNABLE SWITCH These are freely assignable switches see Pad Switch Assignable Switch on page 100 for information on how to assign functions to them Q MAST
191. BS i j i Lead to Delay Harm to Delay Reverb Level be EI FX Mix Lead to Delay knob gt GBL Lead to Delay effects send Harmony to Delay knob GBL Harmony to Delay effects send Reverb Level knob gt GBL PP Sets the overall volume of the Reverb effect FX Level knob GBL PP Sets the overall volume of the Delay effect Delay Type GBL P y Use this parameter to select a Delay type E Mono Mono delay D Stereo Maintains the panning of the sends a PingPongl Sends the lead voice to the left effect end only PingPong2 Sends the lead voice to the sends depending on the lead pan setting Delay BL Only available when Src Manual see below Use this parame ter to fine adjust in milliseconds the current delay time Feedback gt GBLY p Delay feedback amount Src Source gt GBLW Use this parameter to set the source of the tempo for the delay MIDI Tempo is received from MIDI Manual The delay time is set using the Delay parameter 218 Voice Processor Harmony and Tuning with the Voice Processor R Ratio GBL PP Sets the ratio between the tempo and the resulting delay For example 1 2 means that for each quarter note at the current tempo the delay plays two notes A value of 1 4 means that for each quarter note at the current tempo the delay plays four notes and so on Hi Freq Damp High Frequency Damping GBL PP High Frequency Damping Reverb Type GBL P
192. Bell Echo Pan 2 UJ 00 102 102 120 122 122 122 122 122 123 123 123 124 124 124 124 124 125 125 125 2 Guitar Cut Noise 2 3 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 Stream Bubble 5 2 3 Horse Gallop Bird Tweet 2 2 3 Door Creak Door Scratch 5 Car Engine 2 3 Car Stop Car Pass Car Crash Siren 5 125 125 125 Train 121 121 7 a g a a E 5 D sf O 0 Di a o c gt 2 m Q T T Oja D 5 D 2 ua 3 D Q GE lt o N N N N N NIN N N N oO ull ui AIN Starship Factory data 259 Sounds Bank order IN A A RER Lui 1 95 pensa E INC IT Machine Gan A ETICO a MEA Bud ECN INC 9 260 Factory data Sounds Program Change order Sounds Program Change order ll e x m 4 IA me um om 4 ee Fane Emme The following table lists all Pa800 Factory Sounds in order of 133 0 5 jEPiano2GM j EPian Y Bank Select Program Change number 121 1 5 DetmedEP2 EPian Y Legend The table also includes MIDI data used to remotely select the Sounds CC00 Control Change 0 or Bank Select MSB CC32 Control Change 32 or Bank Select LSB PC Program Change EM Bank Sound Performance Select button GER L5 EN EUN ET 12 GEES e ege Je wr s o EI CE 5 wr 2 9 AcPambek Ham wr 3 emm ame mf wr 4 9 tascHan
193. Change 100 Start Stop Style EUM Play Stop Seq 1 Play Stop Seq 2 Note The above Program Change numbers are given according to the 0 127 numbering system 292 MIDI Data MIDI Implementation Chart MIDI Implementation Chart KORG Pa800 OS Version 1 0 Aug 30 2006 Basic Channel Note Number Velocity Aftertouch Default Memorized Changed Default 3 Messages A X Altered kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk 0 127 0 127 True Voice FOO KKK K KKK RARA 0 127 Note On O 9n V 1 127 O 9n V 1 127 Poly Key Sequencer data only Control Change Program Change Bank Select MSB LSB Modulations 6 Data Entry MSB 38 Data Entry LSB 7 11 Volume Expression 10 91 93 Panpot A C FX Send B D FX Send 64 66 67 Damper Sostenuto Soft 65 5 Portamento On Off Portamento Time 71 72 73 Harmonic Content EG time Release Attack 74 75 Brightness Decay Time 76 77 78 Vibrato Rate Depth Delay 98 99 NRPN LSB MSB O O O O O O O O O O OO O 100 101 RPN LSB MSB 120 121 X All sounds off Reset all controllers O 0 127 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk EE BEER System Real Time Aux Messages Song Position Song Select Tune A A A A Clock A A O O 123 127 1 Sent and received when MIDI Filters In and Out are set to Off in Global mode 2 Drawbars settings Sound parameters Selection of SongBook entries 3 LSB MSB 00 00 Pitch Bend range 01 00 F
194. Chord Scanning Notes are received from the same chord scanning area dedicated to the Arranger For example if the Lower chord scanning mode is selected on the control panel notes for the Harmony are received from the Lower area of the keyboard Lower Notes are received from the Lower area of the keyboard Upper Notes are received from the Upper area of the keyboard Full Keyb Notes are received from the full range of the key board Harmony Voices Envelope The envelope lets you set a different Attack and Release time for the harmony voices Note The envelope can only work when the Latch On Off parameter is turned off see page 215 Attack GBL PP Sets the envelope attack time for harmony voices Available only in Notes and Chord mode o v c o i o Ser Q ec 216 Voice Processor Voice Processor Preset Harmony Voices Release gt GBLYP Sets the envelope release time for harmony voices Available only in Notes and Chord mode Level Level knob gt GBL PP Sets the overall harmony voices level Voice Processor Preset Harmony Voices The Voice Processor can add up to three Harmony Voices to the Lead voice Here you can adjust parameters for each individual voice GLOBAL Yoice Processor Preset Voice Select buttons Preset en Voice Select buttons V1 V3 gt GBL PP Use these buttons to select one of the three available voices for editing Individual Voice
195. Coil Stra Vel Pro Stra Gtr Slide Stra Chime 5 5 5 6 N 2 2 2 2 2 2 N 6 NI N N 8 8 New Stra Guitar Clean Guitar GM Clean Gtr Pro2 Clean Guitar 3 Det Clean Gtr Soft Overdrive Chorus Guitar Vintage S 2 N Proces E Guitar L amp R E Guitar 1 L amp R E Guitar 2 R amp R Guitar Funky Cut Gtr 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 9 7 7 7 7 N 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 27 2 8 28 254 Factory data Sounds Bank order me EA Wie aa 3 E Gtr Harmonics Dist Steel Gtr Feedback Guitar HON Ee MEN E Power Chords Mute Monster Disto Mute Dist Rhytmic Gtr 30 EE Nylon Gtr RX1 24 Nylon Gtr RX2 2 T ole 12 Strings RX 32 j 38 25 Pop SteelGtr RX1 25 Pop SteelGtr RX2 25 Funky Wah RX 27 Funk Stein RX2 121 121 15 121 121 121 121 3 SR KS 3 3 0 1 0 29 0 0 0 28 0 1 4 N N o 00 N N N 00 17 N 00 20 olaljajalaja a lt B o o O Q 0 0o o o o o D 9 ml o E lt E e DI DI oj ojojo DI 0 0o ct n ct 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 r o SS y i ololololo o m ES 2182 A E ee eee e 5 5 D A gt 3 GK SESS m a ESAE S Q SES d a S sisisi S55 JJ ul O lt Ka ai al al al al 3 lt a SIS o x X x x x x S Es A a N N w y 3 Ey un a Lo Ro 3 y N 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 1
196. Controls Lock on page 199 There are separate areas in the Global file that may be separately written to memory to avoid writing all global parameters at once when not needed Global Setup containing global parameters not linked to any single operating mode Style Play Setup containing global parameters for the Style Play mode not linked to the single Performance STS or Style Song Play Setup containing global parameters for the Song Play mode not linked to the single Song Sequencer Setup containing global parameters for the Sequencer mode not linked to the single Song Media Preferences containing preferences for the Media mode MIDI Setup containing the available MIDI Setups 1 e set tings for MIDI communication Voice Processor Setup containing lead voice setups for the Voice Processor Voice Processor Presets containing single presets for the Voice Processor Main page There is no main page in the Global edit mode When pressing EXIT you exit the Global mode and the underlying operating mode in the background is recalled Edit menu From any page of the Global mode press the MENU button to open the Global edit menu This menu gives access to the vari ous Global edit sections When in the menu select an edit section or press EXIT to exit the Global mode When in a page press EXIT to go back to current operating mode in the background Style Play Song Play Sequencer So
197. Custom Edit 1 List ncase of an entry based on Standard MIDI Files Associated Selected entry resource s AAA SONGBOOK T M mo chord B Book Book 9 Custom List Edit 1 A Edit 2 List Edit Selected entry This parameter shows the currently selected entry If it is blank the latest selected entry has been modified or no entry has been selected yet Associated resource Style or Standard MIDI File associated to the selected entry Song number Total number of entries in the SongBook list Filtered Song number This parameter shows the number of entries shown in the Book page after applying the selected filter If no filter is selected this matches the total number of entries in the SongBook list see previous parameter Custom List number This parameter shows the number of available Custom Lists Songs in the Current List Number of entries in the selected Custom List Page menu Press the page menu icon to open the menu Press a command to select it Press anywhere in the display to close the menu without selecting a command Se SongBook 169 Page menu Artist Genre Select this command to toggle between the Artist and Genre col umn on the SongBook list appearing in the Book and Custom List page Ascending Descending Select this command to toggle between the ascending and descending view order of the SongBook list The sorting order is selected with one of the followi
198. D 28 EH EH Drum Kit E 297 ER ER Drum Kit F 30 EN N 00 N 00 N P m COI Oil Oil Oil D Lol Lo y 2 ol D 0 2 ol olololec D Dm 0 9o w9 o 5 l c h Q Q 31l131 3 H vi Oil ml oi o Oo v D gt Sl la D un cioli5 i 4 e J a 5 oOlo la 2 9 u O NIN N O D un 3 Dol o D S gt 5 5S gt 5 gt D Dl wl n A N P N 00 N w N w N w S lt S3 S 3 3 2 2x oi imgi igo v wig 25 5 eic Q Q o o yis Ep N Y CH c 3 CH Lo A O o Lo 4 un n zl m o e 7 dE 3 z LIZ 5 mn S N DI 3 m 2 o UJ o o o LA HIT Voice D HIT Blocks ES HIT Misc amp SFX 1 D HIT Misc amp SFX 2 D SEO Percussion Aah EN EN EN EN Drum DrumBasSolo Perc FingerSnap 2 Hit it Bird 1 Drum Snare Solo 2 Perc Triang HH LA 3 Perc Latin 1 Perc Latin 2 Perc Latin 3 Laughing ES Uuh 6 ES Bird 2 i Drum 8 Bt Easy EN ES ES Drum 8 Bt Medium Drum Rock 1 ES GE Explosion GE Drum Rock 2 73 7 5 C e D ct Lo Perc Mix 7 7 Dist Slide 1 Perc Soft Dist Slide 2 7 7 Drum Brush 1 ae 7 Drum Brush 2 ae Helicopter Perc Conga Perc Conga Ride U c 3 2 L e o N Door Creak Laser Gun Perc Conga Mix Door Slam Machine Gun Drum Disco 3 Perc Conga Bongo Du ak cho afpersen fafa D orumFank2 14 pere shakeTomb 1 5 O 3 D PE 5 fe DW DW v v v v v v v v v v v V s S gt ALALA LA ALA A LAA LAA LA AA SSS OIO Ty
199. ECT and HARMONY buttons to turn their LED off and deacti vate the Voice Processor O Note Lowering the Audio In track volume helps avoiding feedback Feedback s caused by audio generated by the Pa800 returning to the audio circuitry via the microphone Singing with a connected microphone Connecting a microphone 4 Go to the main page of the Style Play or Song Play mode and select the Mic tab Be sure the Mic input is not muted STYLE PLAY z IT RN Mid High Mic panel To test the ib di microphone level be sure the Mic Mute e Effects and Talk buttons ar EZB Lee J EMects and tal 5 Sing into the microphone and adjust the input gain and the Microphone volume until you achieve the correct settings O Note You have a cor Adjust the input level by using the GAIN knob next to rect microphone volume GAIN the AUDIO INPUT 1 Sing into the microphone and setting when the AUDIO watch at the AUDIO IN LED on the control panel it IN LED stays green most ought to stay green If it goes orange too often or of the time The AUDIO even red turn down the input gain if it turns off too IN slider must be set AUDIO IN often increase the input gain No hint of distortion accordingly to compen es should be heard in the audio system when you sing sate a too loud or weak incoming signal ASSIGNABLE SLIDER While you adjust the gain gradually increase the Micro phone volume by using the corre sponding s
200. ELECT buttons The latest selected Sound for that bank will be selected Bank sets Selected set of banks top or bottom row of Factory Styles User banks Side tabs banks Use these tabs to select a bank of Sounds Fach tab corresponds to one of the SOUND SELECT buttons on the control panel Lower tabs pages Use these tabs to select one of the available pages in the selected bank If you press again the same SOUND PERFORMANCE SELECT button on the control panel the next page in the same bank is selected This way you do not need to press one of the corre sponding tabs in the display in order to select a different page Previous Next tabs Scroll the lower tabs to the left or the right when additional tabs are available but cannot be seen in the display Press one of these buttons in the display to select a Sound Unless the DISPLAY HOLD LED is turned on the window automati cally closes short after you select a Sound Program Change Program Change number Shown only when the Show Program Change number parameter is turned on in Global mode See page 201 Performance Select window Press the Performance area whereas it appears in the display or one of the PERFORMANCE SELECT buttons on the control panel provided the PERFORMANCE SELECT LED is lit to open the Performance Select window Use the PERFORMANCE SELECT buttons to go directly to the selected bank Press EXIT to exit from this page and go back t
201. ER VOLUME This slider controls the overall volume of the instrument both of the internal speakers the LEFT MONO and RIGHT outputs and the HEADPHONES output It does not control the volume of the 1 and 2 sub outputs This slider also controls the volume of the microphone con nected to the AUDIO INPUT 1 when it is sent to the Voice Pro SEQ SLIDER MODE POP BALLAD BALLROOM DANCE L 1 2 3 e LATIN LATINDANCE JAZZ INTRO 3 COUNT IN 9 9T 9T 9 A POWER d 00 GLOBAL MEDIA ASSIGN A O D BASS MANUAL CO ASSIGN B SINGLE TOUCH MEMORY INVERSION BASS RECORD TRACK SELECT STS1 STS2 STYLE SELECT BALANCE FUNK amp SOUL COUNTRY WORLD1 WORLD2 ROCK 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 TRAD MOVIE amp SHOW UNPLUG CONTEMP USER 1 USER 2 USER 3 START STO LZ cessor It does not control the signal entering the AUDIO INPUTs 1 and 2 when they are directly sent to the outputs without entering the Voice Processor see Audio Output Audio In on page 207 Warning At the maximum level with rich sounding Songs Styles or Sounds the internal speakers of Pa800 might distort during sig nal peaks Should this happen lower the Master Volume a little BALANCE While in Style Play and Song Play mode this slider balances the volume of the Keyboard tracks against the Style Accompani ment Pad and Song tracks This is a relative control whose e
202. Edit Filter on page 188 for more information Return to the Event Edit page 4 Use the Track pop up menu to select the track to edit The list of events contained in the selected track will appear in the display For more information on the event types and their values see above 5 Select the Position parameter Use the TEMPO VALUE controls or press the parameter again to open the numeric keypad to change the event s position 6 Select the Type parameter and use the TEMPO VALUE controls to change the event type Select the Value 1 and 2 parameters and use the TEMPO VALUE controls or press the parameter again to open the numeric keypad to modify the selected value 7 In the case of a Note event select the Length parameter and use the TEMPO VALUE controls or press the parame ter again to open the numeric keypad to change the event s length While the sequencer is not running you may press the Go Catch button in the display to go to a different measure see Go Catch above o Jg c Q e Q ia Q cc 188 Sequencer operating mode Event Edit Filter e While the sequencer is running you may use the Gol Catch button in the display to see the currently playing event in the display see Go Catch above Use SEQUENCER 1 transport controls to listen to the Song 8 Press the insert button in the display to insert an event at the Position shown in the d
203. Event Edit Filter page See Event Edit Filter on page 118 for more information on the filter page Pad Edit Quantize The quantize function may be used to correct any timing mis take after recording or to give the pattern a groovy feeling PAD REC Pad Edit Q y c Q i Q te Q ec Trans Delete f Copy fm Copy fm After setting the various parameters press Execute CV Chord Variation Use this parameter to select the Chord Variation for editing Resolution This parameter sets the quantization after recording Start End Tick Use these parameters to set the starting and ending points of the range to quantize Bottom Top Note Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard range to quantize 136 Pad Record mode Pad Edit Transpose Execute Press this button to execute the operation set in this page Pad Edit Transpose In this page you can transpose the selected track s Note After transposing please don t forget to readjust the Key Chord parameter in the main page of the Pad Record mode see page 134 PAD REC Pad Edit Delete f Copy fm Copy fm After setting the various parameters press Execute CV Chord Variation Use this parameter to select the Chord Variation for editing Value Transpose value 127 semitones Start End Tick Use these parameters to set the starting and ending points of the range to be transposed Bot
204. FT button pressed Select a second file or folder to be selected St Za 2 While keeping the SHIFT button pressed continue select ing the other files or folders to be selected 6 Release the SHIFT button To deselect the files or folders To deselect one or more file or folder without deselecting everything keep SHIFT pressed and touch the file or folder to be deselected To deselect everything select any other file or folder All selected files and folders will be deselected Overwriting existing files or folders When copying files a file or folder with the same name of a source element might be found in the target device In this case Pa800 asks you if you want to overwrite it When a duplicate file or folder is met the following dialog box appears Overwrite on Copy es res an Cancel The procedure is interrupted No The file or folder is not overwritten The source file or folder is not copied The procedure will continue with the other files and folders Yes The file or folder is overwritten The procedure will continue with the other files and folders Yes to All The file or folder is overwritten Any following duplicate file or folders will be overwritten as well without this dialog box appearing again The procedure will continue with the other files and folders Media edit mode Erase 233 Erase The Erase function lets you erase files and folders from the devices
205. Fretless D Bass 121 883 835 Style tracks 3 To return to Normal view press the TRACK SELECT button again Turning Style tracks on off You may easily turn on or off any Style track while you are playing For example try muting all accompaniment tracks while drum and bass continue to play 1 While the Style is playing touch anywhere in the ACCOMP track s chan nel strip to select the track volume value highlighted then touch it again to set the track to Mute Mute the ACCOMP track All accompani ment tracks will go silent apart from Drum Percussion and Bass 2 To set tracks back to the Play status press the Mute icon on the ACCOMP track Set the ACCOMP track to Play All accompaniment tracks will return to their original vol umes 3 To mute unmute each single Style track press TRACK SELECT to switch to the Style Tracks view 4 Press the TRACK SELECT button again to go back to the Normal view O Note While in the Normal view of the Style Play mode you can see Style tracks grouped in just three complex tracks To see each Style track as individual tracks just press the TRACK SELECT button Selecting and playing Styles 49 Adding harmony notes to your righthand melody with the ENSEMBLE function Adding harmony notes to your right hand melody with the ENSEMBLE function Chords played with your left hand may be applied to the right hand melody 1 Press the
206. Gb Canyon Meter 3d H Track name Press TRACK SELECT again to return to Normal view Key board tracks See Main page on page 144 Songs area Despite a different layout it works as the Song area in the Nor mal view Selected Track Info area This line lets you see the Sound assigned to the selected track Not only it is shown on the main page but also in several edit pages Trk Upper 1 b Grand Piano RA E Piano 121 818 888 Sound bank Track name Sound name Program Change Track name Name of the selected track Sound name Sound assigned to the selected track Press anywhere in this area to open the Sound Select window and select a different Sound Sound bank Bank the selected Sound belongs to Program Change Program Change number sequence Bank Select MSB Bank Select LSB Program Change Sounds area This area lets you see the octave transposition and Sound bank icon for the eight tracks currently displayed O Mo or opc or or dH oj t os mE 2a et E PRA Ain ae m a z K g e e TTT i Song track octave Sound name transpose Song track octave transpose Non editable Octave transpose of the corresponding track To edit the octave transpose go to the Mixer Tuning Tuning edit page of the Song Play mode see Mixer Tuning Tuning on page 92 for more details Sound bank s icon This picture illustrates the bank the current Sound belongs to Touch an icon a first
207. Haegr Esrand ano 9 3 ven Jelli IC E EECH CTI 178 9 5 ESCHER po ume A posses ar po Honky Wide MEDION 3 Harpsi 16 RX Synth Clav RX CTS Ec E 5 ECO EN 4 INE ETS E ON CI Bright PianoWide Piano Pad Piano Pad 1 E Grand Wide Grand amp FM Stack Harpsi Octave Clav Wah RX Chorus Piano Piano Layers Piano amp Vibes Harpsi Wide Harpsi Korg Pulse Clav Clav Snap Sticky Clav Grand RX DEMO Bank E Piano Factory data 251 Sounds Bank order vn E EI Classic Wurly 1 323 0 A FM Pad E P 5 ele Studio EP Suit E Piano 2 Dyno Tine EP 1 Stereo Dig EP Classic Dig EP Classic Wurly 2 FM Stack E P Thin E Piano Pro Dyno EP Pro Stage EP Dyno Tine EP 2 Hybrid EP Phantom Tine Soft Wurly E Piano 1 GM R amp B E Piano Bell E Piano 1 Bell E Piano 2 E Piano 2 GM DW8000 EP Sweeping EP Detuned EP 1 60 s E Piano EP1 Veloc sw Syn Piano X Detuned EP 2 EP2 Veloc sw Hard Wurly EP Phase Vel Wurly EP Legend z E OD gt 2 3 D O D m y y o e ar o 5 c rn O SE 0 lt N N UJ D y 3 A 3 Ed b el Lo Do m 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 LA Vibraphone 3 Vibrap Wide Marimba GM Marimba Wide Marimba Key Off Monkey Skuls Xylophone GM 2 3 Balaphon Celesta GM Glockenspiel GM Music Box GM Sistro Orgel Digi Bell
208. Hame Genre Cen groovy lowe Ballad GES Could you be love Reggae CE Greatest love all Ballad EE How deep is love Ballad CED Love letters sand Ballad ed Love s theme Add to Vist Select Book Book Custom List Lyrics Inf Edit 1 f Edit 2 List Edit STS uis 5 To see the whole SongBook database again press the Filtered check box again to make the check mark disappear The SongBook 63 Adding entries Adding entries You can add your own entries to the SongBook database 1 Go to the Style Play or Song Play mode depending on the type of entry you want to add to the SongBook database N Select the Style or Standard MIDI File to be added to the SongBook Assign the selected Song to Sequencer 1 Only Songs assigned to Sequencer 1 will be saved in the SongBook entry Songs assigned to Sequencer 2 will not be saved LA Edit Keyboard and Style tracks as you prefer by selecting different Sounds and Effects or editing any other parameter Please note that changes to a Standard MIDI File s tracks will not be saved as SongBook data Data included in the Standard MIDI File will always be considered I Select a different Voice Processor Preset if you like Ul When your entry is ready press the SONGBOOK button then the Book Edit 1 tab to see the Book Edit 1 page Name of the Style SMF or KAR file memorized with the entry provided Write Current Resource is selected when saving it Entry s param
209. IO IN LED indicator on the front panel to see when the audio level is correctly set Off No signal entering Green Low to mid level signal entering If the LED turns off too often the input gain is too low Use the GAIN controls and or the source device s vol ume to raise the input level Orange Slight overload in the signal path This is fine if it turns on only on signal peaks Red Clipping is occurring in the signal path Use the GAIN controls and or the source device s volume to lower the input level See the Singing with a connected microphone chapter on page 68 and the Audio Output Audio In section on page 207 for more information on connecting and setting the inputs and the audio source MIDI connections You can play the internal sounds of your Pa800 with an external controller i e a master keyboard a MIDI guitar a wind control ler MIDI accordion or a digital piano You can also control other MIDI devices with the Pa800 or con nect it to a computer for use with an external sequencer See the MIDI chapter on page 240 for more information on MIDI connections Damper Pedal Connect a Damper Sustain pedal to the DAMPER connector on the back panel Use a Korg PS1 or DS1H footswitch pedal or a compatible one To switch the Damper polarity see Damper Polarity on page 202 Demo Listen to the built in Demo Songs to appreciate the power of the Pa800 There are sever
210. If you wish to save your setup settings just select the Write Glo bal Voice Processor Setup command from the page menu see page 211 Harmony Settings This parameter is a general setting for the Harmony section voices that is saved in the Voice Processor Setup It will not change when a different Preset is selected Pitch Bend Range gt GBL s Only available in Notes mode Sets the range in semitones that MIDI pitch bend information will alter the pitch of the harmo nies in Notes mode Pan Volume Pan knob gt GBL 5 Adjusts panning for the Lead voice L64 panned fully left to R63 panned fully right Level knob GBL This parameter sets the Lead voice level Off Lead voice is turned off 30dB OdB Lead voice level Voice Processor Setup Dynamics EQ In this page you can adjust parameters for the Compressor Gate and Equalizer applied to the Lead and Harmony voices Li Lead Harm Dun El Delay Assign Dyn gt GBLWs Compressor Gate assignment The options are Off Lead Har mony Harmony or Lead The compressor has auto makeup gain so there are no output levels problems when selecting a dif ferent option Dynamics The Voice Processor has dynamics processing optimized for vocals Thresh knob gt GBL Compressor Threshold Range 0 to 60 dB Ratio knob gt GBL Compression ratio Range 1 1 1 to 64 1 Gate knob gt GBL s Gate Threshold Range Off
211. Il Gm 3 8 pemeeEme sl wr s remeras mes IL 3m O8 8 Wemeete IL Lum 9 5 Wumweew mama hn y ro trombones Res Pra 1 5 Bark trumpet reenen y vat rasa es ali 5 Trumpet Over Wume T vat 3 M Fats IL wr 4 5 Wwemweter roetan Gm 5 Bestes es MEME MENE CEEE o 9 WewhHomsw ps T lee Res ECE e Factory data 265 Sounds Program Change order ccoo ccs2 Pc Name E E ccoo EE wes ank Tee Ca e s es es GROS p 8 ECT Te IT Ca s Bmw es tet te Bertone rom fox wr s sr wes el tet 2 1 ETE EC wr ps mee es er Baritone saxtro f wr m s Wweeme em S enonsa pm o wr m p sp Powertres es 59 foeon Woxwni wr m s mmus ews 59 pages Woodwind wr m p sp Storatosres es a rappen Wownd e Lm NN MON ME wr m sr posteas es Per s ps em el wr m p sp wea el ene II RE NM MON NN E NUM A NN B pe NN EN Lm KS KS m Tat rateros quaes a reson uas S ressens uas a ETE Bes MANE ee KS SS KS SS KS Ge 121 71 Section Winds 2 Woodwind Clarinet Ens Woodwind RES T eeng Woodwind Ti Fok Cerne Woodwind NM SS T Reeds sexes Woodwind KZNNUN T Meme Wound wr 1 smwess es D n lge LT Ca 9 7 prom Weed Y Lm 1 7 Smet orcs woodwind wr s meme ews ra le Wee wr s amines
212. Keyboard tracks playing in different zones of the keyboard For example you may have french horns and woodwinds playing in the center range of the keyboard while only woodwinds play on the higher range Velocity range is useful to create a sound made of up to three dynamic layers assigning each of the Upper tracks to a different dynamic range As an example you may assign the El Piano 1 Program to the Upper 1 and the El Piano 2 Program to the Upper 2 track Then set Upper 1 to Bottom 0 Top 80 and Upper 2 to Bot tom 81 Top 127 The El Piano 1 will play when playing softer the El Piano 2 when playing louder Trk Upper 1 Grand Piano E Piana 121 883 888 Upper Tracks Key amp Velocity Range Bottom Key Bottom Vel MIC TH LOWER UPPERS UPPER2 UPPERL Top Bottom Key Key Range PERF STS This parameter pair sets the Top and Bottom key range for the track C 1 G9 Selected key Top Bottom Vel Velocity Range PERF STS This parameter pair sets the Top and Bottom dynamic range for the track 0 Lowest velocity value 127 Highest velocity value Play Mute icon PERF STS Tracks play mute status Play status The track can be heard Mute status The track cannot be heard o V c Q i o tia Q cc 98 Style Play operating mode Keyboard Ensemble Ensemble Keyboard Ensemble Ensemble This page lets you program the Ensemble function This func tion harmonizes the right ha
213. M Tax Press one of the side tabs to select a different Sound bank DIGITAL DRAWBARS BELL ACCORDION ORGAN Press one of the lower tabs to A Previous and Next Page pair of select a different Sound page button may appear in this area when more than five pages are available 4 Select a Sound from the Sound Select window SOUND SELECT Grand Piano Trk Upper 1 E De rgan K E Piano Guitar i G d Pi Strings ran Tanu ETA Eis The Sound Select window closes and the main screen appears 1 again with the selected Sound assigned to the Upper 1 track EE Lol o tee al MIC IM LOWER UFFERS UPFERZ UPFPERI STS Hame 5 Play the Sound on the keyboard 0 Note You DISPLAY can leave the Sound Select 2 window open in the display even after selecting a Sound Just press the DISPLAY HOLD button to turn its LED on In this case press the EXIT button to exit from a window Playing Sounds 33 Playing two or three Sounds at the same time Playing two or three Sounds at the same time You can layer all three Upper tracks and play them on the keyboard Please note how the FAITE icon appears in the Upper 2 and Upper 3 status boxes These tracks will not be heard 1 Press the ng icon in the Upper 2 status box to set the Upper 2 track to play 2 Play the keyboard Imi i A After pressing in t
214. MIDI messages from the Pa800 keyboard and controller s data to the MIDI application running on the computer PA800 SOUND This allows for transmission of MIDI messages from the MIDI application running on the computer to the internal tone generator of the Pa800 2096 Installing the Korg USB MIDI Driver Mac OS X Installing KORG USB MIDI Driver Mac OS X Installing KORG USB MIDI Driver Insert the included CD into your CD ROM drive Please double click on the KORG USB MIDI Driver pkg in the KORG USB MIDI Driver folder inside the CD ROM to run the installer Install it according to the instructions appearing on screen Je Driver s ports After installation the following ports will be shown in you MIDI application e g sequencer among the other MIDI devices PA800 KEYBOARD This allows for reception of MIDI messages from the Pa800 keyboard and controller s data to the MIDI application running on the Mac PA800 SOUND This allows for transmission of MIDI messages from the MIDI application running on the Mac to the internal tone generator of the Pa800 Shortcuts You can keep the SHIFT button pressed and press another but ton on the control panel to directly jump to an edit page Here is the list of shortcuts ee CN Any operating modes Tempo Change When a list of Songs or SongBook entries is shown Next Previous alphabetical section It also works in Disk mode when the Name
215. N or USB Device port for the Lower track For example if you select the 1 value a received C4 will play a C5 on the Pa800 This parameter may be useful to many MIDI accordion players whose MIDI interface may transmit on an unexpected octave Midi In Velocity Value gt GBL Use this parameter to set a fixed velocity dynamics value for all received MIDI notes This is useful when playing the Pa800 with an organ or a MIDI Accordion Normal Normal velocity values are received 40 127 All received velocity values are converted to the selected value Voice Processor Midi controls Midi In Channel p GBLMd Notes received on this channel are sent to the Harmony section of the Voice Processor Octave Transpose In gt GBLMa Octave transpose for all notes received via MIDI by the Har mony section of the Voice Processor In Note Range High gt GBLMd In Note Range Low gt GBLMd These parameters are the lowest and highest notes received by the Harmony section of the Voice Processor Notes received out of this range are not recognized MIDI MIDI In Channels In this page you can assign Pa800 tracks to any of the MIDI IN channels GLOBAL MIDI 3 zen 1 Tr a1 D ha Ki D D D D R R D IM D Si 12 Setup Midi In 8 Midi Cut Gon contra ME Channels gt GBLM You can assign to each channel one of the following tracks Off No track assigned Lower Lower track Upper 1 3 One of
216. NING buttons see page 15 Page menu icon Press the page menu icon to open the menu See Page menu on page 160 for more information Songs area This is where Song names are shown together with parameters depending on the selected type of Song Song type icon Song name Current mea sure Seq 1 2 A different Song may be assigned to each of the two onboard sequencers Seq 1 and Seq 2 Each sequencer has its own parameters Song type icon Songs of different types can be assigned to the sequencers This icon shows the file type qi Standard MIDI File often abbreviated as SMF file extension MID or KAR The SMF MID is the industry standard song format used by Pa800 as its basic Song format when recording a new Song A MIDI Karaoke File KAR is an extension of the SMF format Only assignable to Sequencer 1 A Jukebox file file extension JBX can be assigned to Sequencer 1 but its name is not shown in this area The JBX icon appears together with the name of the cur rently selected Song in the Jukebox list Note To create or edit a Jukebox file go to the Juke box Edit page see page 156 Song name Displays the name of the Song assigned to the corresponding sequencer If the sequencer is already selected white background press the Song name to open the Song Select window If the sequencer is not selected dark background first select it then press the Song name to ope
217. Open Slap Congal Lo Glissando 467 Conga1 Lo Muffled 468 Conga1 Lo Closed Conga1 Lo Closed Slap 470 Conga1 Lo Heel 471 Congal Lo Toe 472 Conga1 Hi Basstone mf 473 Conga1 Hi Basstone f 474 Conga1 Hi Open mf 475 Conga1 Hi Open Slap 476 Conga1 Hi Muffled 477 Conga1 Hi Closed 478 Conga1 Hi Closed Slap 479 Conga1 Hi Heel 480 Congal1 Hi Toe Factory data Drum Samples Semple Teen IE Ir ar stonge rr EME CI ege Jr 45 onone Ir 4m cmwrHMiSm Ir e emer Jr enge Ir ege Jr ERC a mge Jr 422_ auintor eed Jr 45 ounor cosas e ICC e 45 auintozBesstone 17 ass _ Quintcz Openme e er oumoz Open Flam 6 SR e ES SS SS SS CS SS SS SS NM EINE SS CSC 275 Bongo1 Lo Flam Bongo1 Lo MuffledFlam SW Bongor tostekBounce 6 Sw pongortoringeral 6 SS BongortoGuptone 6 sw Bongottesiap been 6 S BongotHiOpen 5 Sw Report f e Bongo1 Hi Hightone EN Sm BongotHiOpenFiam 6 Sm Bongot Hi fingen 5 Sm been LE Su Bongot Hi sudden 6 Sm BongorHistek dge t 9 S BongorHistekBouncs 6 SS Bongot Hi cutone 6 S pongormisap f e SW feorgo2toopena 6 Sm pongozto open Bongo2 Lo Mute ME Bongo2 Hi Open a ECH SS SES RS m ongoztoreet 17 55 eono to mume 6 o leie Ir SS sonos f 6 sm Bongos tose 5 lenger Ir sw Bongos ias 6 541 Bongo3 Hi Stick1 e aleng 5 276 Factor
218. Pa800 full featured sampler Press the STYLE PLAY and SONG PLAY buttons together to select the Demo mode This mode lets you listen to some Demo Songs to let you under stand the sonic power of the Pa800 Q GLOBAL This button recalls the Global edit environment where you can adjust various global settings This edit environment overlaps any operating mode that still remains active in the background Press EXIT to go back to the underlying operating mode O MEDIA This button recalls the Media edit environment where you can execute various operations on files and storage devices Load Save Format etc This edit environment overlaps any oper ating mode that still remains active in the background Press EXIT to go back to the underlying operating mode SINGLE TOUCH This button turns the Single Touch and Variation STS Link functions on or off On When a different Style or the same again is selected a Single Touch Setting STS1 is auto matically selected The Keyboard sounds and effects will change along with the Style sounds and effects Pad sounds will change too Variation STS Link function activated This func tion makes each Variation recall the correspond ing STS when selected For example select Variation 2 and STS 2 will be automatically recalled select Variation 3 and STS 3 will be automatically recalled Flashing Off When you select a different Style or the same again the Style sound
219. Pad Record mode and in some Pad Edit pages While in Record mode cancels the latest recorded data and restores the previous situation Selected a sec ond time it restores recorded data again Redo function Pad Record mode Export SMF 141 Delete Pad Track Only available in the Main page of the Pad Record mode Select this command to delete the Pad track Overdub Step Recording Only available in the Main page of the Pad Record mode Select this command to open the Overdub Step recording window see the Style Record chapter in the User s Manual for more informa tion Exit from Record Select this command to exit from Record without saving changes to the Pad Write Pad dialog box Open this window by selecting the Write Pad item from the page menu Here you can save the recorded or edited Pad to memory Write Pad 21 User Bank 1 Parameters saved in the Pad are marked with the pap symbol through the user s manual Name gt PAD Name of the Pad to be saved Press the Ti Text Edit button next to the name to open the Text Edit window Pad Bank Target Pad bank Only User banks can be selected Pad Target Pad location in the selected bank Use TEMPO VALUE controls to select a different location Note A User Pad is usually prompted when writing a Pad How ever you can overwrite a Factory Pad when the Factory Style and Pad Protect parameter is left unchecked see page Disk gt Prefer
220. Play status The track can be heard Track names Mute status The track cannot be heard Under the buttons a label for each track is shown Style Edit Delete All This function lets you quickly delete a selected Style Element or Chord Variation or the whole Style STYLE REC Edit eg IRUM FERC BASS ACC ACCZ Trans After setting the various parameters press Execute Track All All tracks of the selected Style Style Element or Chord Variation Drum Acc5 Single track of the selected Style Style Element or Chord Variation E CV Style Element Chord Variation Use these parameters to select the Style Element and Chord Vari ation for editing All All Style Elements i e the whole Style When E Track All and CV All the whole Style is deleted and all parameters are set to the default status Varl CountIn Single Style Element V1 CV1 CI CV2 Single Chord Variation Execute Press this button to execute the operation set in this page Track status icon Status of tracks Press this icon to change the status Play status The track can be heard Track names Mute status The track cannot be heard Under the buttons a label for each track is shown Style Edit Copy Here you can copy a track Chord Variation or Style Element inside the same Style or from a different one Furthermore you can copy a whole Style Warning The Copy operation deletes all data at the target l
221. Press OK to confirm or Cancel to abort 3 Select the folder containing the type of data you wish to Warning After confirming the same bank in the target folder save and press Open to open it The list of contained banks is deleted is shown Saving a single item Mad SE You can save a single User item with a single operation BANKB2 STY 21 08 06 18 05 1 If saving to an external device connect the device to one of BANK STY 21 88 06 18 85 the USB Host ports BANKBM STY ER 2 The full content All of the internal memory is already BANKBS STY 21 88 86 18 85 shown Select it and press Open to open it A list of User data types appear each type is a separate folder 4 Select the bank to be saved and press Save To to confirm the selection The list of files of the target device is shown GLOBAL 21 85 86 18 51 PAD 21 45 46 18 87 PERFORM 21 45 46 15 07 SONGBOOK 21 45 46 18 87 44 80 66 11 14 SOUND 21 88 86 15 8 11 85 86 18 18 3 Select the folder containing the type of data you wish to save and press Open to open it The list of contained banks Open Hew SET Save Geforen 5 If needed select a different target device by using the BANKB1 STY 21 08 06 18 05 Device pop up menu When the target device is selected its content will appear in the display 44 45 46 11 88 BARKA2 5TY 21 45 46 16 85 1 BANKB3 STY 6 Atthis point you can BANKB4 STY e Press the New SET button and create a new
222. RMANCE SOUND SELECT button 1 3 If loading from an external device connect the device to one of the USB Host ports Select the source device by using the Device pop up menu When device is selected its content will appear in the dis play If the folder you are looking for is inside another folder select this latter and press the Open button to open it Press the Close button to go back to the parent folder Select the SET folder containing the data you wish to load and press Open to open the SET folder A list of User data appears Global Performance SongBook Sounds Style GLOBAL B4 Ba a6 11 868 PAD 44 88 86 11 88 PERFORM a4 a5 46 11 05 SOUND 4 88 86 11 88 STYLE B4 Ba a6 11 05 Prefer Save Copy Erase ff Format f Utility ences USE Select the folder containing the type of data you are looking for and press Open to open the selected folder A list of User and Favorite Style banks appears ype Hame Bal eepa zt Bal erno zy Bal useRas sTY e41K 23 48 06 22 27 ZK 23 48 06 22 27 3j48K 23 48 46 22 28 Prefer Save Copy Erase f Format f Utility ences USE Select the bank you are looking for and press Load to con firm the selection A dialog box appears asking you to select one of the available User or Favorite Style banks in memory Ui user ai In the page above the previously selected Style bank will be loaded into the bank 1 USER1 button in memory Th
223. RX Trigger Mode dao ao e Tension E DRUM PERC BASS ACEi ACC ACCS ALCA ACES When in this page press the corresponding button on the con trol panel to select a Style Element VARIATION1 ENDING3 Track Type STYLE Use this parameter to set the type of the corresponding track Drum track This type of track is not transposed by the arranger and is used for Drum Kits made of Drum sounds It can be affected by the Drum Drum Mapping of the Style Play mode see Drum Mapping Var 1 Var 4 on page 99 Perc Percussion track This type of track cannot be transposed and is used for Drum Kit made of Percussion sounds It is NOT affected by the Drum Mapping Bass Bass track This type of track always plays the root when changing chord Acc Accompaniment track This type of track can be used freely for melodic or harmonic accompani ment patterns STYLE This setting lets you define how Bass and Acc type tracks are retriggered when the chord is changed Trigger Mode Off Each time you play a new chord current notes will be stopped The track will remain silent until a new note will be encountered in the pattern Rt Retrigger The sound will be stopped and new notes matching the recognized chord will be played back Rp Repitch New notes matching the recognized chord will be played back by repitching notes already playing There will be no break in the sound This is very useful on Guitar and
224. SPLIT button in the KEYBOARD MODE section to split the key board The Ensemble function only works in Split mode KEYBOARD MODE SPLIT FULL UPPER 2 Press the ENSEMBLE button to turn its LED on ENSEMBLE 3 Play chords with the left hand and single notes in the right hand Notice how the right hand is automatically harmonized according to the chords composed with your left hand 4 To select a different harmonization style keep the SHIFT button pressed and press the ENSEMBLE button to open the Ensemble page This is a fast shortcut to recall this page The longer would have been entering the Edit mode by pressing the MENU button then going to the Ensemble page STYLE PLAY Keyboard Ensemble E While the Ensemble parameter is SHM EE selected use the TEMPO VALUE con trols to select one of the available harmonization types TEMPON MUE wel Ensemble Trk Assign omy HIN LOWER UPPER UPPER UPPER Ebd key Control KMelocitu 50 Selecting and playing Styles Adding harmony notes to your righthand melody with the ENSEMBLE function 5 When the right harmonization type has been selected press the EXIT but ton to go back to the main page STYLE PLAY Keyboard Ensemble a Trk Upper 1 b Sweet Fretless B Bass 121 883 835 n Black Ensemble Trk Assign HI IN LOWER UPPERS UPPERS UPPERL Kbd key Control Velocity STYLE
225. T OUT This connector sends MIDI data generated by Pa800 s keyboard controllers and or the internal sequencer Connect it to an expander s or com puter s MIDI IN THRU This connector sends an exact copy of the data received on the IN connector Use it to cascade the Pa800 with other MIDI instruments AUDIO OUTPUT Use these unbalanced connectors to send the audio signal sound to a mixer a PA system a set of powered monitors or your hi fi system To set the output for each track or the routing for the audio inputs see the Audio Output section starting from page 206 LEFT RIGHT These are the main stereo outputs Use them to send the final stereo mix to an external device Connect either of them to output the signal in mono Set the output level with the MASTER VOLUME slider Note The Voice Processor can only be output from these connectors 1 2 These are the sub outputs Use them to create a stereo sub mix of just some tracks or to output just a single instrument to be mixed alone or to be processed or amplified externally Note The MASTER VOLUME slider has no effect on these outputs Signal is sent dry with no effects applied Note The Voice Processor cannot be routed to these outputs AUDIO INPUT Use these connectors to input another keyboard synthesizer a CD or MP3 player or one or two dynamic microphones To con nect a condenser microphone you need an external phantom power supply
226. T 9 Ca s m amp mw r fees tet 0 5 Vin stings vocal Par s E reens feos S tet 8 ETC EC e e SS 39 umts wr 5 meesms fess Gm Women reien x 3 5 seems fess D 8 Vemaves forns wr s 5 large fess E ao eesw EC v Ca 5 5 ewm ee S tet 9 O ETT ETC Y xm s 5 weserheher es ro M Tremolos Gm stings vocal v wr 7 5 Weesmsi feos D nn Iessen Stings vocal Y xm 9 3 smssieu es D Pez Ensemble EC Lx 1 35 seen fas E a seeker fas E xr 3 EI ee S Pe wr s 35 smm amp mem Js LI ELIO IE wr s 3 S9memss el RIO SS NN NEN EE EN mH NN EN NE EN NE EE ENE EN EE mE mE NEN mE NN mE EN m EN EM EN EN ao ow sewsc w ps as Sings Bras S wa ow ams 00 TEE as sss esst Y wc eee e pmo o sees semesavos So ae e a ile ee wa eessems ess ms M Tea Sep tases ep NE wp sees e O pmo o a mtv cmo o Sym Bass Warm B 0 a Symphonie S woo o sememe 0o ex o pom on oa rrsembieasoo sumgsavo wee fs Y pmo o char Sings smmesavoa Cw Hemmer ex py pmo os O wo s mms pes o moo os aaa Ga o sese m Y pom os oa sees tos sivo Ga 5 o5 Rsswee es O om pos ow or ageet seso Ga o ym Bosses es o pmo os os 8 te smesavoal we s o eeme e A seio i eege wow o Joss x pomo ose Porches S wow o Joss m pomo oa oeste smgsavoa
227. This page split in four panes that can be selected by means of the corresponding side tabs contains all the available locks sometimes grouped under just a single lock Locks prevent parameter values to be changed when loading data from a stor age device or selecting a different Performance Style or STS GLOBAL General Controls Transp Lock Tuning pane GLOBAL General Controls ca e PICA PICA enl Transp Lock Control pane GLOBAL General Controls Tunina Control Tranzp Lock FX amp Voice Processor pane GLOBAL General Controls ca fca Aca Aca een Transp Lock Style pane Global edit mode General Controls Lock 199 Locks gt GBL All the available locks Lock them to prevent changes due to loading or selecting different elements These locks are also found in various other pages next to the locked parameter Hint To save the status of the various parameters as a fixed status for the Pa800 save all the parameters to Performance 1 of bank 1 automatically selected when turning on the instrument and save these locks to the Global Master Transpose When locked master transpose is not automati cally changed when selecting a different Perfor mance or Style See Master transpose on page 83 Style Performance Master Transpose Lock When closed this lock prevents a Style change to modify the Master Transpose When open changing a Style may also change th
228. Trim 121 083 088 ACC Track Reset buttons Use these buttons to reset De flatten equalization for the corresponding track Reset All Tracks button Press this button to reset De flatten equalization for all tracks Bypass PERF PERF STS Check any of these checkboxes to bypass equalization for the corresponding track When bypassed equalization has no effect on the track but all parameters are preserved When the box is unchecked equalization is activated again with the original set tings Input Trim PERF PERF STS This knob allows you to limit the level of the signal passing through the equalizer Extreme equalization values can overload the audio circuits and lead to distortion This control lets you set equalization as desired and at the same time avoid overloading Play Mute icon PERF PERF STS Track s play mute status Play status The track can be heard Mute status The track cannot be heard o y c o i o Ser Q cc 92 Style Play operating mode Mixer Tuning Tuning Mixer Tuning Tuning This page is where you can set the octave transpose and fine tun ing for each track Plus you can program the Pitch Bend range for each track Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from the Keyboard to the Style tracks and vice versa STYLE PLAY Mixer Tuning sa Trk Upper 1 Grand Piano E Piana 121 883 888 i MIC DWER EG STYLE PLAY Mixer Tuning E
229. USER3 are location where you can load new Styles from an external device or save newly created or edited Styles Like the User Styles Styles in the FAVORITE banks are loca tions where you can load new Styles from an external device or save newly created or edited Styles In addition you can edit the names of these banks as it appears in the display so that you can have a custom set of Styles See The Favorite banks on page 105 Each button Style bank contains four pages each with up to eight Styles Repeatedly press a bank button to cycle between the available pages If you keep the SHIFT button pressed and press one of the buttons of this section the Write Style Performance win dow appears in the display and you can save the current Style Performance see Write Style Performance dialog box on page 105 FADE IN OUT When the Style or Song is not playing press this button to start it with a volume fade in the volume goes from zero to the max imum When the Style or Song is playing back press this button to stop it with a volume fade out the volume gradually decreases You don t need to press START STOP or PLAY STOP to start or stop the Style or Song Note This does not work in Sequencer mode INTRO 1 3 COUNT IN buttons PERF PERF SB These buttons set the arranger in Intro mode After pressing one of these buttons start the Style and it will begin with the selected in
230. V Mme EA AA ES E 3 CIA CCOO E EIN AECI CIC EN IET MIA RYO faf CIO EN EI MECA ECTS mr EIN CTO EIA CIO NN Kg NN IEA MEC CTA EN INC e pers A 5 sospelOrgon A COTE NN EIN COTO E CIN RS ES Drawbars Org GM Drawbar Org 2 r A pwason a a e Duogn apa EELER CAI 1 4 e omowa o ae organ mia Ys 6 organi a poon CP T e pooma a 5 35 Rota Organ Jafe r emm a Pipe Tutti 4 WC Church Organ GM 121 0 19 RSR ap ss a SES Church Pipes Church Oct Mix Full Pipes Pipe Flute 1 Pipe Flute 2 par organ A Positive Organ 7 3 9 CTO E EI EI EII EN pes Per Omen Woxtegend AA CTO CN EI EIN CITO EN INE MEN ration Orgon A pomeres mr ofe TS fa TO faa EIA Wmeweogns E mewown A 5 5 Pipe Mixture emm ES eS CO EA NE EIA TS E 9 IO E EN EIN TC E x IA Bank Digi Organ CAC E IN II Bank Guitar woar A CIN EA yin Side pro a saww a S 5 single cal Pro par Stereo Dist aa a Weser Set a mec a 5 Pazza Sierro a CI A EECHER ion Bosa aa a SeanihGutar E a Www m T 5 T Bist Gute a 3 mosie ajoa sacian a pas en m 8 pa Clean Mute Gtr 21 6 28 Distortion GtrGM 423 1 o 30 T Ac Guitar KeyOff 5 Steel Guitar 3 Steel Guitar 2 ERN ESER a 9 9 RM L9 a A s a 2 y A un o z S o amp c C ct 8 a NJ Nylon Guitar 2 NJ I 7 7 Clean Jazz 1 Clean Gtr Pro1 Muted Guitar GM Dist Clean Gtr 3 Nylon Gui
231. Variation from a different Pad Fur thermore you can copy a whole Pad Warning The Copy operation deletes all data at the target location overwrite PAD REC Pad Edit Trans Delete f Copy fm After setting the various parameters press Execute Note If you copy too many events on the same tick the Too many events message appears and the copy operation 1s aborted Note When you copy over an existing Chord Variation Program Change data 1s not copied to leave the original Sounds unchanged for that Chord Variation From Pad Choose this option to select the source Pad to copy the Chord Variation from Press the Select button to open the Pad Select window and select the source Pad From CV Chord Variation Use this parameter to select the source Chord Variation All All Chord Variations 1 e the whole Pad You can t change the target that is automatically set to All CV1 CV6 Single Chord Variation To CV Chord Variation Use this parameter to select a target Chord Variation inside the current Pad CV1 CV6 Target Chord Variation Automatically set to All if the From CV parameter is also set to All Execute Press this button to execute the operation set in this page Pad Track Controls Sound Expression In this page you can assign a Sound to the Pad track adjust its Volume CC 07 and Expression CC 11 values and set vari ous other parameters like the Keyboard Range Track Typ
232. Write Style dialog box see Write Style dialog box on page 128 and save it to memory To exit the Style Record mode without saving any change select the Exit from Record command from the page menu or press the RECORD button Q U c o Se o oO cc 114 Style Record mode Style Record procedure Step Record procedure 1 While in the main page of the Style Record mode select the Overdub Step Recording command from the page menu to enter the Overdub Step Record mode 2 The Pos parameter shows the current position If you do not want to insert a note or chord at the current position insert a rest instead as shown in step 4 To jump to the next measure filling the remaining beats with rests press the Next M button in the display 3 To change the step value use the Step Time values area in the display 4 Insert a note rest or chord at the current position To insert a single note just play it on the keyboard The inserted note length will match the step length You may change the velocity and relative duration of the note by editing the Duration and Velocity parameters see page 130 To insert a rest just press the Rest button in the display Its length will match the step value To tie the note to be inserted to the previous one press the Tie button in the display A note will be inserted tied to the previous one with exactly the same name
233. You don t need to play it on the keyboard again To insert a chord or a second voice see Chords and sec ond voices in Step Record mode below 5 After inserting a new event you may go back by pressing the Back button in the display This will delete the previ ously inserted event and set the step in edit again 6 When the end of the pattern is reached the End of Loop event is shown and the recording restarts from the 001 01 000 position Any note exceeding the pattern length inserted at its end will be reduced to fit the total length of the pattern At this point you may go on inserting new events in over dub mode the previously inserted events will not be deleted This is very useful when recording a drum or per cussion track where you may want to record the bass drum on a first cycle the snare drum on the second cycle and the hi hat and cymbals during the following cycles 7 When finished recording press the Done button in the dis play to exit the Step Record mode When back to the main page of the Style Record mode you may turn all tracks to the play status then press START STOP to listen to the Style Press START STOP again to stop the playback 8 From the main page of the Style Record mode select either the Write Style or the Exit from Record command to exit from the Style record mode respectively by saving the Style to memory or by canceling any change see Write Style dialog
234. a Genre gt SB Music genre associated with the entry Artist SB Name of the artist of the song associated with the entry Key Info SB Original key of the entry The first field 1s the key name the sec ond one is the mode major or minor Tempo SB Basic tempo of the Style or starting tempo of the Standard MIDI File associated with the entry This may change if a Tempo Change event is included with the associated resource Note Even 1f you can edit this value the starting value of a Stan dard MIDI Files is always considered and overrides this value Meter Info AT Basic meter of the Style or starting meter of the Standard MIDI File associated with the entry This may change if a Meter Change event is included with the associated resource M Transp Master Transpose el Master Transpose When the entry is selected the Master Trans pose for the whole instrument is automatically changed unless the Master Transpose is locked Note The Master Transpose value saved with the SongBook entry overrides any Master Transpose setting contained in the referenced Song Resource Area Write Current Resource When checked a reference to the selected resource is saved with the entry when pressing Write Saved resources are e the latest selected Style this also saves the associated Pads and STSs e the SMF or KAR file assigned to Sequencer 1 and shown on the right of this parameter Pads and STSs associat
235. a SSC Ss v O alol 0 gt DI ol d a z 4 Wn x ul 9 alo alolo ech o A a es o n gt DID S lt at Sl EE alo D mi 3 S e UJ O O T un ect USER INTERFACE Display 320 x 240 Graphical Color Touch Screen Display Joystick Dial Up Down Programmable Controls 2 Switches 2 Sliders Cursors Real Time Master Volume Acc Seq Real Time Volume Balance Switches Transp Memory Bass Inv Man Bass Fade Tap Synchro Ensemble C o 2 ct x O Ka Help System CONNECTIONS MIDI Multilanguage Hypertext Contextual IN OUT THRU USB 2 Host 2 0 Hi Speed and 1 Device 1 1 Full Speed 4 Analog Left Right Out1 Out2 c L D Outputs Inputs 2 Inputs 1 Mic Line 2 Line with separate gains Headphone 1 Front jack connection Pedals 1 Damper 1 Assignable Footswitch Pedal EC5 Technical specifications 301 Power Supply AC Universal Voltage PHYSICAL DATA Dimensions W x D x H 43 7 x 13 3 x 7 1 inches 1110 x 388 x 181 mm without music rest 29 3 Ibs 13 3 kg Q 2 A Aftertouch Curve 197 Arabic Scale 88 92 Assignable Sliders 10 202 Audio Inputs 15 19 24 207 Audio Outputs 19 23 206 208 Auto Style Perf Sound Select 201 Write 210 B Backup 22 234 Balance Keyboard Style or Seq 10 23 Balance Sequencer 14 23 Bank Select 243 Bass amp Lower Backing 102 C Chord Scanning 15 Lock 200 Contrast 14 D Da
236. a Song by its ID number Each Song in a folder on a device up to 9 999 has a progressive ID number assigned When the Show Song Number option is selected in the Song Select page menu see below you can see this number before the Song s name in the Song Select window You can use this number to select the Song by composing the corresponding number speeding up the Song retrieval when you are using an hard disk filled with midifiles HAAT LH WOH Selecting elements 8 1 Song Select window While in the Song Select window press the SELECT button to open the keypad and enter the number corresponding to the Song to be selected While in any page of the Song Play mode press the SELECT but ton twice to open the keypad Note If no Song corresponds to the dialed number the Song not available message will appear Warning While the directory may contain more than 9999 files you can t select Songs outside the 0001 9999 range when using the numeric keypad Song Select page menu Press the page menu icon to open the menu Press a command to select it Press anywhere in the display to close the menu without selecting a command E Export Song List Select this command to save the current list as a text file to the SSD U memory or the internal hard disk if installed This way you will be able to print a list of Songs to see which number matches each Song 1 While in the Song Select window select the fold
237. a are lost Make a backup of all your important data l Piano Cows a y 42 Selecting and playing Styles Saving your settings to a Performance Selecting and playing Styles Pa800 is an arranger i e a musical instrument providing automatic accompaniments or arrange CC ments Each arrangement style is called as a consequence Style A Style is made of several Style Elements Intro Variation Fill Ending corresponding to the various sections of a song By selecting Style Elements you can make your playing more varied and musical When selecting a Style a Style Performance with settings for the Style tracks is also selected If the SINGLE TOUCH LED is turned on the first of the four Single Touch Settings STS associated with the Style is selected too and Keyboard tracks pads effects and some other useful parameters are automatically configured Use the Style controls to start or stop the Style Style Select section Style Controls
238. a bbb ccc gt indicator is shown on a track s area in the Main page 121 883 888 A Control Change Program Change area This indicator begins with a remark saying the track is in External E mode and continues with a strings of transmitted Control Change and Program Change data This will let you know what the track is transmitting to the MIDI OUT In the following example CC 0 is the Control Change 0 Bank Select MSB CC 32 is the Con trol Change 32 Bank Select LSB PC is the Pro gram Change 2 1 8 an B i CC 0 value CC 32 value PC value When touching the Sound area the numeric key pad appears instead of the Sound Select window You can enter the Control Change Program Change bundle shown above separating the three parts with a dot Both The track plays both the internal sounds and an external instrument connected to the MIDI OUT Type HERE PERF STS Drum Percussion track Set a track to Drum mode if you wish to separately adjust the volume and set a different output for each percussive family of the assigned Drum Kit Sound See Track Controls Drum Volume on page 95 and Audio Output Sty Kbd on page 206 Drum Note Tracks set to Drum or Percussion mode while in Style Record see Track Type on page 124 cannot be edited here This option appears in grey Other Style tracks cannot be set to Drum mode here Poly Tracks of this kind are polyphonic i e they can
239. ac tory data again from the Accessory CD or downloadable from www korgpa com Performance Sound Default gt GBLSY Performance banks and Sound banks share the same buttons on the control panel Use this parameter to define whether the PER FORMANCE SELECT or the SOUND SELECT LED must be on when you turn the instrument on Style Change On By Default gt GBLS This parameter allows you to define the status of the STYLE CHANGE button at startup On At startup the LED of the STYLE CHANGE but ton will automatically turn on Off At startup the LED of the STYLE CHANGE but ton will stay off Velocity Control Value gt GBLSY Use this parameter to set a velocity value over which to automat ically trigger the Style Start Stop or select a Style Element see Velocity Control above Upper Volume Link gt GBLSY This parameter allows you to define if changing the volume for one of the Upper tracks proportionally changes also the other Upper tracks On When changing volume to one of the Upper tracks volume for the other Upper tracks changes in proportion Off When changing volume to one of the Upper tracks only that track s volume is changed Other Upper tracks are left unchanged Bass 8 Lower Backing gt GBLSY With this function you can play a simple accompaniment with your left hand For this to work the SPLIT Keyboard Mode must be selected and the Style must not be running On If the Style is not pl
240. age header Position Tupe Event list Hr opt 61 opp Ctrl 11 115 H oui 61 688 Note C2 i28 Drop 192 H bal 6i opp Note At2 53 O ada ma 166 Hr 061l 01 696 Hote 65 Dr opp Be B36 Mi6601 61 192 Note D aia ma DEE Track pop up menu Tabs Scrollbar Page header See Page header on page 109 Page menu icon Press this icon to open the page menu See Page menu on page 127 Page sub header This area shows some performing info on the Song SCM CML Event Edit T Drum SE Vari Selected Chord Variation Selected track Selected Style Element Selected track Name of the track in edit Use the Track pop up menu to select one of the Style tracks SE CV Style Element Chord Variation Selected Style Element and Chord Variation This parameter cannot be edited To select a different Style Element and Chord Variation press EXIT to go back to the main page of the Style Record mode see Main page Record 1 on page 109 Event list Use the Event list to see all events contained in the selected track in the selected Style Element Use the scrollbar to browse through the events You can also scroll by using the SHIFT DIAL combination Touch the event to be selected Selected events are highlighted and can be heard Position Position of the event expressed in the form aaa bb ccc aaa is the measure bb is the beat e ccc is the tick each
241. ains unchanged when a different Style or Performance is selected This is useful if you create your own Styles and like to dynamically adjust the volume by using the sliders as a mixer It is not recommended with Factory Styles each one already mixed at its best right at the factory General Controls Interface This page contains parameters related to the way messages are shown in the display GLOBAL General Controls LA English E E m E System palette Help Language Language gt GBLS Use this pop up menu to select one of the available languages for the online help system Change button Press this button to apply the selected language to the user s interface How to select the Help language 1 Since Pa800 must be reset at the end of this procedure be sure to first save all unsaved data 2 While in this page select a language from the pop up menu The Change button will start flashing in red Press it 4 You will be asked if you want to save the Global and select the new language Press Yes to confirm The Global will be automatically saved and the language selected 5 A message will advice you to reboot the Pa800 Press OK to close the message window 6 Turn the Pa800 off then on again Program Change Show Program Change number gt GBL Check this parameter to show Program Change numbers next to Sound names in the Sound Select window Note Program Change numbers are a
242. al Demo Songs to choose from Press the STYLE PLAY and SONG PLAY buttons together Their LEDs start blinking esch At this point 1f you don t press any other button all the Demo Songs will be played back p Select one of the available options to listen to a specified Demo Song SS Stop the Demo by pressing the STOP button on the display or by exiting the Demo mode by pressing any MODE but ton The music stand A music stand comes standard with your Pa800 Insert its legs into the two dedicated holes on the rear panel Glossary of Terms Before you begin take a few moments to familiarize yourself with the names and terms we will be using to talk about the var ious elements of the Pa800 In this section you will find a brief description of various key elements of the Pa800 A professional arranger Pa keyboard uses different terminology than a traditional synthesizer or workstation By familiarizing yourself with the names and func tions in this section you will get a better understanding of how all the different parts of the Pa800 work together to create a real istic musical performance This will also help you to get the most out of the rest of the User s Manual Sound A Sound is the most basic unit of an Arranger Keyboard perfor mance A Sound is basically a playable instrument timbre piano bass sax guitar that can be edited saved recalled and assigned to any track An individual Sound
243. al Style Sounds gt PERF gt PERFSY This parameter lets you assign different Sounds to the Style tracks overriding the Sounds recorded into each Style Element pattern These Sounds can be saved into a Performance or Style Performance with the Write Performance or Write Current Style Performance commands see page 103 Assigned Sounds with this parameter turned on are shown in the Sounds area of this page Note This parameter can be saved with the Performance or Style Performance and is automatically set to On or Off when you select a different Performance or Style depending on the saved status On Style tracks always use the original Sounds recorded in each Style Element If you assign a different Sound to a Style track this parameter is automatically set to Off Off You can assign different Sounds to each Style track and save them in a Performance or Style Performance The selected Sounds are the same for all Style Elements there are no different Sounds for each Style element Selected Track Info area This line lets you see the Sound assigned to the selected track It appears both in the main page and in several edit pages Trk Upper 1 b Grand Piano RX B Piano 121 618 4888 Track name Sound bank Sound name Program Change Track name Name of the selected track o Jg c Q i o ia Q cc 86 Style Play operating mode Volume panel Sound name gt PERF PERF Sound assig
244. alues can overload the audio circuits and lead to distorsion This control lets you set equalization as desired and at the same time avoid overloading Play Mute icon PERF STS GBL Track s play mute status See Keyboard track status on page 145 for more information Play status The track can be heard Mute status The track cannot be heard Mixer Tuning Tuning Parameters in this page let you set various tuning settings See Mixer Tuning Tuning on page 92 for details Parameters gt PERF gt STS Note Song track values edited in this page are not saved and are only intended for realtime use Effects FX Select This page allows you to select effects to be assigned to the four Internal FX processors A D SONG PLAY SE01 Effects ma FX A H 71 Reverb SmoothHall Fx Amount ZA Eto B Mod Track Off FA B H 26 Stereo Chorus Fs Amount 14 F E H 71 Reverb SmoothHall Fe Amount zB Fx O D ZE Stereo Chorus Eu Amount 14 Diot 8 Hod Track Off Note When you stop the Song or select a different Song the default effects are selected again You can however stop the Song change the effects then start the Song again with the new effects Edit the Song in Sequencer mode to permanently change the effects Note The default effect settings can be memorized in the Global Song Play Setup by choosing the Write Global Song Play Setup command from the page menu see page 160
245. am Trk Upper 1 b Grand Piano E Piana 121 883 888 Detune ar PB Sensitivity PERF PERF STS These parameters show the Pitch Bend range for each track in semitones 1 412 Maximum up down pitch bend range in semi tones 12 1 octave 0 No pitch bend allowed Octave Transpose PERF PERF STS This is the octave transpose value 3 Lowest octave 0 Standard tuning 3 Highest octave Detune PERF PERF gt STS This is the fine tuning value 64 Lowest pitch 00 Standard tuning 63 Highest pitch Play Mute icon PERF PERF STS Track s play mute status Play status The track can be heard Mute status The track cannot be heard Mixer Tuning Sub Scale This page lets you program an alternative scale for the tracks selected with the Scale Mode parameter see page 101 The remaining tracks if any use the basic scale set in Global mode see Main Scale on page 198 STYLE PLAY Mixer ZTuning SS Trk Upper 1 Grand Piano E Piano 121 883 888 Contra Note A different Scale can be associated to each Performance or STS Note Quarter Tone selection can be received by MIDI 1 e by an external sequencer or controller Conversely selection of Quarter Tone settings can be sent by the Pa800 to an external MIDI recorder as System Exclusive data Scale PERF STS li Selected scale See Scales on page 289 for a list of the available scales When selecting the
246. am ami al al v S S S olelel sla s LS 5 S5 S5 alala 3 3 3 lt 2 8 12 8l3 Slelela gt pl pl np ct 3 A E Y L 0 2122 ezg R R Qo 0 059 SEA s sj zs gio J un wl NI olola OIOI GO O O OIOI OIOI OIOI OI OIOI OIOI L SH ba e n i e ei s i a i e i 3 8 Ee i Ka Ab 2 I a o Z 2Z 2 2 2 2 2 Z 2 2 5 44 414 win e SSS Se SO mI m um um s eres eerere ee m mm EE o c PIE me alakale ZZZ E l l 5 Kell fil ffe et o o 9o cicicicicici23iaiai o OO E E E 812 a N 7 alal Pl DI nN os H it UM it li ia 0 OI Oil Oil O O O O O O Al aA ct ect ect ect ect ect ect 3 3 3 3 3 a o Alalalalalalalalal l3i 3 23 251 5 51 5 51 5 2 ll gt gt J gt J Iz zl ziele Co Co Co IQ oO Co Co S n i n 5 a k k E Ee Ee GG KAES KKK El E AECH SAS dE Jl ol ul af w n TI 2 2 9 9 9 amp amp I amp amp zd 9 eo ha LI E ul Pl OI bMlI BB w N N Lcd ia ech 5th Intro Pads O i INIMII NO IO lol Je IN CN CN Io CN INI NIN CN Iw Io IMIM a 00 AN 2 5 3 2 2 Q 5 UL Primavera Synth Dark Pad 20 e IN Ip list N O IN o Iono je N NINININI NIN INI NIN o e em 234 Factory data Effects Effects The following table lists all Pa800 Factory Effects Detailed information on each effect s parameter are contained in the Advanced Edit addendum that you can find in th
247. an external instru ment To set each track s MIDI output channel see MIDI MIDI Out Channels on page 205 To hear only the expander s sounds you can lower the MASTER VOLUME control on the Pa800 or set the Song tracks to the External status see Track Controls Mode on page 186 Select the Sequencer 1 or Sequencer 2 MIDI Setup depend ing on the Sequencer you are using on the Pa800 to set the channels as follows The Arranger One of the most interesting aspect of MIDI is that you can use your Pa800 to play an external instrument with its onboard arranger Yes it s hard to beat the audio quality of Pa800 but you could wish to use that old faithful synth you are still accustomed PO To assign some of Pa800 Style tracks to an external instrument set them to the External status see Track Controls Mode on page 186 Select the Default MIDI Setup to set the channels as follows Out Channel this is the default status of Pa800 Drums Percussion Acc1 5 246 Factory data Styles Factory data Styles Note You can remotely select Styles on the Pa800 by sending it Bank Select MSB CC 0 Bank Select LSB CC 32 and Program Change messages on the Control channel see MIDI MIDI In Channels on page 204 EME CC32 Bank 8 18 Beat CC32 Bank Pop CC32 Bank Ballad RS EST ON SS ES ER 4 EEN pin roo 4 ewarsaad MN 5 usse 5 Siow tati
248. and MIDI parameters for the Voice Processor GLOBAL MIDI Setup Midi In Midi Gut Midi In Controls Midi In Octave Transpose gt GBL vd Use this parameter to determine if the Octave Transpose is applied also to notes received on the MIDI IN or USB Device port On Notes received on the MIDI IN or USB Device port are transposed according to the Octave Transpose setting for each track Off Data received on the MIDI IN or USB Device port are not transposed Midi In Mute Unmute gt GBLMd Use this parameter to determine if a muted track can still play data received via MIDI On No data received via MIDI on a muted track can be played by Pa800 Off Data received via MIDI on a muted track can still play on the Pa800 Chord 1 Midi Channel gt GBLMid Chord 2 Midi Channel gt GBLMid Notes entering these channels are sent to the Chord Recognition engine There are two separate Chord channels This is very useful when you must send chords to Pa800 on two different channels like with some MIDI accordions Upper Octave Transp Transpose GBLMd Octave transposition of data received on the MIDI IN for the Upper tracks For example if you select the 1 value a received C4 will play a C5 on the Pa800 This parameter may be useful to many MIDI accordion players whose MIDI interface may transmit on an unexpected octave Lower Octave Transp Transpose GBL Octave transposition of data received on the MIDI I
249. and vice versa SEQUENCER Mixer Tuning Trk S1Tr amp 1 b Grand Piano E Piano Track Reset am m NEED ee ee Mm Bypass LEM Input Trim 121 003 080 TAS Ges Tar THE SEQUENCER Mixer Tuning Trk 51Tr01 p Grand Piano E Fiano Track Reset E E a GN NN Reset All Tracks All Tracks Bypass E 121 083 088 Tis Track Reset buttons Use these buttons to reset i e flatten equalization for the corresponding track Reset All Tracks button Press this button to reset i e flatten equalization for all tracks Bypass Check any of these checkboxes to bypass equalization for the corresponding track When bypassed equalization has no effect on the track but all parameters are preserved When the box is unchecked equalization is activated again with the original set tings Input Trim This knob allows you to limit the level of the signal passing through the equalizer Extreme equalization values can overload the audio circuits and lead to distorsion This control lets you set equalization as desired and at the same time avoid overloading Play Mute icon SONG Track s play mute status Play status The track can be heard Mute status The track cannot be heard Mixer Tuning Tuning Parameters SONG See Mixer Tuning Tuning on page 92 Mixer Tuning Sub Scale This page lets you program an alternative scale for the selected tracks via the Track Assign parameter The
250. ange Program Change events excluding the bundled Control Change 00 Bank Select MSB and 32 Bank Select LSB o V c Q i o EM Q cc Note This kind of data 1s automatically removed during recording Ctl Change All Control Change events for example Bank Select Modulation Damper Soft Pedal CC00 32 CC127 Single Control Change events Double Control Change numbers like 00 32 are MSB LSB bun dles Note Some CC data are automatically removed during recording See the table on page 108 for more information on the allowed data Start End Tick Use these parameters to set the starting and ending points of the range to delete 138 Pad Record mode Pad Edit Delete All Bottom Top Note Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard range to delete Note These parameters are available only when the All or Note option is selected Execute Press this button to execute the operation set in this page Pad Edit Delete All This function lets you quickly delete a single Chord Variation or the whole Pad PAD REC Pad Edit Trans Copy fm Copy fm After setting the various parameters press Execute CV Chord Variation Use this parameter to select the Chord Variation to be deleted All All Chord Variations i e the whole Pad After deletion all parameters are set to the default sta tus CV1 CV6 Single Chord Variation Execute Press this button
251. ange all the above parame ters as well as other Voice Processor parameters Presets can be freely edited see Voice Processor Preset Preset on page 214 VP lock icon gt GBLO This lock avoids changing the Voice Processor Preset when selecting a different Performance STS or SongBook entry This is useful if you want to use the same Preset while selecting differ ent Performances STSs or SongBook entries This lock is reset when turning the instrument off unless you write Global settings to memory see Write Global Global Setup dialog box on page 210 o Jg c o i o tim Q cc 88 Style Play operating mode Sub Scale panel For more information on parameter locks see General Con trols Lock on page 199 FX Level gt GBLYPr Use this control to set the overall effect level on the voice This is the same as the FX Level knob found in the Voice Processor Preset gt Effects page of the Global mode see page 217 This parameter is saved in the Voice Processor Preset EQ Settings gt GBL s Use these controls to set a global three band equalization applied to the voice This is useful to fine tune your voice to the acoustic environment of the room This is the same as the EQ controls found in the Voice Processor Setup gt Dynamics EQ page of the Global mode see page 91 Low Low band Increase it to add body to your voice decrease it to remove boominess Mid Mid band Increas
252. anging tracks volume During playback you may wish to change each track s volume to create a mix on the fly 1 In Normal view you can adjust each Keyboard track s volume Touch a track and use the TEMPO VALUE controls to change its volume SONG PLAY MT B mn chord B pa REEL A t Grand Piano RA Meter 37d M it Pork pad qun p 5 E H 2 L zu wy J bc Keyboard tracks MIC IM LOWER UPPERS UPPERZ UPPERKT STS oe LEE sea Pad E SONG PLAY dy Canyon TRACK SELECT Meter 34 d Wo Trk Upper 1 Grand Piano Rx E Piana 121 818 888 In Track 1 8 view the first 8 tracks of the selected Song are shown Gb Canyon Meter 34d H TRACK SELECT Trk Upper 1 amp Grand Piano RX E Piano 121 818 888 Id Wo H Mo H Wo C In Track 9 16 view the second group of 8 tracks of the selected Song are shown 0 Note Changes to Song tracks will not be saved and will be reset each time you press the lq Home button They may also be reset while pressing the lt lt Rewind button To save changes you must edit the Song in Sequencer mode Song Play 55 Changing tracks volume 4 Press TRACK SELECT again to return to the Normal view Keyboard tracks TRACK SELECT c E Canyon HT B ano chord B Meter 34d H Grand Piano nx MIC IM LOWER UPPERS UPPER UPPER Juke Lyrics STS HA es Jak ame Me f seai RRE Keyboard tracks 5 Press the M PL
253. ani3 9 Caribbean Splash 10 Cuca 1 10 Darbuka 7 10 Rik 2 o timpania io Rezbo SSCS m leet TE Pt orchestra Tut CN Hi Tom Flam Long Guiro Douf Rim Ak 14 Dragon Gong 14 Tef 1 14 Mid Tom Flam 14 Elastick Pad Hollo 1 Tef 2 Low Tom Flam 16 16 Hollo 2 16 Tef 3 16 Drum Single A Tef 4 18 18 Tef 5 18 19 KE EE Drum Single B 18 Drum Single C 19 Drum Single D Drum Sing HouseA m E Drum Sing HouseD Timbale Rim 2 24 24 24 Drum Kit A 125 25 s 8 00 00 C DI Lo 2 A OIAIOIO OIO ce 21818 818818 D Slelala SIS N o Vv ou D E 4 z o w ct o S EN Darbuka 1 EN Conga Hi Darbuka 2 Darbuka 3 K ES Darbuka 4 5 Rev Cymbal EN 2 3 5 D w D uon 9 3 olo Sia wl a o c io 5 Wi Wi U NI N NI N N N N N NI N N O WO COIN an oO B WwW N O Ui Rave Dance Remix 17 mig 3 5 ola ek Pla A N 17 Vintage Sweep You Decide Sig o oc O gt Sia Sin N 0 sl 3 E U C n y ala gt a a gt a ko gt ET o 3 S S 5 a is D O D 5 N NI N N a ul Ww w w N Y N O N ul UJ N N zl 3 en m D T 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 9 N N Drum Sing HouseB Drum Sing HouseC N IA SH 313 om men os 0 oO vA _ O 313 N LA N N a VI EJ Drum Kit B i 26 ES Drum Kit C i EA Drum Kit
254. ank Tee xr we o bei E Gm 9 8 ETT aaee v xm 1 er EC TE Aen Gm 2 8 ETT ET v Z m m wr s pe Reme bei To Rc Bosssting X 121 121 NE WEN Ee MN mm mE RE EG MUN E E per wr wo um 1 ENNNEE XLI STONE OMNE NNNM ESERSE ELI PA UNN NECXI Pe IS MECA EA EN NENNEN mI E EA a KEN E Ee SS Ee a BN ES ES NM EM NON E E wr e Semebe 9e D wr ws os iota wr s 05 rawr sx S tet 0 eese Tel wr s ws Wnem outer D llt sex afe wor outer xm 9 we semensw CS E wr s uw eee eme Y moa pm pes o Lx p pae meer ms wr Delen CIS D in 3m reemesw x 7 wr 3 3e Eme emi 9e A tet Um ere X a s Delen Ra selen ml wr s ae ECT CTI D i pom eme JI 107 Ac Boglamat Gr T0 Assam Ge II os mm Pl ep Ines 1 mr 3 35 eustnose JI Lx 9 us Appa cm x i E SS E ES 122 fin y V v y v V J y v y v v y v y SFX SFX SFX FX FX FX FX FX FX FX FX FX FX FX i wr s pus menes x wr 1 it eme TN ss san x wr mr mew ene 3m 0 3m enses Je wr s mrmme CTI 3m 3 3m Macnee Lx 9 mz mWeseow Metis v Par 1 meme venera xm ia SeGemeas Metas _ 123 7 16 olvidas top Lm 3 tia ewteeMsr Metis Lx 9 95 wom orumaPere Y x 9 m sedem meets Y sm S ew e Lx 1 m Wemsed Metis 1 xm 9 us woodblock Ga ormare v Lx 1 us esaes r
255. antize eee 135 Pad Edit Transpose 136 Pad Edit Velocity v tarro aaa x dabas 136 Poa BOIISC ER 137 Pad Edik Delete ues edunt edd eon Ui ipi hes 137 Pad Edit eerste gegen Hee e eg E 138 Pad Edit Copy Irons SINS v viu ss ee ms AC EENS eg AEN 138 Pad Edit Copy from Pad EE 138 Pad Track Controls Sound Expression 139 Pad Chord able Er 140 Import Import Groove 140 Import Imports 4 2 epus woven tb roe a aed sd 140 EXPO OME is sra ran wey eee me se tren 141 LN AAA stout eee tats e dn 141 Write Pad dialog DOX sunrise 141 Song Play operating mode 142 Transport controls 4422400442080 4aeesuseeeesegerene ens 142 MID eege Ee eg 142 Tempo Lock and Link Mode 142 Master Volume Balance Sequencer Balance 142 Erick parameters 222223 5 0p ox psa aos 142 Standard MIDI Files and Sounds 142 NRPN Sound parameters NNN EE SEN IS casas wate 143 Keyboard Pad and Sequencer tracks oo ooooo o 143 UE EE 144 Song Tracks 1 8 and 9 16 pages ooooooocmommmmmo 146 Volume EEN 147 Jukebox EE 147 Lyrics amp Markers panel 1 2 ose rtm es 148 SIS Name panel vecindario 150 Ne PANG conoser decorada CE 150 Sub ocalo Panel suscitar 150 e eea Bitte cae WEE onesie de See eee 150 Opt Panel ENRETE TEE ures ads uds Gesuadeuuuess os 150 EGU MEN seriene paare Diada poda thes 151 A Me E 151 Switching between sequencers during editing 151 Mixer Tunins Volume Pan ca
256. ape Echo BPM Reverb Hall Reverb Smooth Hall Reverb Wet Plate Reverb Dry Plate Reverb Room ReverbBrightRoom Early Reflections P4EO Exciter PAEQ Wah PAEQ Cho Flng PAEQ Phaser PAEQ Mt Delay Comp Wah Comp Amp Sim Comp OD HiGain Comp PAEQ Comp Cho Flng Comp Phaser Comp Mt Delay Limiter PAEQ Limiter Cho Flng Limiter Phaser Limiter Mt Delay Exciter Comp Exciter Limiter Exciter Cho Flng Exciter Phaser Exciter Mt Delay OD HG Amp Sim OD HG Cho Flng 100 OD HG Phaser 101 OD RG Mt Delay 102 Wah Amp Sim 103 Decimator Amp 104 Decimator Comp 105 AmpSim Tremolo 106 Cho Flng Mt Dly 107 Phaser Cho Flng 108 Reverb Gate FX assignable to FX processors B and D only 109 St Mltband Limiter 110 PianoBody Damper 111 OD HyperGain Wah 112 GuitarAmp P4EQ 113 BassTubeAmp Cab 114 St Mic PreAmp 115 Multitap Cho Delay 116 St Pitch Shifter 117 St PitchShift BPM 118 Rotary SpeakerOD 119 L C R Long Delay 120 St Cross Long Dly 121 Hold Delay 122 LCR BPM Long Dly 123 St BPM Long Dly IM 124 Early Reflections FX assignable to FX processor D only 125 Vocoder Factory data 285 MIDI Setup MIDI Setup SS SS Se 1_Tr 5 1_Tr 6 1_Tr 7 51 Tr8 Si Tr9 E S1 Tr 9 S2 Tr 9 UJ N MIDI IN Channel S1 Tr 10 S1 Tr 10 S
257. ard Mute status The track cannot be heard o v c Q i o tim Q cc 184 Sequencer operating mode Mixer Tuning EQ Gain Mixer Tuning EQ Gain In this page you can set the three band equalization EQ for each individual track Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Song tracks 1 8 and 9 16 and vice versa SEQUENCER Mixer Tuning Trk S1Tr amp 1 b Grand Piano E Fiano Hi Gain E L3 121 003 080 I Tas Ge Thr THs Hid Gain dEl a alli Low Gain dE E Tig Til H H Can J sena Jl Hi High Gain PERF PERF STS This parameter lets you adjust the high frequencies equalization on each individual track This is a shelving curve filter Values are shown in decibels dB Mid Middle Gain PERF gt PERF STS This parameter lets you adjust the middle frequencies equaliza tion on each individual track This is a bell curve filter Values are shown in decibels dB Low Gain gt PERF PERF STS This parameter lets you adjust the low frequencies equalization on each individual track This is a shelving curve filter Values are shown in decibels dB Play Mute icon SONG Track s play mute status Play status The track can be heard Mute status The track cannot be heard Mixer Tuning EQ Control This page lets you reset or bypass track equalization pro grammed in the previous page Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Song tracks 1 8 and 9 16
258. are automatically selected when the instrument is turned on This means you can save your preferred startup settings to Performance 1 Performance Sound Select section Single Touch Settings STS section E TEHELICON KORG S Pacco cm OIT Selecting a Performance 1 Press the Performance area in the display to open the Performance Select window Set of banks 1 10 corresponds to the top row of Performances on the control panel 11 20 to the lower row Jperre RMANCE SELECT Grand Piano exp E FEES Loss Grand Piano exp Se E Vocal The selected Performance is k highlighted Press a Perfor amp Trbn Brass
259. arget device depends on the amount of data to be backed up Full Restore Resources This command restores the backup of the internal Factory and User data created with the Full Backup Resources command Warning Don t play the keyboard while restoring data and stay in the Media mode Wait until the Wait message disappears 1 Incase you are restoring from an external USB device con nect the device to one of the USB Host ports 2 Select the Full Restore Resources command then press Execute The source device appears 3 If needed select a different device by using the Device pop up menu 4 Browse through the files to find the backup file When the backup file BKP file is in the display select it and press the Restore command 6 When done the instrument automatically restarts OS Version Number This line shows the installed Operating System version A newer version may be available on www korgpa com Media edit mode Preferences 235 Preferences This page includes various protect options plus the PCM Auto load option and settings for the hard disk sleep time Load PCH CE EKAA ELI Global Protect gt GBLMed When loading a SET file see Loading all the User data on page 225 this parameter if On prevents Global parameters from being reprogrammed when loading all data All Global parameters are therefore left unchanged When loading a single GLB file this
260. ariation belongs to Note When this parameter and the assigned value is in small let ters cv1 cv6 the Chord Variation is empty when it is in capitals CV1 CV6 it is already recorded If Style Element is Var Var2 Var 3 or Var4 you can select one of 6 Chord Variations to edit If Style Element is Introl Intro2 Intro3 Filll Fill2 Fill3 Endingl Ending2 or Ending3 you can select one of 2 Chord Variations to edit Resolution Use this parameter to set the quantization during record ing Quantization is a way of correcting timing errors notes played too soon or too later are moved to the nearest axis of a rhythmic grid set with this parameter thus playing perfectly in time Note To quantize after recording use the Quantize function in the Edit section see Style Edit Quantize on page 119 High A 1 32 2 1 8 Grid resolution in musical values For example when you select 1 16 all notes are moved to the nearest 1 16 division When you select 1 8 all notes are moved to the nearest 1 8 division A 3 after the quantization value means triplet HN DO Rec Length Recording Length No quantization applied gt STYLE This parameter sets the recording length in measures of the selected track Its value is always equal to or a divider of the Chord Variation Length see next parameter This is not the total length of the Chord Variation but just of the curre
261. arting recording Tempo Select this parameter to use TEMPO VALUE controls to set the tempo Note This value will not be recorded and will only be used for test ing the pattern at various speeds while editing or recording Hint You can always change the Tempo when other parameters are selected by keeping the SHIFT button pressed and rotating the DIAL Meter gt PAD This is the meter time signature of the sequence You can edit this parameter only when the sequence is empty i e before you begin recording anything NTT Note Transposition Table gt PAD The Note Transposition Table NTT determines how the arranger will transpose pattern notes when a chord is recog nized that does not exactly match the original chord of a Chord Variation For example if you only recorded a Chord Variation Pad Record mode Main page Pad Record 133 for the CMaj chord when a CMaj7 is recognized on the key board the arranger must transpose some notes to create the missing 7th Root The root note in CMaj C is transposed to the missing notes Fifth The 5th note in CMaj G is transposed to the missing notes i Series The original pattern must be programmed on the Maj7 or min7 chords NoTrnsp No transposition table is applied The pattern will always play as recorded with no added notes However it will be transposed to other keys depending on the played chord As recorded with NTT Root or 5th When
262. arts at the next beat quarter or octave depend ing on the Song s Time Signature Seq 2 FX Mode gt GBLS 9 This parameter selects the effects mode for Sequencer 2 When a 4 effects Song is loaded all four effects are used independently from this setting AB The A and B effect pair is used Sequencer 2 shares its effects with Sequencer 1 CD The C and D effect pair is used Note When this parameter is set to CD Sequencer 2 shares its effects with Keyboard tracks so these effects can be changed either selecting a Song for Sequencer 2 or selecting a Performance unless the Performance recalls FX CD parameter is left unchecked see above Fast Play gt GBLS 9 When checked this function allows to skip the empty setup beats at the beginning of a song and immediately start from the first note However any setup data are read and considered Note When Pa800 is driving an external musical instrument the fast transfer of MIDI data to the MIDI OUT or USB port may cause a delay to the Song s start Therefore we suggest to turn this function off when Pa800 is hooked to other instruments Get Hard Disk Path gt GBLS 9 Available only when a hard disk is installed Press this button to see the current path of each sequencer This lets you know where currently selected Songs are located in the disk If you save these paths to the Global by selecting the Write Glo bal Song Play Setup command from the page
263. ata between the Pa800 and a personal computer this is called the MIDI Over USB function This is useful when your computer is not fitted with a MIDI interface USB can be used in parallel with the MIDI ports For example you can connect your Pa800 to a sequencer running on your computer and at the same time control another MIDI instru ment connected to the MIDI ports of the Pa800 Connecting the Pa800 this ways makes it at the same time a MIDI input device a controller and a sound generator Connecting the Pa800 to a personal computer Please install the KORG USB MIDI Driver before connecting the Pa800 to a personal computer Be sure your personal com puter meets the requirement shown on KORG USB MIDI Driver system requirements below KORG USB MIDI Driver requirements system Windows Computer A computer with an USB port that satisfies the requirements of Microsoft Windows XP Operating system Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Pro fessional x64 Edition a driver for the x64 Edition is in beta release Macintosh Computer An Apple Macintosh with an USB port that satisfies the requirements of Mac OS X Operating system Mac OS X version 10 3 or later Please note before use Copyright to all software included in this product is the property of Korg Inc The license agreement for this software is provided separately You must read this license agreement before you install this s
264. ating your Color TouchView display may be ELOBAL Vides ini rtada necessary to make pointing more precise If so use this page Touch Panel Calibration System gt GBL 1 When in this page first touch exactly inside the set of Selects the video standard PAL or NTSC arrows in the upper left corner of the display 2 The arrows will subsequently move to the other corners of Mode gt GBL the display Touch exactly inside them Experiment with this parameter to see if your external monitor 3 Finally press Save to confirm the new calibration produces better results with an interlaced or de interlaced video signal Touch Panel Calibration Character gt GBL o Select the character size Big or Small Colors gt GBL Selects a color set for the lyrics and background Kc Color set External Display e In case you want to exit and cancel the calibration press Use this parameter to decide what to show in the monitor con EXIT before completing the procedure nected to the Video Out port optional requires the VIF4 Video Interface Hint To quickly reach this page from any other page press GLO BAL to enter the Global mode then press it again and keep it Text Only Default at startup Only Lyrics and Chords if pressed until this page appears any are shown in the external display Reference Mirror The internal display of the Pa800 is duplicated mirrored to the external display 210
265. ave Copy Erase Format GO USE 3 If needed select a different device by using the Device pop up menu 4 If you wish to save data inside another folder select this lat ter and press the Open button to open it Press the Close button to go back to the parent folder 5 Select the folder where to save data and press Backup to save it If nothing is selected data will be saved to the cur rent directory After pressing Backup a dialog box will appear asking you to select a name for the backup file and whether compres sion must be turned on or off during the backup Backup Press the T Text Edit button to open the Text Edit win dow Enter the name and confirm by pressing OK We suggest you check Compression to save space on the backup device However with compression turned on the operation will last longer 6 Press OK to start the backup 7 When finished save the storage device in a safe place Full Backup Resources This command allows you to make a backup of the Factory and User Musical Resources excluding the Operating System on a target device A BKP file will be created Note Should you not do a backup and your internal data becomes damaged you can download the original data from www korgpa com A copy of the original data in also contained in the included Accessory CD Choose this command and follow the procedure seen to backup the Operating System above The required space on the t
266. ay the sequencer will stop and the No Song message will appear At this point you can select the JukeBox tab to open the Jukebox panel and select a different Song As an alternative you can select the next Song by pressing SHIFT gt gt FAST FORWARD in the SEQUENCER 1 section of the con trol panel then press M PLAY STOP in the SEQUENCER 1 section again Song list Selected Song Jukebox file 1 Canyon mid 2e My Sun mid 3 MightD av mid 4 Pinball mid Volume Song list uricz STS d Use this list to browse through the Songs in the Jukebox list Use the scrollbar to scroll the list Selected Song Name of the Song currently in play You can select a different Song from the list and press the Select button in the display to select it for playback Select button Press this button to select the Song highlighted in the list and assign it to Sequencer 1 If a Song is already playing it will be stopped and the selected Song will start playing back o v c Q i o tia Q cc 148 Song Play operating mode Lyrics Markers panel Jukebox file Name of the selected Jukebox file To edit this file see Jukebox Editor on page 156 Transport controls for the Jukebox When you select a Jukebox file Sequencer 1 transport controls work in a slightly different way than with single Songs Pressed alone these buttons are the Rewind and Fast Forward commands lt lt and g
267. aying and you play chords with your left hand the Sound assigned to the Lower track plays chord notes even if the Lower track is muted and a Bass sound plays the chord root When you start the Style the normal behav ior is restored When the Bass amp Lower Backing EACKIHG function is active the Backing icon appears in the Lower track Sound s area Off If the Style is not playing and the Lower track is muted no sound can be heard when you play with your left hand If the Lower track is set to play you can hear the sound assigned to the Lower track Page menu Press the page menu icon to open the menu Press a command to select it Press anywhere in the display to close the menu without selecting a command Write Performance Select this command to open the Write Performance dialog box and save most of the current control panel settings to a Perfor mance See Write Performance dialog box on page 104 for more infor mation Write Single Touch Setting Select this command to open the Write Single Touch Setting STS dialog box and save Keyboard track settings to one of the Single Touch Settings STS of the current Style See Write Single Touch Setting dialog box on page 104 for more information Write Current Style Performance Select this command to open the Write Current Style Perfor mance dialog box and save Style track settings to the Style Per formance of the current Style See
268. buttons on the control panel to open the Style Select window Use the STYLE buttons to go directly to the selected bank Press EXIT to exit from this page and go back to the previous page without selecting any Style Bank sets Side tabs banks s c Un Plugged Fast Bossa 1 Cont emporar Lower tabs pages Styles Note Depending on the status of the Auto Style Select parameter see page 201 a Style may be immediately selected when pressing one of the STYLE SELECT buttons The latest selected Style for that bank will be selected Bank sets Selected set of banks top or bottom row or Factory Styles Side tabs banks Use these tabs to select a bank of Styles Each tab corresponds to one of the STYLE buttons on the control panel Lower tabs pages Use these tabs to select one of the available pages in the selected bank If you press again the same STYLE SELECT button on the con trol panel the next page in the same bank is selected This way you do not need to press one of the corresponding tabs in the display in order to select a different page Styles Press one of these buttons in the display to select a Style Unless the DISPLAY HOLD LED is turned on the window automati cally closes short after you select a Style 79 Selecting elements Style Select window After selecting a Style from this window and another Style is playing the name of the new Style name begins to flas
269. by pressing the Back button Step Time values Length of the event to be inserted od Standard Standard value of the selected note Dot Note value Augments the selected note by one half of its value Triplet 3 Triplet value of the selected note Meter Meter of the current measure This parameter cannot be edited You can set the Meter in the main page of the Style Record mode before actually starting recording see step 6 on page 113 for more information Free Memory Remaining memory for recording Duration Relative duration of the inserted note The percentage is always referred to the step value 25 Staccatissimo 50 Staccato 85 Ordinary articulation 100 Legato Velocity Set this parameter before entering a note or chord This will be the playing strength i e velocity value of the event to be inserted Kbd Keyboard You can select this parameter by turn ing all counter clockwise the dial When this option is selected the playing strength of the played note is recognized and recorded 1254127 Velocity value The event will be inserted with this velocity value and the actual playing strength of the note played on the keyboard will be ignored Rest Press this button to insert a rest Tie Press this button to tie the note to be inserted to the previous note Back Goes to the previous step erasing the inserted event Next M Next Measure Goes to the next measu
270. cal Resources Should you need the original Musical Resources a copy of them is already supplied with the Accessory CD or can be downloaded from www korgpa com You may also have created a backup copy of your custom data see Full Backup Resources on page 235 To restore data see Full Restore Resources on page 235 Start up Connecting the AC power cord Connect the supplied power cord to the dedicated socket on the rear of the instrument Then plug it into a wall socket You don t need to worry about the local voltage since the Pa800 uses a universal power adapter POWER ACV O Turning the instrument on and off Press the POWER switch on the rear panel to turn the instrument on The display will light up showing the boot procedure Note When turning the instrument on RAM PCM Samples used by some User Sounds may be automatically loaded depending on the status of the PCM Autoload parameter see page 236 This may take some time for loading Press again the POWER switch on the rear panel to turn the instrument off Warning When turning the instrument off all data con tained in RAM Song recorded or edited in Sequencer mode Samples in edit and not yet saved will be lost MIDI Grooves generated by the Time Slice function will be lost too On the contrary data contained in the SSD memory Factory data User Sounds Performances Styles and Multisamples will b
271. can also be assigned to an tom Lists Assignable Switch 3 Select one of the entries in the list it turns blue then press the Select but ton in the display the selected entry turns green to start playing back from there Selecting a SongBook STS Up to four STSs can be associated to any SongBook entry It doesn t matter if it is based on a Style or a Standard MIDI File 1 Press the Lyrics STS tab to open the Lyrics STS page and see the four STSs associated to the current SongBook entry GH GH HAVE SOME FUN Fi THROW AWAY THE WORK ELL MY FRIENDS THE TIME HAS COME TO RAISE THE ROOF AND gt STSs associated with the current entry 2 Select the desired STS by touching its name in the display As an alterna tive press the SINGLE TOUCH BUTTON corresponding to the desired STS The STS is selected Keyboard tracks and Voice Processor settings may change 67 68 Singing with a connected microphone Connecting a microphone Singing with a connected microphone Pa800 is fitted with a powerful digital voice processor based on technologies developed by TC Heli con including effects and three part harmonization Microphone input volume control Microphone input Microphone on off control
272. can be played on the keyboard in the Sound mode In the Style Play mode or Sequencer mode Sounds may be freely assigned to Sequencer tracks Style tracks or Keyboard tracks Style ES Q The Style is the heart of a professional arranger keyboard At its basic level a Style will consist of up to eight parts or Tracks Drums The Drum track will provide a repeating rhythmic phrase played by the standard instruments of a Drum Kit Percussion An additional rhythmic phrase played by various percussion instruments conga shaker cowbell etc is provided by the Per cussion track The Drum and Percussion tracks will play the same phrase repeatedly regardless of the notes and chords being played on the keyboard although it is possible to assign a different Drum Kit to either part or to edit the Kit itself Bass amp Accompaniment The Bass track and the up to five additional Style tracks will each play musical phrases that are musically related to and in sync with the Drum and Percussion tracks However the notes being played by these tracks will change to follow the chord pro gression that you play on the keyboard Again any Sound you choose may be assigned to any track in a Style Glossary of Terms Sound 25 Variation For each Style there are four Variations In general each Varia tion is a slightly different version of the others As you progress from Variation one to Variation four the arrang
273. categorizing your entries by genre or age Each number can correspond only to a single entry You cannot assign the same number to two or more different entries There fore 1f you try to save a modified entry without first selecting a different Song Selection Number and select the New Song option in the Write Song dialog box the following error message will appear This entry s Song Selection Number has already been assigned Please assign a different number Should this happen you will automatically be kept in the Book Edit 2 page While there assign a different number while turn ing the Dial or pressing the UP DOWN buttons you are only allowed to select numbers that are still free and try to save the entry again Harmony Track When selecting a SongBook entry pointing to a Standard MIDI File the Harmony Track can be automatically selected Note If the entry is based on a Style this parameter 1s greyed out non selectable Unchanged The previously selected track is left unchanged Track Number The chosen track is selected when choosing the SMF based SongBook entry Custom List Use this page to select and use one of the available Custom Lists contained in the LISTDB SBL file saved in the same folder as the SBD SongBook file Custom Lists are lists made of entries extracted from the main SongBook list as seen in the Book page They allow the use of smaller customized SongBook lists
274. ce versa STYLE PLAY Mixer r Tuning m Trk Upper 1 b Grand Piano E Piano 121 883 888 STYLE PLAY Mixer Tuning gan Trk Upper 1 Grand Piano E Piana 121 883 888 Hi Gain Cab Mid Gain dEl IRUM PERC BASS ACCA ACCS ACC ACCA ALCA Volume FR EG Sub ean sera M Hi High Gain PERF PERF STS This parameter lets you adjust the high frequencies equalization on each individual track This is a shelving curve filter Values are shown in decibels dB Mid Middle Gain PERF gt PERF STS This parameter lets you adjust the middle frequencies equaliza tion on each individual track This is a bell curve filter Values are shown in decibels dB Low Gain HERE PERF STS This parameter lets you adjust the low frequencies equalization on each individual track This is a shelving curve filter Values are shown in decibels dB Play Mute icon gt PERF PERF STS Track s play mute status Play status The track can be heard Mute status The track cannot be heard Style Play operating mode 9 Mixer Tuning EQ Gain Mixer Tuning EQ Control This page lets you reset or bypass track equalization pro grammed in the previous page Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from the Keyboard to the Style tracks and vice versa STYLE PLAY Mixer Tuning E Track Reset am mmm mm STYLE PLAY Mixer Tuning Trk Upper 1 b Grand Piano E Piana Track Reset E E of of NN Bypass LEM Input
275. cessor Setup Dynamics EQ lusus 213 Voice Processor Setup Talk 213 Voice Processor Preset Preset 42 2 eur sett e I eee 214 Voice Processor Preset Harmony 215 Voice Processor Preset Harmony Voices 216 Voice Processor Preset Effects cesiones 000805 217 Harmony and Tuning with the Voice Processor 218 Media edit mode 222 Storage devices and internal memory 222 Selecting and deselecting Dies 222 A See E Ae 223 TEE sacos rer drm oom eoa deca lg inde aaa R 223 A grt asda Gee Ge ae ee 224 Page SiT MUTE erotica ess 224 Navigation tOOls s usos casara a VPE d eds 224 mr Mr as 279 v 228 CODY RENE 232 A X TPPOTPPET 233 EE sonobal arcas e Da 234 i Ar m 234 Eeer Ee E pen bes 235 USB anidar E deed ee 236 Pee ee Ee 237 Care of mass storage devices 0oooooooommommmmm m o 239 Bonus SOM WAS ege noia sabi Mies 239 VIN cicatrices eee ee rad 240 Whati E EE 240 What is MIDI Over USR 240 Standard MIDI Files 0 cee eee cece eee es 241 The General MIDI standard 241 4 Table of Contents The Global channel 241 The Chord 1 and Chord 2 channels o o o oo 241 The Control channel 22e due ec eee ds beg 241 RBE EE 241 Connecting Pa800 to a Master keyboard 242 Connecting the Pa800 to a MIDI accordion
276. ch of the three available Fills 1 3 Fill Mode 1 3 Off The same Variation playing before selecting a Fill will be selected again VI amp V2 V3 amp V4 The specified Variations will be alternatively selected when one of them is selected For exam ple with the V1 amp V2 option if Variation 1 is selected Variation 1 and Variation 2 will be alter natively selected after the end of the Fill Var Up Var Down The next higher lower numbered Variation is selected in cycle After Variation 4 an Up com mand will select Variation 1 After Variation 1 a Down command will select Variation 4 99 Style Play operating mode Style Controls Drum Fill Var Inc Var Dec The next higher lower numbered Variation is selected When Variation 4 is reached an Inc command will select Variation 4 again When Variation 1 is reached a Dec command will select Variation 1 again To Var 1 To Var 4 Fill to Variation gt 1 gt 2 gt 3 gt 4 automati cally selects one of the four available Style Varia tions at the end of the fill Fill Mode lock icon gt GBLO This lock prevents the Fill Mode being changed when selecting a different Performance or Style This lock is reset when turning the instrument off unless you write Global settings to memory see Write Global Global Setup dialog box on page 210 For more information on parameter locks see General Con trols Lock on page 199 Trac
277. change the value This value is not saved with the Pad and is only used to test the Pad s volume during editing or recording Track status icons Status of the track Press this icon to change the status D Play status The track can be heard Mute status The track cannot be heard Record status After starting recording the track will receive notes from the keyboard and the MIDI IN connector Key Chord area Key Chord PPAD This parameter pair allows you to define the track s original key and chord type for the current Chord Variation When playing the pattern back this chord will be played back exactly as 1t was recorded without any NTT processing see above Delete Note button Use this command to delete a single note or a single percussive instrument from a track For example to delete a snare keep the D2 note corresponding to the snare pressed 1 Press the Delete Note button and keep it pressed 2 Press START STOP to start the Pad 3 When you reach the passage containing the note to be deleted play the note on the keyboard Keep it pressed up to the last note to be deleted P When finished release the Delete button and the note to be deleted and press START STOP again to stop the Pad Note If the note is at the beginning of the pattern press the note before starting the Pad Pad Record procedure Recording a Pad is very similar to recording a Style Please see the relevant cha
278. ck 1 16 Quantize will apply only to the selected track Resolution This parameter sets the quantization value For example when you select J 1 8 all notes are moved to the nearest 1 8 division When you select 1 4 all notes are moved to the nearest 1 4 divi sion um Nd ib S 1 32 4 1 4 Grid resolution in musical values A b f char acter added after the value means swing quanti zation A 3 means triplet Start End Tick Use these parameters to set the starting and ending points of the range to be quantized If you wish to select a four measure sequence starting at the beginning of the Song the Start will be positioned at 1 01 000 and the End at 5 01 000 Bottom Top Note Use these parameters to set the bottom and top note of the key board range to quantize If you select the same note as the Bot tom and Top parameters you can select a single percussive instrument in a Drum track Note These parameters are available only when a Drum track is selected Song Edit Transpose Here you can transpose the Song a track or a part of a track SEQUENCER Edit Tal THe THs Tad Tas THE Tar E THs Velocita mert convert After setting the various parameters press Execute to start the operation Track Use this parameter to select a track All All tracks selected apart for Drum tracks Track 1 16 Selected track Value Transpose value 127 semitones Start
279. clude the artist title genre number key tempo and meter of a specified song When selecting one of the entries the associated Style or Standard MIDI File as well as the Style Play or Song Play mode is automatically recalled In addition to helping you organizing your shows the SongBook allows you to associate up to four STSs to each Standard MIDI File This way it is easy to recall a complete setup for Keyboard tracks effects and the Voice Processor for realtime playing over a Standard MIDI File Also you can link a text file to a Standard MIDI File or to a Style to read the Lyrics in the display or in an external monitor even if there are no Lyrics events in the midifile or if you prefer to play the song live with the help of the Styles You can add your own entries to the SongBook as well as edit the existing ones Korg has already sup plied some hundred entries as standard Furthermore the SongBook allows you to create various cus tom lists that may suit your different shows 5s TT Hn uui The SONGBOOK button
280. ct the Write Global Midi Setup command from the page menu All MIDI Set ups can be freely customized and overwritten Hint To restore the original MIDI Setups load the original Fac tory data again downloadable from www korgpa com Performance recalls FX CD gt GBLS 9 This parameter selects the effects mode for the Performance Off When selecting a Performance no effect is selected On The Performance selects the C D effect pair Note When both this parameter and the Seq 2 FX Mode parameter are set to select the C D effect pair Sequencer 2 shares its effects with Keyboard tracks Therefore these effects can be changed either selecting a Song for Sequencer 2 or selecting a Per formance gt GBLS 9 This parameter allows you to use the SEQUENCER BALANCE slider to select the Sequencer whose lyrics or markers will be shown in the built in display and whose lyrics will be shown on the external monitor provided the optional VIF4 video interface card is installed Off When moving the SEQUENCER BALANCE cross fader only the volume balance between Songs will be selected The shown lyrics or mark ers will remain unchanged On When moving the SEQUENCER BALANCE slider fully to the left or the right the correspond ing Song will fade in and its lyrics and markers will be selected and shown in the display or exter nal monitor Lyrics Markers Balance Link Lyrics 3 Markers Seq 1 1L
281. ction lets you quickly delete a selected measure or a series of measures from the selected Chord Variation All fol lowing events are moved back to replace the cut measure s PAD REC Pad Edit Trans Delete f Copy fm Copy fm After setting the various parameters press Execute CV Chord Variation Use this parameter to select the Chord Variation for editing Start First measure to be cut Length Number of measures to be cut Execute Press this button to execute the operation set in this page Pad Record mode Pad Edit Cut 137 Pad Edit Delete This page is where you can delete MIDI events out of the Pad This function does not remove measures from the pattern To remove a whole measure use the Cut function see Pad Edit Cut on page 137 PAD REC Pad Edit Trans Delete f Copy fm Copy fm All Style Fad After setting the various parameters press Execute CV Chord Variation Use this parameter to select the Chord Variation for editing Event Type of MIDI event to delete All All events The measures are not removed from the Chord Variation Note All notes in the selected range Dup Note All duplicate notes When two notes with the same pitch are encountered on the same tick the one with the lowest velocity is deleted After Touch After Touch events Note This kind of data is automatically removed during recording Pitch Bend Pitch Bend events Prog Ch
282. d ask him for more Sounds Styles and other useful music materials Each Korg distributor can give you useful information Just give them a call for additional services In the English speaking world here are the relevant addresses USA KORG USA 316 South Service Road Melville New York 11747 USA Tel 1 516 333 9100 Fax 1 516 333 9108 Canada Jam Industries 620 McCaffrey St Laurent QC Canada H4T 1N1 Tel 514 738 3000 Fax 514 737 5069 UK KORG UK Ltd 9 Newmarket Court Kingston Milton Keynes Buckinghamshire MK10 0AU Tel 01908 857100 UK Technical Support Tel 01908 857122 Fax 01908 857199 E mail info korg co uk Many Korg distributors also have their own web page on the internet where you can find infos and software Useful web pages in English are the following Korg USA Korg UK www korg co uk www korgcanada com Korg Canada A place to find operating system updates and various system files for example a full backup of the factory data additional musical resources user s manuals and various information is at the following link Other useful information can be found worldwide by accessing to other Korg web sites like the following Gaffarel Musique France gfr net Korg amp More Germany and Austria g de Welcome 2 Useful links What s in the box After you buy your Pa800 please check all the following items are included in the package If some of them are mi
283. d name Program Change Track name Name of the selected track Drum Acc5 Style track Sound name STYLE Sound assigned to the selected track The triangle means you can press the name to open the Sound Select window and select a different Sound Sound bank Bank the selected Sound belongs to Program Change Program Change number sequence Bank Select MSB Bank Select LSB Program Change Key Chord area Key Chord STYLE This parameter pair allows you to define the track s original key and chord type for the current Chord Variation When in Style Play mode this chord will be played back exactly as it was recorded without any NTT processing see above To record just one Chord Variation for a Style Element the sug gested original key chord is maj7 with NTT i Series Be very careful to play the 7th note i e with a Cmaj7th key chord the B to avoid the lack of notes or a bad NTT conver sion when playing different chords Note To conform to Korg specifications it is advisable to record both the Major and minor Chord Variations for the Intro 1 and Ending 1 Style Elements When you select a track the original key chord assigned to the selected track will be shown All recorded tracks will play back on that key chord For example if the original key chord for the Accl track is A7th when selecting the Acc track all the remain ing tracks will play on the A7th key chord In the
284. d separately from a mea sure To insert a Meter change use the Insert function in the Edit sec tion and insert a series of measures with the new meter Existing data can then be copied or entered to these measures b To edit User Scale and Quarter Tone settings select the first value then select the scales degree to edit Edit the second value to change the tuning of the selected note of the scale c When selecting a different effect number during this edit default settings will be assigned to this event FXSend To edit the event Type and Values select the parameter and use the TEMPO VALUE controls to change their value In case of numeric values you can also press them twice to open the numeric keypad Length Length of the selected Note event The value format is the same as the Position value Edit it in the same way Note If you change a length of 000 00 000 to a different value you cant go back to the original value This rather uncommon zero length value may be found in the drum and percussion tracks of Songs made in Backing Sequence mode Track Use this pop up menu to select the track to edit Track 1 16 One of the ordinary tracks of the Song These tracks contains musical data like notes and con trollers Master This is a special track containing Tempo changes Meter changes Scale and Transpose data and the effect parameters Scrollbar Use the scrollbar to browse the event through the lis
285. d touch the Up Down arrow to scroll to the next previous alphabetic Tupe Hame Genre weg Tempo Mete ey 2much afterwerld Ballad REP A day in paradise CER A gigolo Pap GERI A groovy love Ballad SongBook list Gin hard day night Pop SAYA whiter shade Ballad section As an alter Poo native you can use J Filter jAdd to list Select the DIAL Book Book g Custom List Luricz Gi METE Nr nn 2 Press this check box to turn the view filter on if any Press this button to edit Adds the highlighted entry to the the view filter Custom List 4 When finished adding entries to the Custom List press the List Edit tab to go to the List Edit page and use the various commands to edit the list SONGBOOK Scrollbar Type Hane List name eA day in Paradise CERA Ebony amp while Select an entry on the list to edit EP Light my inferno AR Long Erain going XD Over happy Ex EX iN Tp E cl Senza donne Press Write to save the current Custom List ES Use the vertical arrows Press Del Song to m Press New List to create a new Custom List to move the selected delete the selected Press Del List to delete the current Custom entry up or down in entry List Warning Del List will delete the cur the list rent Custom List 5 When the Custom List is ready press the Write button in the display to save it to memory Assign a new name to the Custom List Write List Press Symbol to EES G
286. dable from www korgpa com Harmony Track gt GBLS4 The Voice Processor gets the chord notes from the track selected with this parameter Hint Go to the Voice Processor Preset section of the Global mode to try different Voice Processor Presets while creating or editing a Song Off No track sends notes to the Harmony module of the Voice processor Chords can still be received from the MIDI IN Seq 1 Track 1 16 Chords are sent from one of Sequencer 1 tracks Page menu Press the page menu icon to open the menu Press a command to select it Press anywhere in the display to close the menu without selecting a command Write Global Seq Setup Select this command to open the Write Global Seq Setup dialog box and save global settings that are unique to the Sequencer mode See Write Global Sequencer Setup dialog box on page 193 Load Song Select this command to open the Song Select window and load a Song to the sequencer See Song Select window on page 193 Save Song Select this command to save the new or edited Song to a storage device as a Standard MIDI File The file is automatically added the MID extension After selecting this command the Save Song page appears see Save Song window on page 194 Warning Turning the instrument off will delete the Song from memory Save your Song to a storage device to avoid losing it Warning The Song is also lost when switching from Sequenc
287. device by using the Device pop up menu When the device is selected its content will appear in the display 3 If the folder you are looking for is inside another folder select this latter and press the Open button to open it Press the Close button to go back to the parent folder 4 Select the SET folder containing the data you wish to load and press Load to confirm the selection Note Most data loaded from an external device is merged with data already existing in memory For example if there 1s data in all three USER Style banks in memory USEROI USERO2 USERO3 and there is only the USEROI Style bank on the external device the USERO1 bank is overwritten while USERO2 and USERO3 banks are left unchanged As a result you will have a STYLE folder in memory contain ing the USEROI bank you just loaded and the old USERO2 and USEROS banks Warning When loading a SET folder containing PCM data all existing PCM data in memory are deleted Save them before loading the folder by selecting the PCM option during a Save All operation see Saving the full memory con tent on page 229 Media edit mode Lood 225 To see if a SET folder contains PCM data open it and look for a PCM folder Loading all data of a specified type You can load all User data of a specified type with a single opera tion 1 If loading from an external device connect the device to one of the USB Host ports
288. dit Filtet ee Peon 118 blei Str e e Ach A Ed E ES 119 Style Edit Transpose 0 0 c cece cee cee cee eee o 119 Sivle Edik o o4sccpes weer ousewenedsauues NERA 120 AA meanness 121 Sue dit Dee teen geed een eg 121 Sile Edit Delete All uan toos RU tonteras anys 122 Style Edit EE 122 Style Element Track Controls Sound Expression 123 Style Element Track Controls Keyboard Range 124 Style Element Chord Table Chord Table 124 Style Track Controls Type Trigger Tension 124 Import Import GIODVE deg SE siestas doi 125 Inport Input kie TEn ew o3 e ica 126 EXPOLCOM sau pp dones cada heen poa ad m ai 127 Pace men erectos dedo e tdi 127 Write Style dialog EE 128 Copy Sounds dialog box 0 cece eee ee eee 128 Copy Expression dialog box ee eee eee eee eee 129 Copy Key Range dialog box 0 cee eee eee eee 129 Copy Chord Table dialog box 129 Overdub Step Recording window eee ee eeee 129 Pad Record MOGe aorta cian 131 The Pad SEHOCBUEO s odere eoe vir ERE ceno didit 131 Entering the Pad Record mode 131 Exit by saving or deleting changes LLse 182 Listening to the Pad while in Record Edit mode 132 Main page Pad Record vas A9 geg A AE EE ade 132 Pad Record procedure o ooooocooccccococco co 134 PON MEN MP EES 134 Edit Page Ee EE 134 Event Edit Event Edit senoisergeraiars ci 135 Event Edit Ple soii a 135 Pad Edit Qu
289. ds is made of several different layers triggered by different velocity values Also a fade out may result in the level jumping up next to the zero since a higher level layer may be selected by low velocity val ues Track Use this parameter to select a track All All tracks selected The velocity for all notes of the whole selected Chord Variation will be changed Drum Acc5 Selected track E CV Style Element Chord Variation Use these parameters to select the Style Element and Chord Vari ation for editing Value Velocity change value 127 Start End Tick Use these parameters to set the starting and ending points of the range to be modified If a Chord Variation is four measures long and you want to select it all the Start will be positioned at 1 01 000 and the End at 5 01 000 Bottom Top Note Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard range to be modified If you select the same note as the Bottom and Top parameters you can select a single percussive instru ment in a Drum or Percussion track Advanced When this checkbox is checked the Intensity Curve Start Velocity Value and End Velocity Value parameters can be edited Intensity Only available in Advanced mode Use this parameter to specify the degree to which the velocity data will be adjusted toward the curve you specify in Curve 0 100 Intensity value With a setting of 0
290. ds2 368 E Bass2 RH Stop 416 ME Oud Tek 465 Noisel 514 Crickets 369 E Bass2 Harmo 417 M E Kanunl 466 Noise2 515 Church Bell 370 E Bass3 p 418 ME Kanun2 467 Noise Pad 516 Thunder 371 E Bass3 mf 419 M E Kanun Tremolo 468 Swish Terra 517 Stream 372 E Bass3 f Slap 420 M E Baglamal 469 Gamelan XEQ 518 Bubble 373 E Bass4 Pick 42 M E Baglama2 470 Sawl 519 Dog 374 E Bass4 Harmo 422 M E Zurna 471 Saw2 520 Gallop 375 E Bass4 Slap 423 ME Clarinet Tek 472 Saw3 521 Laughing 376 E Bass4 SlapHar 424 ME Clarinet 473 Pulse 02 522 Telephone Ring 377 E Bass4 LH Mute 425 M E Nay 474 Pulse 05 523 Scream 378 E Bass4 RH Mute 426 Mouth Harpl 475 Pulse 08 524 Punch 379 E Bass Gliss 427 Mouth Harp2 476 Pulse 16 525 Heart Beat 380 E Bass Noisel 428 Mouth Harp3 477 Pulse 33 526 Footstepl 381 E Bass Noise2 429 Mouth Harp4 478 Pulse 4096 527 Footstep2 382 E Bass5 Finger 430 Mouth Harp5 479 Square 528 Door Creak 383 E Bass6 Finger 43 Syn Flute Pad 480 Square MG 529 Door Slam 384 E Bass6 FingerLP 432 Syn Bass Resol 481 Square JP 530 Car Engine 385 E Bass7 Finger 433 Syn Bass FM1 482 Triangle MG 531 Car EngineLP 386 E Bass8 Pick 434 Syn Bass FM1LP 483 Ramp 532 Car Stop 387 E Bass9 Pick Muted1 435 Syn Bass FM2 484 Ramp MG 533 Car Pass 388 E Bass9 Pick Muted2 436 Syn Bass FM2LP 485 Sine 534 Car Crash 389 E Bass10 Pick 437 Syn Bass TB 486 DWGS Syn Sinel 535 Train 390 E Bass10 PickLP 438 RB Saw Bass 487 DWGS Syn Sine2 536 Helicopter 391 E Bass11 Thumb Bass 439 RB Square Bass
291. e Sounds Program Change order on page 260 The leftmost button selects the upper or lower row of Sound or Performance banks Press it repeatedly to select one of the rows Upper LED On Upper row of Sounds or Performances selected Lower LED On Lower row of Sounds or Performances selected On the front panel Sound banks are identified by the instru ment names while Performance banks are identified by num bers 1 20 A note about Sound banks and names Sounds in banks from PIANO to SFX are standard Sounds the user can t directly modify Sounds in banks USER1 and USER2 are locations where you can load new Sounds from an external device or save new or edited Sounds The USER DK bank is where you can load new Drum Kits or save new or edited Drum Kits Each Sound bank contains various pages each with up to eight Sounds Repeatedly press a bank button to cycle between the available pages If you keep the SHIFT button pressed and press one of the buttons of this section even if you are in Sound Select mode the Write Performance window appears in the display and you can save the current track settings into a Performance see Write Performance dialog box on page 104 MIC SETTING buttons Use these buttons to turn voice harmony and effects on or off HARMONY Turns the Voice Harmony effect on or off SHIFT If you keep the SHIFT button pressed and press this butto
292. e A gt gt On Press E continue holding C Step Time A Off Release E and C Step Time A On Press G continue holding C Step Time A EL Off Release D continue holding C Style Record mode 115 Edit menu Edit menu From any page apart for Step Record press the MENU button to open the Style Record edit menu This menu gives access to the various Style Record edit sections When in the menu select an edit section or press EXIT to exit the menu and return to the main page To return to the main page you can also select the Main Page menu item When in an edit page press the EXIT button to return to the main page of the Style Record mode STYLE RECORD Hen L Note While the Style is in play you cannot access the Edit section pages from the main page see page 109 Stop the playback before pressing MENU Note When switching from the Edit section pages Quantize Transpose Velocity Delete to the other pages or vice versa the Style if in play is automatically stopped Edit page structure Most edit pages share some basic elements Selected Style Operating mode Edit section Element Page menu icon AAA AAA A STYLE REC SE Track Controls E Yari Trk Drum bass Kit RE1 E Drum amp Perc 128 800 0 H Selected mu mu mo mu mug mo mu mo track info Parameters area DRUM PERC il i TL Tabs o d c Q i o tia Q cc 116 Style
293. e Trigger Mode Tension and Wrap Around PAD REC Track Controls Pad Type Keyboard Range TrackType Bottom Top P Der Expression Trigger Mode Tension s E MEM Sound Bank PAD MOLUPE Sound assigned to the Pad track Pad Type PAD Use this parameter to decide if the Pad will play once or if it will loop Note While in Pad Record mode the pattern is always played back in loop even if this parameter is set to One Shot One Shot When you press one of the PAD buttons the cor responding Pad is only played once This is useful for playing Hits or Sequences that must only play once Loop When you press one of the PAD buttons the cor responding Pad plays up to the end then contin ues playing from the start Press STOP in the PAD section to stop it playing This is useful for play ing cyclic sequences Pad Record mode Pad Track Controls Sound Expression 139 Expression PAD Use this knob to set the Expression CC 11 value for the Pad track This value can be seen at the beginning of the Event Edit list The Expression is useful to balance the Pad with the other Pads For example if you want the Pad you are recording to be mel lower than the average just lower the Expression value Volume Use this slider to set the Volume CC 07 value for the Pad track This value is not saved with the Pad and is only used to test the Pad s volume during editing or recording Keyboard Range PAD
294. e cards for the Pa80 Pa60 series These are high quality sound sets based on additional PCM Samples Go to www korgpa com for more information To load these sounds first copy either the REALDRUM SET or TA_WORLD SET folder to the SSD U or internal hard disk if installed using the USB connection then load them to memory By loading the BONUS_SW SET folder you can load both col lections at once Warning When loading the above folders all User data in mem ory is deleted Save important data before loading the bonus soft ware Note After turning the instrument off all samples are deleted from the RAM memory You can either have them automatically reloaded when turning the instrument on again see PCM Auto load on page 236 or manually load them see Load PCM but ton on page 236 o v c Q i o tim Q cc 240 MIDI What is MIDI What is MIDI Here is a brief overview of MIDI as related to the Pa800 If inter ested you may find more information on the general use of MIDI in the various specialized magazines and dedicated books In general MIDI stands for Musical Instruments Digital Interface This interface lets you connect two musical instruments or a com puter and various musical instruments From a software point of view MIDI is a protocol that describes messages for playing notes and controlling them It is sort of a grammar to let different instruments and computers speak th
295. e existing Styles in memory will be deleted and overwritten Select the target bank and press OK to load the source bank Warning After confirming all User data contained in the bank in memory is deleted Note If Sounds or Drum Kits based on external PCM sam ples are deleted choose the Delete command from the page menu of the Sampling mode to delete the unused samples see the Advanced Edit addendum in the Accessory CD Note If you are loading a bank of Sounds and one or more Sounds or Drum Kits use an external PCM sample the sam ples are automatically loaded unless they are already in memory Loading a single item You can load a single User or Favorite Style item with a single Operation 1 If loading from an external device connect the device to one of the USB Host ports 2 Select the source device by using the Device pop up menu When device is selected its content will appear in the dis play 3 If the folder you are looking for is inside another folder select this latter and press the Open button to open it Press the Close button to go back to the parent folder 4 Select the SET folder containing the data you wish to load and press Open to open the SET folder A list of User data appears Global Performance SongBook Sounds Style GLOBAL 04 08 06 11 88 PAD 04 08 06 11 08 PERFORM 04 08 06 11 08 SOUND 04 08 06 11 08 STYLE 04 08 06 11 88 open i 5 Select the folder c
296. e same language and let the one tell the other what to do From a physical point of view MIDI messages can travel across two different types of connectors on the Pa800 The MIDI interface that is composed of three different con nectors The MIDI IN receives data from another device the MIDI OUT sends data to another device the MIDI THRU sends to another device exactly what was received on the MIDI IN this is useful to daisy chain more instruments e The USB Device port that replaces both the MIDI IN and OUT connectors with a single port and cable Both these devices are active at the same time So you can con nect the Pa800 to a computer via the USB port and connect another instrument s MIDI IN port to the MIDI THRU port of the Pa800 Channels and messages Basically MIDI or USB cable transmits 16 channels of data Think to each MIDI channel as a TV channel the receiver must be set on the same channel of the transmitter The same happens with MIDI messages when you send a Note On message on channel 1 it will be received on channel 1 only This allows for multitimbricity you can have more than one sound playing on the same MIDI instrument There are various messages but here are the most commonly used Note On This message instructs an instrument to play a note on a specific channel Notes have both a name C4 standing for the center C and a number 60 being the equivalent for C4 A Note Off message is often
297. e Accessory CD FX assignable to FX processors A to D IM Stereo Compressor Stereo Limiter Multiband Limiter St MasteringLimtr Stereo Gate St ParametricAEQ St Graphic 7EQ St Exciter Enhncr WO 00 N ON uU A o N Stereo Isolator 10 St Wah Auto Wah 11 St Vintage Wah 12 St Random Filter 13 Multi Mode Filter 14 St Sub Oscillator 15 Talking Modulator 16 Stereo Decimator 17 St Analog Record 18 OD Hi Gain Wah 19 St Guitar Cabinet 20 St Bass Cabinet 21 Bass Amp Model 22 Bass Amp Cabinet 23 Tube PreAmp Model 24 St Tube PreAmp 25 MicModel PreAmp 26 Stereo Chorus 27 St HarmonicChorus 28 St Biphase Mod 29 Multitap Cho Delay 30 Ensemble 31 Polysix Ensemble 32 Stereo Flanger 33 St Random Flanger 34 St Env Flanger 35 Stereo Phaser 36 St Random Phaser 37 St Env Phaser 38 Stereo Vibrato 39 St Auto Fade Mod 2Voice Resonator Doppler Scratch Grain Shifter Stereo Tremolo St Env Tremolo Stereo Auto Pan St Phaser Trml St Ring Modulator Detune Pitch Shifter Pitch Shifter BPM Pitch Shift Mod Organ Vib Chorus Rotary Speaker L C R Delay Stereo CrossDelay St Multitap Delay St Mod Delay St Dynamic Delay St AutoPanningDly Tape Echo Auto Reverse Sequence BPM Dly LIC R BPM Delay Stereo BPM Delay St BPM Mtap Delay St BPM Mod Delay St BPMAutoPanDly T
298. e MIDI Setup to be saved Press the T Text Edit button next to the name to open the Text Edit window and mod ify the name Midi Setup One of the 8 available MIDI Setup locations where to save cur rent MIDI settings Write Global Talk Configuration dialog box Only available when the Talk function is activated Open this window by selecting the Write Global Talk Configuration item from the page menu Here you can save Voice processor s Talk settings see Voice Processor Setup Talk on page 213 Write Global Talk Configuration Parameters saved in the Talk Configuration area of the Global are marked with the GBL symbol through the user s manual Write Global Voice Processor Setup dialog box Open this window by selecting the Write Global Voice Processor Setup item from the page menu Here you can save current set tings for the Voice Processor Setup edit section see starting from page 208 Write Yoice Setup T Defa E Default Parameters saved in the Voice Processor Setup area of the Global are marked with the gt GBL S symbol through the user s manual Name Name of the VP Setup to be saved Press the Ti Text Edit but ton next to the name to open the Text Edit window and modify the name Voice Setup One of the 16 available Voice Setup locations where to save cur rent VP Setup settings Save and use as default Check this option when saving a VP Setup you would
299. e Master Transpose See Master transpose on page 83 Hint In order to avoid having the Master Trans pose setting change when selecting a new Perfor mance or STS use the general Master Transpose Lock the first parameter in this page Note When the Master Transpose Lock is closed this parameter has no effect However the Master Transpose Lock also locks the Style Performance Transpose Sub Scale Quarter Tone When locked selecting a Performance or STS will not change the Sub Scale or Quarter Tone value See Sub Scale panel on page 88 Auto Octave This lock lets you decide if the instrument will automatically transpose the Upper tracks when switching between the FULL UPPER and the SPLIT Keyboard modes If On when switching to the FULL UPPER or SPLIT Keyboard Mode the Upper tracks trans position is left unchanged f Off when switching to the FULL UPPER Key board Mode the Upper tracks Octave Transpose is automatically set to 0 When switching to the SPLIT Keyboard Mode the Upper tracks Octave Transpose is automatically set to 1 Assignable Switches When locked selecting a Performance or STS will not change the Assignable Switch assignment See Pad Switch Assignable page 100 Switch on Slider Mode When locked selecting a Performance or STS will not change the selected status of the SLIDER MODE button See Assignable Slider Mic on page 202 Split Point W
300. e Write Global com mands from the page menu Several Global areas are available and a smaller symbol after the GBL abbreviation will appear for each relevant param eter More information is given in each Reference chapter gt GBL gt SB The parameter can be saved to a SongBook entry e ic Siem YU 3 H Be Sea i 22 Welcome Making a backup of the original data Making a backup of the original data A backup copy of all original data is supplied with the Accessory CD and can be found on our website www korgpa com You can freely download it in case you want to restore the Pa800 to its original status In case you customize your Musical Resources Sounds Perfor mances and Styles we suggest you make frequent backup copies of them to avoid accidental loss To backup the Operating System please see Backup OS on page 234 To backup the Factory Musical Resources Styles Programs see Full Backup Resources on page 235 Loading the Operating System Your Pa800 can be constantly updated as new versions of the operating system are released by Korg You can download the operating system from www korgpa com Please read the instructions supplied with the operating system on the site You can see which version of the operating systems is installed in your Pa800 by going to the Utility page of the Media mode see OS Version Number on page 235 Loading the Musi
301. e deleted when turning the instrument off switching to the Style Play or Song Play mode or entering Record again If you wish to preserve it save the Song to a storage device 179 Sequencer operating mode Record mode Step Backing Sequence page Record mode Step Backing Sequence page The Step Backing Sequence mode allows you to enter single chords to create or edit the Style Chord Acc part of a Song This mode lets you enter chords even if you are not a keyboard player or fix any error made playing chords or selecting Style controls during a Backing Sequence Quick Record recording In this mode you can only edit Songs created using the Backing Sequence Quick Record recording mode When saving a Song created using the Backing Sequence Quick Record recording mode all Chord Acc data is preserved and can be loaded later to be edited again by using the Step Backing Sequence mode While in Sequencer mode press the RECORD button and select the Step Backing Sequence option The Step Backing Sequence window appears B SE0 Step Record E Page menu Event Recorded Icon Ste lt British Pop 1 Performance p Stereo Grand 400 088 511 Parameters area sc be k BEN co ona gt Style Element oer Length B E Soft transport buttons See Step Backing Sequence procedure on page 181 for infor mation on the record procedure Page menu icon Press the page menu icon to open the menu S
302. e is at the beginning of the pattern press the note before starting the Style Tracks volume status area Virtual sliders Press the track s area to select a track and use TEMPO VALUE controls to change the value Track status icons STYLE Status of tracks Press this icon to change the status D Play status The track can be heard EI Mute status The track cannot be heard a Record status After starting recording the track will receive notes from the keyboard and the MIDI IN connector Track names Under the sliders a label for each track is shown Drum Acc5 Shown Style tracks o v c Q i o tim Q cc 112 Style Record mode Main page Record 2 Main page Record 2 While in the main page press the Record 2 tab to see this page Most parameters in this page are the same as in Main page Record 1 In addition here you can see and select Sounds for each Style track STYLE RECORD Tempo J G4 Chord Vary cv 1 Meter 4 4 Resolution F High NTT F Fifth Sounds area Et WE WEP LS LPL LSP Le DRUM FERC BASS ACC1 ACCE ACCS ACCA ACCS ER Cua Sounds area This area lets you see Sounds and octave transposition for the eight Style tracks Octave transpose icon Eo d P T Sec AF TE Ba ra S e M e e av Sound bank s icon Octave transpose icon Non editable This indicator shows the track s octave transposi tion Tracks will be recorded with t
303. e it to add clarity to your voice decrease it to remove nasality High High band Increase it to add brilliance to your voice decrease it to remove sibilance Sub Scale panel Press the Sub Scale tab to select this panel This panel replicates the Mixer Tuning Sub Scale edit page see page 92 Volume Pad panel Press the Pad tab to select this panel This is where you can assign a different Hit or Sequence Pad to each of the four pads and see at a glance how pads are programmed For more options go to the Pad Switch Pad page see page 100 Pad 1 Pad 3 Pl Crash 2 Pad 2 Rain Stick Pad d w indchimez 1 bTamb Ace 1 Sub Scale f PERF gt PERFSY gt SB iini Pad assignment Name of the Hit or Sequence assigned to each Pad Press the box to make the Pad Select window appear see Pad Select window on page 79 Pads lock icon gt GBL When locked assignments to the pads remain unchanged when selecting a different Performance Style or SongBook entry This lock is reset when turning the instrument off unless you write Global settings to memory see Write Global Global Setup dialog box on page 210 For more information on parameter locks see General Con trols Lock on page 199 Split panel Press the Split tab to select this panel This is where you can set the split point and Chord Recognition mode Split Point A LLL P PERF STS ini Use
304. e keyboard diagram becomes active You can then change each note tuning in cents of a semi tone within a range of 99 cents referred to Equal tuning This way you can create a custom scale you can save to a Perfor mance or STS Bm MEN D User RR 2 Keto Fine tuning values After selecting the User scale touch a note in the keyboard dia gram and use TEMPO VALUE controls to adjust the selected note tuning in cents Note These settings can be saved to a Performance or STS How to use the Quarter Tone function with a footswitch EC5 switch or Assignable Switch The Quarter Tone function allows you to program a custom scale in realtime for example those sudden scale change typical of Arabic music Changes are not saved anywhere so the scale is easily wiped out when selecting a different Performance or STS or when pressing the Quarter Tone pedal again Note You can create a custom scale to be assigned to a Perfor mance or STS simply by selecting and editing a User scale and saving any change to a Performance or STS See Scale above You can assign the Quarter Tone function to a footswitch a Korg EC5 switch or an Assignable Switch 1 Program a footswitch one of the EC5 pedals or an Assign able Switch to be the Quarter Tone switch Simply go to the Global mode and reach the Controllers Pedal Switch or Controllers EC5 page There you will find the Pedal Footswitch
305. e next C there are twelve keys 7 white keys and 5 black keys Each of those keys are pitched one semitone apart for a total of you guessed it 12 semitones The chromatic scale uses all twelve semitone notes opposed to the diatonic scales Thus there is only one chromatic scale but 12 each of the major minor etc dia tonic scales C major C major D major etc Most of us have grown up hearing the traditional doh ray me fah so la tee doh diatonic scale so that harmonies based on the diatonic scale sound correct What does this mean harmony wise Diatonic scale harmonies can only use notes within specified scale or chord so a third above harmony voice actually varies between three and four semitones above the lead note where the chromatic harmony would stay exactly four semitones a major 3rd above each note To recap we have three different harmony modes that use chro matic or diatonic scales Shifting which uses the chromatic 12 semitone scale changes the input pitch by a fixed number of semitones D I H EA Y l1 cc IA A A es A TL O Chordal which uses the root third fifth and sometimes seventh of the many diatonic scales pitches the harmony voice to the closest note contained within the chord Scalic which uses one of many diatonic scales pitches the har mony voice to the nearest note contained within the scale Theory aside the best way to get great sound is to experiment with all of
306. e octave transpose for each track go to the Mixer Tuning Tuning edit page of the Song Play mode see Mixer Tuning Tuning on page 92 for more details You can also transpose all Upper tracks by using the UPPER OCTAVE buttons on the control panel Keyboard track name Non editable Name of the corresponding track em ma 0 ma UP1 UP2 Sound bank s icon PERF STS This picture illustrates the bank the current Sound belongs to Keyboard track status PERF STS Play mute status of the current track Press this icon to change the status No icon Play status The track can be heard Mute status The track cannot be heard o Jg c Q i o tia Q cc 146 Song Play operating mode Song Tracks 1 8 and 9 16 pages Panels The lower half of the main page contains the various panels you can select by pressing the corresponding tabs See more informa tion in the relevant sections starting from page 147 Volume panel Toi TH Ta T d TOS THE Tar TOS p XE EH ic Split l EJE Mark A Hame LA AA Scale LA AA Tabs Song Tracks 1 8 and 9 16 pages Repeatedly press the TRACK SELECT button to cycle between the Normal Song Tracks 1 8 and Song Tracks 9 16 view In Song Track views the upper half of the main page changes to show parameters for the Song tracks CMNT DIAY d st Canyon Meter 37d H Songs area Selected track info area y o Ma Sounds area
307. e of Contents 3 Edit page Structure siii ra EEN EN EEN aa 196 General et EE 197 General Controls Transpose Control 198 General Controls Scale 1 1 5 dee iria oa g 198 General Controls Locke 199 General Controls Interface 201 Controllers Pedal Switch 2 00262404 tee memes 202 Controllers Assignable Sliders oooooooo 202 Controle ECS WEE 202 MIDI MIDI Setup General Controls 203 MIDI MIDI In Control 204 MIDI MIDI In Channels 204 MIDI MIDI Out Channel 205 o UI 205 Audio Output Sty RDA soia oso eere Eee hr ch 206 Audio Output Seal siirsi conte ci osea Kee 206 Audio Output Seg usce ehh cee ee CR De ae els 206 Audio Output Drums 0 cece cece eee ees 207 Audio Output Audtofn een ees 207 Audio Output Metro Speaker 208 Voice Processor Setup and Preset sections 208 Video Interface Video QU ge eua Eege ech ee 209 Touch Panel leg eg ode dg ses 209 E EE E AE 210 Write Global Global Setup dialog box 210 Write Global Midi Setup dialog box o o oo 210 Write Global Talk Configuration dialog box 211 Write Global Voice Processor Setup dialog box 211 Write Global Voice Processor Preset dialog box 211 Voice Processor 2 0002 e cece o 212 Accessing the Voice Processor edit pages o o o 212 Voice Processor Setup Setup 0 0 cee eee eee eee 212 Voice Pro
308. e order entries are shown in the display 1 Press the page menu icon to open the page menu Choose whether the list must be seen in ascending or descending order Choose one of the sorting options to change the list view order The selected option will be shown in red over the list of file NJ Select one of the available sorting options The order of entries in the display changes reflecting the selected sorting option e As an alternative you can change the sorting order by touching one of the labels in a list of names Touch the Name label gp Hame Genre much afberworld Ballad 44 45 66 11 14 Moree A day in Paradise 11 H6 86 18 18 ha A gigolo Cee A groovy Iove SER A hard day night to alphabetically order the names in ben sl the list Each time you touch the label the order changes between Ascending l Book Book Custom List and Descending p You can do the same by touching the Type Name Genre Artist Key Number Tempo or Meter label e Each time you touch the same label again the order changes between ascending and descending The SongBook 6 1 Searching entries Searching entries The SongBook database may be really huge You can however look for say specific artists or song titles using the filtering functions 1 Press the Filter button in the display to open the Filter dialog box SONGBOOK RH no chord i a Filter Available Tupe Ha
309. e preserved Saved Samples will be preserved too Controlling the Volume Master Volume Use the MASTER VOLUME slider to con trol the overall volume of the instrument This slider controls the volume of the sound going to the internal speakers the main LEFT amp RIGHT OUTPUTs and the HEADPHONES connector The 1 amp 2 OUTPUT connectors are not affected by this slider So use the mixer s or speaker s level controls to adjust the volume MASTER VOLUME MIN Note Begin with a moderate level then raise the MASTER VOLUME up Don t keep the volume at an uncomfortable level for too long Start up 23 Connecting the AC power cord Keyboard Style and Song Volume Use the BALANCE slider to control the relative volume of RealTime RT tracks keyboard BALANCE pads Style tracks drums percussions RT bass Song tracks When in Style Play mode this slider bal ances between the Realtime keyboard tracks and the Accompaniment Style and Pad tracks When in Song Play mode this slider bal ar I ance between the Realtime keyboard SEQ tracks and both Sequencer and Pad tracks The Sequencer s BALANCE slider The Sequencer s BALANCE slider sets the relative volume of the two onboard sequencers Sequencer 1 and Sequencer 2 BALANCE Move it fully left to set Sequencer 1 to the maximum level and Sequencer 2 to zero
310. e these parameters to select the Style Element and Chord Vari ation for editing Start First measure to be cut Length Number of measures to be cut Execute Press this button to execute the operation set in this page Track status icon Status of tracks Press this icon to change the status Play status The track can be heard Track names Mute status The track cannot be heard Under the buttons a label for each track is shown Style Record mode 121 Style Edit Cut Style Edit Delete This page is where you can delete MIDI events out of the Style This function does not remove measures from the pattern To remove whole measure use the Cut function see Style Edit Cut on page 121 STYLE REC Edit ALCA Copy fm Style After setting the various parameters press Execute E CV Style Element Chord Variation Use these parameters to select the Style Element and Chord Vari ation for editing Track Use this parameter to select a track All All tracks selected After deletion the selected Chord Variation will remain empty Drum Acc5 Selected track Event Type of MIDI event to delete All All events The measures are not removed from the Chord Variation Note All notes in the selected range Dup Note All duplicate notes When two notes with the same pitch are encountered on the same tick the one with the lowest velocity is deleted Q V c Q i o Ser Q
311. e you want to send all of a track s signal to the effect as when using insert effects like Rotary Distortion EQ just set the Pan to Off see Pan above Out L R There are four Internal FX processors in Style Play mode two for Keyboard tracks two for Style and Pad tracks You can assign them any kind of available effects but we found it conve nient to arrange them in the following way for most of the Styles STS and Performances included with the Pa800 FX A Reverb processor for the Style tracks FX B Modulating FX processor for the Style tracks FX C Reverb processor for the Realtime Keyboard tracks FX D Modulating FX processor for the Realtime Key board tracks Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from Keyboard to Style tracks and vice versa STYLE PLAY Mixer z Tuning a Trk Upper 1 amp Grand Piano E Piano 121 883 888 STYLE PLAY Mixer Tuning ow Trk Upper 1 b Grand Piano E Piana 121 883 888 IS INS Eu A Send level A D 0 127 PERF PERF STS Level of the track direct signal sent to the effect processor Play Mute icon PERF PERF STS Track s play mute status Play status The track can be heard Mute status The track cannot be heard Mixer Tuning EQ Gain In this page you can set the three band equalization EQ for each individual track Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from the Keyboard to the Style tracks and vi
312. ear movement of the Joystick Y Modulation and sometimes a different Sound parameter s control Y Various controls or non active Expression PERF STS This parameter allows you to switch the Expression control on off on each individual Keyboard track The Expression control is a relative level control always subtracted from the Volume value of the track As an example imagine you have a Piano sound assigned to Upper 1 and a Strings sound assigned to Upper 2 If you turn the Expression switch on on Upper 2 and off on Upper 1 you can use a continuous pedal to control only the Strings volume while the Piano remains unchanged To program a pedal or Assignable Slider to act as an Expression control see Controllers Pedal Switch on page 202 or Con trollers Assignable Sliders on page 202 You can only assign this function to a volume type pedal not to a switch type one Assign the KB Expression option to the pedal or Assignable Slider then select Write Global Global Setup from the page menu to save the setting to the Global Play Mute icon PERF STS Track s play mute status Play status The track can be heard Mute status The track cannot be heard 97 Style Play operating mode Keyboard Ensemble Keyboard Control Keyboard Ensemble Key Velocity Range This page lets you program a key and dynamic velocity range for each of the Keyboard tracks Key range is useful to create a set of
313. ecting a Performance sese eee 38 Saving your settings to a Performance 39 Selecting and playing Styles 42 Selecting and playing a Ste 43 TEE RIDO sonoras oar erp d pA PURA DECRE UE 44 Intro Fill Variation Ending 2 vi NS EIERE sas 45 Single Touch Settings STS iasess sureste e pPe edu vues 46 WII EMT 46 Adjusting balance between the Style and the keyboard 47 Adjusting volume of each single track 47 Turning Style tracks on off llle lees 48 Adding harmony notes to your right hand melody with the ENSEMBLE function hr n Ree 49 SOMO Play 2 rosana s pera HIDE Rn See s 51 Selecting a Song to play 51 Playing back a Song ege aio teow eee es 53 Changing tracks volume 24 22 x n rec ENEE NEE 54 Turning Song tracks on off ooooooocooommmmmm m 56 Soloing a track EE 56 Mixing EE 57 UNE le ee EE 58 Selecting the desired entry from the Main List 58 Displaying Artist or Genre 59 A ENER 60 SEI hine QUELS EE EE E teg 61 Add COS uscar serrana 63 Creating a Custom List 9 i904 tov acce wo genee dew e dee y 65 Selecting and using a Custom List 67 Selecting a SongBook STI 67 Singing with a connected microphone 68 Connecting a microphone ooooccooccoocconcoccncao coo 68 Applying harmony to your voice ooooo ooocmmommomm 70 Soloing your voice TalkBack 00 cee eee eee 71 Locking Voice Proces
314. ecting items from the Main List To add entries to a Custom List first create or select the list to be edited in this page Then go to the Book page select the entry to be added and press the Add to list button When finished add ing entries return to this page and edit the selected list List Name SONGBOOK S no chord A Type Hame key Tempo HAS wA day in paradise 44 a Custom list remm amp while Scrollbar Gu Light mv inferno dap Lana train going E Over happy ED Senza donne PoP Senza donne Commands Tt oo sons Del List write Book Custom Lyrics cati Jj Esto J tise List Name Name of the selected list To select a Custom List go to the Cus tom List page and use the List pop up menu Custom list List of songs contained in the selected Custom List Use the scrollbar to browse through the list o y c Scrollbar Q o Use the scrollbar to scroll the entries Kn c Commands Move Use these buttons to move the selected song entry up or down in the list Del Song Press this button to delete the selected song entry from the list New List Press this button to create a new empty Custom List Note The maximum number of Custom Lists in a SongBook file is 256 lists Del List Press this button to delete the current list 168 SongBook Lyrics STS Write Press this button to save changes to the selected Custom List Write List To assign a diffe
315. ectribe09 BD Electribe10 BD Electribe11 BD Electribe12 BD Electribe13 BD Electribe14 BD Electribe15 BD Electribe16 BD Electribe17 55 56 57 58 59 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 BD Orchestra SD Piccolo1 pp SD Piccolo1 p SD Piccolo1 mf 87 88 SD Piccolo2 pp SD Piccolo2 p SD Piccolo2 mf SD Piccolo2 f SD Solid1 mf SD Solid1 f 92 93 SD Solid2 mf 102 103 105 107 Some E mear 17 mear 17 mear E SoHe be 17 mear 17 sD eeaiber 17 mear 17 mear 7 mear 17 mear 17 mear 17 mear 17 mea 17 sme ES Reg ETICO ANI 5m Reg mosa E COS men 17 mee 17 so riotero 2 EE ANETO mee 17 sorely 3 EII ANETO sore 3 CES ANETO EE EE osoin f TM fores eng eng 274 Factory data Drum Samples N ege Family Tr TS ANETO z oomen JL TM oomen a messen 7 TM pos 2 mme 3 mees r fores RER De fomm f gt menge f gt zm pos 3 m pow a ze fowm a 5 poYmwer a zm fowm 2 zm so images 2 zw fowm 2 zm so images 2 zu poA 2 zu forse NET zm pomi 2 zs poWwwe 2 ME CIS ANETO MEN CE ANETO ara e 2 m9 esa a zm ms 2 zm pes ER zr poodem NET zs foomo NET MEM ETE 17 zm egen 2 zm _ RimSnrSignaturetow 2 ar rimshorp ER zs CEC NET zm WmWasr RER zm WmWnsz a Rim Synth Rm mh o o upps 2 NJ NJ NI N NI N N N NI Mib o o a a fo N
316. ed to the latest selected Style are also saved Note Only the SMF or KAR file assigned to Sequencer 1 will be saved in the SongBook entry However when recalling the entry the Song will be assigned to either Sequencer depending on which one 1s currently free and not in play When unchecked no new resource will be saved with the entry The original resource associated with the entry will be preserved when pressing Write When pressing New Song to create a new blank entry this parameter is automatically checked and cannot be modified A reference to the associated resource will be saved with the new entry Resource Name gt SB Name of the currently selected Style or Standard MIDI File It may differ from the name of the resource already saved in the entry shown on top of the page see Resource above You can select a different resource by just using the STYLE SELECT section or the SEQI SELECT button on the control panel to select a different Style or Standard MIDI File As an alternative you can exit to the Style Play or Song Play mode and select resources from there Then press the SONG BOOK button to return to the Book Edit page SongBook 165 Book Edit 1 When you press Write a link to the selected resource s is saved with the entry provided Write Current Resource is selected when saving The resource s will be recalled when you selected the entry it is associated to Write STS gt SB Wh
317. ee Step Backing Sequence page menu on page 181 for more information Parameters area Side arrow The small arrow next to a parameter means that its value is effec tive at the current position For example if you are at the 003 01 000 position and an arrow lights up next to the Chord parameter this means that a chord change happens at the 003 01 000 position Measure This parameter shows the current position of the Step Editor To go to a different position within the Song use one of the follow ing systems e Select this parameter then use the TEMPO VALUE con trols to go to a different measure e Use the Measure buttons in the display to move to a differ ent measure Use the Step buttons in the display to move in steps of 1 8 192 ticks Use the Event buttons in the display to jump to the next event Q V c o i o Ser Q cc 180 Sequencer operating mode Record mode Step Backing Sequence page The locator value is shown in the measure beat tick format Measure Measure or bar number Beat Divider in the Time Signature ratio e g a quar ter in a 3 4 time Tick Smallest position value Both Pa800 internal sequencers feature a resolution of 384 ticks per quarter Style This is the latest selected Style To insert a Style change at the current position touch the Style name to open the Style Select window or follow the standard selecting procedure using the buttons of
318. embesclosedStapc iembetas ger lr pawon Jr pwone LE pawon Jr nger Jr 750_ UduWalfOpenb 7st vaa Hair Open 7 eda m pase WD Brazillia1 WD Brazillia2 WD Brazillia e omo 3 zw wonmesg 3 7 wo timosos a 738 WoRmesb 2 7 WoHhmesbs 3 7 woens 3 e been 17 e wo Kangaroo 5 eleng 9 75 wo Kangaroo 9 7e wo Kangaroos 5 7e wo Kangaroo 9 7m wo Kangaroo 8 75 wo kangaroos 9 7m Tambourine maior 6 75 tags 5 T Tambourine Open 5 M E 1 Douf Rim Ak MSN M E 1 Douf Tek Ak1 MN s iiber Jr 7m ie Pandopen Jr rar Mere 5 7 amp upper 6 78 ME Panarat 6 upper CIN mw mera mw weg 5 ehn Jr 133 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 50 791 M E 1 Sagat Close 792 MEI Surdo L Mute 793 MEI Surdo L Open 794 M E 1 Tabla Medium 795 M E 1 Tabla Dom 796 M E 1 Tabla Flam 797 M E 1 Tabla Rim 798 M E 1 Tabla Tak 799 M E 1 Timbales 800 M E 1 Udu f Open M E 1 Alkis 802 MEI Bandir Open 803 M E 1 Bandir Closed 804 MEI Bongo Roll 805 M E 1 Darbuka1 Tek1 806 MEI Darbuka1 Tek2 807 MEI Darbuka1 Open 808 M E 1 Darbuka1 Closed 809 MEI Darbuka2 M E 1 Darbuka3 M E 1 Darbuka4 M E 1 Darbuka D1 M E 1 Darbuka D2 M E 1 Darbuka D3 815 M E 1 Darbuka5 D1 M E 1 Darbuka5 D2 M E 1 Darbuka5 D3 M E
319. ements will become more complex and more parts Tracks may be added This allows your performance to have a more dynamic arrange ment without losing the original feel of the Style Fill in During a performance a drummer may often perform a fill such as when transitioning from a verse to a chorus adding extra dynamics and keeping the beat from getting too repetitive The Pa800 offers three Fill ins specifically programmed for each Style A Fill in may be drums alone drums with instrumenta tion of even a silent break Intro amp Ending Each Style also allows you to embellish your performance with a set of musical introductions and endings A long and short ver sion of the Intro and Ending are usually provided with the former more harmonically elaborated and the latter with a fixed chord A count in style Intro is also provided Pads are like single track Styles that can be triggered by using the dedicated PAD buttons They can be used to play in realtime single sounds as well as short cycling sequences that play in time with the Style Keyboard tracks In addition to the Style and Pad tracks up to four additional parts can be played on the keyboard in real time Each of these Keyboard tracks can be limited to a particular range of keys or velocities but in general three can be assigned to play above the split point Upper and one below Lower This allows the Upper Sounds to be layered tog
320. emory 99 Chace e Rec Meter Resolution F High Karst Nylon Gtr amp Trk Upper 1 b Sweet Fretless B Bass 121 883 835 Chord ficc Track Kbd Pad Track Volume 20 IS MIC IH_ LOWER UPPERS UPPERS UPPERL After choosing the Backing Sequence Quick Record option the Backing Sequence Record page appears Preparing to record When you enter Backing Sequence Record the most recently used Style is already selected and all tracks are ready to record You could simply start recording as if you were playing in realtime with the Styles However there are some settings that you may wish to edit e Ifyou like adjust any editable parameter in the display Track s status Rec means they are ready Measure counter Neg to record Play means they are recorded ative numbers 2 1 and you can hear them Mute means they are the precount Press the Style param cannot be heard after which you can eter or one the STYLE start recording buttons to open the Style Select window and select a different Style as seen on page 43 Style s Tempo Change it if you like Free Memory 99 Resolution High Style s Meter You can not change it Press the Perf STS parameter to open the Performance Select window and select a different Per LOWER UPPERS UPPER UPPERI formance as seen on H1IC TH A page 38 As an alter y native you use the PERFORMANCE Grouped tracks During Quic
321. en saving a SongBook entry and this parameter is checked you can save a single STS or all four Style s STSs lt STS Name gt A single STS is saved to the chosen SongBook STS The source are the Keyboard tracks as they have been configured by selecting a Performance Style STS SongBook STS or after manual edit ing When you press Write and choose the Rename Overwrite option only the new STS is overwrit ten while the others are left untouched All Current Style STS All four STSs are saved to the current SongBook entry The source STSs are those contained in the Style currently selected in Style Play mode When you press Write and choose the Rename Overwrite option all STSs are overwritten STS Name gt SB Name of the current STS Press the Ti Text Edit button to open the Text Edit window and modify the name To STS Location One of the four STS available for each entry where you can save the current settings for Keyboard tracks and the Voice Processor Buttons New Song Press this button to create a new entry Settings are copied from the currently selected Style or from the Standard MIDI File assigned to Sequencer 1 The selected resource will be shown in the Resource Name field see above Del Song Press this button to delete the current entry Write Press this button to open the Write Song dialog box and save the current entry to the main list of the SongBook Note The maximum number
322. ent SET MYSHOWLSET Scrollbar List Keep the SHIFT button pressed while touching one of the arrows to scroll to the next or previous alpha numeric section Icons Various icons help identifying the type of a file a Song a folder Operative modes Pa800 pages are divided into various operating modes Each mode is accessed by pressing the corresponding button in the MODE section on the control panel Each operating mode is marked with a different color code that helps you understand at first sight where you are Three special modes Global Disk and SongBook overlap the current operating mode that remains active in the background The SongBook mode can recall the Style Play or Song Play modes Selected highlighted items Any operation carried on on parameters data or list entries is executed on highlighted items First select the parameter or item then execute the operation RO Non available grayed out parameters When a parameter or command is not currently available it is shown in grey on the display This means it cannot be selected but may become available when a different option is selected or you switch to a different page Pitch Shortcuts Some commands or pages can be recalled by keeping the SHIFT button pressed and pressing other buttons or elements in the display See the Shortcuts chapter on page 297 for a list of available shortcuts apinb IO 30
323. ent Chord Variation Use this parameter to select the target Style Element and Chord Variation To Track Use this parameter to select the target track inside the selected Chord Variation The Percussion track is usually suggested since the Drum track is still suitable for standard Drum Kit sounds count in break etc After importing the MIDI Groove pattern assign the Sound to which the sliced samples are assigned to the track playing the MIDI Groove pattern Q V c o i o Ser Q cc 126 Style Record mode Import Import SMF Import Import SMF The Import SMF function allows you to import MIDI data from a Standard MIDI File SMF created on your preferred external sequencer and transform them in a Chord Variation Note You cannot use this function to import data from any generic Song The Standard MIDI File to be imported must be pro grammed as if it was one of Pa800 s Chord Variations STYLE REC Import Oivi cvi When importing an SMF parameters like CV Length Meter Tempo Changes Program Changes and Expression are recog nized These parameters will be imported as the header of the Style Element containing the Chord Variation provided the Initialize parameter is checked or the Style Element is empty Hint It is a good idea to check the Initialize parameter when importing the first Chord Variation of a Style Element and uncheck it when importing the following Chord Varia
324. ent setting of the CC07 control CC64 or Damper Pedal Use this controller to simulate the Damper pedal Tempo Tempo is a global MIDI message that is not tied to a particular channel Each Song includes Tempo data Lyrics Lyrics are non standard MIDI events made to display text together with the music Pa800 can read many of the available Lyrics format on the market What is MIDI Over USB You can let the Pa800 communicate MIDI data with a computer using the USB Device port instead of the MIDI ports This way you can connect your Pa800 to a personal computer without the need of a dedicated MIDI interface Most Pa800 MIDI features can be used on a Windows XP or Mac OS X computer with no need of special software However for full and easy use of all MIDI features we suggest you to install the KORG USB MIDI Driver a special software that you can find in the CD that comes with your Pa800 Relevant instructions come with the software itself See Installing the Korg USB MIDI Driver on page 295 Standard MIDI Files Midifiles or Standard MIDI Files a k a SMF are a practical way of exchanging songs between different instruments and computers Pa800 uses the SMF format as its default song for mat so reading a song from a computer or saving a song that a computer software can read is not a problem at all The Pa800 sequencers are compatible with the SMF in format 0 all data in one track it is the most
325. ents and Chord Variations and the Style structure in general see The Style structure on page 106 3 Press MENU and select the Event Edit section The Event Edit page appears see Event Edit Event Edit on page 116 for more information 4 Press START STOP to listen to the selected Chord Varia tion Press START STOP to stop it Chord Scanning does not work so you will listen the pattern at the original Key Chord 5 Press the Filter tab to select the Filter page and uncheck the filters for the event types you wish to see in the display see Event Edit Filter on page 118 for more information 6 Press the Event Edit tab to go back to the Event Edit page 7 Usethe Track pop up menu to select the track to edit see Track pop up menu on page 117 8 Thelist of events contained in the selected track inside the Chord Variation selected on step 2 will appear in the dis play Some events on the beginning of the Chord Varia tions as well as the EndOfTrk event marking its ending point cannot be edited therefore appearing in grey o Jg c o i Q ia Q cc 118 Style Record mode 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Event Edit Filter Scroll though the various events by using the scrollbar Select an event to be edited by touching it in the display This is usually a note that you can edit Hr 6601 681 006 Note Ft2 4 amp 1 H eias Be daas For more inf
326. equencer Play Main page Manual In this mode you can change the Tempo using TEMPO VALUE section controls The Song will be played back using the manually selected tempo Auto The Tempo recorded to the Song will be used Selected track info area This line lets you see the Sound assigned to the selected track Not only it is shown on the main page but also in several edit pages Track name Sound bank Sound name Program Change Track name Name of the selected track Sound name Sound assigned to the selected track Press anywhere in this area to open the Sound Select window and select a different Sound Sound bank Bank the selected Sound belongs to Program Change Program Change number sequence Bank Select MSB Bank Select LSB Program Change Sounds area This area lets you see Sounds and octave transposition for the eight tracks currently displayed Zo ior Ho Ha qa F Q i c o Q S oO Sound bank s icon e Octave icon Song track octave transpose Non editable Octave transpose of the corresponding track To edit the octave transpose go to the Mixer Tuning Tuning edit page see page 92 for programming information Sound bank s icon This picture illustrates the bank the current Sound belongs to Touch an icon a first time to select the corresponding track detailed information are shown on the Selected Track Info area see above Touch i
327. er 44 P 1 Song name RW E Song name Displays the name of the selected Song NEWSONG means that a new blank Song is selected and you can record it Touch the Song name to make the Song Select window appear allowing for selection of a different Song see Song Select win dow on page 80 To select a Song you can also press the SELECT button in the SEQUENCER 1 section of the control panel Press SELECT a second time to select a Song by dialing in its ID number see Selecting a Song by its ID number on page 81 SEQUENCER 1 SELECT lt lt gt gt I4 gt E Y SII Meter Current Time Signature Measure number Current measure number Tempo Metronome tempo Select this parameter and use the TEMPO VALUE controls to change the tempo As an alternative when a different parameter is selected or you are in a different page keep the SHIFT button pressed and use the DIAL to change the tempo of the sequencer Locate measure When checked the measure shown by this parameter is a tem porary start point of the song instead of measure 1 When you press the Le HOME button or use the lt lt REWIND button to go back to the beginning the Song returns to this point Metro Check this box to turn the metronome on during playback Tempo Tempo mode Use this menu to select the Tempo change mode Sequencer operating mode 171 S
328. er of measures of the current Style Element Current beat Beat number of the current measure that is currently playing Current tempo PERF PERFS Metronome tempo from 30 to 250 Select this parameter and use the TEMPO VALUE controls to change the tempo As an alternative you don t need to select this parameter just keep the SHIFT button pressed and use the DIAL to change the tempo To recall the Tempo stored in the current Style press the DOWN and UP buttons at the same time Note Tempo may change while a Style Element is playing Each Style Element may contain Tempo Change data Sequencer 1 2 area This is where Songs assigned to the two onboard sequencers are shown Song name Song name Name of Songs assigned to Sequencer 1 S1 and Sequencer 2 S2 You can select Songs while playing Styles to have them ready when switching to Song Play mode The icon shows the type of the selected Song Standard MIDI File often abbreviated as SMF file extension MID or KAR Only assignable to Sequencer 1 A Jukebox file file extension JBX can be assigned to Sequencer 1 but its name is not shown in this area The JBX icon appears together with the name of the cur rently selected Song in the Jukebox list Performance STS area This is where the latest selected Performance or STS name is shown Selected Performance or STS Selected Performance or STS This is the latest selected Perf
329. er is not selected or you are in any other page keep the SHIFT button pressed and use the DIAL to change the Tempo The selected tempo will be shown in a small window TEMPO VALUE wel Down e Press the UP and DOWN buttons at the same time to recall the saved Tempo O Note You could sim ply press START STOP to start the Style but the Synchro Start function allows you to make the Style start in sync with your playing on the key board Therefore it may be considered a more musical way of starting a Style Selecting and playing Styles 45 Intro Fill Variation Ending Intro Fill Variation Ending When playing Styles you can select various Style Elements to make your playing richer A Style is made of up to four basic patterns Variations three Intros or two Intros and a Count In three Fills or two Fills and a Break and three Endings 1 4 eo Make sure the SYNCHRO START LED is turned on otherwise press the button to turn it on SYNCHRO START STOP Press one of the INTRO buttons to set the corresponding Intro to play INTRO 3 COUNT IN Play the keyboard The Style starts with the selected Intro When the Intro is completed the basic pattern selected Variation starts to play While playing press one of the FILL buttons to select a Fill Before the Fill ends press one of t
330. er to Style Play or Song Play mode without previously saving the Song to a storage device Undo When selecting this command the latest operation is canceled and data are reverted to the previous situation Overdub Step Recording Only available in Record mode Select this command to enter Overdub Step Record mode This recording mode lets you enter events one at a time adding events to the existing events See Record mode Step Record page on page 175 Overwrite Step Recording Only available in Record mode Select this command to enter Overwrite Step Record mode This recording mode lets you enter events one at a time overwriting all existing events See Record mode Step Record page on page 175 Delete Song Select this command to delete the Song and create a new blank Song Delete Current Track Select this command to delete the track currently selected in the Track area see Track volume status area on page 174 Solo Track Select the track to be soloed and check this item You will hear only the selected track and the Solo warning will flash on the page header Uncheck this item to exit the Solo function SHIFT Keep the SHIFT button pressed and touch one of the tracks to solo it Do the same on a soloed track to deactivate the Solo function Copy Paste FX You can copy a single or all four effects between Styles Perfor mances STSs and Songs To do this choose the Copy FX
331. er track plays below the split point while the Upper 1 Upper 2 and Upper 3 tracks play above it By default selecting this keyboard mode automatically selects the Lower chord scanning mode see Chord Recognition Mode on page 101 FULL UPPER The Upper 1 Upper 2 and or Upper 3 tracks play on the whole keyboard range The Lower track does not play By default selecting this keyboard mode automatically selects the Full chord scan ning mode see Chord Recognition Mode on page 101 B STYLE CHANGE This button turns the Style Change function on or off On When you select a Performance the Style might change according to which Style number is memorized onto the Performance Off When you select a Performance the Style and Style track settings remain unchanged Only Key board track settings are changed c 9 D YU O O 16 Front panel M PERFORMANCE SELECT Press this button to use the SOUND PERFORMANCE SELECT section to select a Performance Y SOUND SELECT Press this button to use the SOUND PERFORMANCE SELECT section to select a Sound and assign it to the selected track SOUND PERFORMANCE SELECT section PERF STS PERF gt STSS gt SB Use these buttons to open the Sound Select or Performance Select window and select a Sound or a Performance See Sound Select window on page 78 or Performance Select window on page 78 For a list of available Sounds se
332. er whose Song list you wish to save as a text file 2 Select the Export Song List command from the page menu 3 A dialog box will appear asking you to select either the SSD U memory or the hard disk Write Song List 4 Select an option and press OK to confirm Note The text file will contain a list of mid kor and bx files only Folders and different kinds of files will not be included When saved the text file will be named after the selected folder For example a folder named Dummy will generate a Dummy txt file If a file with the same name already exists in the target it will be overwritten without waiting for any confirmation A file con taining the list of all valid files contained into the root of the disk will generate a Root pt file The list will include the progressive number assigned to each Song file names the total number of files in the list Q V c Q i o Ser Q cc 82 Selecting elements Song Select window For the correct display and printing of the list on a personal com puter use a fixed size 1 e non proportional character in your text editor Show Song Number Check this option to make the Song s progressive ID number appear in the list next to each Song Show Song Extension Check this option to make the file extension mid kar jbx appear in the list at the end of each Song s name Create New Folder Th
333. erating mode Mixer Tuning FX Send CO Center R 1 R 63 Right stereo channel Off If the track s output status is Left amp Right normal setting the direct uneffected signal is not sent to the outputs only the FX signal is heard for this track If the track is sent to a separate output no FX is sent to any output To program the output status for each track see Audio Output Sty Kbd on page 206 Volume of grouped Style tracks gt GBLSY This parameter is a general offset applied to all Styles While the balance between the individual Style tracks can change when choosing a different Style the average volume set here will not change This is useful to avoid sudden changes in volume when choosing different Styles Volume of individual tracks gt PERF PERF ere Track s volume This is the relative volume of each track as saved in the Style Performance or STS It may change when choosing a different Style Performance or STS 0 127 MIDI value of the track s volume Play Mute icon PERF PERF STS Tracks play mute status Play status The track can be heard Mute status The track cannot be heard Mixer Tuning FX Send This page lets you set the level of the track s direct uneffected signal going to the Internal FX processors The effect processors included in Pa800 are connected in parallel so you can decide which percentage of the direct signal can be effected Out L R In cas
334. erformance or STS GLOBAL Controllers Ca Mic in volume Pedal Switch E Assignable Slider Mic gt GBL Functions assigned to the corresponding sliders on the control panel when the selected mode is MIC See List of Assignable Pedal and Assignable Slider functions on page 287 for a list of the assignable functions Assignable Slider A B gt GBLOP Functions assigned to the corresponding sliders on the control panel when the selected mode is A or B See List of Assignable Pedal and Assignable Slider functions on page 287 for a list of the assignable functions The first functions are switch type functions while the remaining starting from Master Volume are continuous like functions Only continuous functions can be assigned to the sliders Controllers EC5 This page lets you program each of the five switches of the KORG EC5 multiswitch controller GLOBAL Controllers i Style Start Stop Pedal f Assign Switch A Sliders S See List of Footswitch and EC5 functions on page 286 for a list of the assignable functions The first functions are switch type functions while the remaining starting from Master Volume are continuous like functions Only switch functions can be assigned to the EC5 switches EC5 A E Each of the switches of a KORG EC5 multiswitch gt GBL MIDI MIDI Setup General Controls This page allows you to select a MIDI Setup convert ordinary notes to RX Noises
335. es of the manuals show LCD screens along with an explanation of functions and operations All sound names parameter names and values are merely examples and may not always match the actual display you are working on Cleaning the display Use a soft cotton cloth to clean the screen Some materials such as paper towels could cause scratches and damage it Computer wipes are also suggested provided they are specifically designed for LCD screens Do not spray any liquids on the LCD screen directly Always apply the solution to your cloth first then clean the screen Trademarks Akai is a registered trademark of Akai Professional Corporation Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Computer Inc MS DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation TC Helicon is a registered trademark of TC Elec tronic Inc All other trademarks or registered trademarks are the property of their respective holders Disclaimer The information contained in this manual have been carefully revised and checked through Due to our constant efforts to improve our products the specifications might differ to those in the manual Korg is not responsible for any eventual differences found between the specifications and the contents of the instruc tion manual the specifications being subject to change without prior notice Liability Korg products are manufactured under strict specifications and voltages required by each country T
336. ess this icon to open the page menu see Page menu on page 141 Parameters area Each page contains various parameters Use the tabs to select one of the available pages For detailed information on the vari ous types of parameters see sections starting from page 135 Tabs Use tabs to select one of the edit pages of the current edit section Event Edit Event Edit The Event Edit is the page where you can edit each single MIDI event of the selected Chord Variation You can for example replace a note with a different one or change its playing strength 1 e velocity value Page sub header Event Edit a Valuel Valuez Length Position Tupe Page header Page menu icon H 00l 0i gaa Ctrl KASIRA Hore 166 D0 006 66 192 H 003 601 661 EndOfT ck Event list G0 Meas insert Een CI O Tabs Scrollbar This is very similar to the Style Record s Event Edit page See Event Edit Event Edit on page 116 for more information on the event editing procedure Pad Record mode Event Edit Event Edit 135 Event Edit Filter This page is where you can select the event types to be shown in the Event Edit page PAD REC Event Edit Turn On the filter for all event types you do not wish to see in the Event Edit page Note Some of the events are ghosted and non editable since the corresponding events are not editable in a Pad This 1s very similar to the Style Record s
337. eters Entry s name When checked current settings for Style tracks or the path for the SMF or KAR file are saved with the entry If unchecked WE original Style track settings are saved with EEN Gelle A S the entry different Style SMF or KAR file This parameter is mandatory when creat nas DESEN selected Em ay IMS e Su from the saved resource ing a new entry by pressing the New Song button When checked current Keyboard track W em PE and Voice Processor settings are saved to S H H one of the four STSs available for each Mew Song Write See Ser eg entry You can also exit the SongBook edit e y S Book EJE Processor Keyboard tracks then return to the Song Book and save the new settings to a differ ent STS Press the Text Edit icon to edit the STS name One of the four STS available Press New Song to Choose All Current Style STS to save the four create a new entry STSs recalled by the latest selected Style with the new entry 64 The SongBook Adding entries 6 When done with this page press the tab to go to the Book Edit 2 page Name of the Style SMF or KAR file memorized with the entry provided Write Current Resource is selected when saving it Entry s name Text file linked to the entry E Unchanged mY This text will be seen as Lyrics in the display or in the external monitor See Lyrics as text files associated to a SongBook entry on page 16
338. ether The split point can be set to any note on the keyboard In addition to performing along with a Style these same Keyboard tracks will allow you to play along with the Sequencer STS Single Touch Settings Single Touch Settings allow you to instantly change the sounds assigned to each of the Keyboard tracks with a single button press allowing for wide variation in sounds during a perfor mance Four STS Single Touch Settings can be saved with each Style or SongBook entry e SE D n YU 3 H Be Sea i 26 Glossary of Terms Performance Ensemble By turning the Ensemble feature on a single note played on one of the Keyboard tracks will be embellished by additional notes to create a complete chord voicing The Ensemble knows which notes to add by looking at the chord that the Style is playing In addition the Ensemble parameters allow you to select the type of voicing that will be added from a simple one note harmony to a full Brass section even a marimba style trill Performance The Performance is the most encompassing setting on the Pa800 a single setting that can remember a Style with all the appro priate sounds the Keyboard tracks with all the appropriate sounds and all their Single Touch Settings Tempo transposi tion etc A Performance can be stored in one of the Perfor mance Banks or it can be saved in a database format using the SongBook function G Seq
339. example above you will record the Acc1 track in the AMa jor key with notes pertaining to the A7th scale This exact pat tern will be recalled when an A7th chord will be recognized Copy Key Ch Copy Key Chord button Press this button in the display to copy Key Chord settings of the currently selected track to all other tracks of the same Chord Variation or to the whole Style This function is useful to speed up pattern programming and to avoid having different tracks in different keys within the same Chord Variation Copy Key Chord Current Chord Variation Tracks The Key Chord of the current track will be cop ied to all tracks of the current Chord Variation All Style Tracks The Key Chord of the current track will be cop ied to all tracks of the Style i e all Chord Varia tions Style Record mode Main page Record 1 Delete Note button Use this command to delete a single note or a single percussive instrument from a track For example to delete a snare keep the D2 note corresponding to the snare pressed 1 Selecta track 2 Pressthe Delete Note button and keep it pressed 3 Press START STOP to start the Style 4 When you reach the passage containing the note to be deleted play the note on the keyboard Keep it pressed up to the last note to be deleted 5 When finished release the Delete button and the note to be deleted and press START STOP again to stop the Style Note If the not
340. expression type pedals can be used Q V c Q i o EM Q cc 108 Style Record mode Exit by saving or deleting changes Exit by saving or deleting changes When finished editing you can save your Style in memory or abort any change e To save changes select the Write Style command from the page menu see Write Style dialog box on page 128 To abort all changes select the Exit from Record command from the page menu or press the RECORD button to exit from record and return to the main page of the Style Record mode Hint Save often while recording to avoid accidentally losing your Style Listening to the Style while in Edit mode While you are in Style Record mode you can listen to the selected Chord Variation or to the whole Style depending on the page you are in To select a Chord Variation go to the Main page of the Record Edit mode see Element Style Element and Chord Var Chord Variation on page 109 When you are in the Main Event Edit Quantize Trans pose Velocity or Delete pages you can listen to the selected Chord Variation Press START STOP to check how it works Press START STOP again to stop the play back When you are in the Sounds Expression Keyboard Range Chord Table Trigger Tension Delete All Copy Style Element Controls or Style Control pages you can listen to the whole Style Press START STOP and play some chords to do your tests Select an
341. ey of D as that s the first chord but the harmonies actually work best in the key of G try running the song through Voice Processor to hear for yourself Setting the scale can also take a bit of practice for songs centered around the third or root of the scale it might not sound like there s any noticeable differences between the three major or three minor scales This is because your song doesn t hit any of the scale s altered notes A melody centered around the fifth of the scale such as B in the key of E highlights the differences between the scales Try the Sha Lala Lala La Tee Daa chorus of Van Morrison s Brown Eyed Girl key E scale major 3rd above voicing with each major scale to hear the audible differ ence between them For the minor scales Santana s Evil Ways key G scale minor 3rd above voicing highlights the differ ences between the three minor scales The following table illustrates the third and fifth above for a given input note to illustrate the differences between the six dif ferent scales nc means no change in that the harmony voice will simply keep its previous pitch until the lead voice pitch changes to a non nc note 2 2 2 A A A A A 2 A Diatonic and Chromatic We ve described scalic and chordal harmonies as diatonic and shift harmonies as chromatic but what do those words mean Look at a piano keyboard Between middle C and th
342. f the pattern to record Use the Meter parameter to set the Style Elements meter Note You can edit this parameter only 1f you selected the Record New Style option when entering the Record mode or when editing an empty Style Element Select the Tempo parameter and set the tempo Press the Record 2 tab to see the Sounds area Here you can assign the right Sound to each Style track You cannot select Digital Drawbars Sounds For more details see Sounds area on page 112 If needed set the Octave Transpose for each track Note The Octave Transpose will affect only the notes coming from the keyboard and not from the arranger At this point if you want to do a Realtime Recording go on reading Realtime Record procedure below Otherwise if you prefer to do a Step Record jump to Step Record pro cedure on page 114 Style Record mode 113 Style Record procedure Realtime Record procedure 1 Select the track to record Its status icon will turn to Record For more details see Tracks volume status area on page 111 Note When entering the Record mode a track is already in Record status When you press START STOP after entering the Record mode you can immediately start recording If you like you can try your part before recording e Mute the track by repeatedly pressing its icon status until the EI Mute status icon appears e Press START STOP to let any recorded track play bac
343. ffective maximum value is determined by the MASTER VOL UME slider position When moved a magnified version of the virtual slider appears in the display for more accurate positioning Note This does not work in Sequencer mode Q ASSIGNABLE SLIDER gt GBL These are freely assignable sliders see Controllers Assignable Sliders on page 202 for information on how to assign functions to them Three operating modes are available and can be selected by pressing the SLIDER MODE button see below Front panel 11 Introduction TEMPONALUE LCD CONTRAST CHORD SCANNING KEYBOARD MODE EXIT MENU AUDIO IN MIC E TouchView TEMPO DISPLAY LOCK HOLD 138 43 STYLE CHANGE PERFORMANCE SELECT ken O SINGLE TOUCH SETTING STRINGS amp TRUMPET A GUITAR VOCALS TROMBONE BRASS BALANCE e START STOP SYNCHRO EE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 SAX WOODWIND SYNTH 1 SYNTH 2 BASS DRUM amp PERC SFX USER 1 USER2 USER DK ENSEMBLE mo MICSETTING PAD 3 SONGBOOK HARMONY EFFECT 1 2 C3 II mums vocal TECHNOLOGIES TECHNOLOGY UI IM o eoe o Q e IM You can use these sliders to change the volume of several tracks at once While in Style Play or Sequencer mode select one of the Upper tracks or one of the separate Style or Song tracks in the display then keep the SHIFT button pressed and move one of these sliders to proportionally change
344. fferent Style page 79 STYLE PLAY Tempo Use the DIAL to change it Length of the accompaniment pattern and current beat Performance or STS Touch it to open the Performance Select win dow and choose a different Per formance Sounds on the keyboard will change page 78 Touch it to turn the microphone on off page 68 Touch it to turn the voice har mony on off page 70 Touch it to talk to your audience page 71 Chard no chord l Easy Mode 7 The Style Play page in detail Sounds assigned to the right hand UP1 to UP3 and to the left hand LOW Touch the Sounds name to open the Sound Select window and choose a different Sound page 78 Sound icon and status If the HUTE icon appears the Sound is in mute and cannot be heard If the icon does not appear the Sound is in play and can be heard page 33 Close this lock to avoid transposition when choosing a different Performance or Style gt page 199 Touch here to change the Split Point page 36 Single Touch Settings STS Touch one of them to choose it or use the dedicated buttons on the control panel Sounds on the keyboard will change page 80 Notes There are three Sounds for the right hand Upper 1 Upper 2 Upper 3 and only one Sound for the left hand Lower Their names are abbreviated as UP1 UP2 UP3 LOW and are shown in the right side of the display Right hand Upper and left
345. for each onboard sequencer Song path This line shows the current device path Directory This is the list of the selected device s content File status File size Scrollbar Type gt Name 44 45 66 11 14 11 86 66 18 18 43 45 66 11 21 3 8 6 11 21 H3 H8 B6 11 21 Type of the File or folder Modification file or folder name date Use the scrollbar to scroll the list items As an alternative you can use the TEMPO VALUE controls to scroll Keep the SHIFT button pressed and press one of the arrows to jump to the previous or next alphabetical section You can touch one of the labels on top of the list to reorder the list items accordingly By pressing the label again the order of the files switches between ascending and descending A list can contain several different types of files or folders File folder type Standard MIDI File SMF CW Karaoke file KAR Jukebox file JBX A file or folder may be in one of the following status See Pro tect and Unprotect on page 238 for information on how to change the file status File folder status amp C Unprotected Page menu icon Press the page menu icon to open the menu See Song Select page menu on page 81 for more information Storage device Use this pop up menu to select one of the available storage devices SSD U User area of the internal SSD memory Hard disk optional USB F Device connected to the front USB H
346. from a new empty Pad When finished recording you will save the new Pad into a User Pad location Pads can be saved into Factory Pad locations only when the Factory Style and Pad Protect parameter is set to Off When you have finished recording or editing the Hit or Sequence Pad please save it see Exit by saving or deleting changes below and exit the Pad Record mode Then go to the Pad page of the Style Play or Song Play mode assign the new Hit or Sequence to a Pad button and adjust the various Pad settings Volume Pan and A B FX Send see Pad Switch Pad on page 100 Finally save the Pad settings by selecting the Write Performance or Write Current Style Per formance command from the page menu Note While in Record mode the footswitch and EC5 pedals are disabled On the contrary volume expression type pedals can be used o v c Q i o EM Q cc 132 Pad Record mode Exit by saving or deleting changes m M Exit by saving or deleting changes Main page Pad Record When finished editing you can save your Pad in memory or The Main page of the Pad Record mode looks like a simplified cancel any change version of the Main page of the Style Record mode with just a single track to be recorded and no Style Elements to be chosen T h select the Write Pad d from th o lol leido The only addition is the Pad Sync parameter pa
347. g If you change the name of a device connected to the USB F or USB R port and it contains midifiles used by some SongBook entries these entries will be damaged due to broken links to the resources contained in the device This does not affect resources contained in the SSD U memory or the optional internal hard disk Protect Select this command to protect the selected file or folder from writing erasing The lock icon will appear next to the file or folder name Unprotect Select this command to unprotect the selected file or folder if protected Ordered by Name Select this display option to see the list of files and folders in rough alphabetical order with different file types mixed in the list The Name label above the file list is shown in red E KARA This command is the same as directly touching the Name label above the file list Ordered by Type Select this display option to see the list of files and folders ordered by type Inside any type group files are still in alphabet ical order The Type label above the file list is shown in red EN Type Hame This command is the same as directly touching the Type label above the file list Order by Size Select this display option to see the list of files and folders ordered by size The Size label above the file list is shown in red 13K 6 03 03 19 This command is the same as directly touching the Size label above the file list Order
348. g Play mode may be saved to a Performance You can then recall different settings by just selecting a single Performance Settings for Song tracks like pan volume and FX sends depend on the midifile Changes to Song tracks made in Song Play mode cannot be saved to a midifile and are only intended for realtime control To permanently save changes to the various Song parameters edit the midifile in Sequencer mode Standard MIDI Files and Sounds The native Song file format of the Pa800 is the Standard MIDI File SMF an universal standard set by all manufacturers You can read these files with any musical instrument or computer Differences may appear in sounds If you recorded a Song on the Pa800 Sequencer mode using only General MIDI sounds you can be confident you can play the same Song on virtually any other musical instrument or computer If you used Korg native sounds you cannot play back the same sounds on instruments from other manufacturers When you read SMEs in Song Play mode there is no problem reading files made using only General MIDI sounds Sounds could be different when playing a Song made on a different instrument despite the wide compatibility of Pa800 with other non standard formats differences may arise If so go to the Sequencer operating mode and load the SMF Then manually reassign the non matching Sounds replacing them with similar Sounds on the Pa800 Finally save the SMF again and you wi
349. g on the page menu com mand you select Style Play operating mode 83 Start up settings Main page Normal view This is the page you see after you turn the instrument on To access this page from another operating mode press the STYLE PLAY button To return to this page from one of the Style Play edit pages press the EXIT button Style area STYLE PLAY HIR Page header Page menu icon no chord HO gt Sequ Ree UTE Key encer 1 2 N S Go IE gt x board area Hb tracks area Perfor mance STS area MIC IM LOWER UPPERS UPPER UPPER STS Sub Harme Scale Panels To switch between Normal view Keyboard tracks grouped Style tracks and Mic In controls and Style view individual Style tracks use the TRACK SELECT button See Style Tracks view page and Volume panel starting from page 85 Page header This line shows the current operating mode transposition and recognized chord STYLE PLAT WIR na chord gt B Operating mode Master Transpose Recognized name in semitones chord Operating mode name Name of the current operating mode gt PERF PERFS fi Master transpose value in semitones This value can be changed using the TRANSPOSE buttons on the control panel Master transpose Note Transpose may be automatically changed when selecting a different Performance or Style It may also be changed when load ing a Standard MIDI File generated with an instru
350. ge 104 Style Play operating mode 87 STS Name panel Mic panel Press the Mic tab to select this panel This is where you can set the various Voice Processor options Mic On Off Harmony On Off Talk On Off Mid High Voice Processor Preset Mic On Off Use this switch to mute unmute the microphone This is the same as the MIC IN Play Mute icon in the Main page see Track status icons on page 87 Note Any line signal entering the Audio Inputs and not being sent to the Voice Processor is not affected Harmony On Off GBL P Turns the Harmony module on off Talk On Off gt GBL Use this switch to soften all music generated by the Pa800 and speak in the microphone at normal level This is useful to address your audience while automatically lowering the back ground music volume While this switch is turned on all Voice Processor modules are momentarily turned off except for Reverb whose level is simply reduced to avoid los ing clarity on the voice Setting for the Talk func tion can be programmed on the Talk page see Voice Processor Setup Talk on page 213 Depress this switch to return to the original set tings Note When you deactivate the Talk function the Voice Processor Preset is recalled Any unsaved change to the Preset will be lost VP Preset PERF erg ini Use this pop up menu to select one of the available Voice Proces sor Presets Selecting a Preset may ch
351. ge menu Here you can save MIDI Setups see Midi Setup on page 191 that are saved to the Global file Write Global Sequencer Setup Parameters saved in the Sequencer Setup area of the Global are marked with the GBL symbol through the user s manual Song Select window This window appears when you select the Load Song com mand from the page menu or press the SELECT button in the SEQUENCER 1 sections on the control panel See Song Select window on page 80 for details o v c Q i o tim Q cc 194 Sequencer operating mode Save Song window Save Song window The recorded Song is contained in RAM and is lost when turn ing the instrument off The Song is also lost when you over write it in Record mode or if you confirm the warning message when switching to the Style Play or Song Play mode You must save to a storage device any Song you wish to preserve This window appears when you select the Save Song command from the page menu Press EXIT to exit from this page and go back to the main page of the Sequencer operating mode without saving the Song Directory SFOUPNPFR 1 Gave Sana Type Hama BACKLIP 84 45 66 11 14 MIDIFILE 11 65 66 18 18 Canyon 3 85 86 11 21 MySum 83 45 86 11 21 MightDay 6 2K 83 86 06 11 21 Song path open J ciose Sune H Save Storage device Song path This line shows the path of the location where you are saving the S
352. ge menu see Write Pad dialog box on page 141 To cancel all changes select the Exit from Record command e from the page menu or press the RECORD button to exit from Chord Var gt ERR 7 record and return to the main page of the Style Record mode Resotution P Hionh CY Length 2 Meter Hint Save often while recording to avoid accidentally losing your Pad Sync PJorr metro P orr NTT P Fifth Pad Listening to the Pad while in Record Edit m 0 d e WOLUME Please look at the User s Manual for more information on the While you are in Pad Record or Pad Edit mode you can listen to various parameters Only general information and differences the selected Chord Variation To select a Chord Variation go to with the Style Record mode are described here the Main page of the Record Edit mode When you are in the Main Event Edit Quantize Trans Recording parameters area pose Velocity or Delete pages you can listen to the selected Chord Variation Press START STOP to check how it Chord Var Chord Variation works Press START STOP again to stop the playback This parameter lets you select one of the six available Chord When you are in the Sounds Expression Keyboard Range Variations CV1 CV6 for editing or recording Chord Table Trigger Tension Delete All Copy Style Ele ment Controls or Style Control pages you can listen to the whole Pad Press START STOP and play some chords to do ter
353. h mean ing it is ready to start playing at the beginning of the next mea sure Style Select page menu Press the page menu icon to open the menu Press a command to select it Press anywhere in the display to close the menu without selecting a command Ce AA Rename Favorite Bank Choose this command from the page menu and assign the Favorite Style banks any name you like The assigned name can be spanned over two lines by separating them with the paragraph character 9 For example to write World Music on two lines enter World Music Be careful not to write words exceeding the width of the side tabs of the Style Select window Pad Select window Press the Pad area whereas it appears in the display to open the Pad Select window Press EXIT to exit from this page and go back to the previous page without selecting any Pad Bank sets Side tabs banks E PAD SELECT TU w rene N sunth amp Pad Crash 2 d Voice d Lower tabs pages Pads Bank sets Selected set of banks corresponding to different types of Pads Hit are single note pre programmed factory Pads Sequence are sequence based pre programmed factory Pads User can be either single note or sequence based Pads and can be user recorded or modified Side tabs banks Use these tabs to select a bank of Pads T UY m in O E c 80 Selecting elements STS Select Lower tabs pages
354. h of the most important chords Import Import Groove The Import Groove function allows the loading of MIDI Grooves GRV files generated by the Slice function see Time Slice in the Sampling mode By importing these data to the Pad track and assigning the Sound based on the sliced sam ples to the same track you can play the original audio groove and freely change its tempo PAD REC Import From Use this parameter to select one of the MIDI Groove patterns GRV files generated when saving data after a Time Slice operation To CV Chord Variation Use this parameter to select the target Chord Variation Import Import SMF The Import SMF function allows you to import MIDI data from a Standard MIDI File SMF created on your preferred external sequencer and transform them in a Chord Variation PAD REC Import When programming a Chord Variation on the external sequencer please assign the Pad track to the MIDI channel 10 Note Only SMF in format 0 can be loaded From Song This is the name of the Standard MIDI File to be loaded Press the Select button to open the file selector and select an SMF file Select Press this button to open the file selector and load the SME Initialize Check this parameter if you want all Pad settings De Key Chord Chord Table Sound are reset when loading the SMF Hint It is a good idea to check this parameter when importing t
355. hand Lower Sounds are sepa rated by the Split Point Performances and STSs are collections of Sounds Just choose one of them to change all the Sounds of the keyboard and when the STYLE CHANGE LED is lit on the control panel of the Style Choose a Style to change the musical style of the accompani ment patterns Touching the Style name in the display is the same as to press one of the buttons of the STYLE section on the control panel Introduction 8 Easy Mode The Song Play page in detail The Song Play page in detail Song assigned to Sequencer 1 Touch it to open the Song Select window and choose a different Song page 80 30H65 PLAY Tempo Use the DIAL to change it Song assigned to Sequencer 2 Touch it to open the Song Select window and choose a different Song page 80 Performance or STS Touch it to open the Performance Select win dow and choose a different Per formance Sounds on the keyboard will change page 78 Touch it to turn the microphone on off page 68 Touch it to turn the voice har mony on off page 70 Touch it to talk to your audience page 71 Sounds assigned to the right hand UP1 to UP3 and to the left hand LOW Touch the Sounds name to open the Sound Select window and choose a different Sound page 78 Sound icon and status If the MITE icon appears the Sound is in mute and cannot be heard If the icon does not appear the Sound i
356. he first Chord Variation of the Pad and uncheck it when importing the following Chord Variations To CV Use this parameter to select a target Chord Variation Execute After setting all parameters in this page press this button to import the Standard MIDI File into the target Chord Variation Export SMF The Export SMF function allows you to export a Chord Varia tion as a Standard MIDI File SMF and edit it on your pre ferred external sequencer PAD REC Export SMF To Song This non editable parameters shows the name of the Standard MIDI File to be generated The automatically assigned name will be the same of the exported Chord Variation From CV Use this pop up menu to select one of the available Chord Varia tions from the current Pad Execute After selecting a Chord Variation press this button to export it as a Standard MIDI File A standard file selector will appear Select the target device and directory then press Save Page menu Press the page menu icon to open the page menu Press a com mand to select it Press anywhere in the display to close the menu without selecting a command CS Write Pad When done recording or editing a Pad and you want to save the changes select this command to open the Write Pad dialog box and save the Pad to the internal memory See Write Pad dialog box on page 141 for more information Undo Only available in the Main page of the
357. he VARIATION buttons to select a dif ferent variation of the basic pattern VARIATION When the Fill ends the selected Vari ation will start playing When you like to stop playing press one of the ENDING buttons to stop the Style with an Ending ENDING When the Ending is fin ished the Style auto matically stops 0 Note You do not need to select a Fill before selecting a differ ent Variation but select ing a Fill makes the transition smoother and more musical O Note You do not need to select a Varia tion during a Fill since a Variation may already be automatically recalled at the end of the Fill See Fill Mode 1 3 on page 99 46 Selecting and playing Styles Single Touch Settings STS Single Touch Settings STS Each Style or SongBook entry may come with up to four Keyboard track settings called STS short for Single Touch Settings STS 1 is automatically selected when choosing a Style provided the SINGLE TOUCH LED is turned on STS 1 is also recalled when a SongBook entry is selected STSs are still available when switching to Song Play mode from Style play mode to let you select a dif ferent configuration of Keyboard tracks and a different Voice Processor Preset while listening to the Songs 1 Press one of the four STS buttons under the display STS1 STS2 STS3 STS4 SINGLE TOUCH SETTING 2 Play the keyboard
358. he current list Add new Songs then press Save and enter a different name before confirming A new Jukebox file will be saved to disk Move Up Down Use these button to move the selected item up or down in the list Add Adds a Song at the end of the current list You can add up to 127 Songs in a list Note A Jukebox list can include only Songs contained 1n the same folder Hint Instead of a single Song you can select a Jukebox file and add its whole content to the current Jukebox list Insert Inserts a Song at the current position 1 e between the selected item and the preceding one All subsequent Songs are moved to the next higher numbered slot You can add up to 127 Songs ina list Note A Jukebox list can include only Songs contained 1n the same folder Hint Instead of a single Song you can select a Jukebox file and insert its whole content to the current Jukebox list Delete This command lets you delete the selected Song from the list Del All Select this command to delete the whole Jukebox list Save Press this button to save the Jukebox file to disk The Save Juke box File dialog box appears allowing you to edit the name and save your file to disk Write JukeBox File Press the T Text Edit button to open the Text Edit window and edit the name If you are editing an existing list and do not change its name the old file is overwritten If you change it a new file will be created
359. he selected octave transposi tion To change this value use the UPPER OCTAVE buttons or go to the Mixer Tuning Tuning edit page in the Style Play mode see page 92 Save this value to the Style Performance Sound bank s icon gt STYLE This picture illustrates the bank the current Sound belongs to Touch an icon a first time to select the corresponding track detailed information are shown on the Selected Track Info area see the Record 1 page above Touch it a second time to open the Sound Select window Note These Sounds can be replaced by Sounds selected by a Perfor mance provided the Original Style Sounds parameter is left unchecked in Style Play mode see page 85 Main page Cue While in the main page press the Cue tab to see this page This is where you can access to the Cue parameter STYLE RECORD Element HA Rec Length 4 Tempo J 94 Chord Yar W C v1 Cv Length 4 Meter 4 4 Resolution F High Metro E ort wrr F Fifth 1 2 iil gt STYLE This parameter lets you decide how the current Style Element will enter after it has been selected This setting is only available for the Fill 1 2 3 Style Elements Cue mode for Style element Immediate first measure The Style Element enters immediately and begins from the first measure Immediate current measure The Style Element enters immediately and begins from the current measure Next measure first measu
360. he source data already exists at the target location the Overwrite dialog box will appear see Overwriting existing files or folders on page 233 During Copy a dialog box shows the progress of the opera tion Copy Progress Copying a single file or folder You can copy a single file or folder from a generic folder to a dif ferent one The file or folder must be located in the root the main highest level in the device hierarchy or into a generic folder You can t copy single files or folders from inside a SET folder 1 If copying from or to an external device connect the device to one of the USB Host ports 2 Select the source device by using the Device pop up menu 3 Select the folder containing the file or folder you wish to copy If it is contained in another folder press the Open button to open it Press Close to go back to the previous hierarchic level 4 Press Open to open the folder containing the file or folder to be copied 5 Select the file or folder to be copied then press Copy To to confirm its selection The target device appears Note If the selected device is not available the Device not found or unknown format message will appear A different device will be automatically selected 6 If needed select the target device by using the Device pop up menu 7 When the target device content appears in the display select the target folder Press Open to open a folde
361. heir default values Drum Mapping Off Kick amp Snare Designation Off Original Style Sound On Keyboard Range On Wrap Around 9 This means that you can hear some differences between the Style in play and the same Style being edited for example resetting the Drum Mapping may lead to some instruments being replaced Select Record New Style to start from a new empty Style A default Style Performance will be recalled When finished recording you will save the new Style onto a User Style location Styles can be saved onto Factory Style locations only when the Factory Style and Pad Protect parameter is set to Off see page 235 After editing the Style please save it see Exit by saving or delet ing changes below and exit the Style Record mode Then while in Style Play mode edit the Style Performance to adjust track settings Tempo Volume Pan FX Send see page 89 and fol lowing in the Style Play operating mode chapter and save it by selecting the Write Current Style Performance from the page menu see Write Style Performance dialog box on page 105 Note After a record or edit operation the memory is automati cally reorganized Therefore when you press START STOP there is a delay before you can actually listen to the Style This delay is higher with a Style containing more MIDI events Note While in Record mode the footswitch and EC5 pedals are disabled On the contrary volume
362. hen locked selecting a Performance or STS will not change the split point Reference 200 Global edit mode General Controls Lock Pad Lower See Split Point on page 88 When locked selecting a Performance or STS will not change the Pad assignment See Pad Switch Pad on page 100 When this lock is closed the Lower track remains unchanged when a different Style Performance or STS is selected This is useful if for example you prefer to always play with the left hand muted and reserved only to playing chords for the arranger Hint If you want the same Lower settings to be used during all your shows save your preferred Lower settings to Performance 1 1 automatically selected on startup then close this lock and choose the Write Global Global Setup from the page menu Keyboard Mode Chord Scanning When this lock is closed the Keyboard Mode and Chord Scanning remain unchanged when a dif ferent Performance or STS is selected This is useful if for example you prefer to always play in Full Keyboard with chords recognized on the whole keyboard range Note The Keyboard Mode and Chord Scanning settings are reset when switching to a different oper ating mode Hint If you want the same Keyboard Mode and Lower Scanning settings to be used during all your shows save your preferred settings to Performance 1 1 automatically selected on startup then close this lock and ch
363. hese products are warranted by the Korg distributor only in each country Any Korg product not sold with a warranty card or carrying a serial number dis qualifies the product sold from the manufacturer s distributor s warranty and liability This requirement is for your own protec tion and safety Service and User s Assistance For service please contact your nearest Authorized Korg Service Center For more information on Korg products and to find software and accessories for your keyboard please contact your local Authorized Korg distributor For up to date information please point your web browser to www korgpa com Copyright O 2006 KORG Italy Spa Printed in Italy The BALANCE slider When turning the instrument on please be assured the BALANCE slider is set to the cen ter This sets both Sequencer 1 and Sequencer 2 to their maximum level This will avoid you start a Song without hearing anything SEQ 1 l SEQ 2 Table of Contents 1 Table of Contents Introduction EASY IMOGG x43 eso rie SEN GE ae 6 The Style Play page in detalles ge das 7 The Song Play page in detail cosas Fete Ser P VERS 8 The Lyrics page in detallista renace 9 Aid RIT 10 Rear panel iaa RR Rc cR dd 18 NVCICOIMG DOTT 20 EIUS DSETOFIDU osse asd uU Jd d 20 Eds Mode PC mrm 20 Brun d rem 2 dia dos A e doses dry Phoen afectan dinde 21 About this manual 21 Making a backup of the original data 22
364. hestral Kit E 32 Favorite 3 BANK20 PRF FAVORITE10 STY TYLE E 20 1 Rock Brass S E 1 Favorite 1 BANKO01 STY E 1 1 8 16 Beat 1 E El E 20 8 Rock Strings E 32 Favorite 32 SONGBOOK E E 1 32 8 16 Beat 32 PAD SONGDB SBD BANK STY BANKO1 PAD BANK17 STY E 1 Cowbell 1 F 17 1 Contemp 1 Z LISTDB SBL E El E 32 Drumkit F E 17 32 Contemp 32 BANK PAD USERO1 STY E 1 Agogo 11 E U1 1 User 1 SE E E 32 Windchimes 3 E U1 32 User 32 BANK20 PAD USERO2 STY F 1 Military 1 F U2 1 User 1 El El E 32 Circus 2 E U2 32 User 32 USEROS STY F U3 1 User 1 El E U3 32 User 32 o v c Q i o tim Q cc 224 Media edit mode Main page Main page There is no main page in the Media edit mode When pressing EXIT you exit the Media mode and the underlying operating mode in the background is recalled Page structure All edit pages share some basic elements Edit mode Page menu icon C MIDIFILE List of files st MYSHOW SET Scrollbar oro deet G Path open Commands 1 aT we J Tabs Device pop up menu Edit mode This indicates that the instrument is in Media mode Page menu icon Press this icon to open the page menu see Page menu on page 237 Path Full path of the directory currently shown in the display List of files This area shows the files and folder contained in the selected
365. his area the FAITE icon disap pears The Upper 2 track will be set to play and will be heard Note how the Dark Pad sound assigned to the Upper 2 track has been layered with the Grand Piano assigned to the Upper 1 track 3 Press the UTE icon in the Upper 3 status box to set the Upper 3 track to play 4 Play the keyboard I i A As above after press ing in this area the FAITE icon disap pears The Upper 3 track will be set to play and will be heard Note how the StringEns2 sound assigned to the Upper 3 track has been added to the Dark Pad assigned to the Upper 2 track and the Grand Piano assigned to the Upper 1 track 34 Playing Sounds Playing two or three Sounds at the same time 5 Press the bank icon in the Upper 3 status box to mute the Upper 3 track again D Grand Piano RX Piano T TEE bGrand Piano RX Piano e FS 6 Play the keyboard Note how the StringEns2 sound assigned to the Upper 3 track has been muted again Only tracks Upper 1 and Upper 2 can be heard at this time Press the bank icon in the Upper 2 status box to mute the Upper 2 track again D Grand Piano RX Piano RA d bGrand Piano RX Piano et FS 8 Play the keyboard Note how the Dark Pad sound assigned to the Upper 2 track has been muted again Only track Upper 1 can be heard at this time Pla
366. his is only available for Note events Note If you change a length of 000 00 000 to a different value you cant go back to the original value This rather uncommon zero length value may be found in some drum or percussion tracks Scrollbar Use the scrollbar to browse the event through the list Other elements Track pop up menu Use this pop up menu to select the track to edit inside the cur rent Chord Variation Drum Acc5 Style track Style Record mode 117 Event Edit Event Edit Go Meas While the sequencer is not running press this button to open the Go to Measure dialog box Go to Measure 1 cancer ok When in this dialog box select a target measure and press OK The first event available in the target measure will be selected Insert Press the Insert button in the display to insert a new event at the current shown Position The default values are Type Note Pitch C4 Velocity 100 Length 192 Delete Press the Delete button in the display to delete the event selected in the display Event Edit procedure Here is the general procedure to follow for the event editing 1 Select the Style to edit and press the RECORD button Select the Current Style option to enter recording The main page of the Style Record mode will appear 2 Select the Element Style Element and Chord Var Chord Variation parameters Note For more information on the Style Elem
367. i URS m sinewave il x s s wwrktez mm Gm 7 om peested ez wr s 5 pred m E CI 9 96RAwes ez wm 9 e mure CCOO D 9 ETE mhz 74 75 75 76 77 77 7 266 Factory data Sounds Program Change order ccoo ccs2 Pe name Jet E EEE JS Je Tee wr uo 9 sweRr o mi 00 0 GE Dp 9 EI 9m 0 wr u 5 Porwhine mz II 3m 2 9 EITC hmi Ew Lum 4 39 sweswes mi Lx 9 Wmesue mhi a s 9 EI bei xm 7 9 EEC mhz E wr s 9 wewSmb mhz E EM NON ON ECKEN N EE E ES WE ENTIS ge wm AAA mmu e EPIS SO Hw cL Pele pe 7 Cat tas Pe AAA GEENENNEENE car A e l MEE CA EA EEC ES GENE KEEN EE ci EUN NE MES a HAB EEN KONEEE E NE N NONE X NES uM E GEN NE 121 ROSS NK ROSS E xm 9 sr lernen stings Vocal Y wr s mew mr wm 3 55 Heaven sings oer CEEE 5 3 s 3 NNNM 5 3 I Se ETC ET Ferera ETE ament gi Fresh Breath Irene tert gi 1 Pre 4 s luetene mz II 3m o3 5 ETT Jee 1 Pre 5 EE TI famine 3 9 s EEC ET wr s Awewm fama et s meemz mi wr 7 tortie ei Gm OE 5 leegen eni xm 9 s oera sirnaa Y vat 9 BowedGiascm gz wm 1 S Where eWeeRves io 9 Messe f wr 2 5 ote EII 3m 3 9 eme a m 9 s Biiedew fama v at 2 9 CEET ET wn Ile enr io oM msemiew eme 17 wr 9 9 wsstedow fama v vat
368. ic Vox Doolally 121 Heaven ws wr wm ROSE ol ol ROSE ol BOS ROSE als 5 0 7 2 LI I UJ 3 5 lt lt el E S 5 A CHE y un SIE 2 a zd O Ul Ul w y 3 A xl E 3 Lo b Kai Lo o 3 a gt gt gt 4 a a 218 F 5 5 o olo olo O Br Bk G ffe ss L Oo oO on Lol wn Di OI go ols pa m Ska A GE o S al a a 5 nln N al a ZK N N s 5 5 N o 5 56 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 56 57 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 56 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 o Cornet Expr N N Hard Trombone Di da to Cornet Pro 1 o Flugel Horn Pro Y Mute Trumpet GM NJ OI AD o Cornet Pro 2 M 12 121 M 12 mmj 3 5 56 KSE OberkrTuba OA Bank Brass poms AAA sig andara A CEC EIN EI CES EIN REI ICE EI EI COTOS EIN REI EE a Numer m 3 3 Wumeks 0 m 91 N Pitch Trombone xl NI N N w Mute Trumpet 2 o Concert Trumpet o Concert Trp Pro Dual Trumpets N N N Bright Trombone j N o BeBop Cornet Flugel Horn N s s N Mono Trumpet s 5 5 5 5 5 Dark Trumpet gt gt 3 3 gt o zi A E gt 3 3 3 c c e 2 1 0 ojo e 0 D cjg o oj o c clo o ol s ee 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 a E 3 313 31313 3 3 gt 3 3l 0 313 Re o c m ce ele a o ojlo olojo 9 ojo 3 3 S 2 2 8 aleS z s 38g zi 8 z3 8S
369. ice connector Multitrack recording procedure Here is the general procedure to follow for the Multitrack Recording 1 Press SEQUENCER to enter Sequence mode 2 Press the RECORD button and select the Multitrack Sequencer option to enter the Multitrack Record mode Now you can prepare your recording parameters For more details see Record mode Multitrack Sequencer page on page 173 3 Be sure the Overdub or Overwrite recording options is selected see Rec mode Recording mode on page 173 4 Set the tempo There are two ways of changing tempo Keep the SHIFT button pressed and use the TEMPO VALUE controls to change the tempo Move the cursor to the Tempo parameter and use the TEMPO VALUE controls to change tempo 5 Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Song Tracks 1 8 and Song Tracks 9 16 and assign the right Sound to each track see Sound bank s icon on page 171 6 Select the track to record Its status icon will automatically change to Record see Track status icons on page 174 7 Use the Locate measure parameter to enter a measure where you want to start recording 8 Press P Bl PLAY STOP to start recording Depending on the Metro option you selected a 1 or 2 bars precount may play before the recording actually begins After precount play freely f you selected the Auto Punch recording mode the recording will begin only when reaching the S
370. iele hters Res Waas We Ms He ts He Use alphabetic O B e ES KS D D EN D D characters to a Js apro Hs M og enter text 2 Bx Me e ky Wa um ue Hu Use the SHIFT but Space conto switch es between capitals Clea ar Cancel VW OK J Press the T symbol to open the Text Edit and small charac dialog box ters When done press OK Use the and gt Press Clear to delete the to confirm the new buttons to move the whole string Delete to name or Cancel to cursor delete just a single charac abandon all changes ter The SongBook Selecting and using a Custom List Selecting and using a Custom List After creating one or more Custom Lists you can select one and use it for your show 1 Press the Custom List tab to select the Custom List page 2 Use the List pop up menu to select one of the available Custom Lists SONGBOOK S no chord amp Type Hane Genre key Tempo Meter Entry in play To select a different one highlight it and press the Select button in the display A Pop en 40 ED Ebony amp white Pop kk ED Light my inferno Pop kk E Long train going Pop ED Over happy Bop en Deene ep 2 Press Select to set the highlighted entry to play La if different than the next e en Book EBook List Luri one automaticall Gatata ap EE Use the List pop up menu to Press Next to select the next entry in the list select one of the available Cus This command
371. ies Most popular music uses a single scale so you usually only have to input the information at the beginning of your song Scalic harmonies are more dynamic than the chordal harmonies because there are unique harmony notes for each input note The subsequent illustration shows the harmony notes for the C major scale with a voicing selection of a C major scale and a single third above harmony voice You can see from the next diagram that the Scalic harmonies are intelli gent and closely follow your lead voice for a tighter sound Black Lead Grey Harmony Under the Harmony page is a parameter called Smooth When set to 100 the harmony voices follow your input pitch errors and all but when set to 0 the harmonies will jump directly to the scalic harmony notes kind of like a hard pitch correction on the harmony voice Setting the Smooth parameter between 0 and 100 is like having variable amounts of pitch correction on the harmonies Voice Processor has five prepro grammed harmony scales three major three minor and one custom per preset To create a custom scale or pitch map see the Trend voice 3rd above IF 3rd above IF 3rd above IF 3rd above mem e 3rd above ae 3rd above 5th above parameter description under Custom Voice Mapping on page 216 It is also tricky to pick out the key in some songs An example is Sweet Home Alabama Listening you might think this song is in the k
372. ime O Note The Octave UPPEROCTAVE Transpose value for each of the keyboard track is shown under the Sound s name LE 3 Each press of this button Each press of this button will lower the pitch by one will raise the pitch by one octave octave 2 Press both UPPER OCTAVE buttons together to reset the octave 38 Selecting and saving Performances Selecting a Performance Selecting and saving Performances The Performance is the musical heart of the Pa800 Unlike selecting single Sounds selecting a Per formance will recall several Sounds at the same time the needed effects and transpositions a suitable Voice Processor preset plus many more parameters useful for playing in a musical situation You can save all control panel settings in a Performance memory location including your Digital Drawbar Organ settings While many Performances are already supplied with the instrument you can customize each of them to your own taste and then save them in their customized form Similar to Performances you can also save your settings to a Single Touch Setting STS which will store all the settings for the Keyboard tracks Four STSs are supplied with each Style and SongBook entry and can be selected with the four dedicated buttons under the display As far as Style tracks are concerned you can save settings in a third object called the Style Perfor mance Please note that settings saved in Performance 1
373. in proportion Off When changing volume to one of the Upper tracks only that track s volume is changed Other Upper tracks are left unchanged Pan PERF gt STS Track position in the stereo field 64 1 Left stereo channel 0 Center 1 63 Right stereo channel Off If the track s output status is Left amp Right normal setting the direct uneffected signal is not sent to the outputs only the FX signal is heard for this track If the track is sent to a separate output no FX is sent to any output To program the output status for each track see Audio Output Seq1 and Audio Output Seq2 on page 206 Volume gt PERF STS Track s volume 0 127 MIDI value of the track s volume Play Mute icon PERF STS GBL 9 Track s play mute status See Keyboard track status on page 145 for more information Play status The track can be heard Mute status The track cannot be heard Mixer Tuning FX Send This page lets you set the level of the track s direct uneffected signal going to the Internal FX processors Note Song parameters cannot be saved when saving to a Perfor mance or STS The effect processors included in Pa800 are connected in paral lel so you can decide which percentage of the direct signal can be effected Out L R In case you want to send all of a track s signal to the effect as when using insert effects like Rotary Distortion EQ just
374. ine Tune 02 00 Course Tune Local On Off All Notes Off Active Sense Reset 5 5 4 Includes Inquiry and Master Volume messages FX settings Quarter Tone settings GM Mode On 5 Transmitted only when the Clock Send parameter Global mode is set to on Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 2 0MNI ON MONO O Yes Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO X No Recognized chords 293 Recognized chords The following pages show the most important chords recognized by the Pa800 when the selected Chord Recognition mode is Fingered 2 see Chord Recognition Mode on page 101 Recognized chords may vary with a different Chord Recognition mode Major Major 6th 3 note 2 note 4 note 2 note A AAU 41 Hl n a emje m olmjo eje ol Je Major 7th 4 note 3 note 2 note nur nn n sine lol e eine eim e Sus 4 Sus 2 3 note 2 note 3 note Ml d ul d OP Al I Dominant 7th 4 note 3 note 2 note Du D IS AU Dominant 7th Sus A Dominant 7th e up nas Un Major 7th 5 Major 7th Sus 4 4 note 4 note JUHE SUI e constitue
375. ing the keyboard harder See Velocity Control on page 101 TAP TEMPO RESET This is a double function button acting in a different way depending on the Style status stop play Tap Tempo When the Style is not playing you can beat the tempo on this button At the end the accompaniment starts playing using the tapped in tempo Reset When you press this button while the Style is playing back the Style pattern goes back to the beginning of measure 1 START STOP Starts or stops the Style running Note This function can be automatically activated by playing the keyboard harder See Velocity Control on page 101 You can reset all frozen notes and controllers on the Pa800 and any instrument connected to its MIDI OUT or the USB Device port by using the Panic key combination Just press SHIFT START STOP to stop all notes and reset all con trollers SYNCHRO START STOP buttons PSB These buttons turn the Synchro Start and Synchro Stop func tions on or off This lets you decide if you must press START STOP to start and or stop a Style or just play the keyboard Start On Stop Off In this situation just play a chord in the chord recognition area usually under the split point see CHORD SCANNING section on page 15 to automatically start the Style If you like turn one of the INTROs on before starting the Style Start On Stop On When both LEDs are lit raising
376. ing to the current Style Write Single Touch Setting 5T5 A 41 steel Guitar tan ox Parameters saved in the STS are marked with the STS symbol through the user s manual SHIFT Keep the SHIFT button pressed and press one of the SIN GLE TOUCH SETTING buttons to open this window Name Name of the STS to be saved Press the Ti Text Edit button next to the name to open the Text Edit window Current Style Non editable Settings are saved in one of the four STSs belong ing to the current Style This parameter displays the name of the parent Style STS Target STS location The name of the STS currently saved at the target location is shown Use TEMPO VALUE controls to select a different location Write Style Performance dialog box Open this window by selecting the Write Style Performance item from the page menu Here you can save Style track settings to the Style Performance of the current Style Write Style Performance Parameters saved in the Style Performance are marked with the PERF symbol through the user s manual SHIFT Keep the SHIFT button pressed and press one of the STYLE buttons to open this window Style Bank Non editable Bank of Styles the current Style belongs to Each bank corresponds to one of the STYLE buttons Current Style Non editable Name of the current Style Write Global Style Play Setup dialog box Open this window by selecting the Write Global Style
377. ings are stored in the Song Play Setup area of the Global file together with all the other parameters marked with the GBL abbreviation in the manual After changing these settings select the Write Global Song Play Setup command from the page menu to save them to the Global Melody gt GBL s This parameter selects the Song s Melody track This track can be muted using the Melody Mute function assignable to an Assignable Switch Footswitch or EC5 pedal Drum gt GBLS 9 This parameter selects the Song s Drum track This track is left set to play together with the Bass track when selecting the Drum amp Bass function assignable to an Assignable Switch Footswitch or EC5 pedal Bass gt GBLS 9 This parameter selects the Song s Bass track This track is left set to play together with the Drum track when selecting the Drum amp Bass function assignable to an Assignable Switch Footswitch or EC5 pedal Harmony Track gt GBLS 9 The Voice Processor gets the chord notes as well as Program Change messages from the track selected with this parameter Off No track sends notes to the Harmony module of the Voice processor Chords can still be received from the MIDI IN Seq 1 Track 1 16 Notes are sent from one of Sequencer 1 s tracks Seq 2 Track 1 16 Notes are sent from one of Sequencer 2 s tracks Seq 1 2 Track 1 16 Notes are sent by a track with the same name from both Sequencer 1 and Se
378. ion and select one of these commands Note All events on the very first tick M001 01 000 like Perf Style Tempo Chord Style Element selection cannot be deleted Sequencer operating mode 181 Record mode Step Backing Sequence page Step Backing Sequence procedure Here is the general Step Backing Sequencer recording procedure Hint Before entering Step Backing Sequence mode to edit an exist ing Song select the Save Song command from the page menu and save the Song to a storage device This way you will have a copy of the Song in case you don t like the results of your editing 1 While in Sequencer mode press the RECORD button and choose the Step Backing Sequence recording option 2 Select the Measure parameter and go to the desired posi tion in the Song by using the TEMPO VALUE controls Alternatively you can move the locator using the soft transport buttons in the display See Soft transport but tons on page 180 3 Select the parameter type Style Performance Tempo to insert edit or delete at the current position If an arrow F appears next to a parameter the shown event has been inserted at the current position 4 Use the TEMPO VALUE controls to modify the selected event Delete it by pressing the Del button next to the event When editing a parameter without the arrow next to it a new event is inserted at the current position 5 Exit the Step Backing Se
379. is C The black keys are tuned as in the Equal tun ing Simulates the stretched tuning of an acoustic piano Basically an equal tuning the lowest notes are slightly lower while the highest notes are slightly higher than the standard User scale i e scale programmed by the user for the Style Play Backing Sequence and Song Play modes The user scale can be saved to a Perfor mance Style Performance STS or Song You can t select a User scale in Global mode Assignable parameters Scales 289 290 MIDI Data MIDI Controllers MIDI Data MIDI Controllers The following is a table including all Control Change messages and their effect on various Pa800 functions CN ESTETICA 3 wea SSCS a mx 5 mme SS s mmm s wea 20 31 Undef ctl Control Change 32 63 are the LSB Least Significant Bytet of Con trol Change 0 31 i e the MSB Most Significant Byte and are changed according to their MSB counterparts Damper pedal Sostenuto pedal Soft pedal REM OS AS FilterEg roon Mew Mey men Pea raet Release Attack F CutOff Port ctl Undef ctl Pa800 Function A C reverb send level B D modul send level See table below See table below See MIDI Implementation Chart See MIDI Implementation Chart Reset All Controllers Data Inc Data Dec NRPN Lsb NRPN Msb RPN Lsb Undefined ctl AIISOff Res Ctl LocalCt
380. is command lets you create a new generic folder in the root of any device or inside any other generic folder You can t create a SET folder with this command since this type of folder is reserved to the Save operations and can be created with the New SET button in any Save page Create New Folder Cows ox By pressing the T Text Edit button you can open the Text Edit window Enter the name then press OK to confirm and close the Text Edit window Rename Available only when an item is selected in a list Use this function to change the name of an existing file or folder You cannot change the 3 character extension of files and SET folders since they are used to identify the type of file or folder Rename EAM Press the T Text Edit button to open the Text Edit window Enter the new name then press OK to confirm and close the Text Edit window Erase Use this command to delete the selected file or folder Style Play operating mode The Style Play mode is the boot up operating mode When in this mode you can play with Styles i e automatic accompani ments while playing with one to four tracks Upper 1 3 and Lower on the keyboard You can select different Sounds and Effects by selecting Performances and STSs A different Voice Processor Preset may be selected by a Performance or STS You can also use the SongBook to automatically select Styles for a desired music genre Style Play
381. is function assigned you can control the proportional volume of all four Pads at the same time Please note that the status of the Pad s volume after having been modified with a pedal or slider is made current and will be saved in a Performance or STS by using the rel evant Write procedure 288 Assignable parameters List of Assignable Switch functions List of Assignable Switch functions Functor E a Text Page Up These options let you move to the previ ous or next page when reading a text file loaded with a Song see Text files loaded with Standard MIDI Files on Text Page Down The following functions can be assigned to the Assignable Switches Function Mesning om emm E cmm CO o xam SyleUpperiwute SSS Syewwenwte SS Syewpeswe SSS aisen SSS ss ss pe O ee ee ss page 150 or Song Book entry see Lyrics as text files associated to a SongBook entry on page 168 SongBook Next Moves to the next SongBook entry in the selected Custom List Style Acc1 5 Mute Song Melody Mute Mute of Song track 4 usually the Mel ody track Song Drum amp Bass Mode Mute of all tracks apart for track 2 usu ally Bass and 10 usually Drum Bass amp Lower Backing Mutes all tracks except for the Bass and Lower tracks Turns Quarter Tone on off Microphone Talk Turns all Voice Processor effects down to let you address the audience See Voice Processor Setup Talk on page 213
382. is the general procedure to follow for the Step Recording 1 Dress SEQUENCER to enter Sequencer mode 2 Press the RECORD button and select the Multitrack Sequencer option to enter the Multitrack Record mode From the page menu select the Overdub Step Recording or Overwrite Step Recording mode At this point the Step Record window will appear in the display 3 The next event will be entered at the position shown by the Pos indicator in the upper right corner of the display If you don t want to insert a note at this position insert a rest instead as shown in step 5 To jump to the next measure filling the remaining beats with rests press the Next M button in the display 4 To change the step value use the Step Time parameters 5 Inserta note rest or chord at the current position To insert a single note just play it on the keyboard The inserted note length will match the step length You may change the velocity and relative duration of the note by editing the Velocity and Duration parameters See Veloc ity and Duration on page 175 To insert a rest just press the Rest button in the display Its length will match the step value To tie the note to be inserted to the previous one press the Tie button in the display A note will be inserted tied to the previous one with exactly the same pitch You don t need to play it on the keyboard again To insert a chord or a second
383. isplay a Note event with default values will be inserted Press the Delete button in the dis play to delete the selected event 9 When the editing is complete you may select a different track go to step 4 10 When finished editing the whole Song select the Save Song command from the page menu to save the Song to a storage device See Save Song window on page 194 for more information on saving a Song Event Edit Filter This page is where you can select the event types to be shown in the Event Edit page SEQUENCER Event Edit _ Turn On the filter for all event types you do not wish to see in the Event Edit page Note RX Noise Notes and RX Noises Program Program Change events Control Control Change events Tempo Meter Tempo and Meter changes Master Track only After Touch Mono Channel Aftertouch events Poly After Touch Poly Aftertouch events Pitch Bend Pitch Bend events Pa Controls Controls exclusive of the Pa800 like the FX and Scale settings These controls are recorded to the Master Track and saved as System Exclusive data Song Edit Quantize The quantize function corrects any rhythm error after recording SEQUENCER Edit ceca T Tai LCE B3 Tad THS THE Tar THe Trans Cut Ra After setting the various parameters press Execute to start the operation Track Use this parameter to select a track All Quantize will apply to all tracks Tra
384. jo jo o 23 o 22 olojo jo c uloj ojojo oliololololojlojo lt 2 2 2 2 5 a e e 2j 2 ojoj oaojajaja o a gt 2 AO 92 2 5 lululrio o AIAI Di Y gw oO GAEREN Oo al 4 o 3 o o o S el Bl Si ct DI ol al al a To ES ell EK UJ N o w Q N W w N N N N N N N NI N N d ul wl Nn W W N NI NI N N N N NIN O W CO wD UI SI Ww NI O N LI W N O O COIN Oil OY AJ WIN 2 3 3 5 Serenade 5 N 7 12 13 12 13 Slide Blues 5 D r SA my oO 2 CR Cl bi uiu Gl E D d o m 9 9 s 2 9 2 o o 3 o 4 D O0 AX NIX T s 5 o 5 5 M w o lt T lt lt S 3 I I To o aj 2 w2 3 9 S 3 2 53 33 10 5 lt 8 C m EN Clo N D m elo cl23 5 3 t o0o T N N 5 A jo po 0 3 po O DI lt bd 5 17 17 20 C ank User 2 CCO PC ank User 3 CC32 Bank Favorite 1 10 20 29 9 ll A E 0 MEA ps pis EG EA A O 8 MEA 0 DI HI B E DI 1 DI CH B 2 apo japo ao A Ce p p EN o p M _ 24 28 W W W N N N N NI N N NI N N NJ ul wl n W W WI N NI N N NI N N NI N N Y ul wl nu N O W CF NI om wy Si WwW N O N Ui W N N OF vi oi N Oil Si WI N O N Ui W N A A e e N Mia Q ol Q N N w W NI N NI N N NI N N N N Y ul wl nm Y wW W ni N ni N ni N N N NIN
385. k and practice on the keyboard When you have finished practicing press START STOP to stop the arranger and unmute the track by repeatedly pressing its icon status until the Record status icon appears again While the shown status icon is Record press START STOP to begin recording Depending on the Metro metro nome option you selected a 1 or 2 bars precount may play before the recording actually begins When it begins play freely The pattern will last for some measures accord ing to the Rec Length value then restart Since the recording will happen in overdub you can add notes on any following passage This is very useful to record different percussive instruments at any cycle on a Drum or Percussion track Note While recording track s Keyboard Range see page 124 1s ignored and the track can play over the whole keyboard range The Local parameter see Local Control On on page 203 is also automatically set to On to allow playing on the keyboard When finished recording press START STOP to stop the arranger Select a different track and go on recording the full Chord Variation Note You can select a different track only when the arranger is not running When finished recording the Chord Variation select a dif ferent Chord Variation or Style Element to go on recording the full Style When finished recording the new Style select the Write Style command from the page menu to open the
386. k Record you cannot SOUND or STS but access each separate Song track For ease of use tons just two master tracks are provided Kbd Pad Key board Pads and Ch Acc Chord Accompaniment 74 Recording a new Song Recording Recording 1 Select the Style Element you wish to use before starting to play Select one of the Intros to start with an introduc tion Select any of the Variations before starting to record 2 Start recording by pressing the START STOP button START STOP 3 Play as if you were performing live with the Styles During recording select any Style Element Intro Variation Fill Ending you like You can also press START STOP to stop the Style and press it again to start the Style up again Please remember that while recording in Backing Sequence Record mode you cannot use the SYNCHRO TAP TEMPO RESET ACC SEQ VOLUME controls 4 When finished recording your Song press the ll PLAY STOP button in the SEQUENCER 1 section to exit recording and return to the main page of the Sequencer mode SEQUENCER 1 a a SEQUENCER 5 d HEWSONG A Heter did H 1 _ SELECT AE NNI E H Ne DA DA DA After pressing the PLAY STOP button the main page of the Sequencer mode appears again 5 While in the main page of the Sequencer mode press the M PLAY STOP button in the SEQUENCER 1 section to listen to the recorded S
387. k status gt PERF PERF9 Track play mute status Press these icons to change it Play status The track can be heard Mute status The track cannot be heard Style Controls Keyboard Range On Off Wrap Around In this page you can program the Wrap Around point and turn on off the Keyboard Range included in each Style tracks STYLE PLAY Controls Trk Upper 1 Grand Piano E Piana 121 083 888 Ebd Range On Off Keyboard Range On Off gt PERF PERF This parameter is an on off switch for the Key Range parameter memorized into each Style Element track On The Keyboard Range is considered provided it has been programmed see Style Element Track Controls Keyboard Range on page 124 in Style Record mode When a track goes over the lower or higher Keyboard Range point it is automati cally transposed to stay in the programmed range Off No Keyboard Range used o v c Q i o tia Q cc 100 Style Play operating mode Pad Switch Pad Wrap Around PERF PERF The wrap around point is the highest register limit for the back ing track The accompaniment patterns will be transposed according to the detected chord If the chord is too high the Style tracks might play in a register that is too high and there fore unnatural If however it reaches the wrap around point it will be automatically transposed an octave lower The wrap around point can be individually set for each
388. ks and four Pad tracks In the main page Keyboard tracks are shown in the right half of the display You can reach the main page by pressing EXIT from any of the Style Play edit pages If you are in a different operating mode press STYLE PLAY to recall the Style Play mode If Keyboard tracks are not shown in the display press the TRACK SELECT button to see them This operating mode is automatically selected when turning the instrument on 12 Front panel SONG PLAY Song Play mode where you can play back Songs in Standard MIDI File SMF or KAR format Since the Pa800 is equipped with two sequencers you can even play two Songs at the same time and mix them with the SEQUENCER BALANCE slider In addition to the Song tracks you can play up to four Keyboard tracks along with the Song s In the main page Keyboard tracks are shown in the right half of the display You can reach the main page by pressing EXIT from any of the Song Play edit pages If you are in a different operating mode press SONG PLAY to recall the Song Play mode Use the TRACK SELECT button to cycle between Keyboard and Song tracks SEQUENCER Sequencer mode where you can play record or edit a Song The Backing Sequence mode lets you record a new Song based on the Keyboard and Style tracks and save it as a new Standard MIDI File SOUND Sound mode to play single Sounds on the key board or edit them By pressing RECORD you can enter the Sampling mode
389. ks to solo it Do the same on a soloed track to deactivate the Solo function Exit from Record Select this command to exit from Record without saving changes to the Style Write Style dialog box Open this window by choosing the Write Style item from the page menu Here you can save the recorded or edited Style to memory by choosing either a User or Favorite Style bank Write Style Parameters saved in the Style are marked with the STYLE symbol through the user s manual Name gt STYLE Name of the Style to be saved Press the Ti Text Edit button next to the name to open the Text Edit window Style Bank Target bank of Styles Each bank corresponds to one of the STYLE SELECT buttons Use TEMPO VALUE controls to select a different bank Style Target Style location in the selected bank Use TEMPO VALUE controls to select a different location Note A User or Favorite Style is usually prompted when writing a Style However you can overwrite a Factory Style when the Fac tory Style and Pad Protect parameter is left unchecked see page 235 Select button Press this button to open the Style Select window and select a target location STYLE SELECT British Pop 1 Er m ker e CON Aa d L ko ko A While in the Style Select window use the buttons on top of the window to select either the User Bank 11 20 or the Favorite banks Copy Sounds dialog box Open this window
390. la amp Baya 599 Large2 L 561 Agogo Bell 574 Snare Ghost 587 WoodBlock amp Castanet 600 Large2_R 562 Meditation Tree 575 Rain Stick 588 Mix Latin Perc 601 Large3 L 563 Marc Tree 576 Congas 589 Kangaroo 602 Large R 564 Marc TreeLP 577 Quinto amp Bongos 590 DJ Eddie Set 603 Large4 L 565 Cowbell 578 Okonkolo 591 Stereo Snares182 L 604 Large4_R 566 Click 579 Timbales 592 Stereo Snares1 amp 2 R 605 Empty Drum Samples Factory data Drum Samples 273 The following table lists all Pa800 Fac tory Drum Samples Sample Lee ICI CUT JI 3 CUT JI 3 poroa 1 3 poroen E 4 porom E 35 Bees E 5 Bee 1 3 Beet E 5 BR E 3 por EN ena 1 m ovs 1 use JI eme LI res E A woer 1 s Bened 1 35 Temm 1 reng 1 3 pese E m mm E z sme E MEA foreso 3 MEN EC EN ME ETE 17 e SS MEAN a0 Backssoutstong 1 MEN ECT 1 mp II mp II mp II SS SS BEN SS EE A 39 CAC E MEN forem 1 aber m BWpz 1 Ce Wes E afore a foe 5 kg 1 a ponme 50 Ambient cae EC BD Ambient Rocker 49 EA 5 51 BD Klanger 0 52 BD Electribe01 53 i Gs BD Electribe02 BD Electribe03 EX MEN EN A WR E EN 13 15 17 20 21 22 23 24 25 T 27 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 6 BD Electribe04 BD Electribe05 BD Electribe06 BD Electribe07 BD Electribe08 BD El
391. lay to give Pa800 an answer and the dialog box will close Are you sure Page menus Press the icon on the upper right corner of each page and a menu with suitable commands for the current page will appear Touch one of the available commands to select it Or press any where else on the screen to make it disappear with no command selected Pop up menus When an arrow appears next to a parameter name press it to open a pop up menu Select any of the available options or any where else on the screen to make the menu disappear na chard H rand Piano c io CG n YU 3 H im ele 28 Interface basics Operative modes Checkboxes This kind of parameters are on off switches Press them to change their status Quarter To Numeric fields When a numeric value can be edited press it a second time to open the Numeric Keypad SAMPLING ome Alphabetic fields When a textual option is underlined press it a second time to open a list of options Editable names When the T Text Edit button appears next to a name press it to open the Text Edit window and edit the name Filter BOB Hal He W H o Hee HerHe Hu ohHe zx eHs Wer Ne HnHAbeH CH ht We We He We e He HCH cancer EI n Space Delete Shift RR Ze GS Co GR Lists and scrollbars Files on storage media as well as other kinds of data are shown as lists Use the scrollbar to scroll the list cont
392. le if the file MYSONG TXT exists in the same directory as the MYSONG MID file it is loaded together with the matching MID file However unlike ordinary Lyrics the text will not scroll automat ically while the Song is playing back You must scroll it with the DIAL As an alternative you can use an assignable switch or footswitch with the Text Page Up or Text Page Down functions assigned to scroll respectively to the previous or next text page Note When a TXT file is loaded with the Song it overrides any included Lyrics data Playing the keyboard while reading chords When playing the keyboard while a Song is running if you want to play the keyboard in C while seeing the original chords in the display set to Off the Transpose applies to Style and Kbd tracks parameter and check the Transpose applies to Sequencer 1 2 parameter see page 198 STS Name panel Select this panel to see the name of the four available STSs See STS Name panel on page 87 for details Mic panel Select this panel to set parameters for the microphone input See Mic panel on page 87 for details Sub Scale panel Select this panel to select a secondary scale for the Keyboard tracks See Mixer Tuning Sub Scale on page 92 for details U Y o KS D 5 Select this panel to see which Hit or Sequence Pads are assigned to the four Pads See Pad panel on page 88 for de
393. led by a Style Press the Style name to open the Style Select window As an alternative use the STYLE SELECT section on the control panel 5 T t Groove Bld Selected Style Performance STS area This is where the Performance or STS name is shown a bPerf StereoGrand Selected Performance or STS Selected Performance or STS This is the latest selected Performance PERF or Single Touch Setting STS Press the name to open the Performance Select window As an alternative use the PERFORMANCE SOUND SELECT section to select a different Performance Song Play operating mode 145 Main page To select a different STS from the latest selected Style use the four SINGLE TOUCH SETTING buttons under the display Keyboard tracks area This is where Keyboard tracks are shown Sound name Ok Track name Sound bank s icon Track status Track s octave transpose Sound name PERF STS Name of the Sound assigned to the corresponding Keyboard track If the track is already selected white background press the Sound name to open the Sound Select window If the track is not selected dark background first select it then press the Sound name to open the Sound Select window For more information about the Sound Select window see Sound Select window on page 78 Keyboard track octave transpose PERF STS Non editable Octave transpose of the corresponding track To individually edit th
394. lete button When a side arrow kl is shown next to a parameter there is an event at the current position You can press the Del button next to it to delete the event at the current position Hint To delete all events starting from the current position select the Delete All from Selected command from the page menu see below Soft transport buttons Event Previous or Next Event Use these buttons to move to the previous or next recorded event I Step Previous or Next Step Use these buttons to go to the previous or next step 1 8 or 192 ticks If an event is located before the previous or next step the locator stops on that event For example if you are positioned on M001 01 000 and no event exists before M001 01 192 the gt button moves to the M001 01 192 location If an event exists on M001 01 010 the gt button stops to the M001 01 010 location These commands are effective even 1f the Measure parameter is not selected Measure Previous or Next Measure Use these buttons to move to the previous or following measure These commands are effective even if the Measure parameter is not selected Done button Done Press this button to exit the Step Backing Sequence mode All changes will be saved to memory Hint Save the Song to a storage device by selection the Save Song command from the page menu to avoid losing it when turn ing the instrument off Step Backing Sequence page menu
395. lider O MIC CO ASSIGN A CO ASSIGN B SLIDER MODE 6 Press the EFFECT and HARMONY buttons to turn their LED on and acti vate the Voice Processor Try the Play Mute button of the Microphone panel to mute unmute the whole microphone section O Note This is the same play mute control you can find in the Mic Microphone muted Microphone set to In channel strip of the play Volume panel 8 Press the Volume tab to select the Volume panel MIC IM LOWER UPPERS UPPERZ UPPERI STS Hame Sub Scale 70 Singing with a connected microphone 9 Applying harmony to your voice If you like start a Style or Song Adjust the microphone final volume using the dedicated slider 10 Adjust the other settings balancing the Style Song and microphone with the BALANCE slider and the Microphone slider The settings for the BALANCE and MIC sliders are not saved in memory so they stay consistent when selecting different Styles Performances Songs or Voice Processor settings Applying harmony to your voice 1 2 OH Mi A W Be sure you are in Style Play mode and select a Style you especially like Press the Mic tab to show the Microphone panel and select one of the available Voice Processor Presets Voice Processor Presets are settings for the various Voice Processor modules Effects Harmony By selecting a Preset all processing parameters may change A Voice Processor Preset is assigned to
396. ll be able to play it in Song Play mode with the correct Sounds NRPN Sound parameters GM compliant Standard MIDI Files can contain NRPN 99 98 Control Change messages These messages are used to mod ify some Sound parameters before starting a Song The following NRPN messages are recognized by the Pa800 CC 98 LSB 0 1270 CC 99 MSB CC 06 Data Entry Vibrato Rate Vibrato Depth Vibrato Delay O 0 127 Filter Cutoff 1270 o 0 127 9 dd 12700 dd 12700 dd 0 127 9 NOS 0 127 9 dd 0 127 oa 0 127 9 a 64 No change to the original parameter s value b dd Drum Instrument No 0 127 CO C8 2 Resonance 3 1279 EG Attack Time 1270 0 0 0 0 e eo EG Decay Time EG Release Time Drum Filter Cutoff Drum Filter Resonance 7 a 12 Drum EG Attack Time 127 9 0 0 0 Drum EG Decay Time 0 Drum Coarse Tune Drum Fine Tune Drum Volume Drum Panpot 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 28 0 12 Drum Rev Send FX 1 29 0 127 Drum Mod Send FX 2 30 Note These controls are reset when stopping the Song or selecting a new Song Song Play operating mode 143 NRPN Sound parameters Keyboard Pad and Sequencer tracks The Pa800 is equipped with a double sequencer Each Song can play a maximum of 16 tracks for a total of 32 sequencer tracks In addition you can play the keyboard with four additional Key
397. lt lt lt lt lt lt a wo cU w w w w w un Og O ESA E D D S a gt mS et D ajaj n 4 N D Ke MOE 1 wewwau 4 segerea 5 pen Balad 5 mms s ues RRE REGER 4 ages e pance shaor 15 Medium shaor 15 posa LA DI W N N NI N NI N NI N N N Y ul wl Nn W Wl W N N N N NI N N NI N N Y ul RE N O 9 NI oi ul SI Wl N O N LI UJ N N Ol W OO Oli ul SI WI N O N ui UJ N Factory data 0 Hawaiian Vin Flamenco 4 4 MEM Flamenco 3 4 LS Banda 2 4 4 Mexican Wiz 7 emm 36 osuere 2 3 Celtic Dream 7 8 Scottish Reel RN T Mme 15 19 Tej 23 24 LN Turkish Turkish Pop s jewwau EST IEC NN RN ms Lu 15 uem ENE EN EN 24 Bigger Band Medium EEUU E EA AE RE WE KE m mene AE NM E PAP eee MEENN EH EN 7 Rm o Slow Swing Brush 3 Swing Balad baang mn Swing Ballads T s X ieee brah rz ie o Jazzy Blues vw 70 beat Groove EN 5 UEM 12 16 22 Vocal Swing Jazz Waltz 1 Dixieland Serenade Band Jazz Club 187 oa Blues 21 Medium SING 28 Jazz Waltz 2 Le 3 Gwen 80 O ee 2 3 5 7 RS KGR NN 17 NN 20 21 22 EN 27 13 2 3 A 7 WEN ECE RUN 17 24 27 0 Guitar Bossa Bossa raros
398. lt lt lt lt lt o A A opo ojo gt x x rl rT rs xz xz azl zl zl zl ols wg ololalololol Slolo Ss Ss Sc gt 0 DI S 3 5 1 Q Q 5 5 ol ole c 2 2 3 o o o o o o N Cle c c 2 23 2a a o o G alr al aA Tl rl rl LS rc ry sie 313 3 3 0o oj aej el olo ylnil ojojo ojolo O olO0 ny _ O0 o llull oO o0 9 o9 09 7 9 22d Ed NI N ul a w Nn lt D d un m o L un lt et gt o V y Military 1 Military 2 Military 3 Military 4 N 2 3 LA 5 LI Synth Seq 5 Horror 1 Horror 2 N 7 Horror 3 Horror 4 Lullaby 1 Lullaby 2 Nature River 12 3 2 3 Nature Storm _ Metronome ae 1 LI NIL NILE Lol Lol NIN LO M NT NIN NI Lol UN Ni Nn Loi L lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt Sails 31212 2132312 2 2 221313 tl Aa tl Al Atl Al Al l l ej Hill ct c Eo Bd a sal ea eal 3 o El e 5 5 2529 SE pol pl pl ol ol oi UI Lol Lol Lol Lol nit L NI Lol ni wn Slol l lololdld oa a lololal a 0 0 0 0 e eiziazialalala i9 2 2 2 2 2 ajajaja o n S3 o po o o Ol CO NI o Bl DI N S S 7 3 3 3 8 7 a gt Bl wl n aja 5 Metronome 4 4 17 ech 7 a o o U un w owl w w w w w w w w w w w ojala D m ole bee a el ee ee Se a alala CH O ojo ja o anal anal al al u n un i n Siojo O h oOloOipoivl ol wl cl ai
399. lute GM Bassoon GM ul N HighlandBagPipes Flute 2 Piccolo GM Double Reed LA Blown Bottle GM Bambu Flute N NJ LI Reeds Saxes English Horn GM English Horn 2 121 121 2 N N NI N N xl alxal a al a sch Ww UJ NO Wy Ww UJ Ww Ww N On Ww Wy UJ L Lol Le L A gt sI Q S lt 9 D Oz O Di Ee ol ol D Ola gt N le alo Di N 5 tlt ay MVs ols T N O T 2 N D olol2 21 2 8 O a 2E 3 m m a 23 25 9 O s Z D D el oO o c alsis w z m ozzgessssasziszsss sia22o 5 5 lt SERA du D D c Sie O m alal u c ct ki C De al Ta a ct 3 oO Q N O D gt A N o D m Mm emen Fm JI Recorder GM Recorder 2 2 Per Whistle 2 2 Bag Pipes GM Uillean BagPipes 121 Ocarina GM Shakuhachi GM TT Shakuhachi 2 Hichiriki 2 Clarinet G 3 Klarnet 1 121 12 Klarnet 2 121 13 121 3 121 121 Zurna 1 Zurna 2 Flute Click N QD kt 3 A Un 3 gt The Pad Dark Pad Ui NJ w N w 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 N N WO 12 13 29 OB Pad 29 Dark Anna Symphonic Ens Future Pad Air Clouds N w 15 UJ N O NJ UJ N Pods In Pad 5 Ww AU Wy UY oO nl aj N Korgmatose N LA LI Reoccuring Astra N w Money Pad N LA Ravelian Pad Meditate Reso Down Sky Watcher Super Sweep 121 121 121 1
400. lways shown in Sound Edit mode and in the various Track Info areas Track Activity Show Track Activity GEILEN Use this parameter to turn on off the Track Activity display When it is turned on you can monitor events coming from the Global edit mode General Controls Interface 201 tracks or the MIDI inputs Incoming events are shown by the changing color of each track s label Here is the list of colors and their meaning Red Data coming from the MIDI IN ports Internal data generated by the keyboard pads the Arranger or one of the Sequencers Green Grey Fither internally or externally generated data or both at the same time Dark Blue No data received Auto Select Auto Style Select Auto Performance Sound Select gt GBL gt GBLA When one of these parameters is checked the latest selected Style Performance or Sound selected in a bank is immediately selected when pressing the bank button This way you can assign your preferred Style Performance or Sound to each control panel s button and select it just with a single press However the Style Perf Sound Select window still appears when you press one of the bank buttons so you can select a different item if desired Note Unless you save your settings by means of the Write Global Auto Select Setup page menu command the memorized Style Performance or Sound is reset to the first one in each bank when turning the instrument off and
401. m s 9 Water menest at 8 ST Tembenetaei trumpet aon _ xm s 9 onanvoices masiva a 7 ST Tembenetari Numeri hn Pier o s sewer ment 1 a 8 S7 rombonevelt Trumpet aon Ew w enana ment Dm 3 37 Trapen Trumpet aon wr w m Genus ment 1 1 rio S Trapen Trumpet aon Lum s 5 siso ment 1 1 m it S WembeneBeve Trumpet aon xm w 5 femiwaeiat ment m S rombones emet b rs m remisa ment Um 9 os TuboGM rann Lum s s mees ment 1 3m 3 59 berks Toba trumpet aon Fw w leegent 1 1 tat 2 59 tube od numera n Lum sw s servas menet tat 3 38 Bynabone trumpet aon xm 5 5 sosa ment ro 59 Mute trumpet GM Trumpet aon Y wr 3 9 Nwas ems vocal m mue Ensemble 2 ees 1 Ln s 3 Synth voce esi os Y Lum 1 3 Anolog voice mesi vol Y li 3 Vesesue strings vocal 1 p 9 Frenchsection ares wr 3 s Wessape mesi os ect ares wr 4 9 GeV ment 1 1 3m 4 9 HemitwemBe aes wr s 5 bemvece ment 3m 9 61 Bros secioncm Ces Y wr s 9 Synth voces men 1 1 Um 3 61 esoe LI wr s 5 owememw mas Il um o 8 meses fees wr 1 ppes 6 3m 3 8 Glen rents mee FE wn 4 e EEC ores Pers 9 wame eres wr a 5 meme me II re 8 Se amp ee FI wr s 5 mmm px O et p fresas ees wo s 5 wide ri LI Gm os 8 m ie FI wr 7 5 ese ri
402. me Genre search criteria st much Afterworld Ballad u Genre and CEP n day in paradise Artist are ED A gigolo Pop both consid ED A groovy love Ballad ered even Hn GP A hard day night Pop though only ED A whiter shade Ballad one of them may be shown in the List Filter Add to list Select Book Custom List Lyrics dit 2 List Edit STS 2 Press the T Text Edit button next to the search criteria even more than one you want to enter For example you may want to find all songs containing the word love in the title in any posi tion in the string If so select the Name criterion and enter the word love Capitals are not relevant for the search Filter Love AS Hehe H Wach ee d HH 0020090000 Ate LEET ZELLE Ee pg Ex Er ES crear concer oK 3 Press OK in the display and close the Text Edit dialog box The entered text is now the search criteria Filter Love 0 1 1 gH 000 010 0 010 dL LE off Erf E E Eiei DEE E 2Rs Re Mr We Re NAHe HCH BEEBE Oe ee pg EE Conte ELS crear concer or q 62 The SongBook Searching entries 4 Press OK to close the Filter dialog box and return to the SongBook page Once the Filter dialog box has been closed by pressing OK the Filtered check box is automati cally checked and the filter is activated Only entries matching the entered criterion are seen in the Main List SONGBOOK IR no chord Type
403. ment of the Korg Pa series To avoid transposing the Master Transpose is locked by default If you want to lock or unlock it change the Master Transpose Lock parameter s status see General Controls Lock on page 199 then write the Global to memory see Write Global Global Setup dialog box on page 210 o v c Q i o tia Q cc 84 Style Play operating mode Main page Normal view Recognized chord Displays the recognized chord when you play a chord on the keyboard If no chord abbreviation is shown no chord recogni tion mode has been selected by using the CHORD SCANNING buttons see page 15 Page menu icon Press the page menu icon to open the menu See Page menu on page 103 for more information Style area This is where the Style name is shown together with its tempo and meter parameters Style name Current beat Style bank Current tempo Style Element s meter Measure number Style name PERF Currently selected Style Press the Style name to open the Style Select window As an alternative use the STYLE SELECT section on the control panel Style bank gt PERF Bank the current Style belongs to Style Element meter Meter of the current Style Element Measure number While the Style is playing an M appears and it shows the cur rent measure number of the current Style Element playing While it is in stop an T appears and it shows the total numb
404. menu on page 182 Page menu icon Press this icon to open the page menu see Page menu on page 192 Parameters area Each page contains various parameters Use the tabs to select one of the pages For detailed information on the various types of parameters see sections starting from page 182 Tabs Use tabs to select one of the edit pages of the current edit section Mixer Tuning Volume Pan This page lets you set the volume and pan for each Song track Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Song tracks 1 8 and 9 16 Pan SEQUENCER Mixer ZTuning Trk 51T1r61 t Grand Piano E Piano 121 883 8868 quu ur de die died Tal Taz TAS T d THS THE Fa Eu EL Sub SEQUENCER Mixer ZTuning Trk S1Tr amp 1 b Grand Piano VIII 30 gu PLE go 30 au 30 30 bet ht hek SG het let TH3 Ti Til Tiz Tid T15 T16 113 Fa EG EG Sub gt SONG Track position in the stereo field L 64 L 1 Lett stereo channel C 00 Center R 1 R 63 Right stereo channel Off If the track s output status is Left amp Right normal setting the direct uneffected signal is not sent to the outputs only the FX signal is heard for this track If the track is sent to a separate output no FX is sent to any output To program the output status for each track see Audio Output Sty Kbd on page 206 Volume SONG Track s volume 0 127 MIDI value of the track s volume Play Mute icon SONG Track s play mu
405. menu the first time you will open the Song Select window after turning the instrument on the selected path will be selected by default o Jg c o i Q ja Q ec 160 Song Play operating mode Page menu Page menu Press the page menu icon to open the menu Press a command to select it Press anywhere in the display to close the menu without selecting a command Write Performance Select this command to open the Write Performance dialog box and save most of the current control panel settings to a Perfor mance See Write Performance dialog box on page 104 for more infor mation Write Global Song Play Setup Select this command to open the Write Global Song Play Setup dialog box and save global settings that are unique to the Song Play mode See Write Global Song Play Setup dialog box on page 161 for more information Save Song Marker Seq 1 2 Select this command to save the markers created in the corre sponding sequencer see Markers side tabs on page 149 Export Jukebox List Select this command to save the current Jukebox list as a text file to a disk Here is how it works 1 While a Jukebox file is assigned to the sequencer select the Export Jukebox List command from the page menu 2 A dialog box will appear asking you to select either the internal SSD U memory or a storage device connected to one of the USB Host ports Write Jukebox List 3 Select an option
406. move the plug from the socket if not using it for extended periods of time or before cleaning Please ensure that the mains plug or appliance couple remains readily accessible Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way such as power supply cord or plug is damaged liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture does not operate normally or has been dropped Do not install this equipment on the far position from wall outlet and or convenience receptacle Do not install this equipment in a confined space such as a box for the conveyance or similar unit When a cart is used use caution when moving the cart apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip over Lu WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN AVERTISSEMENT RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR RBOEN SY Fr eERy ibi The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product s enclo sure that may be of sufficient magnitude to con stitute a risk of electric shock to persons The exclamation point within an equilateral tri angle is intended to alert the user to the pres ence
407. mper 24 97 Polarity 202 Demo 24 Display contrast 14 Display Hold 15 Double Sequencer 14 151 Drum tracks 95 99 207 E EC5 202 Effects Copy 103 160 193 Sequencer mode 183 185 Song Play mode 152 154 155 Style Play mode 90 93 185 Ending 13 Ensemble 98 F Fade In Out 197 Favorite Styles 105 Fill 13 Footswitch 202 Polarity 202 Format 234 G General MIDI 241 Global 196 211 Write Global Setup 210 MIDI Setup 210 Sequencer Setup 193 Song Play Setup 161 Style Play Setup 105 Talk Configuration 211 Voice Processor Preset 211 Voice Processor Setup 211 Global channel 241 Groove Quantize 157 H Harmony track Voice Processor 158 192 in SongBook entries 166 MIDI channel 204 Note Input Source 215 l Inputs 15 19 24 207 Intro 13 J Jukebox 147 156 K Keyboard Mode 15 Lock 200 L Local Off 203 243 Lower Lock 200 Lyrics 148 168 M Markers 149 Master Transpose 16 198 Master Tune 197 Master Volume 10 23 Media 222 239 Backup 234 Format 234 Menu 15 MIDI Clock 142 203 General MIDI 241 Global channel 241 IN channels 204 Interface 18 243 OUT channels 205 Setup 102 158 191 203 241 Standard MIDI File 142 170 MIDI interface 18 243 MIDI Setup 102 158 191 203 241 Write 210 Midifile 142 170 241 Mode Pad Record 131 141 Sequencer 170 195 Song Play 142 161 SongBook 162 169 Style Play 83 105 Style Record 106 130 O Octave Transpose 16 92 Auto Octave 19
408. n page 145 for more information Play status The track can be heard Mute status The track cannot be heard Song Play operating mode 153 Mixer Tuning EQ Gain Mixer Tuning EQ Gain In this page you can set the three band equalization EQ for each individual track Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from the Keyboard to the Song tracks and vice versa SONG PLAY SE01 Mixer Tuning Trk Upper 1 Grand Piano E Piano 121 883 888 Hi Gain Tal SONG PLAY SEQ1 Mixer Tuning psa Trk Upper 1 b Grand Piano E Piana 121 883 888 Hid Gain dEl a E a li Low Gain E IN I Tas THE Tur SONG PLAY SEQ1 Mixer Tuning Trk Upper 1 Grand Piano E Piana 121 883 888 Hid Gain dEl ie p Ps Gain Hole Hi High Gain PERF STS This parameter lets you adjust the high frequencies equalization on each individual track This is a shelving curve filter Values are shown in decibels dB Mid Middle Gain PERF STS This parameter lets you adjust the middle frequencies equaliza tion on each individual track This is a bell curve filter Values are shown in decibels dB Low Gain gt PERF STS This parameter lets you adjust the low frequencies equalization on each individual track This is a shelving curve filter Values are shown in decibels dB Play Mute icon PERF STS P GBL 9 Track s play mute status See Keyboard track status on page 145 for more information
409. n the Voice Processor Preset gt Preset page will appear see Voice Processor Preset Preset on page 214 EFFECT Turns the Voice Effects effect on or off If you keep the SHIFT button pressed and press this button the Voice Processor Preset gt Effects page will appear see Voice Processor Preset Effects on page 217 PAD 1 4 STOP gt PERF STS STSS Each Pad corresponds to a dedicated Pad track Use these but tons to trigger up to four sounds or sequences at the same time e Press a single PAD button to trigger a single sound or sequence Pres more PAD buttons to trigger several sounds or sequences The sequences will play up to the end Then they will stop or continue repeating depending on their One Shot Loop status see Pad Type on page 139 You can stop all sequences or just some of them by pressing the STOP button of the PAD section e Press STOP to stop all sequences at once e Keep STOP pressed and press one or more of the PAD buttons to stop the corresponding sequence s Note Pads are automatically stopped when selecting one of the Endings Note Pads share polyphony voices with the other tracks so avoid using too many of them together with a dense Style or Song arrangement About Pad synchronization In Style Play mode Pads are sync d to the Style s tempo In Song Play mode they are sync to the latest Sequencer you set to play For example assume you pressed SEQ
410. n 1 Variation 2 Variation 3 6 Bass Variation 4 ju Intro1 ac3 E Accs ev Acc5 CV2 ove Intro 2 Ro Intro 3 C In Fill 1 Fill 2 V e Fill 3 Break Ending 1 Ending 2 Ending 3 Each Style Element is made up of smaller units called Chord Variations CV but not all of them have the same number of CVs Variations 1 4 have up to 6 CVs each while the other Style Elements have only up to 2 CVs When you play on the chord recognition area Lower Upper or Full depending on the Chord Scanning section on the control panel the arranger scans the keyboard and determines which chord you are playing Then depending on the selected Style Element it determines which Chord Variation CV should be played for the scanned chord Which Chord Variation corre sponds to each scanned chord is a setting of the Style the Chord Variation Table Each Style Element contains a Chord Variation Table whose prototype is the following Chord Variations CVs Variation 1 4 Intro 1 3 Fill 1 3 Ending 1 3 CV1 CV6 CV1 CV2 no 3rd no 5th After deciding what CV to play the arranger triggers the right sequence for each track Since each sequence is written in a par ticular key for example CMajor GMajor or Emin the arranger transposes it according to the scanned chord Notes in the sequence are carefully transposed according to the Note Transposition Tables NTT to make them work fine with all recognized chords The NTT allow
411. n dialog box Copy Chord Table dialog box Open this window by choosing the Copy Chord Table item from the page menu Here you can copy the Chord Table of the cur rent Style Element to a different Style Element Copy Chord Table Cancel To Style Element Target Style Element All Settings will be copied to all Style Element of the Style in edit Varl CountIn Single Style Element where to copy settings to Overdub Step Recording window The Step Record allows you to create a new Style by entering sin gle notes or chords to each track by playing them on the key board one at a time with no need to play on time This is very useful when transcribing an existing score or needing a higher grade of detail and is particularly suitable to create drum and percussion tracks To access this page select the Overdub Step Recording com mand from the page menu STYLE RECORD Overdub Step Track Selected track Name of the selected track in record DRUM ACC5 Style track SE Selected Style Element See Element Style Element on page 109 CV Selected Chord Variation See Chord Var Chord Variation on page 109 Q y c Q i Q te Q ec 130 Style Record mode Overdub Step Recording window Pos Position This is the position of the event note rest or chord to be inserted Event list Previously inserted events You may delete this event and set it in edit again
412. n the Song Select window When the Song Select window appears you can select a single Song or a Jukebox file see Song Select window on page 80 If you select another Song while a Song is in play within the same Sequencer the previous Song stops and the new Song will be selected ready to play To select a Song an alternative is to press the SELECT button on the control panel corresponding to the desired sequencer Press SELECT a second time to select a Song by dialing in its ID number see Selecting a Song by its ID number on page 81 7 lt lt SIMP MLS V SEQUENCER 1 gt gt Meter Current Song Time Signature Measure number Current measure number Tempo Metronome tempo Select this parameter and use the TEMPO VALUE controls to change the tempo As an alternative you don t need to select this parameter just keep the SHIFT button pressed and use the DIAL to change the tempo of the selected sequencer Hint While in the main page you can have the Tempo parameter of Sequencer 2 on focus while Sequencer 1 1s selected In this situ ation you can use the DIAL to change Tempo for Sequencer 2 and SHIFT DIAL to change Tempo for Sequencer 1 Style area Currently selected Style You can select a Style while playing Songs to have it ready when switching to Style Play mode Also this lets you change the Pad and STS settings since Pads and STSs are recal
413. nFop SES RS SES e forste ECN s roksan E s forsen o sewr 5 Foksa D 35 ues lem 36 eroen Tit Pop eect T PopshufieT T pues palas SS Tw Beat Analogt lena ie froe EA AAA A EO TE MER E XLI NEN a EN A EA eee A MER Color Ballad MEA em x 8 PC LI 50 s Fox N 12 13 5 _ 7 Orchestral Tango N N o 1 22 3 24 5 N Twist 2 27 8 Jive N PC Bank Dance 5 7 12 13 15 17 20 1 2 5 Factory data 247 Styles S esa Eaten Rock open Rock 5 Rea Rock DECS ECC MEETS rer 9 amm 16 sewr 15 oossoo 1 ks o ER 5 5 o 39 N NI NI N UJ N CO NI NI DM Un n Siala 8 2 9 Lo c e 8 o D o g e e o 2 2 T el ajl al 5j njojojajeejg G 5 ou 9 cls b TT SD A D 5 Euro Trance Fashion Funk Dance Fever Funky Disco Barry Dance Philly Disco Miami Disco Love Disco Dance Motown Disco Gully Dance Mix Disco Latin House Garage House HipHop mm PC PC Bank Country CC32 Bank World 1 OH CH OH C A OE N N w DI W N N N N NI N NI N N N NJ ul wl n W W WI N NI N N NI N N NI N N Y ul wl nu N O Ol CO NI oi ul SI Wl N O N LI UJ N N Ol W OO Oli ul SI Wl NI O N Ui UJ N UJ N 5 Talkin Jazz 7 Soul 12 13 5 17 0
414. nd csm Jota os Tabs E Operating mode This indicates that the instrument is in Song Play mode Song Play operating mode 151 Edit menu Selected sequencer Before entering edit select one of the two sequencers by using the Song area of the main page see Switching between sequencers during editing below Edit section This identifies the current edit section corresponding to one of the items of the edit menu see Edit menu on page 151 Page menu icon Press this icon to open the page menu see Page menu on page 160 Parameters area Each page contains various parameters Use the tabs to select one of the pages For detailed information on the various types of parameters see sections starting from page 151 Tabs Use tabs to select one of the edit pages of the current edit section Switching between sequencers during editing When you enter Edit mode you can edit the selected sequencer s parameters The selected sequencer is always shown on the page header SONG PLAY SEQ1 Mixer Tuning b rand Dianna To select a sequencer go to the main page of the Song Play mode and select the sequencers you wish to edit The selected sequencer is shown with a white background Terk linner 1 D Diari j pheno song gt eter dd 51 denim E E ml H 2 Mixer Tuning Volume Pan This page lets you set the volume and pan for each of the Key board or Song tracks
415. nd melody played in realtime using the recognized chords of the left hand Note The Ensemble function only works in Style Play mode with the Split Keyboard Mode STYLE PLAY Keyboard Ensemble L Trk Upper 1 b Grand Piano E Fiano 121 883 888 Ensemble Trk Assign MIC TH LOWER UPPERS UPPER2 UPPERL kbd key Control A Velocitul Ensemble gt PERF STS Harmonization type Duet Adds a single note to the melody Close Adds a closed position chord to the melody Open 1 Adds an open position chord to the melody Open 2 As the above but with a different algorithm Block Block harmonization very typical of jazz music Power Ensemble Adds a fifth and an octave to the melody as heard in hard rock Fourths LO Typical of jazz this option adds a perfect fourth and a minor seventh under the melody Fourths UP As the above but with notes added over the mel ody Fifths This adds a series of Fifths below the original note Octave Adds one or more octaves to the melody Dual This option adds to the melody line a second note at a fixed interval set with the Note parameter When selecting this option a transpo sition value appears 24 24 semitones to the original note Brass Typical Brass section harmonization Reed Typical Reed section harmonization Trill When two notes are played on the keyboard this option trills them If three or more notes are played only the last two are trilled You can set the t
416. ndard MIDI File to be generated The automatically assigned name will be the same of the exported Chord Variation From E CV Use this pop up menu to select one of the available Chord Varia tions from the current Style Execute After selecting a Chord Variation press this button to export it as a Standard MIDI File A standard file selector will appear Select the target device and directory then press Save Style Record mode Export SMF 127 Page menu Press the page menu icon to open the page menu Press a com mand to select it Press anywhere in the display to close the menu without selecting a command ESTE Write Style Select this command to open the Write Style dialog box and save the Style to the internal memory See Write Style dialog box on page 128 for more information Undo Only available in Record mode While in Record mode cancels the latest recorded data and restores the previous situation Selected a second time it restores recorded data again Redo function Copy Sound Only available in some edit pages While the Style Element Track Control edit section is selected use this command to open the Copy Sound dialog box and copy all Sounds assigned to the current Style Element tracks to a different Style Element See Copy Sounds dialog box on page 128 for more informa tion Copy Expression Only available in some edit pages While the Style Element Track Control edit secti
417. ne HOST F This is a USB Type A Master Host connector USB 2 0 compli ant High Speed It duplicates the USB connector located in the rear panel Use it to connect to the Pa800 an USB Flash Memory stick an external CD ROM drive an USB hard disk To access the connected device go to the Media edit mode see Media edit mode on page 222 Front panel 17 c Io i YU 3 H im ele Rear panel PEDAL D NCE HOST R DAMPER ASSIGNABLE ps THRU out H IN COME NC 0000000 o id 2 1 RIGHT AUDIO OUTPUT USB lt lt PEDAL DEVICE HOST R DAMPER ASSIGNABLE EGS 1 RIGHT LEFT GAIN 1 AUDIO OUTPUT AUDIO INPUT 9 Music stand holes A music stand comes standard with your Pa800 Insert its legs into these two dedicated holes ACV cable connector Plug the supplied AC cable into this connector Q POWER switch Use this switch to turn the instrument on or off o USB connectors DEVICE This is a USB Type B Slave Device connector USB 1 1 compliant Full Speed Use it to connect the Pa800 to a personal computer and transfer data to from its internal devices SSD hard disk if fitted See HD and SSD U Connection on page 236 for more information MIDI O
418. ned to the selected track Press anywhere in this area to open the Sound Select window and select a different Sound Sound bank Bank of the selected Sound gt PERF gt PERFSY Program Change HERE gt PERF Program Change number sequence Bank Select MSB Bank Select LSB Program Change Sounds area This area lets you see Sounds and octave transposition for the eight Style tracks Style track s octave transpose icon XO o EO ao 44 40 m oz I E ad A ad t Sound bank s icon Style track s octave transpose icon gt PERF gt PERF Y Non editable Octave transpose of the corresponding track To change the octave transpose use the UPPER OCTAVE buttons or go to the Mixer Tuning Tuning edit page see page 92 Sound bank s icon gt PERF STS This picture illustrates the bank the current Sound belongs to Touch an icon a first time to select the corresponding track detailed information are shown on the Selected Track Info area see above Touch it a second time to open the Sound Select win dow Volume panel Press the Volume tab to select this panel This is where you can set the volume of each track and mute unmute tracks Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between the Normal view Keyboard and grouped Style tracks Mic In controls and the Style Tracks view separate Style tracks The Normal view shows grouped Style tracks Mic In controls Keyboard tracks Track status icon Virtual
419. next note from the chord above the input note is output for that harmony voice The subsequent illustration shows the harmony notes for the C major scale with a voicing selection of a C major chord and a single one above Root C Chord Type Maj Voicing Up1 Black Lead Grey Harmony You might have noticed that each harmony note can cover more than one input note or that each input note doesn t necessarily have a unique harmony note For instance C and D both have E as the 3rd above E and F share G and so on This gives a more stepped sound to the harmony as the changes are both greater in magnitude and less frequent than when using other harmony methods shift mode for example The benefit of this method is that it is very easy to integrate vocal harmonies into your songs if you already know their chord progressions The following lists the chords available with respect to the root of C Major C E G 6 C E G A Maj e E G B M7sus4 C F G B min C Eb G min6 C Eb G A min7 C Eb G Bb min7b5 C Eb Gb Bb dim C Eb Gb Bbb A 7 C E G Bb 7b5 C E Gb Bb aug C E G aug7 C E G Bb sus4 C F G sus2 C D G 7sus4 C F G Bb Voice Processor Harmony and Tuning with the Voice Processor 219 o v c Q i o tim Q cc 220 Voice Processor Harmony and Tuning with the Voice Processor Scale Scalic mode Harmonies use key and scale information to create musically correct diatonic harmon
420. nfirm the new name or Cancel to abandon all changes Selecting and saving Performances 4 Saving your settings to a Performance 4 Select a Bank and Performance location in memory where you would like to save the Performance Write Performance ai Piano To select the target Bank and TEMPONALVE Performance location select kg the Bank and Performance b 2 parameters and use the _ Cancel Dm d 2 TEMPO VALUE section N A zi 1 Grand Piano Ge D Set of banks 1 10 corresponds to the top row of Performances on the control panel Or 11 20 to the lower row PERFORMANCE SELECT Grand Piano eXp The selected Perfor cc ere nano uA UL highlighted Press a B Digi Uraan y Performance s name Grand Piano Grand Piano eXp D EEEERM e suu to select it SI rige emere Senes E Mocal Al Piano GE Note A Performance Deko Brass can be saved to an Empty location An OK Empty locations currently contains D no data Press one of the side tabs to Press one of the lower tabs to select a different Performance select a different Performance bank page 5 When you have changed the name to the Performance and selected the target location press OK to save the Performance to memory or cancel to stop the operation Write Performance A Warning Saving a Performance to an already used location overwrites any existing data at that location The old dat
421. ng the SHIFT button being pressed Style Play mode Up Down Original Tempo Opens the Write Performance window Upper Octave either together Global mode Global keep it Touch Panel Calibration pressed 298 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Power does not turn on Make sure that 1 the power cable is plugged into the outlet 2 the cable is plugged into the connector on the back of the instrument 3 and is not damaged 4 there are no problems with the mains Is the power switch turned ON If the power still does not turn on contact your dealer or the nearest KORG Service Center Is a jack connected to the HEADPHONES connector This would disable the internal speakers Is the Local parameter set to Off Turn it On Is the Speaker parameter set to Off Turn it On Is the Attack parameter value too high Set it to a lower value to let the sound start faster Is 89 96 the Volume parameter too low Set it to a higher value 23 23 23 203 208 UJ Lowest note are not played When the SPLIT button is lit up the keyboard will be divided into the Lower part low notes below the split point and the Upper part high notes above the split point Is the Lower track muted Unmute it Has one of the USER Drum Kits been modified Load the appropriate Drum Kits Wrong sounds Do the USER banks contain modified data Load the appropriate data for the Song or the Style 22
422. ng commands Sort by Type Name Genre Artist Key Tempo Meter Select one of these command to select the sorting order The selected option is shown in red above the entry list Enable List Edit Select this command and make the checkmark appear to make the List Edit page available Export as text file Select this command to open the Export dialog box and save the SongBook or Custom List as a text file The selected filtering will be applied to the exported list assuming the Filter button is checked The dialog box is a little different depending on the page where you selected this command Selected from the Book page Export as text file FEET iT Selected from the Custom List page Export as text file FEET iT Press the T Text Edit button to open the Text Edit window and assign a name to the text file to be saved to a storage device Then select either the internal SSD U memory or the hard disk to save the file e Press OK to confirm Q y c Q i Q te Q ec 170 Sequencer operating mode Transport controls Sequencer operating mode The Sequencer operating mode is the full featured onboard sequencer where you can create a Song from scratch or edit it You can also use this mode to edit the initial parameters of a Standard MIDI File either made with an external sequencer or with Pa800 s own sequencer You can save the new or edited Song as a Standard MIDI File SMF
423. ng the left P M PLAY STOP button or the START STOP button you can record a keyboard intro with no Style playing After a count in see Metro Metro nome on page 178 you can start recording Play a solo intro then start the auto accompaniment by pressing the START STOP button By pressing the START STOP button you can start the Style right at the beginning of the Song Since you can use any Style control you could start with the usual combinations INTRO ENDING FILL see Selecting and playing a Style on page 43 for more infor mation Note While in Backing Sequence mode you can t record the SYNCHRO TAP TEMPO RESET MANUAL BASS ACCOMPANIMENT VOLUME controls Play your music While recording you can even change the Style or stop it by pressing START STOP or one of the ENDINGs While recording you can even start the style again by pressing START STOP When finished recording your performance press the KI PLAY STOP button in the SEQUENCER 1 section You will go back to the Sequencer Play Main page see Sequencer Play Main page on page 170 At this point you may press the gt M PLAY STOP but ton in the SEQUENCER 1 section to listen to the new Song You may also edit the Song by pressing the MENU button see Edit menu on page 182 Save the song to a storage device see Save Song window on page 194 Warning The recorded Song is in RAM Random Access Memory and will b
424. ngBook entry When you select this entry the text file is automatically loaded Text files can be seen in the display and in an external monitor provided the VIF4 Video Interface has been installed Since there is no automatic synchronization between this kind of lyrics and the associated songs you must scroll them manually This can be accomplished in either of two ways e When a TXT file is selected a special vertical scrollbar appears in the Lyrics STS page of the SongBook mode Touch it to scroll through the text during the performance See Lyrics STS on page 168 Scrolling is also possible by means of the Text Page Down Up command that can be assigned to a Footswitch EC Switch or Assignable Switch This section of the Book Edit 2 page contains two buttons Reset Press this buttons to unlink the text file from the entry Browse Press this button to open a standard File Selector and select a TXT file to be linked to the current SongBook entry Song Selection Number SB Here you can select a unique number up to 9 999 to be associ ated to the current SongBook entry By typing this number after pressing the SONGBOOK button again you will be able to quickly recall an entry from the Book page see Numeric selec tion of entries on page 163 Assigning a number is not mandatory but may help you to orga nize your entries For example you can use the different 100s to create a different way of
425. nsion Extension Select one of the parts then use the TEMPO VALUE controls to modify it As an alternative you can play a chord and it will be automatically recognized While recognizing a chord the status of the BASS INVERSION button will be considered The lack of a chord means that the accompaniment will not play at the current position apart for the Drum and Percussion tracks To select the option select the Name part of the Chord parameter then use TEMPO VALUE controls to select the very last value C B Off Note If you replace a chord with a different one please remember that the Lower track if recorded will not be automatically changed and may cause a dissonance against the accompaniment Style Element This is the Style Element i e a Variation Fill Intro or Ending The length of the selected Style Element is always shown by the Length parameter see below Off means that the accompaniment will not play at the selected position only Keyboard and Pad tracks will play Hint Insert a Style Element Off event exactly where the automatic accompaniment must stop at the end of the Song Length This parameter will let you know where to place the following Style Element Change For example if you inserted an Intro event lasting for 4 measures you can insert 4 empty measure after this event and a Variation event at the end of the Intro beginning at the 4th empty measure Del De
426. nspose Position allows you to define the rela tion between the Scale and the Master Transpose Post KB Pre Scale When this option is selected notes will be trans posed immediately after they leave the keyboard The Scale will be applied to the transposed notes For example if you altered an E and then set the Master Transpose to 1 the E key will play E and the altered key will be EL that will play an altered E ToneL nm SH KEN NES Post KB amp Scale When this option is selected all notes are trans posed immediately before they enter the internal tone generator or are sent to the MIDI OUT but after the Scale For example if you altered an E and set the Master Transpose to 1 the altered key will still be E that will play an altered F Tone mnm EN een Ge General Controls Scale This page lets you select the main or basic scale of the instru ment GLOBAL General Controls L Equal Transp Inter Main Scale gt GBLS This parameter sets the main scale or temperament for the whole instrument apart for tracks where a different sub scale has been selected by a Performance or STS see Scale Mode on page 101 Style Play mode See Scales on page 289 for a list of available scales Note You cannot select a User scale in Global mode Key gt GBLA This parameter is needed by some scales to set the preferred key see Scales on page 289 General Controls Lock
427. nstrument with the Pa800 You can use the Pa800 as the master controller for your MIDI setup 1 Connect one of Pa800 MIDI OUT connectors to the other instrument s MIDI IN Ae Set the other instrument to the same channels you want to play from Pa800 For example if you wish to play the Upper 1 and Upper 2 tracks with sounds of the other instrument enable the other instrument to receive on the same channels Pa800 is transmitting from tracks Upper 1 and Upper 2 by default channels 1 and 2 A Set the master volume of the other instrument with its own volume controls P Mute unmute any track right from the Pa800 Adjust each track s volume by using Pa800 sliders Play the keyboard of the Pa800 Ge The Keyboard Pa800 s keyboard can drive up to four tracks via the MIDI OUT Upper 1 3 and Lower MIDI output channels are set in Global mode see MIDI MIDI Out Channels on page 205 As a default situation 1 Default MIDI Setup each of Pa800 Keyboard tracks transmit on the following channels Upper1 Upper2 Upper3 flower CON When a track is muted it cannot transmit any MIDI data to an external expander or sequencer connected Pa800 s MIDI OUT To hear only the expander s sounds you can lower the MASTER VOLUME control on the Pa800 or set the Keyboard tracks to the External status see Track Controls Mode on page 186 The Sequencer Any Sequencer s track can drive a channel on
428. nt notes of the chord T can be used as tension e 294 Recognized chords Minor Minor 6th 3 note 2 note 4 note E21 Tena P lm ee ol im Sim leie Minor 7th Minor Major 7th 4 note 3 note 4 note 3 note Du pr PE DI Sin jojo m giel lomo eim je BEIER Major 7th HM pg ejm o m Je Minor 7th s MEL ei lei Jm EE do ada 7th oe Major 7th TO nag UI gie sine sis je No 3rd No 3rd no 5th nan ni e constituent notes of the chord T can be used as tension Installing the Korg USB MIDI Driver Connecting the Pa800 to a personal computer 295 Installing the Korg USB MIDI Driver The USB Device port can be used to transfer MIDI d
429. nt target device by using the Device pop up menu When the target device is selected its content will appear in the display 5 Atthis point you can e Press the New SET button and create a new SET folder see Creating a new SET folder on page 231 or Select an existing SET folder and press Save to confirm Warning After confirming all data of the selected type in the target folder is deleted Saving a single bank You can save a single User bank with a single operation A bank corresponds to a button on the control panel of the instrument i e a button of the STYLE section Q V c Q i o Ser Q ec 230 Media edit mode Save 1 If saving to an external device connect the device to one of 7 A dialog box appears asking you to select one of the avail the USB Host ports able User or Favorite Style locations inside the folder 2 The full content All of the internal memory is already shown Select it and press Open to open it A list of User data types appear each type is a separate folder user 61 21 45 46 18 51 21 85 66 18 87 EN PERFORM 21 45 46 15 07 SONGBOOK 21 08 06 18 87 In the above dialog box the previously selected bank of Styles will be saved to the bank User 01 corresponding to the USERI button inside the selected folder Three User banks are available SOUND 21 45 46 15 07 a Prefer Copy Erase f Format f Utility ieee USE 8
430. nt track For example you may have a Chord Variation eight measures long with a drum pattern repeating each two measures If so set the CV Length parameter to 8 and the Rec o v c Q i o EM Q cc 110 Style Record mode Main page Record 1 Length parameter to 2 before starting recording the Drum track When playing back the Style saving it or executing any edit operation on the Style the 2 measures pattern will be extended to the full 8 measures length of the Chord Variation Warning If you assign CV Length a value lower than Rec Length the value of Rec Length is not immediately updated in the display Therefore you are still free of changing the value of CV Length before the measures exceeding its value are deleted see warning in CV Length Chord Variation Length below However if you press START STOP to begin recording the real Rec Length value is changed to the new one even if the display still shows the old value For example you may have CV Length 4 and Rec Length 4 If you set CV Length to 2 and press START STOP to begin recording Rec Length is still shown as 4 but it is in reality set to 2 and recording will cycle for just 2 measures After you press START STOP to stop recording Rec Length is updated to 2 and all measures after the second measure are deleted CV Length Chord Variation Length gt STYLE This parameter sets the total length up to 32 measures for the
431. nyon 1K 83 86 66 11 21 SONG PLAY HT na chord fio Canyon b Grand Piano Ex mo Meter 34d M up 3 11 88 86 18 18 MySun 3 3K H3 B8 B6 11 21 Motto amp 6 2K H3 BB8 B6 11 21 Pinball 13K H3 B8 B6 11 21 MIC IM LOWER UPPERS UPPER UPPER llame A tie f seate JL Pas Hame l 3 Keep the SHIFT button pressed and press any of the two gt E PLAY STOP buttons to start both Sequencers at the same time SEQUENCER 1 SELECT gt gt L KI p E 3 E E 3 SA AD 4 During playback move the SEQUENCER BALANCE slider to mix between the two Songs BALANCE 5 During playback you may control each Sequencer separately by using the dedicated Sequencer controls 6 Press the relevant M PLAY STOP button to stop the corresponding Sequencer O Hint You don t need to start both sequencers at the same time You can start the first Song then start the second one when the first one is near to the end This Way you can use the BALANCE slider to gently crossfade between the end of one Song and the beginning of the follow ing one 58 The SongBook Selecting the desired entry from the Main List The SongBook One of the most powerful features of the Pa800 is the onboard music database that allows you to organize your Styles and Songs in SMF and KAR format for easy retrieving Each entry of this data base may in
432. o am Dm o perse iano O DELLI oro 0 Piano abs Je wm 3 3 mets RS SR 7 Piano amp Strings 5 rar octave DW8000 EP Sweeping EP White Pad EP Grand amp MovingPad ro Emm Emm Emm Emm Emm Emm Emm PhantomTine feren Emm Emm Emm Emm so Emm A Piano Emm ap piano Pare A SS piano Piano 39 9 crendrieno mx reno eene Pen fv a o emaon fe 1 a e seror Piano o i CT CS v a 4 s wmm eo 3 1 WewPooW s hme v ia 5 S leen pae 34 i WBmemdi el O ff uw mme s 4 1 Paneer mo ie 2 7 leng Rame wn s EEE ring 38 3 7 9wsw e m o 2 EGwdPom GM mo Y a 7 lm Pme wm 1 2 EGw W s fe D ll 9m we wn 4 2 2000 tiene rio Dillerten ater pet 17 wn s 2 Gewfwe Mme LL seo CCE o wn s 2 Piano ayers ee ia 9 10 Manica ien 7 wm 7 2 L ns reno D ll nien Lm 5 froen Pam Y ia 9 ln Vibraphone ram beten 17 xm 1 3 CI Rae Y HL oH vb wide CCE y Gao 4 EMwmeio oe v mp 2 Loge beten m i 4 oenen tram v a 3 ln Vbepones varetas 121 EP1 Velocsw am 0 12 Marimba GM Mallet amp Bell 121 60 s E Piano A AZ Marimba Wide Mallet
433. o choose the routing of the Audio Input signal In to Voice Processor Input 1 goes to the Voice Processor while Input 2 is deactivated Inputs 1 and 2 go to the final mix together with the sounds generated by the Pa800 No Voice Pro cessor effects are applied In to Direct In 1 Input 1 may be routed to the Left output or to the Voice Proces sor depending on the status of the Input Routing parameter Ifthe selected routing is In to Voice Processor it is sent to the Voice Processor If the selected routing is In to Direct it is sent to the Left output In 2 Input 2 may be routed to the Right output or deactivated depending on the status of the Input Routing parameter If the selected routing is In to Voice Processor it is deacti vated Ifthe selected routing is In to Direct it is sent to the Right output Q Y c Q i Q Toes Q ec 208 Global edit mode Audio Output Metro Speakers Voice Processor Out gt GBLS Use this parameter to assign an audio output AUDIO OUTPUT section on the back of the instrument to the Voice Processor In 1 2 Out Non editable These output are fixed and cannot be changed Audio Output Metro Speakers This page lets you define various parameters for the Metronome and turn the Speakers on off GLOBAL Audio Setup Metronome Mode gt GBL Use this parameter to activate the metronome f
434. o execute the operation set in this page Track status icon Status of tracks Press this icon to change the status um Ces Track names Play status The track can be heard Mute status The track cannot be heard Under the buttons a label for each track is shown Copying to a Chord Variation of a different length You can copy a Chord Variation to a different one of a different length Just keep in mind the following e If the source length is a divider of the target length the source Chord Variation will be multiplied to fit the target Chord Variation For example if the source is 4 measures long and the target 8 measures the source will be copied two times fthe source length is not a divider of the target length the source Chord Variation will be copied for as many mea sures as can fit the target Chord Variation For example if the source is 6 measures long and the target 8 measures Style Record mode 123 Style Element Track Controls Sound Expression the source will be copied once then the first 2 measures will be copied to fit the remaining 2 measures 112 3 4 5 6 YA 1 j2 s 4 s e 1 2 Note Avoid copying to a Chord Variation with a different meter for example a 4 4 Chord Variation onto a 3 4 one Style Element Track Controls Sound Expression In this page you can assign a different Sound to each track of the selected Style Element Each Style Element can have different Sound
435. o quantize If you select the same note as the Bottom and Top parameters you can select a single percussive instrument in a Drum or Percussion track Style Record mode 119 Style Edit Quantize Note These parameters are available only when a Drum or Percus sion track is selected Execute Press this button to execute the operation set in this page Track status icon Status of tracks Press this icon to change the status Play status The track can be heard Track names Mute status The track cannot be heard Under the buttons a label for each track is shown Style Edit Transpose In this page you can transpose the selected track s Note After transposing please don t forget to readjust the Key Chord parameter in the main page of the Style Record mode see page 111 Ga Crum BASS ACC ACCS ALCA ACCS cat J ote n ET ea After setting the various parameters press Execute E CV Style Element Chord Variation Use these parameters to select the Style Element and Chord Vari ation for editing o V c Q i o Ser Q ec Track Use this parameter to select a track All All tracks selected apart for tracks set in Drum mode like the Drum and Percussion tracks The whole selected Chord Variation will be trans posed Drum Acc5 Single selected track Value Transpose value 127 semitones Start End Tick Use these parameters to set the starting and ending
436. o the previous page without selecting any Performance Bank sets Side tabs banks ees PERFORMANCE SELECT Grand Piano exp Cu A Diai 1 ELI Grand Piano Grand Piano eXp B IT ECH Lower tabs pages i Trumpet E ion E E GE Perfor mances Note Depending on the status of the Auto Performance Sound Select parameter see page 201 a Performance may be immedi ately selected when pressing one of the PERFORMANCE SELECT buttons The latest selected Performance for that bank will be selected Bank sets Selected set of banks top or bottom row of Performances Side tabs banks Use these tabs to select a bank of Performance Each tab corre sponds to one of the PERFORMANCE SELECT buttons on the control panel Lower tabs pages Use these tabs to select one of the available pages in the selected bank If you press again the same SOUND PERFORMANCE SELECT button on the control panel the next page in the same bank is selected This way you do not need to press one of the corre sponding tabs in the display in order to select a different page Performances Press one of these buttons in the display to select a Performance Unless the DISPLAY HOLD LED is turned on the window auto matically closes short after you select a Performance Style Select window Press the Style area whereas it appears in the display or one of the STYLE
437. ocation overwrite STYLE REC Edit current FERC BASS ACEi ACC ACCS ACCd ACCS Trans Delete Copy tm Cor Jes cot oes nt After setting the various parameters press Execute Note If you copy too many events on the same tick the Too many events message appears and the copy operation is aborted Note When you copy over an existing Chord Variation Program Change data is not copied to leave the original Sounds unchanged for that Chord Variation From Style Choose this option to select the source Style to copy the track Chord Variation or Style Element from Press the Select button to open the Style Select window and select the source Style From To E CV Style Element Chord Variation Use these parameters to select the source and target Style Ele ments or Chord Variations Note You can t copy from a Variation to a different Style Element or vice versa because of their different structure All All Style Elements i e the whole Style You can t change the target that is automatically set to All Varl End2 Single Style Element V1 CV1 E2 CV2 Single Chord Variation From To Track Use this parameter to select the source and target track to copy You can double a track to strengthen a pattern All All tracks of the selected Style Style Element or Chord Variation Drum Acc5 Single track of the selected Style Style Element or Chord Variation Execute Press this button t
438. odulation Damper Soft Pedal CC00 32 CC127 Single Control Change events Double Control Change numbers like 00 32 are MSB LSB bun dles Start End Tick Use these parameters to set the starting and ending points of the range to edit If you wish to select a four measure sequence starting at the beginning of the Song the Start will be positioned at 1 01 000 and the End at 5 01 000 Bottom Top Note Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard range to delete If you select the same note as the Bottom and Top parameters you can select a single note or a single percus sive instrument in a Drum track Note These parameters are available only when the All or Note options are selected Song Edit Copy Here you can copy tracks or phrases SEQUENCER Edit Ta Merge 12 Tal Taz TH Tad THS THE Tar Trans Cut After setting the various parameters press Execute to start the operation Note If you copy too many events on the same tick the Too many events message appears and the copy operation is aborted Mode Use this parameter to select the Copy mode Merge Copied data are merged with the data at the tar get position Overwrite Copied data replace all data at the target position Warning Deleted data cannot be recovered From Track To Track Use these parameters to select the source and target track to copy All All tracks The target track cannot be selected
439. of entries in a SongBook file is 3 000 entries Write Song o Jg c Q e Q ia Q ec 166 SongBook Book Edit 2 To assign a different name to the entry press the T Text Edit button to open the Text Edit window Select an option to add the new entry to the SongBook e Select Rename Overwrite to overwrite an existing entry optionally changing its name Warning The older entry will be deleted Select New Song to save a new entry to the SongBook data base Book Edit 2 The Book Edit 2 page is where you select Style options to be memorized link a TXT file and assign a unique number to the current entry SONGBOOK T B na chord B DA Unchanged L n sg Book Custom List Lyrics Edit 1 List Edit STS Synchro Start Synchro Stop Memory gt SB The status of these functions can be memorized in a SongBook entry Note If the SongBook entry is based on a Song Synchro Start and Synchro Stop appear in grey and cannot be modified since they have no effect on a Song Unchanged When selecting this SongBook entry the status of the corresponding function is left unchanged Off When selecting this SongBook entry the status of the corresponding function is turned off On When selecting this SongBook entry the status of the corresponding function is turned on Linked TXT SB You can select a text TXT file and link it to the Style or Song associated with the current So
440. of most Media pages Device pop up menu Device name About the SSD The SSD Solid State Disk is a non volatile memory whose content is preserved even after turning the instrument off It is divided in the following separate areas Factory PCM Factory supplied PCM Samples User PCM Up to 64 MB of imported or recorded PCM Samples Operating System and Musical Resources Styles Pads Sounds Performances STSs Multisamples and Global settings Includes the User and Favorite data User Area SSD U Area reserved to the user To be consid ered as a special type of hard disk SSD and the internal RAM memory System Area SSD S After turning the instrument on all data contained in the System area of the SSD Factory and User data are transferred to a RAM memory This memory is volatile and will be deleted when turning the instrument off Before turning the instrument off please remember to save any new or modified data like Songs or Samples Selecting and deselecting files While a file list is shown in the display you can select any item by touching it The selected item is highlighted You can deselect all items in any of the following ways Touch an empty area in the file list if available e Press the Device pop up icon and select the current device again File types The following tables describe all the file and folder types the Pa800 can manage Here are the files you can read
441. of the PADs Selecting and playing Styles 47 Adjusting balance between the Style and the keyboard Adjusting balance between the Style and the keyboard Balancing between the Keyboard and Style tracks may be useful to gently fade them and adjust their respective volume While the Style is playing use the BALANCE slider next to the MASTER VOLUME slider to balance between the Keyboard and Style volume BALANCE RT SEQ Adjusting volume of each single track You can adjust the volume of each of the Style and Keyboard tracks for example to soften the bass a little or to make the keyboard solo louder 1 Touch a track and use the TEMPO VALUE controls to change its volume The average volume of grouped Style tracks Drum Perc Accomp and Bass will not change when choosing a different Style no chord A UE o E d O In Normal view all Style tracks are seen as three grouped tracks Style tracks Keyboard tracks O Note Grouped Style tracks are Dr Perc Drum and Per cussion Accomp Accompaniment 1 5 Bass Bass 48 Selecting and playing Styles Turning Style tracks on off 2 To separately adjust each Style track press the TRACK SELECT button to change track s view TRACK SELECT o gt In Style view all sepa rate Style tracks are shown and can be controlled using the corresponding Assign able Sliders no chord i Trk Upper 1 Sweet
442. oft ware Your installation of this software will be taken to indicate your acceptance of this agreement Windows Installing the KORG USB MIDI Driver Please connect the Pa800 to the computer via an USB cable only after having installed the KORG USB MIDI Driver Tools Note You must install a separate driver for each USB port you will use 1 Insert the included CD into your CD ROM drive 2 Normally the KORG Pa800 Application Installer will start up automatically If your computer is set so that the installer does not run automatically double click KorgSetup exe on the CD a Please follow the installation instructions appearing on screen P Restart the computer and turn on the Pa800 Connect the Pa800 to the computer via an USB cable d Select the following command from the task bar to open the installation instructions Start gt all programs gt KORG gt KORG USB MIDI Driver Tools Installation manual e Select the following command from the task bar to open the installation program Start gt all programs gt KORG gt KORG USB MIDI Driver Tools gt Install KORG USB MIDI Device S Please follow the installation instructions appearing on screen to install the KORG USB MIDI Driver Driver s ports After installation the following ports will be shown in you MIDI application e g sequencer among the other MIDI devices PA800 KEYBOARD This allows for reception of
443. omatically assigned to the Song Note If a file is selected just touch the storage device name to dese lect 1t If a file has been selected in the display prior to pressing Save the name of the selected file will be automatically assigned to the Song In any of the above situations press the T Text Edit button to edit the Song name Warning If a file with the same name 1s already in the current directory a message will warn you If you confirm the existing file will be overwritten Select a file before saving only 1f you want to overwrite it 1 e in case you are saving changes to an existing file Empty measure at the beginning of the Standard MIDI File When saving a Song as an SMF an empty measure is automati cally inserted to the beginning of the Song This measure con tains various Song initialization parameters Play Mute status saved with the Song When saving a Song the Play Mute status is saved with the Song This status is preserved also when playing back the same Song in Song Play mode Master Transpose saved with the Song When saving a Song the Master Transpose value is saved with the Song Since this value is saved as System Exclusive data it is preserved also when playing back the Song in Song Play mode Hint Since the Master Transpose is a global parameter loading a Song with a non standard transposition may result in unwanted transposing when loading other Songs that do not contain their
444. on There are various types of MIDI accordions each one requiring different MIDI settings Pa800 is provided with a series of Accordion MIDI Setups each one suitable for a different MIDI accordion see page 203 Connection and settings To connect the accordion to the Pa800 follow this procedure 1 Connect the MIDI OUT connector of the accordion to one of the MIDI IN connectors of the Pa800 IN A suggested And Select the MIDI Setup parameter You can do this by going to the MIDI MIDI Setup General Controls page of the Global mode or in the dedicated page of the Style Play Song Play or Sequencer mode see Midi Setup on page 102 and Midi Setup on page 158 Note A different MIDI Setup may be selected for the Style Play Song Play and Sequencer modes The 1 Default MIDI Setup 1s automatically selected when entering the Sound Edit mode MIDI settings are therefore modified when switching to a different operating mode The current MIDI Setup is also shown in the Global mode as Select one of the available Accordion MIDI Setups Note Settings may change when new Global data is loaded from disk To protect settings from loading use the Global Protect function see Global Protect on page 235 5 To save the assigned MIDI Setup for the selected operative mode into the Global select the Write Global Style Setup the Write Global Song Play Setup the Write Global Seq Setup or
445. on gt PAD Tension adds notes a 9th 11th and or 13th that have actually been played even if they haven t been written in the Pad pattern This parameter specifies whether or not the Tension included in the recognized chord will be added to an Acc type track On The Tension will be added Off No Tension will be added o v c Q i o Ser Q cc 140 Pad Record mode Pad Chord Table Wrap Around gt PAD The wrap around point is the highest register limit for the Pad track The Pad pattern will be transposed according to the detected chord If the chord is too high the Pad track might play in a register that is too high and therefore unnatural If how ever it reaches the wrap around point it will be automatically transposed an octave lower The wrap around point can be individually set in semitone steps up to a maximum of 12 semitones relative to the chord root set in the main page of the Pad Record mode see Key Chord on page 134 1 12 Maximum transposition in semitones of the track referred to the original key of the Pad pat tern Pad Chord Table This is the page where you can assign a Chord Variation to each of the most important recognized chord When a chord is recog nized the assigned Chord Variation will be automatically selected by the arranger to play the Pad track PAD REC Chord Table Chord Chord Variation PAD Use these parameters to assign a Chord Variation to eac
446. on area STYLE Use these knobs to set the Expression CC 11 value for the cor responding track This value can be seen at the beginning of the Event Edit list see Event Edit Event Edit on page 116 Different Expression values can be defined for each Style Ele ment This way you can set a different volume in each Style Ele ment relative to the general Volume value set in the Style Header Volume area Use these controls to set the volume and status of each track See page 111 for more information The Volume value is the same for the whole Style Use the Expression controls to adjust the relative balance between tracks in each Style Element Style Element Track Controls Keyboard Range The Keyboard Range automatically transposes any pattern note that would otherwise play too high or too low in pitch com pared to the original acoustic instrument when transposed by the arranger This will result in a more natural sound for each accompaniment instrument For example the lower limit for a guitar is E2 If you play a chord under the E2 the transposed pattern could exceed this limit and sound unnatural A Bottom limit set to E2 for the guitar track will solve the problem Different Keyboard Range values can be set for each Style Ele ment STYLE REC SE Track Controls E Yarl zu Trk Drum buazz Kit RX B Drum amp Perc 128 006 033 Expr M Note The Keyboard Range is ignored while recording The selected
447. on is selected use this command to open the Copy Expression dialog box and copy all Expression values assigned to the current Style Element tracks to a different Style Element See Copy Expression dialog box on page 129 for more infor mation Copy Keyboard Range Only available in some edit pages While the Style Element Track Control edit section is selected use this command to open the Copy Keyboard Range dialog box and copy all Keyboard Range values for the current Style Element tracks to a different Style Element See Copy Key Range dialog box on page 129 for more infor mation o V c Q i o Ser Q cc 128 Style Record mode Write Style dialog box Copy Chord Table Only available while in the Style Element Chord Table page Select this command to open the Copy Chord Table dialog box see Copy Chord Table dialog box on page 129 Delete Current Track Only available in the Main Record pages Select this command to delete the selected track Overdub Step Recording Only available in the Main Record pages Select this command to open the Overdub Step recording window see Overdub Step Recording window on page 129 Solo Track Select the track to be soloed then check this item You will hear only the selected track and the Solo warning will flash on the page header Uncheck this item to exit the Solo function SHIFT Keep the SHIFT button pressed and touch one of the trac
448. on to enter the Text Edit dialog box Enter a name and confirm by selecting OK Select a target memory location where to save the Style The name of the Style already existing at the selected loca tion is shown after the Style Bank Location number Warning If you select an existing Style and confirm writing the older Style is deleted and replaced by the new one Save the Styles you don t want to lose to a storage device before overwriting them Press OK to save the Style to the internal memory or Can cel to delete any changes made in Style Record mode When the Are you sure message appears press OK to confirm or Cancel to go back to the Write Style dialog box Event Edit Filter This page is where you can select the event types to be shown in the Event Edit page STYLE REC Event Edit Turn On the filter for all event types you do not wish to see in the Event Edit page Note Some of the events are ghosted and non editable since the corresponding events are not editable in a Style Note RX Noise Notes and RX Noises Control Control Change events Only the following Con trol Change numbers are allowed with Styles CCH Control Change Number Control function Modulation 1 Modulation 2 Expression CC 12 CC 13 Damper Filter Resonance Low Pass Filter Cutoff CC 80 CC 81 CC 82 a Expression events cannot be inserted at the starting Position 001 01 000 An Exp
449. on to open the Style Play edit menu This menu gives access to the various Style Play edit sections When in the menu select an edit section or press EXIT or STYLE PLAY to exit the menu and return to the main page To return to the main page you can also select the Main Page menu item When in an edit page press EXIT or the STYLE PLAY button to return to the main page of the Style Play operating mode STYLE PLAY Menu E Each item in this menu corresponds to an edit section Each edit section groups various edit pages that may be selected by press ing the corresponding tab on the lower part of the display Edit page structure All edit pages share some basic elements Operating mode Edit section Page menu icon E NS STYLE PLAY Mixer 7 Tuning Trk Upper 1 b Grand Piano P Piano 121 883 8 Selected 1 track info Parameters area gt MIC IM LOWER UPPERS UPPER LFPER 4 FR EG Sub JE sens cum A contro Turina ZIL Tabs rr M Operating mode This indicates that the instrument is in Style Play mode Edit section This identifies the current edit section corresponding to one of the items of the edit menu see Edit menu on page 89 Page menu icon Press this icon to open the page menu see Page menu on page 103 89 Style Play operating mode Edit menu Parameters area Each page contains various parameters Use the tabs to select one of the available
450. ong The Backing Sequence Song has been converted to an ordinary Song If you like it you can save it to disk and read it in Song Play mode or with any external sequencer 6 To edit the Song press MENU to enter the Edit mode see instructions starting from page 182 O Note If you do not wish to start the Song with the Style playing you can simply start recording by pressing the P M PLAY STOP button in the SEQUENCER 1 section and start the Style only later The Style will start at the next beginning of the measure Recording a new Song 75 Second take recording Overdubbing Second take recording Overdubbing You may wish to re record and add one of the two grouped tracks or overwrite a bad recording with a new one Usually you will record all chord and Style Element changes during the first take and record Keyboard tracks and Pads during the second take 1 Press the RECORD button to enter Record again When the Song Record Mode Select dialog box appears select Backing Sequence Quick Record again NJ If you are recording just one of the grouped tracks set the track to be preserved to the Play mode c Chace EIDEN LA Repeat the recording process and press the lll PLAY STOP button in the SEQUENCER 1 section to stop recording and to return to the main page of the Sequencer mode I While in the main page of the Sequencer mode press the M PLAY STOP button
451. ong Directory This is the list of the selected device s content File status File size Type Hame 3 H6 H6 11 21 H3 H8 B6 11 21 H3 B8 B6 11 21 2 Type of the File or folder Modification file or folder name date Use the scrollbar to scroll the list items As an alternative you can select one of the items and use the TEMPO VALUE controls to scroll Keep the SHIFT button pressed and press DOWN or UP to jump to the previous or next alphabetical section Storage device Use this pop up menu to select one of the available storage devices where to save the Song SSD U User area of the internal SSD memory Hard disk optional USB F Device connected to the front USB Host port USB R Device connected to the rear USB Host port The actual name label of the device may appear within square brackets Open Opens the selected folder item whose icon looks like this Close Closes the current folder returning to the parent upper folder Sync P Synchronized Path Press this button to see the Song assigned to the Sequencer This is useful to quickly return to it after you have browsed through long directories and dug into different folders Save Press this button to open the Save Song dialog box and save the Song to the current directory Save Song Cancel If no file has been selected in the display prior to pressing Save the NewSong default name will be aut
452. ongBook entries can be selected via MIDI through the special Control channel by using the NRPN dedicated Control Change messages 99 MSB with value 2 and 98 LSB with value 64 See Selecting SongBook entries via MIDI on next page Setting the special Control MIDI channel First of all go to the Global gt MIDI gt Setup General Control page and select a MIDI Setup to be used when you will remotely select SongBook entries Then go to the Global gt MIDI gt Midi In Channel page to assign a MIDI channel to the special Control channel Assign the Con trol option to one of the sixteen available MIDI channels usu ally one of the higher numbered ones When done save this setting to the current MIDI Setup by choosing the Write Global Midi Setup command from the page menu If you plan to use a different MIDI channel for the Style Play and Song Play modes repeat the above to create a second MIDI Setup Assigning a MIDI Setup to the Style Play and Song Play modes Since SongBook entries dynamically recall the Style Play or the Song Play modes it is advisable to assign them the same MIDI Setup or two different MIDI Setups with the Control channel assigned to the same MIDI channel This way the same MIDI channel will be used to select a SongBook entry in either the Style Play or Song Play mode When one of the operating modes is recalled the MIDI Setup memorized in the Style Play Setup or in the Song Play Setup
453. ons e Send the following string to select SongBook entry 77 E w 1 e DS Ball 1 1 B E NAPA MSB NAPA LSE Initialization string CC 99 98 Thousands and hundreds 00xx Tens and units xx77 Send the following string to select SongBook entry 100 Initialization string CC 99 98 Thousands and hundreds 01xx Tens and units xx00 e Send the following string to select SongBook entry 8563 Data NAFN MSE 2 MAPA LSB Ed DataEnt MSE 85 DataEntL5B 63 Initialization string CC 99 98 Thousands and hundreds 85xx Tens and units xx63 Book Edit 1 The Book Edit 1 page is where you to add or modify SongBook entries Hint Use the Filter in the Book page to quickly find an entry to be edited The Book Edit 1 page with a Style based entry no chord Al e Custom Header Name SB Name of the selected song entry The name is assigned after you press the Write button to save the entry to the SongBook list Resource SB Style or Standard MIDI File associated with the saved entry Warning If you replace this resource with a different one carrying the same media path and name in case of a Standard MIDI File or memory location number in case of a Style the SongBook entry will no longer point to the right data Be careful not to delete or move a Style or a file associated with a SongBook entry from the original location Database Are
454. ontaining the type of data you are looking for and press Open to open the selected folder A list of User or Favorite Style banks appears ype Name Bal era zt Bal ustRez sTY Bal erno zy HE 23 09 06 22 27 24BK 23 48 06 22 27 348K 23 48 46 22 28 Zap open m Prefer Save Copy Erase f Format Utility nd 6 Select the bank you are looking for and press Open to open it A list of User or Favorite Style items appears 235 H6 H6 22 27 41 82 Standard 16 Beat 23 08 06 22 27 41 83 Kool Beat ze3 BHa B6 22 27 41 84 Guitar Beat 23 BHa B6 22 27 41 45 Easy Beat 1 25 H6 H6 22 27 Prefer Save Copy Erase f Format Utility ances USE 7 Select the item you are looking for and press Load to con firm the load A dialog box appears asking you to select one of the available User or Favorite Style locations in memory UG 1 61 empty In the dialog box above the previously selected Style will be loaded into location 01 of the bank U01 USERI button in memory The existing Style at the same memory location will be deleted and overwritten Empty locations are named empty 8 Select the target location and press OK to load the source file Warning After confirming the item you are overwriting in memory will be deleted Note If a Sound or Drum Kit based on external PCM sam ples is deleted choose the Delete command from the page menu of the Sampling mode to delete the unused
455. oose the Write Global Global Setup from the page menu Voice Processor Preset Upper 1 FXs When locked selecting a Performance or STS will not change the Voice Processor Preset See VP Preset on page 87 In Sound mode you can assign a Sound two effects FX1 and FX2 When you assign a new Sound to the Upper 1 track the FX1 and FX2 set tings saved with that Sound can be automatically selected overriding Performance STS settings for this track Whether Sound or Performance STS effect parameters will be considered depends on the status of this lock If the Upper 1 FX Lock is turned on when assigning a new Sound to the Upper 1 track Per formance STS parameters are left untouched selected effects and FX Send values are not changed If the Upper 1 FX Lock is turned off when assigning a new Sound to the Upper 1 track Sound parameters are considered selected effects and FX Send values are changed accord ing to the Sound s stored data Note If effects associated to the selected Sound are not compatible with effects already assigned to the CD FX block C and or D Send values on the other Keyboard tracks will be automatically set to zero For example assume a chorus effect is assigned to the D effect processor If the new Sound assigns a distortion effect to the D effect processor the D Send value on the Upper 2 Upper 3 and Lower tracks will be set to zero to avoid these tracks sound in the
456. or a full fade out from maximum volume to zero after you press the FADE IN OUT button 5 20 Fade time in seconds Accelerando Ritardando These parameters lets you adjust the speed of the Accelerando and Ritardando functions Step Speed of the Tempo change from 1 to 6 With higher values the step change is greater and the speed will change faster With lower values the step change is smaller and the speed will change more slowly Curve Accelerando ritardando curves from 1 to 3 Experiment the various options to see the one that best fit your taste Glide Glide is a function you can assign to a footswitch When the pedal is pressed affected notes on Upper tracks are bent down according to settings for the Pitch Bend on the same tracks When the pedal is released notes return to the normal pitch at the speed defined by the Time parameter To change Pitch Bend values for each Upper track see the PB Sensitivity parameter in the Style Play mode see page 92 Time Time needed to notes affected by the Glide to return to the nor mal pitch Q V c Q i o Ser Q cc 198 Global edit mode General Controls Transpose Control General Controls Transpose Control This page is where you can select to which tracks the Master Transpose is applied to and adjust some related parameter GLOBAL General Controls Hint When playing the keyboard while a Song is running 1f you
457. or the Style Play and or Song play operating modes Off No metronome is heard Style The metronome is always activated when playing a Style Song The metronome is always activated when playing a Song Style Song The metronome is always activated when playing a Style or Song Volume gt GBL Use this parameter to set the volume of the metronome Click Out gt GBL amp The metronomes click can be routed to any audio output Hint When sending the click to your drum player we suggest to select one of the sub outs Out 1 and 2 to avoid it is sent to the audi ence through the Left Right outputs Note The selected Metronome Mode must not be Off in order for the click to be sent to an audio output during playback See Tracks on page 206 for detailed information on the avail able outputs Speakers Speakers On Off gt GBL Use this checkbox to turn speakers on or off This option is use ful when the instrument is connected to an external amplifica tion system and you don t need the speakers Voice Processor sections Setup and Preset See the relevant Voice Processor chapter starting from page 212 Global edit mode 209 Video Interface Video Out PP Video Interface Video Out Touch Panel Calibration If your Pa800 is fitted with a Video Interface Board VIF4 use From time to time for example after loading a new operating this page to adjust its parameters system calibr
458. or write with the Pa800 File folder type All the User data This is a folder containing other folders Backup file created with the Full Resource Backup function of the Disk gt Utility page This is a folder containing other folders Extension mw SongBook SongBook s Custom List Midi file Standard MIDI File SMF Pa800 can also read but not write the following types of data Extension LN Media edit mode File types 223 Media structure Each device and the internal memory can contain files and folders Data in the Pa800 is slightly more rigidly structured than in a computer due to the pre configured type of data inside the instruments memory The diagram below shows the global structure of a Pa800 device Note Style banks from 1 to 17 Factory Styles can be seen in Media mode only when the Factory Style and Pad Protect parameter is set to Off see page 235 and only when loading or saving a single Style bank MYDIR SET GLOBAL El SETUP GBL El VPPRESET VOC SOUND USERO1 PCG E 1 Piano 1 PERFORM BANKO1 PRF El F 128 SynBrass22 STYLE Cent E 1 1 Grand Piano i ences T PRIEST E 1 SopranoSax E 1 Favorite 1 El BANKO2 PRF So E 2 1 Jazz B E 128 Noise F 32 Favorite 32 E 2 1 Jazz Brass E FAVORITE STY 3 2 8 Jazz Strings USERDK PCG E 1 Favorite 1 E 1 Standard Kit E avorite BANK PRF E A EI 32 F te 32 E 64 Orc
459. ord Recognition Mode gt PERF vers itl This parameter defines how chords are recognized by the auto accompaniment engine Please note that when in Full or Upper Chord Scanning mode the Fingered 3 mode is always selected and you must always play at least three notes to let a chord be recognized Note This parameter is the same you can find in the main page see Split panel on page 88 Fingered1 Play one or more notes according to the selected Chord Scanning Mode A full Major chord will be recognized even if only a single note is played Fingered2 You must always play two or more notes for a chord to be recognized If you play just one note a unison will be played If you play a suspended chord a root 5th a suspended chord will be played The full chord will be recognized when you play three or more notes Fingered 3 You must always play three or more notes for a chord to be recognized This option is automati cally selected when selecting the FULL Chord Scanning mode One Finger You can also compose a chord using a simplified chord playing technique f you play only one note a Major chord is rec ognized Play the root note plus a white key on the left for a 7th For example play C3 4 B2 for a C7 Play the root note plus a black key on the left for a Minor chord For example play C3 Bb2 for a C minor Play the root note plus a white and a black key on the left for a Minor 7th For
460. ormance PERF or Single Touch Setting STS Press the name to open the Performance Select window see Performance Select window on page 78 As an alternative use the PERFORMANCE SOUND SELECT section to select a dif ferent Performance To select a different STS use the four SINGLE TOUCH SET TING buttons under the display Keyboard tracks area This is where Keyboard tracks are shown Sound Track name quad Sound bank s icon Track status Track s octave transpose Sound name gt PERF STS Name of the Sound assigned to the corresponding Keyboard track If the track is already selected white background press the Sound name to open the Sound Select window f the track is not selected dark background first select it then press the Sound name to open the Sound Select window For more information about the Sound Select window see Sound Select window on page 78 Keyboard track octave transpose PERF STS Non editable Octave transpose of the corresponding track To individually edit the octave transpose for each track go to the Mixer Tuning Tuning edit page see page 92 You can also transpose all Upper tracks by using the UPPER OCTAVE buttons on the control panel Bass amp Lower Backing icon gt GBL Y When the Bass amp Lower Backing function is EACEIMG active the Backing icon appears in the Lower track Sound area see Bass amp Lower Backing on page 102
461. ormation on the event types and their val ues see Event Edit Event Edit on page 116 Edit the event Select the M parameter Use TEMPO VALUE controls to change the event s position Select the Type parameter You may use TEMPO VALUE controls to change the event type as well as its Value 1 and Value 2 If a Note event is selected select the Length parameter and use TEMPO VALUE controls to change the event s length You may use the Go Meas command to go to a different measure see Go Meas on page 117 As described in step 4 you may press START STOP to lis ten how the pattern sounds after your changes Press START STOP again to stop the pattern running Press the Insert button in the display to insert an event at the Position shown in the display a Note event with default values will be inserted Press the Delete button in the dis play to delete the selected event When editing is complete you may select a different track to edit go to step 7 When finished editing the selected Chord Variation press EXIT to go back to the main page of the Style Record mode then go to step 2 to select and edit a different Chord Variation When finished editing the whole Style select the Write Style command from the page menu to open the Write Style dialog box see Write Style dialog box on page 128 or select the Exit from Record command to cancel all changes Press the T Text Edit butt
462. ory contains type All All the User data in memory The USER 01 03 Styles and the FAVORITE 01 10 Styles The USER Sounds and Drum Kits Perform Per The Performances formances SongBook PCM Global The SongBook database All the Multisamples contained in the SSD and the Samples con tained in RAM The Global All parame ters marked with gt GBL through the various chapters are saved in the Global Voice Processor presets are saved too A STYLE folder inside a SET folder A SOUNDS folder inside a SET folder A PAD folder inside the SET folder A PERFORM folder inside a SET folder A SONGBOOK folder inside a SET folder A PCM folder inside a SET folder A GLOBAL folder inside a SET folder A VOC file will be cre ated inside the GLO BAL folder containing Voice Processor pre sets Saving the full memory content You can save the full memory content with a single operation 1 If saving to an external device connect the device to one of the USB Host ports 2 The full content All of the internal memory is already shown Select it and press Save to confirm the selection The list of files in the target device is shown ype Mame 0 Backup 0 more SET MYSHOW SET 4 88 06 11 14 11 85 86 18 18 44 88 86 11 88 3 If needed select a different target device by using the Device pop up menu When the target device is selected its content will appea
463. ost port USB R Device connected to the rear USB Host port The actual name label of the device may appear within square brackets Open Opens the selected folder item whose icon looks like this one I Close Closes the current folder returning to the parent upper folder Sync P Synchronized Path Press this button to see the Song assigned to the selected Sequencer This is useful to quickly return to it after you have browsed through long directories and dug into different fold ers Select Selects the highlighted item in the display If a Song is already playing it stops and the new Song is ready to play You are returned to the main page Play All When this button is pressed all midifiles contained in the cur rent directory are added to a new Jukebox list that is automati cally assigned to Sequencer 1 The order in which they are played depends on the current sorting method i e how the files are shown in the display You can use this Jukebox list as any other list of this type De start the playback with SEQ1 PLAY STOP jump to the next Song in the list with SHIFT gt gt edit it in the Jukebox page Note A Jukebox list can include up to 127 Songs If your folder con tains more items only the first 127 will be considered Hint If you don t want to lose the list when turning the instrument off go to the Jukebox page and save it to disk as a JBX file Selecting
464. ove a device or move the instrument while the device is operating e Make a backup copy of the data contained in a device in order not to lose data forever in case of damage You can backup your data to a personal computer and from there to a CD or DVD The internal SSD U and optional hard disk can be backed up on a personal computer s hard disk by using the USB Device connection e Do not leave a USB device connected to the USB ports while carrying the instrument or 1t may be damaged e Keep the memory devices or the instrument away from sources of magnetic fields for example televisions refriger ators computers monitors speakers and transformers Magnetic fields can alter the contents of the devices Do not keep memory devices in very hot or wet places do not expose them to direct sunlight and do not store them without use in dusty or dirty places Do not place heavy objects on top of the devices Possible problems e Magnetic fields dirt humidity and usage can damage data in a device You can try to recover the data with disk repair utilities for personal computers It is however advisable to always make a backup copy of your data Media edit mode Care of mass storage devices 239 Bonus software With Pa800 three SET folders are supplied with the Accessory CD with the whole content of Korg s Real Drums and Turk ish Arabic World collections originally available as separat
465. own transposition data To transpose a Song it 1s advisable to use the Transpose function in the Edit section of the Sequencer mode see Song Edit Transpose on page 189 You may also lock the Master Transpose to avoid unwanted trans position See General Controls Lock on page 199 of the Global chapter As a general rule you should use the Master Transpose TRANS POSE buttons on the control panel when you need to transpose Keyboard tracks together with the Song You should use the Edit mode Transpose function see Song Edit Transpose on page 189 when only the Song has to be transposed Note The Master Transpose value is always shown on the page header SEQUENCER T 8 Sequencer operating mode 195 Save Song window Save Song procedure 1 If you are in Record mode stop the sequencer and exit from the Record mode Then go back to the main page of the Sequencer Play mode see Sequencer Play Main page on page 170 2 Select the Save Song command from the page menu The Save Song page appears 3 Select the folder where you want to save the Song into Use the Open and Close commands to browse open or close folders Use the scrollbar to browse through the files 4 When you are in the directory where you want to save your Song to press the Save button in the display To overwrite an existing file select it before pressing Save To create a new file do not select any file before pres
466. pe FX Amount PERF PERF STS Volume of the effect that is added to the dry uneffected signal Src Source MPERF PERF STS STSS Modulation source To select the track generating this message see the Mod Track Modulating Track parameters found in the Effects FX Select page see above For a list of modulation source see the Advanced Edit addendum in the Accessory CD Track Controls Mode This page lets you connect each track to the internal sound gen erator and to external MIDI devices This is very useful to let a Style track drive an external expander or play a digital piano with one of Pa800 s Keyboard tracks In addition here you can set the polyphony mode for each track STYLE PLAT Track Controls SS Trk Upper 1 amp Grand Piano E Piano 121 883 888 STYLE PLAY Track Controls Trk Upper 1 Grand Piano E Piana 121 883 888 Int Ext Internal External PERF PERF sTS Internal The track plays the sounds generated by the internal sound engine It does not play an exter nal instrument connected to the MIDI OUT External The track plays an external instrument connected to the MIDI OUT The connected device must receive on the MIDI channel associated with this track on the Pa800 see MIDI MIDI Out Chan nels on page 205 A track set to this status does not play the internal sounds therefore saving polyphony Instead of the assigned Sound name the lt E aa
467. pter in the User s manual Edit menu When pressing the MENU button while in Pad Record mode the Pad Record Edit Menu will appear PAD RECORD Menu Main Page Pad Track Event Edit Controls Pad Edit Pad Chord Table Import Export SMF Note The Pad Edit pages are a simplified version of the Style Edit pages See the User s manual for information on the various parameters Note While the Pad is in play you cannot access the Edit section pages from the main page see page 132 Stop the playback before pressing MENU Note When switching from the Edit section pages Quantize Transpose Velocity Delete to the other pages or vice versa the Pad if in play is automatically stopped Edit page structure Most edit pages share some basic elements Operating mode Edit section Page menu icon PAD REC Track Controls Pad track info Fad Type Keyboard Range Bottom Top D ni Expression Trigger Mode Tension Parameters e area _ TrackT ype 3 D EA MOL UE Tabs Other pages exhibit a slightly different structure Operating mode Edit section Page menu icon AAA A PAD REC Pad Edit Parameters area Trans x Delete Copy fm Copy fm Tabs TE O Operating mode This indicates that the instrument is in Pad Record mode Edit section This identifies the current edit section corresponding to one of the items of the edit menu see Edit menu on page 134 Page menu icon Pr
468. quence Quick Recording 1 Press SEQUENCER to enter the Song mode 2 Press the RECORD button and select the Backing Sequence Quick Record option to enter the Backing Sequence Quick Record mode Now you can prepare your recording parameters For more details see Record mode Backing Sequence Quick Record page on page 177 3 The latest selected Style is currently selected If it is not the right one select a different Style to start recording with See Style Select window on page 79 4 The latest selected Performance or STS is currently selected If you prefer select a different Performance or SIS See Performance Select window on page 78 and STS Select on page 80 5 Select the status of the Backing Sequence grouped tracks using the Kbd Pad and Ch Acc parameters Kbd Pad stays for Keyboard and Pads Ch Acc stays for Chord and Accompaniment i e the Style tracks To record all you play on the keyboard plus the automatic accompaniment leave their status to Rec see Track status icons on page 174 Warning lracks set to REC are automatically overwritten when starting recording Set a track to the PLAY or MUTE status when you don t want to delete it For example if you are recording a keyboard part on an existing Style track set the Ch Acc parameter to PLAY and the Kbd Pad track to REC 6 Start recording by pressing the left KR PLAY STOP button or the START STOP button By pressi
469. quence recording mode by press ing the Done button in the display 6 Press P ll PLAY STOP in the SEQUENCER 1 section to listen to the consequence of your editing If they are fine save the Song to a storage device o Jg c Q i o tim Q cc 182 Sequencer operating mode Edit menu Edit menu From any page press the MENU button to open the Sequencer edit menu This menu gives access to the various Sequencer edit sections When in the menu select an edit section or press EXIT to exit the menu When in an edit page press EXIT or the SEQUENCER button to go back to the main page of the Sequencer operating mode SEQUENCER Menu Each item in this menu corresponds to an edit section Each edit section groups various edit pages that may be selected by press ing the corresponding tab on the lower part of the display Edit page structure All edit pages share some basic elements Operating mode Edit section Page menu icon AAA AAN SEQUENCER Mixer Tuning Trk S1Tr81 b Grand Piano B Piano 171 003 0 Selected track info Parameters area FR 5 2 F P F E F P F 2 Md N TAL THe Tas T d Tas THE Tar TAS 4 FR EG EG Sub JI sens b can costa Tunina sue L Tabs i n dd Operating mode This indicates that the instrument is in Sequencer mode Edit section This identifies the current edit section corresponding to one of the items of the edit menu see Edit
470. quencer 2 Warning If both sequencers are generating notes at the same time the harmonizer will receive notes from both sequencers Be warned that notes are sent to the harmonizer even when the SEQUENCER BALANCE slider is totally moved away from a gen erating sequencer and may interfere with the Song you are listening to Global Chords are sent from the Chord Scanning area of the keyboard Preferences General Control In this page you can set various general parameters SONG PLAY SE01 Preferences E Note These settings are stored in the Song Play Setup area of the Global file together with all the other parameters marked with the gt GBL abbreviation through the manual After changing these settings select the Write Global Song Play Setup command from the page menu to save them to the Global Midi Setup gt GBLS MIDI channels for the Song Play mode can be automatically configured by selecting a MIDI Setup with this parameter See MIDI on page 240 for more information on using MIDI Set ups Note To automatically select a MIDI Setup when entering the Song Play mode select the Write Global Song Play Setup command from the page menu For detailed information on MIDI Setup settings see MIDI Setup on page 285 Note After selecting a MIDI Setup you can go to the Global mode and apply any change to each channel setting To store these changes to a MIDI Setup while still in Global mode sele
471. r 3 wrjenxer ECN wrjensen e ws meneen mies NC 7 8 9 0 2 3 4 5 6 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 278 Factory data Drum Samples A e fs ss mni ICI on IO AECI oe mem ANC rae able sw CTI CIN sm Telephone ning f e sz pesenesed e ss erketpecrum CI sw wwe CIN ws News a ws wie Fed 8 sm CI 8 sn CT CIN bart 8 a3 frenos sw CTN 8 ws pesa CIN e CI mre CIN ws CET CIN MEN CET CIN MEN CI 8 9m fere 8 o fne 9s ferao 8 sw monnen CIN kel Factory data 9709 Performances Performances All Performances are user editable Use the following table as a model for your own Perfomance lists Note You can remotely select Performances on the Pa800 by sending it Bank Select MSB CC 0 Bank Select LSB CC 32 and Program Change messages on the Control channel see MIDI MIDI In Channels on page 204 DEIA AI DIC ET E FR ES E dA TEA G lesen Pe Pe l O IA A NENNEN NENNEN Er ES a 11 20 S SR CO Kl KE BE IS Si A MN A Lp 1 SR WE E EA td EX NN NENNEN a i A RN TI TI Daf S 1 Kl A TI C 1 EA Bd NENNEN KS NENNEN el BS EG NEN NENNEN NENNEN NENNEN El EJ RSEN o D BE LIMEN Md ee E cl El MG GE D Jj Kd m CA PE ea AA E Banke Pee e Cate te er nes KS E d WE C ef DO OS NENNEN E RD EA RID D BEL 3 3 3 3 ES TI TI WR E LL ai II Bt Aro ES A A TI i
472. r or Close to close it 8 Once the target is selected press Copy If a file or folder with the same name of the source data already exists at the target location the Overwrite dialog box will appear see Overwriting existing files or folders below Multiple file selection While in the Copy and Erase pages of the Media mode you can select several files or folders at the same time before executing the operation Files or folders can be selected consecutively 1 e in a row or discontinuously i e with other files or folders in the middle To choose either to select files in a consecutive or discontinue way use the Mode button on the right of the page command buttons to choose an option for the SHIFT button Choose this option to select files or folders con secutively i e in a row Fe Choose this option to select files or folders dis m sts g Gergen continuously i e with other files or folders in the middle To select more files or folders consecutively 1 Press the Mode button to choose the option for the SHIFT button 2 Select the first file or folder to be selected 3 Press and keep the SHIFT button pressed 4 Select the last file or folder to be selected 5 Release the SHIFT button To select more files or folders discontinuously 1 Press the Mode button to choose the option for the SHIFT button Select the first file or folder to be selected Press and keep the SHI
473. r Gender Voice Processor Voice Processor Preset Harmony 215 Note For this to work a value other than zero must be assigned to the Pitch Bend Range in the Voice Processor Setup Setup page see page 212 Portamento gt GBL P This is defined in milliseconds as the time to reach a target note when a harmony voice needs to change pitch Note Octave Transpose gt GBL This transposes the harmony voices in Notes mode see Har mony Mode on page 215 The value corresponds to octaves 4 This is useful when used in conjunction with In Note Range High and In Note Range Low parameters see page 204 When receiving notes from MIDI this value is summed to the value of the Octave Transpose In parameter found in the MIDI MIDI In Control page see page 204 Harmony Note Input In Style Play and Song Play mode when the Harmony track is set to Global the Voice Processor s Harmony module can receive notes and chords from a source different than the Arranger s Chord Scanning area This way you can continue sending chords to the Arranger with your left hand while for example sending chords or notes to the Harmony module with your right hand Source gt GBL Pr This parameter allows you to select a source of notes for the Har mony module of the Voice Processor Note When the Chord Harmony Mode is selected only the Chord Scanning option 1s available See above
474. r in the display 4 At this point you can Press the New SET button and create a new SET folder see Creating a new SET folder on page 231 or Select an existing SET folder 5 Press Save to confirm A dialog box appears asking you to select the type of data to save Save All User Data m In the above dialog box check all data type you wish to save to a storage device 6 Press OK to confirm or Cancel to abort Warning After confirming all data of the selected type in the target folder is deleted Media edit mode Save 229 Saving all data of a specified type In addition to the above you can save all data of a specified type by selecting the corresponding folder 1 If saving to an external device connect the device to one of the USB Host ports 2 The full content All of the internal memory is already shown Select it and press Open to open it A list of User data types appear each type is a separate folder 21 85 46 18 51 21 45 46 18 87 PERFORM 21 45 46 15 07 SONGBOOK 21 45 46 18 87 p SOUND op Prefer Copy Erase f Format f Utility ences USE 3 Select the folder containing the type of data you wish to save and press Save To to confirm the selection The list of files of the target device is shown ype Fame 7 BACKLIP BE MIDIFILE SET MYSHOW SET B4 Ba B6 11 14 11 45 46 18 18 B4 Ba a6 11 88 4 If needed select a differe
475. rS y S S Factory Styles Up to 544 locations Preloaded Styles 419 User Styles 96 User 320 Favorite all 960 styles are re writable Arranger Tracks Style Edit Record amp Edit functions Patterns Chord Variations Up to 42 patterns for each style including 3 Intros 3 Endings 3 Fills Style Performance STS Up to 960 x 4 Real time tracks Acc tracks all programmable PCM Style Grooves Using the internal PCM RAM memory Un m e m 5 S Separate transport controls for each Sequencer Balance Slider In SongBook Mode 16 16 Record amp Edit functions Real Time Record Step Record amp Edit Tracks Sequencer Edit Backing Sequence Quick Record Lyrics Chords OTHER FEATURES Aix vol D du U olo lt ojo aj D Slu 0 S 2 SE D 7j5 D A n o O en 5 Q On Screen compatible with most popular formats Voice technology by TC Helicon 3 Parts Harmony Reverb Delay Compressor Eq Fully Programmable Programmable 4 Stop button i Series Styles Pa series Style Perf Sound Song Song Book OPOS Multitasking System Load while playing Upgradable 256 MB for O S PCM and all Resources Yes 2 slots 1 Host Rear 1 Host Front Optional with Hard Disk Installation Kit 2 x 22 W Loudness Fixed Eq Internal SSD Flash memory USB for Memory Devices Hard Disk 4 Speakers 10 cm Woofer Tweeter 2 way Bass Reflex Box L CH L ez olelslsisls o 3 O l5 ol oO o3 olal
476. rack volume is automatically set to its maximum value The volume 1s automatically set back to the original value when the MANUAL BASS button is deactivated On The automatic accompaniment stops playing apart for the Drum and Percussion tracks and you can manually play the Bass track on the Lower part of the keyboard You can start the automatic accompaniment again by pressing one of the CHORD SCANNING buttons Off The bass track is automatically played by the Style STYLE SELECT section gt PERF Use these buttons to open the Style Select window and select a Style See Style Select window on page 79 The leftmost button lets you select the upper or lower row of Style banks or the Favorite Style banks Press it repeatedly to select one of the rows After both LEDs have turned on press the button again to turn them off Upper LED On Upper row Styles selected These are ten factory programmed banks Lower LED On Lower row Styles selected These are seven factory pro grammed banks plus three user programmed banks Both LEDs On RIIT Styles selected These are custom made banks A word about Style banks and names Styles in banks from 8BEAT 16 BEAT to WORLD 2 and from LATIN to CON TEMP are standard Styles the user can t normally overwrite with a Load operation unless you remove the protection see Factory Style and Pad Protect on page 235 Styles in banks from USER1 to
477. rack cannot be heard How to adjust sound parameters for a sin gle Sound Here is a quick example of the use of the Easy Sound Edit func tion 1 If needed while in this page press TRACK SELECT to see Keyboard tracks 2 Press the Select button in the display above the Upper 1 track 3 While playing on the keyboard to hear the Sound select the Cutoff knob and use TEMPO VALUE controls to turn its value completely off You ll notice how the filter progressively cuts out high fre quencies making the sound darker and mellower 4 Press the Reset Track button in the display to recall the original Cutoff value Keyboard Ensemble Keyboard Control This page lets you enable disable the Damper and Expression pedals plus the Joystick for each of the Keyboard tracks STYLE PLAY Keyboard Ensemble E Trk Upper 1 Grand Piano E Piana 121 883 888 LET TALI WIR SS Joystick X E u a Yu Joystick Y Y E o ra MIC IM LOWER UPPERS UPPER2 UPPERL Damper PERF STS On When you press the Damper pedal and release the keys the track s sound is kept sustained Off The Damper pedal is not active on any track set to this status Joystick X PERF STS This enables disables the left right movement of the Joystick Pitch Bend and sometimes a Sound parameter s control for Pitch Bend settings see Mixer Tuning Tuning on page 92 Joystick Y PERF STS This enables disables the front r
478. rack only plays the Ensemble notes but not the original note Play Mute icon PERF STS Track s play mute status Play status The track can be heard Mute status The track cannot be heard Style Controls Drum Fill In this page you can select various general parameters for the Style STYLE PLAY Controls Trk Upper 1 b Grand Piano E Piana 121 883 888 Drum Mapping Var 1 Var 4 PERF gt PERF The Drum Mapping lets you select an alternative arrangement of percussive instruments for the selected Drum Kit without any additional programming Just select a Drum Map and some percussive instruments will be replaced with different instru ments Off Standard mapping Drum Mapping 1 7 Drum Map number Mapping 1 is soft sound ing while mapping 7 is loud sounding Kick and Snare Designation gt PERF gt PERFSY The Kick Designation replaces the original Kick Bass Drum sound with a different Kick of the same Drum Kit while the Snare Designation replaces the original Snare Drum sound with a different Snare of the same Drum Kit Hint Select different Designations while listening to the Style and see how they affect the Style When you like the result save your setting to a Performance or Style Performance Off Original Kick or Snare Type 1 3 Kick or Snare replacing the original one gt PERF gt PERFSY ii These parameters set a Variation to be automatically selected at the end of ea
479. ransposition Table gt STYLE The Note Transposition Table NTT determines how the arranger will transpose pattern notes when a chord is recog nized that does not exactly match the original chord of a Chord Variation For example if you only recorded a Chord Variation for the CMaj chord when a CMaj7 is recognized on the key board the arranger must transpose some notes to create the missing 7th Note To conform to Korg specifications it is advisable to set the NTT to No Transpose on the Intro 1 and Ending 1 Root The root note in CMaj C is transposed to the missing notes Fifth The 5th note in CMaj G is transposed to the missing notes i Series All original patterns must be programmed on the Maj7 or min7 chords When loading old Korg i Series Styles this option is automatically selected NoTrnsp No transposition applied The pattern will always play as recorded This is the standard setting of Intro 1 and Ending 1 in Korg s original Styles As recorded with NTT Root or 5th When you playaCM7 When you play a CM7 Key Chord CMaj with NTT Root with NTT 5th A ED Mati As recorded with NTT i Series When you play a CMaj When you play a C7 Key Chord 2 CM7 with NTT i Series with NTT z i Series DDT GUMHI 00 Selected track info area This line lets you see the Sound assigned to the selected track Trk Drum t Stand K IT3 B Drum amp Perc 124 088 802 Track name Sound bank Soun
480. rd sequencers at the same time Chord Use this channel to send notes recognized by the Chord Recognition engine to the MIDI OUT This is useful for example to control an external Harmonizer from the Pa800 using the Lower track to play chords even if the track is muted MIDI Filters Use this page to set up to 8 filters for the MIDI data received or sent by the Pa800 GLOBAL n LI Setup Midi In Midi In f Midi ovt Gen Ctl E Control E Channel A Channel A Midi In Filters gt GBLM Selected MIDI IN filters Off No filter Pitch Bend Pitch Bend MonoTouch Mono or Channel After Touch PolyTouch Poly After Touch PrgChange Program Change SysExcl System Exclusive All CC All Control Change messages 0 127 Control Change message 0 127 See MIDI Data on page 290 for a list of available Control Change messages Midi Out Filters gt GBLMid Selected MIDI OUT filters See above for information on each filter type o v c Q i o tia Q cc 206 Global edit mode Audio Output Sty Kbd Audio Output Sty Kbd This page lets you connect Style Keyboard and Pad tracks to the audio outputs GLOBAL Audio Setup Li Left Right Tracks gt GBLCb Use these parameters to assign an audio output OUTPUT sec tion on the back of the instrument to each track Left Right The selected track is connected to the Left amp Right outs in stereo The track is also sent
481. rd to your touch Fix No dynamic control available Dynamic values are fixed as in a classic organ Softl Hard Curves from the lightest one to the hardest one A Touch Curve gt GBLS This parameter sets the sensitivity of the keyboard to the pres sure you apply after first pressing a key Soft Hard2 Curves from the lightest to the hardest Off The aftertouch is turned off Global Tuning Reverb Master Tuning gt GBL This is the master tuning of the instrument in cents of a semi tone Use it to adapt your keyboard tuning to an acoustic instrument for example an acoustic piano 50 Lowest pitch 0 Standard pitch A4 440Hz Global edit mode General Controls Basic 197 50 Highest pitch Reverb Offset GBLO This is the master offset for all reverbs Use it to adjust reverb tails to the room where you are playing Use negative values when you are in a very reverberant room positive values if the room is too dry By using this global control you are not obliged to change the reverb time in each single Performance STS Style Performance or Song 50 Less reverb 0 Standard reverb 50 More reverb Fade In Out Time These parameters allows you to set the speed for the Fade In Out function Fade In Time gt GBL Time for a full fade in from zero to maximum volume after you press the FADE IN OUT button 5 20 Fade time in seconds Fade Out Time gt GBLO Time f
482. rdion Change Voice Harmonica Harmonica Wah Highland Bag Pipes Highland Drones Uilleann Pipes Bag Pipes French Horn T1 French Horn Ensemble Flugel Horn Vibrato Flugel Horn M1 Tuba f Tuba ff Trombone Vibrato Trombonel mf Trombonel ff Trombone Soft Trombone Bright Trombone Muted 2 Trombones mf L 2 Trombones mf R 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 297 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 2 Trombones f L 2 Trombones f_R Trombone SlurUp Trombone Fall Classic Trumpet p Classic Trumpet mf Pop Trumpet mf Pop Trumpet f Trumpet Expr Trumpet Slow mp Trumpet Slow f Trumpet Tonguing mp Trumpet Tonguing f Trumpet Medium Trumpet Overblown Trumpet Muted Trumpet Wah wah 2 Trumpets mp _L 2 Trumpets mp R 2 Trumpets f L 2 Trumpets f_R Trumpet Dot Trumpet Fall Stereo Brass Ensemblel L Stereo Brass Ensemble R Stereo Brass Ensemble2 L Stereo Brass Ensemble2 R Brass Ensemblel Brass Ensemble2 Brass Ensemble2LP Voice Female Wuuh Voice Female Woh Voice Female Wah Voice Female Dah Voice Male Wuh Voice Male Woh Voice Male Wah Voice Male Dah Voice Scat Buh Voice Scat Duh Voice Scat Bah Voice Scat Dah Voice Choir Voice Hoo Voice Pop Ooh Voice Pop Ah 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280
483. re The Style Element enters at the beginning of the next measure and begins from the first measure Style Record procedure There are two different methods for recording a Style Realtime and Step Realtime Recording allows you to record Style patterns in realtime Step Recording allows you to create a new Style by entering single notes or chords in each track This is very useful when transcribing an existing score or needing a higher grade of detail and is particularly suitable to create drum and percussion tracks Preparing to record N S B di Si o N 10 If you like to edit an existing Style select that Style Press the RECORD button to enter the Style Record mode You are prompted to select either the Current Style or a New Style Select record edit Current Style if you want to edit the current Style or make a new Style starting from an existing one Select Record New Style if you want to start from scratch with an empty Style After you select your preferred option the main page of the Style Record mode will appear Select the Element Style Element and Chord Var Chord Variation parameters to select the Chord Variation to be recorded edited Note For more information on the Style Elements and Chord Variations and the Style structure in general see The Style structure on page 106 Use the Rec Length Recording Length parameter to set the length in measures o
484. re and fills the remaining space with rests Done Exits the Step Record mode Pad Record mode The Pad structure 131 Pad Record mode By entering the Pad Record mode you can create your own Pads or edit an existing Pad The Pad structure A Pad is basically a single track Style Most of what applies to Style recording also applies to Pad recording There are two different categories of Pads Hit Pads While they are mostly used as non transpos Pad ing events they can also be transposing notes or chords CV1 Basically they are single note Pad Track or single chord Sequences see below CV2 Sequence Pads ie com plex single track patterns ES that can be transposed by CVA playing different chords on the keyboard exactly as a CV5 Style track They are roughl y y galy Cu equivalent to single element single track multi chord variation Styles see illustration Each Pad is made up of up to six smaller units called Chord Variations CV Each Chord Variation is made of a single track the Pad track Exactly as with the Styles when playing a chord in the chord rec ognition area the corresponding Chord Variation is recalled Recognized chords are associated to a Chord Variation by means of the Chord Variation Table Each Pad contains a Chord Varia tion Table As with the Styles the Note Transposition Tables NTT applies to the Pads What to record Recording
485. refer to your microphone user s manual 1 2 Use these balanced unbalanced connectors to connect your external source s The signal goes directly to the final mix As an alternative it can be sent to the Voice Processor see Audio Out put Audio In on page 207 for more informa tion GAIN Use these controls to adjust the input sensitivity of the input connectors from 0 to 40 dB You can check the input level by watching at the AUDIO IN LED on the control panel see AUDIO IN LED on page 15 VIDEO OUT optional If an optional VIF4 video interface is fitted you can connect the Pa800 to a TV or video monitor See the instructions included with the video interface for more information Rear panel 19 e 9 D YU 3 H Be Sea 20 Welcome Live Performing Welcome to the world of Korg Pa800 Professional Arranger Pa800 is the most powerful arranger available today both for professional and home entertainment use Here are some of the features of your new instrument RX Technology the cutting edge engine that drives every aspect of the Pa800 from the synthesis to the display and how it all works together Powerful HI Hyper Integrated Korg sound generation system as seen in our best professional synthesizers 120 voices of polyphony e OPOS Objective Portable Operating System multitasking operating system to let you load data while playing your instrument
486. rent name to the selected list press the T Text Edit button to open the Text Edit window Select an option to save the edited Custom List Select Rename Overwrite to overwrite an existing list optionally changing its name Warning The older list will be deleted Select New List to save a new Custom List in memory This list will be available in the Custom List page Lyrics STS The Lyrics STS page is where you can see Lyrics and select STSs GH GH HAVE SOME FUN FH THROW AWAY THE WORK ELL MY FRIENDS THE TO RAISE THE ROOF AND When a TXT file is associated to the current song a vertical scrollbar appears allowing you to scroll to the previous or former text page during the performance Note You cannot scroll a single line of text at a time you always scroll by a whole page of text either if you press on the scrollbar or one of the small scrolling arrows Press here to scroll to the next page Lyrics as text files associated to a Song Book entry Lyrics can be associated to each SongBook entry either Style or Song based as a TXT file See Linked TXT on page 166 for more information on this issue As as consequence there are five ways of seeing Lyrics on the Pa800 In Song Play mode you can see lyrics contained in a Stan dard MIDI File as Lyrics events To see this kind of lyrics you must press the Lyrics tab in the Song Play mode In Song Play mode
487. ression value is already among the default header parameters of the Style Element Tempo Meter Tempo and Meter changes Master Track only Pitch Bend Pitch Bend events Style Edit Quantize The quantize function may be used to correct any timing mis take after recording or to give the pattern a groovy feeling STYLE REC Edit e Crum G FERI ACCS ACCS ALCA ALCA E BASS ACE Trans Delete f Copy fm Copy fm After setting the various parameters press Execute Track Use this parameter to select a track All All tracks selected Drum Acc5 Selected track E CV Style Element Chord Variation Use these parameters to select the Style Element and Chord Vari ation for editing Resolution This parameter sets the quantization after recording For exam ple when you select 1 8 all notes are moved to the nearest 1 8 division When you select 1 4 all notes are moved to the nearest 1 4 division UTD IDEA Aan Ju Grid resolution in musical values A b f char acter added after the value means swing quanti zation A 3 means triplet Start End Tick Use these parameters to set the starting and ending points of the range to quantize If a Chord Variation is four measures long and you want to select it all the Start will be positioned at 1 01 000 and the End at 5 01 000 Bottom Top Note Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard range t
488. rface basics The Color TouchView graphical user interface Interface basics The Color TouchView graphical user interface Pa800 features an easy to use graphical user interface based on Korg s patented Color TouchView interface Here are the basic elements of the user s interface Pages Parameters are grouped into separate pages to be selected by touching the corresponding tabs on the lower part of the display ITU Im LOWER A A ll A Uren STS Sub 8 Liane J Me f scale J Pas J sett Menus and sections Pages are grouped in sections to be selected by touching the cor responding buttons in the Edit menu that opens up when you press the MENU button GIWI F DI AV Monu Selectable items A triangle next to the name of a Sound Style STS Pad or Song means that you can select it and replace it with a different ele ment Touch the item s name and make the corresponding Select window appear pee H UR Overlapping windows When you press a Sound Style STS Pad or Song name a select ing window overlaps the current page After you select an item in the window or press the EXIT button the window closes and the underlying page is shown again S50UND SELECT Grand Piano RX EE s Grand Piano RX Organ d ES Strings i E E G Trumpet E IC Trk Upper 1 Dialog boxes Similar to selecting windows dialog boxes overlap the underlay ing page Press one of the button on the disp
489. rill speed by using the Tempo parameter see below Repeat The played note is repeated in sync with the Tempo parameter see below When playing a chord only the last note is repeated Echo As the Repeat option but with the repeated notes fading away after the time set with the Feedback parameter see below AutoSplitl If more than a single Upper track is in play the Upper 1 track plays the melody in mono while the other Upper tracks play the chord notes If only the Upper 1 track is in play it plays poly phonically all the chord notes AutoSplit2 Similar to AutoSplitl but the Upper 1 track always plays the uppermost note Note Velocity PERF STS This parameter sets the velocity difference between the right hand melody and the added harmonization notes 10 0 Subtracted velocity value Tempo PERF STS Note This parameter only appears when the Trill Repeat or Echo options are selected Note value for the Trill Repeat or Echo Ensemble options This is in sync with the Metronome Tempo Feedback PERF STS Note This parameter only appears when the Echo option is selected This parameter sets how many times the original note chord is repeated by the Echo option Ensemble Track Assign PERF STS Use these parameters to separately set Upper tracks for the Ensemble function Off There is no harmonization on this track Normal This track is included in the harmonization Mute This t
490. rite Global Voice Processor Preset Select this command to open the Write Global Voice Processor Preset dialog box and save the current Voice Processor Preset settings see from page 214 See Write Global Voice Processor Preset dialog box on page 211 for more information Write Global Auto Select Setup Choose this command to save the preferred Styles Sounds and Performances assigned to the control panel STYLE and PER FORMANCE SOUND buttons via the Auto Select functions see page 201 This way the next time you will turn the Pa800 on the preferred Styles Sounds and Performances will be still assigned to the rele vant buttons Write Global Global Setup dialog box Open this window by selecting the Write Global Global Setup item from the page menu Here you can save most settings pro grammed in the Global edit mode to the Global file in memory Write Global Setup Parameters saved in the Global Setup area of the Global are marked with the GBL amp symbol through the user s manual Write Global Midi Setup dialog box Open this window by selecting the Write Global Midi Setup item from the page menu Here you can save all MIDI settings to a MIDI Setup that is included in the Global file in memory Write Midi Setup T Defa i A ai Default E Parameters saved in the MIDI Setup area of the Global are marked with the GBL symbol through the user s manual Name Name of th
491. rmony styles in the dedicated pages of the Global edit mode described in this chapter Accessing the Voice Processor edit pages While in the Global edit mode press the MENU button to access the edit section menu GLOBAL Menu mm When this page appears touch either the Voice Processor Setup or the Voice Processor Preset item to access the relevant edit pages An alternative way to access these pages is to keep the SHIFT button pressed and press either the MIC Setup page HAR MONY Preset page or EFFECT Effects page button on the control panel Voice Processor Setup Setup In this page you can select a Voice Processor Setup and set some general parameters for the current Setup GLOBAL Yoice Processor Setup LJ oi Default Setup Voice Processor Setup Use this parameter to select a Voice Processor Setup Setup parameters are global and do not change when a different preset is recalled Setup parameters are all the parameters found in the Voice Processor Setup edit section including Lead voice input level and pan Compression Gate and EQ parameters among many others They are parameters that would typically be set for a given situa tion based on the singer microphone or studio configuration and then left that way as a basis for the presets within the Voice Processor If you change your microphone or singer the EQ Compression settings need to only be adjusted once in the setup section
492. rument off unless you write Global settings to memory see Write Global Global Setup dialog box on page 210 For more information on parameter locks see General Con trols Lock on page 199 Preferences Global Setup In this page you can set various general parameters for the Style Play mode STYLE PLAY Preferences Ea Pref E Note These settings are stored in the Style Play Setup area of the Global file together with all the other parameters marked with the GBLY abbreviation through the manual After changing these settings select the Write Global Style Play Setup command from the page menu to save them to the Global Midi Setup GBLS MIDI channels for the Style Play mode can be automatically configured by selecting a MIDI Setup with this parameter See MIDI on page 240 for more information on using MIDI Set ups Note To automatically select a MIDI Setup when entering the Style Play mode select the Write Global Style Setup command from the page menu For detailed information on MIDI Setup settings see MIDI Setup on page 285 Note After selecting a MIDI Setup you can go to the Global mode and apply any change to each channel setting lo store these changes to a MIDI Setup while still in Global mode select the Write Global Midi Setup command from the page menu All MIDI Setup can be freely customized and overwritten Hint To restore the original MIDI Setups load the original F
493. s See The Style Play page in detail on page 7 for more informa tion o v c Q i o tim Q cc 104 Style Play operating mode Write Performance dialog box Write Performance dialog box Open this window by selecting the Write Performance item from the page menu Here you can save all track settings the selected Style number various Style settings and the selected Voice Pro cessor Preset to a Performance Write Performance l Piano Parameters saved in the Performance are marked with the PERF symbol through the user s manual SHIFT Keep the SHIFT button pressed and press one of the SOUND PERFORMANCE buttons to open this window Name Name of the Performance to be saved Press the T Text Edit button next to the name to open the Text Edit window Perf Bank Target bank of Performances Each bank corresponds to one of the PERFORMANCE SOUND buttons Use TEMPO VALUE controls to select a different bank Performance Target Performance location in the selected bank Use TEMPO VALUE controls to select a different location Select button Press this button to open the Performance Select window and select a target location Write Single Touch Setting dialog box Open this window by selecting the Write Single Touch Setting item from the page menu Here you can save Keyboard track settings and the selected Voice Processor Preset to one of the four single Touch Settings STS belong
494. s cv1 cv6 the Chord Variation is empty when it is in capitals your tests CV1 CV6 it is already recorded Note When this parameter and the assigned value is in small let Note In this mode the pattern is always played back 1n loop even Resolution if the Pad Type parameter is set to One Shot see page 139 Use this parameter to set the quantization during record Note While in Pad Record mode the Fingered 3 Chord Scanning ing mode is automatically selected Pad Sync PAD This parameter allows you to set a synchronization mode for the Pad s pattern Off No synchronization The sequence will start as soon as you press the PAD button Continued The pattern will start immediately in sync with the arrangers or active sequencers tempo Depending on the current position of the beat counter it might not start from its very begin ning instead it will continue from the current position For example if the arranger s or sequencer s beat counter shows the third beat and is playing tick 91 the Pad will start from its third beat at tick 91 The beat counter STYLE PLAY This works exactly as if 1t was a Fill Beat The sequence will start at the next beat in sync with the arranger s or sequencer s tempo It will start from its very beginning De tick 1 or mea sure 1 Rec Length Recording Length PAD This parameter sets the recording length in measures of the sequence Its value is al
495. s and effects will change as well as Pad sounds The Keyboard sounds and effects will not change MEMORY gt SB This button turns the Lower and Chord Memory functions on or off Go to the Preferences Style Preferences edit page Style Play mode see page 101 to decide if this button should be a Chord Memory only or a Lower Chord Memory button When it works as a Lower Chord Memory Note This function can be automatically activated by playing the keyboard harder See Velocity Control on page 101 On The sound on the left of the split point and the chord for the automatic accompaniment are kept in memory even when you raise your hand from the keyboard Off The sound and chords are released as soon as you raise your hand from the keyboard BASS INVERSION PERF STS STSS This button turns the Bass Inversion function on or off Note This function can be automatically activated by playing the keyboard harder See Velocity Control on page 101 On The lowest note of a chord played in inverted form will always be detected as the root note of the chord Thus you can specify to the arranger composite chords such as Am7 G or F C Off The lowest note is scanned together with the other chord notes and is not always considered as the root note 9 MANUAL BASS PERF STS STS5 This button turns the Manual Bass function on or off Note When you press the MANUAL BASS button the Bass t
496. s in play and can be heard page 33 Close this lock to avoid transposition when choosing a different Performance or Style page 199 Touch here to change the Split Point page 36 Touch here to see the Songs Lyrics page 9 Single Touch Settings STS Touch one of them to choose it or use the dedicated buttons on the control panel Sounds on the keyboard will change page 80 Notes As in Style mode there are three Sounds for the right hand Upper 1 Upper 2 Upper 3 and only one Sound for the left hand Lower Their names are abbreviated as UP1 UP2 UP3 LOW and are shown in the right side of the display Right hand Upper and left hand Lower Sounds are sepa rated by the Split Point Performances and STSs are collections of Sounds Just choose one of them to change all the Sounds of the keyboard Available STSs depend on the Style you last selected Since there are two onboard Sequencers you can play two Songs at the same time Mix them using the SEQUENCER BAL ANCE slider on the control panel Touching a Song name in the display is the same as to press one of the SELECT buttons on the control panel Each Sequencer has its own SELECT and transport buttons Easy Mode 9 The Lyrics page in detail The Lyrics page in detail Master Transpose page 144 Chord if included in the Song Current beat and measure number Lyrics are shown in this area FH THROW AW
497. s until December 31 1996 means it conforms to EMC Directive 89 336 EEC and CE mark Directive 93 68 EEC And CE mark which is attached after January 1 1997 means it conforms to EMC Directive 89 336 EEC CE mark Directive 93 68 EEC and Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC Also CE mark which is attached to our company s products of Battery operated apparatus means it conforms to EMC Directive 89 336 EEC and CE mark Directive 93 68 EEC IMPORTANT NOTICE TO CONSUMERS This product has been manufactured according to strict specifications and voltage requirements that are applicable in the country in which it is intended that this product should be used If you have purchased this product via the internet through mail order and or via a telephone sale you must verify that this product is intended to be used in the country in which you reside WARNING Use of this product in any country other than that for which it is intended could be dangerous and could invalidate the manufacturer s or distributor s warranty Please also retain your receipt as proof of purchase otherwise your product may be disqualified from the manufacturer s or distributor s warranty Data Handling Data in memory may sometimes be lost due to incorrect user action Be sure to save important data to the optional internal hard disk or to an external USB device Korg will not be responsible for damages caused by data loss Example screens Some pag
498. s you to record just some Chord Variations and have all the notes play in the right place avoiding dissonances and transposing the pattern notes to the notes of the recognized chord Going deeper into the Style structure we can see that each Chord Variation is made up of Track Sequences and the Pa800 supports 8 different tracks DRUM and PERC are used for drum and percussion sequences BASS for bass and ACCI 5 are for accompaniment sequences string guitar piano or other accom paniment instruments Just to summarize when you play a chord on the chord recogni tion area the arranger determines which Style Element is used then determines which Chord Variation should be used for the played chord then Style sequences for every track of that Chord Variation are transposed from the original chord to the recog nized chord using the NTT and so on every time you play a chord What to record Recording a Style is a matter of recording tracks inside a series of Chord Variations inside a series of Style Elements inside the Style itself You don t need to record all Chord Variations for all Style Ele ments It is often only needed to record just a Chord Variation for each Style Element Exceptions are the Intro 1 and Ending 1 where we suggest to record both a Major and minor Chord Vari ations Pattern data vs track data While the Style Record mode is where you can create or edit music patterns for the Style track parame
499. sa ea at 0 leegen pos wi s m eem outer et Actas EI Pre s mem outer 32 m esser e wr 9 z umteaz outer S at 3 x peeemems es wr wo m ewm je O Pet a om opAeememe es wr u m wwe am tat 5 m EE Rs wr s m deeeewet outer O a 8 m esser pes wn ow m Singlecoitro Aa 3m 7 om peeemem EI wr s m ener outer Gm 8 mopeskmer EI mei sevese am II IG px pee JI wr E sense ja O ox owmw pos wr m m mewewe outer at it 5 ow pos wn m x Weeesi am 3m 0 89 messe II wr m Ierger Ae et ft m Ierger EI IC wr m z sew jm 1 2 9 metes II Factory data 263 Sounds Program Change order les Pc name en Iesel ccoo c32 Pc Name Je Lee Ter 3 5 mete ms ELI M o9 Amon ai TI wr 5 metes ms LI ERC 5 o9 meme fe IL wr s 3 meer pos O rar veto es E wr s 5 GewhmRs pos II Dallas leger es SR s 5 Wewmwe s ft 58 EE wr m 5 mener es O A IA IE E meme es wr m 5 more maras ms O pra 5 attache pas Ca f s 5 mess Bs O paros as pesem fees wr w 5 mesas me SG RECH LEE s SSC es T s MEA s a s s s s T s Par 5 5 Wee pes xm 0 3 P edtsescM fess wr 0 peenes ee o IG wr EEE ee Ca s 3 ses ee wr s 3 essema el wr s E sme fas wr s 3 wsserbodie feos RA Per 7 3 meme ell RIS
500. samples see the Advanced Edit addendum in the Accessory CD Note If you are loading a Sound or Drum Kit that makes use of an external PCM sample the sample is automatically loaded unless it is already in memory Loading Pa1X data You can load PalX data exactly as if they were Pa800 data Minor differences might exist between effect parameters Also keep in mind Voice Harmony is only 3 voices in the Pa800 while it is 4 voices in the PalX Some other parameters are missing in the Voice Processor section At the same time most Pa800 data can be read by any PalX provided it is fitted with Operating System v 3 0 However keep in mind the following e Pa800 has a more extensive range of effects that might not exist on the PalX Due to the different content and organization the Song Book will point to different Styles Media edit mode Lood 227 Loading Pa80 60 data You can load Pa80 60 data exactly as 1f they were Pa800 data The only difference is that the SOUND folder of Pa800 is called PROGRAM in the Pa80 60 Therefore to load Sounds from Pa80 60 disks you must accomplish one of the following opera tions Either rename the PROGRAM folder SOUND by using a personal computer before loading a SET folder or e First load the SET folder then separately load the PCG file from the PROGRAM folder Loading i Series data Pa800 is compatible with the Styles of the
501. selected it may be played back by the sequencer 1 Be sure the SEQUENCER BALANCE slider is completely moved to the left toward Sequencer 1 BALANCE 2 Press the li PLAY STOP button in the SEQUENCER 1 section to start playback SEN SELECT lt lt H SONG PLAY dub Canyon MA A A A EY ea ge After pressing the H PLAY STOP button the button s LED turns on and the measure counter z begins to show the current measure number MIC IM LOWER UPFERS UPFFER2 UPFER1 Juke Lyrics STS Sub r es Mets Name Me f sose Pau sen 3 Use the SEQUENCER 1 control section to control the Song s playback Press the PLAY STOP button to stop the Song Press the HOME button to at the current position Press it again to move the Song to measure 1 resume playback Press the REWIND button once to go tothe Press the FAST FORWARD button once to go beginning of the current measure Keep it to the beginning of the next measure Keep it pressed to go back several measures pressed to go forward several measures 4 When you want to stop the song and go back to the first measure press the La HOME button 0 Note In any case the n When the Song is sequencer will automati lt lt di stopped the LED on the cally stop when the end Jj SERIES PLAY STOP button goes of the Song is reached dark 54 Song Play Changing tracks volume Ch
502. send a sequencer s or backing track to a separate channel For example by using the separate outputs you may send the Drum or Bass track to an external compressor or reverb unit or mix the separate tracks on an external mixer Connect four mono cables to each of the main LEFT RIGHT and 1 2 OUTPUTS To feed the sub outputs 1 2 you must pro gram the track s you wish to send them see the Audio Out put section in the Global starting from page 206 Note When a track is sent to the OUTPUT 1 or 2 it is removed from the main mix going to the internal speakers and the LEFT amp RIGHT OUTPUTS Note OUTPUTS 1 amp 2 carry a dry sound with no effects applied Adjust the volume of the LEFT amp RIGHT OUTPUTs with the MASTER VOLUME slider Adjust the volume of the 1 amp 2 OUT PUTs with the mixer s or external speaker s level controls Audio Inputs Connect your microphones guitars or any other musical instru ment to the AUDIO INPUTS on the back of the instrument A microphone connected to the AUDIO INPUT 1 can also be sent to the Voice Processor for sophisticate processing Use a suitable XLR to 1 4 jack adapter to connect a micro phone with a XLR connector to the Pa800 s 1 4 jack inputs Use an external phantom power supply like a mixer to connect condenser microphones Use the GAIN knobs next to the audio inputs to set the input sensitivity While you play the external source look at the AUD
503. serted Kbd Keyboard You can select this parameter by turn ing all counter clockwise the dial When this option is selected the playing strength of the played note is recognized and recorded 1 127 Velocity value The event will be inserted with this velocity value and the actual playing strength of the note played on the keyboard will be ignored Event list area List of inserted events Previously inserted events You may delete the last of these events and make it ready for a new event by pressing the Back button in the display Position where the event has been inserted The value is shown in the measure beat tick format Note RX Noise Name of the inserted Note or RX Noise When entering a chord a series of dots is shown after the name of the root note Position Vel Velocity of the inserted event Dur Percentage duration of the inserted event Buttons Rest Press this button to insert a rest Tie Press this button to tie the note to be inserted to the previous one A note with the same pitch and the specified length will be created and tied to the previous one 0 V c Q i o Ser Q ec 176 Sequencer operating mode Record mode Step Record page Back Goes to the previous step erasing the inserted event Next M Next Measure Goes to the next measure and fills the remaining space with rests Done Exits the Step Record mode Step Record procedure Here
504. set with this parameter thus playing perfectly in time High No quantization applied Sequencer operating mode 177 Record mode Backing Sequence Quick Record page A 1 32 1 8 Grid resolution in musical values For example when you select 1 8 all notes are moved to the nearest 1 8 division When you select 1 4 all notes are moved to the nearest 1 4 division High no i i quantize y P ii iP oi tien Chord Acc Kbd Pad a 3 These parameters let you define grouped track status during recording This status is reflected by the big status indicator above the track sliders Play The Backing Sequence track is set to play If there are recorded data they will be heard while recording the other Backing Sequence track Mute The Backing Sequence track is muted If this tracks has already been recorded it will not be heard during recording of the other Backing Sequence track Rec The Backing Sequence track is in record All pre viously recorded data will be deleted After press ing KI PLAY STOP to start recording the track will receive notes from the keyboard and the MIDI IN connector Ch Acc This Backing Sequence track groups all Style tracks together with recognized chords and Style controls and Style Elements selection After finishing recording they will be saved as Song tracks 9 16 as in the following table Chord Acc track Song track Channel 5m CS Pm X eum 8
505. sh and other cymbals volume Perc 1 Low pitched percussions volume Perc 2 High pitched percussions volume EFX Special effects volume Select Use these buttons to select the track to edit The button corre sponding to the selected track turns green Reset Track Press this button to reset all changes to percussive instrument volumes in the selected track Reset All Tracks Press this button to reset all changes to percussive instrument volumes in all tracks Q6 Style Play operating mode Track Controls Easy Edit Play Mute icon PERE PERF STS Tracks play mute status Play status The track can be heard Mute status The track cannot be heard How to adjust volume for a single Drum Family Here is a quick example of the use of the Drum Volume func tion 1 While in this page press TRACK SELECT to see individual Style tracks e Press the Select button in the display above the Drum track Press START STOP to let the Style go While listening to the Style select the Cymb knob and use TEMPO VALUE controls to turn the volume completely off w You ll notice how all cymbals stops sounding e Press the Reset Track button in the display to recall the original cymbals volume Track Controls Easy Edit In this page you can edit the main parameters of the Sounds assigned to each track Note All values refer to the value of the original Sound STYLE PLAY Track Controls Trk Upper 1
506. si es Vea weh a haa 151 Mixer Tunina FX Send iios exiret PES y PY reed acea 152 Mixey Tuning EO Gal 255i setes ER AE 153 Mixer Tuning EQ Control 154 Mixer Lunine TUNNE censo vs exa does reme we ans 154 Effects FX Select AAPP reer eee re 154 AO A aden ad pe ee aes me Oe 155 Track Controls Mode cesiones 155 Track Controls Drum Volume 155 Track Controls Easy PdL 155 Keyboard Ensemble Keyboard Control 156 Keyboard Ensemble Key Velocity Range 156 Keyboard Ensemble Ensemble 156 ea di A ses 156 Pad Switch Assignable Switch oo ooooomoommo 156 Jukebox Editor sor aa 156 Groove Os AS RE RAE Oe EIE 157 Preferences Track Settings d adesuceacurgeset deis 158 Preferences General Control 158 Rage Tent 2222 2 9309 tesoros ob ad tere 160 Write Global Song Play Setup dialog box 161 SONGBOOK cross fax ura Ee toros 162 Dna CL 162 DOOGEGICL sosa e DPI VER PEOR MES 164 Book e M 166 CUSTOMS sordos ep POR ER ERO KOH SIRE 9 HORE EORR 167 DISC Egi resort ate dA OP D Eu bi dr 167 bus db UEM 168 ln PT aes 168 TOS ee DEG qos esa ed aestu A dabo eta dune d 169 Sequencer operating mode 170 Transport controls 1 adeat ere E teda rue a ptr rie 170 The Songs and the Standard MIDI File format 170 Songs and Voice Processor Presets 170 Sequencer Play Main page
507. sing Save The NewSong NEWSONG MID on a storage device name will be automatically assigned to the Song 5 After pressing the Save button the Save Song dialog box will appear 6 If you like press the Ti Text Edit button to edit the name 7 Press OK to confirm saving or Cancel to stop the Save operation o v c Q i o tim Q cc 196 Global edit mode What is it and how the Global is structured Global edit mode The Global edit environment is the place where you can set glo bal functions 1 e functions overriding the single Performance STS or Style This edit environment overlaps the current operat ing mode Style Play Song Play Sequencer Sound Edit What is it and how the Global is structured The Global is a file that can be written to memory and may sub sequently be saved to a storage device containing global param eters for the whole instrument or each single operating mode Global parameters can be written to memory by selecting the various Write Global commands from the page menus each dedicated to one of the areas of the Global file They can be saved to a storage device by using the ordinary Media opera tions Note Saving or loading a SET folder also saves or loads the Glo bal file Parameter changing may be avoided by turning the Lock on for any single parameter or groups of parameters in the Lock page of the Global mode see General
508. sition are highlighted Song chords Chords contained in the midifile if any This indicator may be easier to read than chords shown within the lyrics Master Transpose Master transpose value in semitones This value can be changed using the TRANSPOSE buttons on the control panel Current beat Beat number of the current measure that is currently playing Current measure Current measure number Selected sequencer SEQ 1 SEQ 2 Use these side tabs to select a sequencer whose Song to show Note You can have Sequencer 2 selected in the Main page of the Song Play mode and Sequencer 1 selected in the Lyrics page or vice versa This way you can select a Song whose lyrics to display on the external video monitor while selecting a different sequencer for editing operations STS Name of the four selected Single Touch Settings STS Touch one of them to select it Markers side tabs Standard Song Markers contained in a midifile can be read with the Pa800 to quickly jump to a given position in the Song Addi tionally you can set your own marker points on the fly Press one of these side tabs to access the Marker panel corre sponding to one of the two sequencers Tadd J petete cat Save DEI Note Markers do not work when the Groove Quantize is activated Note It is not advisable to program them with a Jukebox file assigned to Sequencer 1 since pressing PLAY STOP would delete the markers How to add a marker
509. sor Effects module Voice Processor Preset Harmony In this page you can define general parameters for the Harmony module GLOBAL Yoice Processor Preset gt Chord Harmony Effects Harmony Harmony On Off gt GBL This checkbox allows enabling disabling of the Harmony mod ule It is the same control found in the Preset page Latch On Off gt GBLY When enabled in Chord mode the latest chord played remains active after the notes have been released from the keyboard When enabled in Notes mode the harmony voices will only respond to note input when the number of notes being played equals the harmony voices enabled This ensures logical voice assignment when voices change When Latch is On the envelope parameters Attack and Release are not applicable Harmony Mode gt GBL P Change the current harmony mode Available parameters Scalic Scalic presets Chord Chordal presets Shift and Notes Shift and Notes presets See Harmony and Tuning with the Voice Processor on page 218 for a full description of each harmony mode Root GBL P In Scalic presets this sets the scale root Type gt GBL In Scalic presets this sets the scale type If the selected type is Custom a Custom Map can be used see Custom Voice Map ping on page 216 PB Assign GBL P Pitch Bend control assignment Allows assignment of the pitch bend to Pitch applicable in Notes and Chord harmony modes o
510. sor senge 71 Recording a new Song 72 Entering Backing Sequence Quick Record mode Ta Preparing tO ee ateo 73 RECO EE 74 Second take recording Overdubbing 75 Saving a Song to disk 1 eee ccc eee eee 75 Reference Selecting elements ooooooooommmmmmooo 78 sound Select WINdOW 444545604956 mien leia id 78 Performance Select window 78 Style Select window s seats ia iaa acie are o i i ait d 79 Pad Select e ou pee da ene PRACT det Pepe oed 79 JUS r 80 Song Select WINdOW soe saco mado euer eon des asu ona 43 poleras 80 Style Play operating mode 83 EE ob olo LULA P REP ERR 83 How Styles Performances and STSs are linked together 83 Main page Normal view 83 Style Tracks VieW DADO gt order 85 Molutme PANG 2s po dris 9 ooh oe o leo ooh des 86 2 Table of Contents SIS Name panel conociera rado cp 87 Mic PANG cand comune due a oo 87 Sub Scale panel 88 Pad panel Varese papa opa 88 OPE PANG carcasa ds da ara ds add euer 88 Sega eee ee ee eee ee ee ee ee 89 Pale pase Sc ono sure Ea Ee 89 Mixer Tunine Volime Pats casaca ke yea ERES VES 89 Mixer lunio FX Send odes sepas pice ose cubes de rendi 90 Mixer Tuning BO Gait 5o ie Ae d oes serena 91 Mixet Tuning FO Controls visos dE Yu ede pr ree Yes 91 Mixer Tuning LUNINE serrer pi die onde DRE raros 92 Mixer Tuning Sub Scale o ooooooocooommommomm 92 Elects EE snaps habe aaa
511. ssing imme diately contact your Korg dealer Pa800 Music stand Power cable Owner s Manual Accessory CD containing the USB driver additional man uals the Bonus Software and a backup of the original Operating System and Musical Resources About this manual This manual is divided in four sections An Introduction containing an overview of the instru ment and of basic operations A Quick Guide containing a series of practical guides A Reference Guide with each page and parameter described in detail An Appendix with a list of data and useful information for the advanced user Additional information can be found inside the Accessory CD Within the manual you will find the following abbreviations The parameter can be saved to a Performance by selecting the Write Performance command from the page menu gt PERF The parameter can be saved to the current Style Performance by selecting the Write Style Perfor mance command from the page menu gt PERFSY gt STS The parameter can be saved to one of the Single Touch Settings of the current Style or to a Single Touch Setting of a SongBook entry To save it to a Style select the Write STS command from the page menu of the Style Play mode To save it to a SongBook entry either of Style or Song type check the Write STS option in the Book Edit 1 page of the SongBook mode The parameter can be saved to the Global by selecting one of the availabl
512. suitable for a single gig or your own music tastes List Header J SONGBOOK T 3 nao chord i Tipi Key Tempo Mete E day in paradise Custom list ED Ebony amp white E Light my inferno Scrollbar dua Lana train going E Over happy Bab Senza donne d Commands Book Book Edit 1 A Edit 2 Hint You can jump to this page by keeping SHIFT pressed and pressing the SONGBOOK button List header See List Header on page 162 Custom list List of files contained in the selected Custom List Use the scroll bar to browse through the list Scrollbar Use the scrollbar to scroll the entries Commands List pop up menu Use this pop up menu to select one of the available lists Next Press this button to select the next entry in the list Hint You can assign this command to an Assignable Switch or Assignable Footswitch Select Press this button to confirm selection of the highlighted entry in the list After pressing this button the name of the selected entry appears in the left upper corner of the display N Hint This command is useful to browse through the list and select an entry different than the following one in the list SongBook Custom List 167 List Edit This page is only available after checking the Enable List Edit command in the page menu see page 169 Use this page to edit the available Custom Lists A Custom List is a set of SongBook entries created by sel
513. t You can also scroll by using the SHIFT DIAL combination Go Catch This is a dual function command Sequencer operating mode 187 Event Edit Event Edit While the sequencer is not running it works as a Go to Mea sure command Press it to open the Go to Measure dialog box Go to Measure When in this dialog box select a target measure and press OK The first event available in the target measure will be selected While the sequencer is running it works as a Catch Locator command Press it to show the event that is currently playing Insert Press the Insert button in the display to insert a new event at the current shown Position The default values are Type Note Pitch C4 Velocity 100 Length 192 Note You can t insert new events in an empty non recorded Song To insert an event you must first insert some empty measures by using the Insert Measure function see Song Edit Cut Insert Mea sures on page 190 Delete Press the Delete button in the display to delete the event selected in the display Note The End of Track event cannot be deleted Event Edit procedure Here is the general event editing procedure 1 While in the Event Edit page press P M PLAY STOP in the SEQUENCER 1 section to listen to the Song Press it again to stop the Song 2 Select the Filter page and turn Off the filter for the event types you wish to see in the display see Event
514. t gt SHIFT Keep the SHIFT button pressed and press these buttons to scroll to the previous or next Song in the Jukebox list a HOME Returns to measure 1 of the current Song gt M PLAY STOP Starts or stops the current Song When you stop the Song it is stopped at the current position Press HOME to go back to measure 1 of the cur rent Song If the Jukebox panel is open you can select the Song from which to start See Jukebox panel above Lyrics amp Markers panel Lyrics side tabs These panels show the lyrics and chord abbreviations included in a Song or loaded as a TXT file with the Song You can see the following types of Lyrics e Lyrics included in Standard MIDI Files e Lyrics included in Karaoke files e Lyrics loaded as a TXT file with a Standard MIDI File or Karaoke file see Text files loaded with Standard MIDI Files below Lyrics will be shown only if they are compatible with a standard format that Pa800 can understand Master Transpose Current measure Current beat Song chords GH GH Selected HAVE SOME FUN 2 sequencer FH THROW AWAY THE WORK eq 1 ELL MY FRIENDS THE TIME HAS COME ir o options STS While the Song is playing the text flows in the display Chord abbreviations if any will appear above the lyrics in time with the music depending on the Show Chords parameter status under the Options side tab Lyrics at the current po
515. t a second time to open the Sound Select win dow 172 Sequencer operating mode Entering Record mode Track volume status area This area is where you can set the volume of each Song track and mute unmute tracks Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Song Tracks 1 8 and Song Tracks 9 16 views The Song Tracks 1 8 view shows individual Song tracks 1 8 30530 PU Tal THe Tu Lyrics amp Mark H E T14 Juke Bon Track status icon Virtual slider Virtual slider track volume Virtual sliders are a graphical display of each tracks volume Touch the track s area to select a track and use TEMPO VALUE controls to change the value SONG gt GBL Play mute status of the current track Select the track then press this area to change the track status The status of Song tracks is saved when saving the Song Track status icon D Play status The track can be heard EI Mute status The track cannot be heard Track names Under the sliders a label for each track is shown Use the TRKACK SELECT button to switch between tracks 1 8 and 9 16 TO1 T16 Song tracks Entering Record mode To enter Record mode press the RECORD button while you are in Sequencer mode The following dialog box will appear Cancel Select one of the three available recording options and press OK or Cancel if you don t want to enter Record mode Multitrack Sequencer Full featured sequencer Select
516. t appear depressed Tid allel 3 Sing or talk into the microphone You ll hear background music has been made softer while your voice will be heard loud and proud The effects have probably changed too 4 To turn the TalkBack function off press the Talk button again making it appear relieved The background music returns to the original volume Locking Voice Processor settings If you like the selected Voice Processor Preset and other settings you have made in the Microphone panel you can lock them to prevent them from changing each time you select a Performance Style or STS that may be saved using different settings 1 While the Microphone panel is shown in the display press the lock icon to freeze it Lock on Voice Pro cessor settings will not change when selecting a different Performance or STS Lock off Voice Pro cessor settings will change when select ing a new Perfor mance or STS 72 Recording a new Song Entering Backing Sequence Quick Record mode Recording a new Song There are several ways to create a Song on the Pa800 The easiest and fastest is to use the Styles to record what you are playing in realtime on the keyboard while the arranger gives you the accompani ment tracks
517. tails Split panel Select this panel to adjust the split point for the Keyboard tracks See Split panel on page 88 for details Edit menu From any page press the MENU button to open the Song Play edit menu This menu gives access to the various Song Play edit sections for the currently selected sequencer see Songs area on page 146 When in the menu select an edit section or press EXIT or SONG PLAY to exit the menu When in an edit page press the EXIT or SONG PLAY button to go back to the main page of the Song Play operating mode S0NG FLAY Menu Each item in this menu corresponds to an edit section Each edit section groups various edit pages that may be selected by press ing the corresponding tab on the lower part of the display Note Some of the edit parameters are only meant for realtime To see which parameters are saved in the Performance STS or Global Song Play Setup and which are not see the Parameters chapter on page 344 As a general rule Keyboard track parameters can be saved in a Per formance or SongBook STS while Song track parameters could be saved in the Global Song Play Setup Edit page structure All edit pages share some basic elements Selected Operating mode sequencer Edit section Page menu icon Po N SONG FLAY SEU1 Mixer Tuning Trk Upper 1 b Grand Piano E Piano 121 883 8 Selected 1 track info Parameters area N Tal Tae TH Tad Tas H Hr Hp d Fa EG Je se
518. tar 3 Brazilian Guitar Steel Folk Gtr Steel Slide Pro2 Jazz Guitar GM Chorus Gtr Pro Mute Vel Gtr Overdrive Gtr GM Guitar Strings Steel amp Body Pop Steel Slide Finger Key Off 25 25 2 2 28 0 2 2 25 25 8 9 N N EE 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 2 5 5 25 Factory data 253 Sounds Bank order Mme EA Clean Jazz 2 EN 7 Tel Midddle 7 Clean Funk 8 30 Mandolin Mandolin Key Off Mandolin Trem Mandolin Ens 1 Mandolin Ens 2 Banjo GM Banjo Key Off MEM MN EA EE MOM ME Banjo RX 121 4 Sitar GM NED Sitar 2 NENE Sitar Tambou Sitar Sitar CET KSE SENG 359 9 3 pas oss Laks SR de wo EEEN per LS IE KAE Ac Baglama 1 IRA 107 CERTE SC ER MOM A CS EN EN NE WEE E MON EE WS ME RES WEN MEM 4 La 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 5 5 5 5 5 105 105 105 Indian Stars Indian Frets Tambra Ukulele Bouzouki 24 ala NI N axila 107 107 107 107 107 105 105 Kanoun 1 N Kanoun 2 N Kanoun Trem 1 N Kanoun Trem 2 N Kanoun Mix NI NI N N 2 2 Ac Baglama 2 Shamisen GM Koto GM N EJ Ea EN EZE EZS EW SCH E EM EM EN KE KCN EN N 107 107 ala N N Finger Tips Hackbrett N N los Reso Guitar N Country Nu 7 Pedal Steel Gtr1 Pedal Steel Gtr2 Jazz Man Tel Bridge 54 E Guitar Guitarish Mid Tone Gtr Single
519. tart point If you selected the Pedal Punch recording mode press the pedal when you want to begin recording Press it again to finish recording Note The Punch functions will not work on an empty Song At least one track must already be recorded 9 When finished recording press P M PLAY STOP to stop the sequencer Select a different track and go on recording the whole Song 10 When finished recording the new Song either press the RECORD button or select the Exit from Record com mand from the page menu see page 193 Warning Save the Song to a storage device to avoid it is lost when turning the instrument off Note When exiting the Record mode the Octave Transpose is automatically reset to 0 11 If you wish edit the new Song by pressing the MENU but ton and selecting the various edit pages Record mode Step Record page The Step Record allows you to create a new Song by entering sin gle notes or chords to each track This is very useful when tran scribing an existing score or needing a higher grade of detail and is particularly suitable to create drum and percussion tracks To access this page select the Overdub Step Recording or Overwrite Step Recording command from the page menu In Overdub Step Recording mode you will add to existing events while in Overwrite Step Recording mode you will overwrite all existing events Page sub header Page header Note parameters S0HG
520. te Clean Guitar Dead Clean Guitar Slap Clean Guitar Slide El Guitar Le Neck El Guitar Le Bridge El Guitar Le Mute p El Guitar Le Mute mf El Guitar Le Ghost El Guitar Le Ghost2 Tele Mute 5th pp Tele Mute 5th p Tele Mute 5th mf Tele Mute 5th f Tele Mute 5th ff Tele Mute 5th Key off El Guitar Harmonics El Guitar Gliss Down El Guitar Gliss Up El Guitar Noise El Guitar Short Noise El Guitar Fret Noise Jazz Guitarl Jazz Guitar2 Jazz Gib mellow p Jazz Gib mellow mf Jazz Gib mellow f Pedal Steel Guitar Resonator Guitar Dist Guitar Dist Guitar Harmo Dist Guitar2 Harmo Dist Guitar2 Mutel Dist Guitar2 Mute2 El Guitar DistMuted p El Guitar DistMuted mp El Guitar PowerChord1 El Guitar PowerChord2 El Guitar PowerChord3 Acoustic Bass1 Acoustic Bass2 mf Acoustic Bass2 f Acoustic Bass3 mp Factory data 271 Multisamples 359 Acoustic Bass3 mp VAR 407 MandolinLP 456 Wave Sweep3 505 Brass Fall 360 Acoustic Bass3 mf 408 Mandolin Tremolo 457 Syn Ghostly 506 Vox Wah Gtr 361 Acoustic Bass3 mf VAR 409 Mandolin Ensemble 458 Ghost 507 Vibe Chord 362 Acoustic Bass3 f 410 Banjo 459 Syn Air Pad 508 Zapl 363 Acoustic Bass3 f VAR 411 BanjoLP 460 Dream Str 509 Zap2 364 E Bassl Finger 412 Ukulele 461 Syn AirVortex 510 Stadium 365 E Bass2 P B 1 413 Shamisen 462 Syn Palawan 511 Applause 366 E Bass2 P B 2 414 Koto 463 Syn Clicker 512 Birds 367 E Bass2 LH Stop 415 M E Oud 464 Cricket Spectrum 513 Bir
521. te status a EI Play status The track can be heard Mute status The track cannot be heard Mixer Tuning FX Send This page lets you set the level of the track s direct uneffected signal going to the Internal FX processors The effect processors included in Pa800 are connected in parallel so you can decide which percentage of the direct signal can be effected Out L R In case you want to send all of a track s signal to the effect as when using insert effects like Rotary Distortion EQ just set the Pan to Off see Pan above Out UR There are four Internal FX processors in Sequencer mode grouped in two pairs AB and CD Usually you will create Songs with only a pair preferably AB but you can create Songs using both FX pairs We suggest to use A and C as reverb processors and B and D as modulating effect processors Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch between Song tracks 1 8 and 9 16 and vice versa SEQUENCER Mixer Tuning Bex Trk 51Tr 01 b Grand Piano B Piana 121 883 888 Trk 51T1r 61 t Grand Piano E Piano 121 883 8868 SEQUENCER Mixer Tuning Sequencer operating mode 183 Mixer Tuning FX Send SONG Use this pop up menu to select one of the two FX groups AB or CD FX Groups Send level SONG 0 127 Level of the track direct signal sent to the effect processor Play Mute icon SONG Track s play mute status Play status The track can be he
522. ted by a dot Zeroes at the beginning can be omitted as well as the least important parts of the number For example to enter position 002 02 193 dial 2 2 193 to enter position 002 04 000 dial 2 4 to enter position 002 01 000 simply dial 2 Type Type of the event shown in the display To edit it select the parameter and use the TEMPO VALUE controls to change its value Value 1 and 2 Values of the event shown in the display Depending on the selected event the value may change This parameter also shows the non editable End Of Track marking when the end of the track is reached Here are the events contained in ordinary tracks 1 16 prog Program Change number ONE Change number Control Change value Lr Mono Channel After touch value PAft Note to which the After Poly Aftertouch value touch is applied And here are the events contained in the Master track First value Second value Tempo change Volume Master Volume value Type Tempo Scale One of the available pre Root note for the set Scales selected Scale UScale User Scale Altered note Note alteration b QT Quarter Tone Altered note Note alteration 0 50 QT Clear Quarter Reset of all Quarter Tone Tone Clearing QT changes FXType One of the four available Effect number FX processors Feedback Send B gt A or Feedback send D gt C level a Meter changes can t be edited or inserte
523. ter thus playing perfectly in time High A 1 32 2 1 8 Grid resolution in musical values For example when you select 1 16 all notes are moved to the nearest 1 16 division When you select 1 8 all notes are moved to the nearest 1 8 division LR j ji jj 2 p No quantization applied 1 8 Start End Start and End locators These parameters area available only when the Auto Punch recording mode is selected They set the starting and ending points of the Punch recording Metro Metronome This is the metronome heard during recording Off No metronome click will be heard during record ing A one bar precount will be played before starting recording Onl Metronome on with a one bar precount before starting recording o v c o ne o EM Q cc 174 Sequencer operating mode Record mode Multitrack Sequencer page On2 Metronome on with a two bar precount before starting recording Tempo Select this parameter and use the TEMPO VALUE controls to set the tempo Note You can always change the Tempo when other parameters are selected by keeping the SHIFT button pressed and rotating the DIAL Meter This is the basic meter or time signature of the Song You can edit this parameter only when the Song is empty 1 e before you begin recording anything To insert a meter change in the middle of the Song use the Insert Measure function see page 190 Tempo Tempo mode
524. ters like Volume Pan Octave Transpose FX settings have to be edited in Style Play mode After creating or editing music patterns in Style Record mode save them by selecting the Write Style command from the page menu of the Style Record mode see Write Style dialog box on page 128 After editing track parameters in Style Play mode save them to the Style Performance by selecting the Write Style Performance command from the page menu of the Style Play mode see Write Style Performance dialog box on page 105 Style Import Export As an alternative to creating Styles on the Pa800 you can use Korg s Style To Midi application to import a Standard MIDI Files SMF from your computer to a Pa800 s Style The applica tion is freely downloadable from www korgpa com Please read the included instructions Style Record mode 107 Style Import Export Entering the Style Record mode While in the Style Play operating mode press the RECORD but ton The following page will appear in the display STYLEFPAD RECORD Select Record Edit Current Style to edit the current Style If it is a Factory Style you may not be able to save it at the original location depending on the status of the Factory Style and Pad Protect parameter see page 235 you will select a User Style instead When editing an existing Style the original Style Perfor mance is recalled but the following parameters are reset to t
525. th the entry In addition to helping you organize your shows the SongBook allows you to associate up to four STSs to each Standard MIDI File played back in Song Play mode This way it is easy to recall a complete setup for Keyboard tracks effects and the Voice Pro cessor for realtime playing over a midifile For more information on using the SongBook see the Quick Guide starting from page 58 Note SongBook entries do not include actual data but only a pointer to a Style in memory or a Standard MIDI File When you copy a SongBook file referenced files are not copied with it Warning If you load a SongBook list from a storage device SBD file the existing one in memory is deleted Save your old SongBook list before loading a new one Book The Book page contains the full database of song entries i e an SBD file While in this page you can select an entry and press the Select button in the display to start playback If the Enable List Edit command is selected in the page menu see above the Add to list button becomes available to let you add entries to the selected Custom List List Header ETET T 3 Type Mame Genre SS much afterworld Ballad Main list do A day in paradise PP Scrollbar Oidolo CSC H aranvy Jove Ballad Cb A hard day night Pop GERE A whiter shade Ballad Add to list Select Commands Book Book Custom List Lyrics Inf Edit 1 f Edit 2 List Edit STS n
526. the Write Global Global Setup command from the page menu E If needed press one of the buttons in the MODE section to go to the desired operative mode Connecting the Pa800 to an external sequencer You can program a new song on an external sequencer using Pa800 as a multi timbral expander Connections and settings In order to connect the Pa800 to a computer you need to have a computer with the MIDI interface 1 In case you will connect the computer and the Pa800 via the USB port install the Korg USB MIDI Driver as explained in Installing the Korg USB MIDI Driver on page 295 e Connect the Pa800 and the computer either via the USB Device port or via the MIDI ports and a MIDI interface as shown in the following diagram 7 uf
527. the volume of all similar tracks Note This does not work in Song Play mode Q SLIDER MODE First select one of the Upper tracks Then keep SHIFT pressed and move one of the sliders to proportionally change the volume of all Upper tracks at the same time This works in Style Play mode First press TRACK SELECT and select one of the separate Style tracks Then keep SHIFT pressed and move one of the sliders to proportionally change the volume of all Style tracks at the same time This works in Style Play mode Keep SHIFT pressed and move one of the sliders to pro portionally change the volume of all Song tracks at the same time This works in Sequencer mode PERF STS STS Use this button to select one of the three available operating modes for the sliders The sliders can be freely programmed in Global mode see Controllers Assignable Sliders on page 202 ASSIGN A ASSIGN B Pa SOO host While this mode is active the sliders control two parameters related to the microphone By default the left slider controls the volume while the right one controls the FX level First set of freely assignable controls Second set of freely assignable controls MODE section Each of these buttons recalls one of the instrument s operating modes When selected each mode excludes the others STYLE PLAY Style Play mode where you can play Styles auto matic accompaniments and play up to four Key board trac
528. then on again Hint You can save your preferred Performances into the first loca tion of each bank This way by turning on this parameter you will select your preferred Performance at the touch of a single button Also note that by turning the Factory Style and Pad Protect an Factory Sound Protect2 parameters off you can do the same with the Styles and Sounds o v c Q i o EM Q cc 202 Global edit mode Controllers Pedal Switch Controllers Pedal Switch This page lets you select a function to the Assignable Pedal Foot switch and select the polarity for the Damper and Assignable Pedal Footswitch GLOBAL Controllers Assigns Sliders See page 286 for a list of the assignable functions The first func tions are switch type functions while the remaining starting from Master Volume are continuous like functions Pedal Footswitch gt GBL Continuous pedal or footswitch connected to the ASSIGN ABLE PDL SW connector Damper Polarity gt GBLS Polarity of the Damper pedal Pedal Switch Polarity gt GBLS Polarity of the Assignable pedal or footswitch Controllers Assignable Sliders This page lets you program the two Assignable Sliders Three sets are available Mic A and B You can assign the preferred set by using the SLIDER MODE button on the control panel respec tively selecting the MIC A or B mode The status of the SLIDER MODE button can be saved with the P
529. time to select the corresponding track detailed information are shown on the Selected Track Info area see above Touch it a second time to open the Sound Select win dow Volume panel Press the Volume tab to select this panel This is where you can set the volume of each track and mute unmute tracks Use the TRACK SELECT button to switch from Normal Key board and Mic In tracks to Song Tracks 1 8 and Song Tracks 9 16 views The Normal view shows Mic In controls and Keyboard tracks MIC IM LOWER UPPERS UPPERS UPPERI TH1 IL LR Tad TAS THE Tar TAS Lyrics E Mark UE TI Juke Box Track status icon Virtual slider Virtual sliders track volume Virtual sliders are a graphical display of each track s volume Touch the track s area to select a track and use TEMPO VALUE controls to change the value The volume of Keyboard tracks may be saved to a Performance while the Song track volume is not memorized Track status icons gt PERF STS gt GBLS 9 Play mute status of the current track Select the track then press this area to change the track status The status of Keyboard tracks may be saved to a Performance or STS See Keyboard track status on page 145 for more information a EX Note You can save this setting into the Global Song Play Setup by choosing the Write Global Song Play Setup command from the page menu to leave the track status unchanged when selecting a different
530. tions Sounds assigned to each track can be imported provided the Program Change Bank Select MSB and LSB events are on the first tick of the SME These data are loaded in the Style Ele ment s header and not as Sounds assigned to the Style Perfor mance Note Sounds in the Style Element header can be overridden by Sounds assigned to the Style Performance by checking the Origi nal Style Sound parameter in the main page of the Style Play mode Style Track view If the above data was not found on the first tick of the imported SMF Sounds must be manually assigned to each track You can do this in the Record 1 or Record 2 or the Sound Expression page of the Style Record mode Key Chord Chord Table Expression and any other Style Vari ation parameter must be manually programmed in the relevant Style Record pages The starting Tempo and each track s Volume must be pro grammed as Style Performance data and then saved in the Style Performance e Meter Change is not allowed therefore not recognized The Chord Variation length is the same as the imported SMF You can change length by changing the value of the CV Length parameter on the main page of the Style Record mode Hint If a note extends beyond the last measure of the Chord Varia tion an additional measure 1s appended for example if a note extends after the end of the fourth measure in a 4 measure pattern a 5 measure
531. to confirm or Cancel to abort Note Loading a whole SET folder from an 130 file may take very long You are advised to load a single bank or a single Style a time 7 Go to the Style Play mode and select one of the loaded Style Adjust the Tempo then select the Write Current Style Performance to write changes to the Style Perfor mance Press OK twice to confirm 8 Due to the difference in Sounds you will probably want to make some adjustments to the old Styles once they are loaded in Pa800 changing the Sound Volume Pan Tempo Drum Mapping Wrap Around o V c o i o tim Q cc 228 Media edit mode 10 Save To make the Sound assignment to the Style tracks effective be sure the Original Style Sounds parameter is not checked see page 85 Save the Style Performance again Select the Write Current Style Performance to write changes to the Style Perfor mance Press OK to confirm Save In this page you can save User data from the internal memory to a mass storage device like an hard disk or an USB pen drive You can save single files banks or all the User and Favorite Style files of the internal memory i e the SSD device 21 45 46 15 07 Save To zu Prefer Copy Erase f Format Utility en ac USE Note While in this page only data allowed for saving are shown All other files are hidden Here are the various types of files contained in the internal mem
532. to the Internal FX processors A and B for the Style and Pad tracks C and D for the Keyboard tracks You can set the volume using the MASTER VOLUME slider Internal FX The track is connected to the 1 amp 2 sub outs in stereo It is not sent to the Internal FX processors The MASTER VOLUME slider has no effect on it Track gt Out 1 The selected track is connected to the sub out 1 It is mixed to mono It is not sent to the Internal FX processors The MASTER VOLUME slider has no effect on it Out 2 The selected track is connected to the sub out 2 It is mixed to mono It is not sent to the Internal FX processors The MASTER VOLUME slider has no effect on it L Mono amp Right Out 1 2 Audio Output Seq1 This page lets you connect Sequencer 1 tracks to the audio out puts These setting are also applied to the Sequencer mode GLOBAL Audio Setup Li Left Right Tracks gt GB Use these parameters to assign an audio output OUTPUT sec tion on the back of the instrument to each track See Audio Output Sty Kbd on page 206 for more information Audio Output Seq2 This page lets you connect Sequencer 2 tracks to the audio out puts GLOBAL Audio Setup k Left Right Tracks gt GBL Use these parameters to assign an audio output OUTPUT sec tion on the back of the instrument to each track See Audio Output Sty Kbd on page 206 for more information Audio Outp
533. to transmit over the Global channel of the Pa800 see MIDI MIDI In Channels on page 204 For information on the master keyboard programming see the master keyboard own user s manual 3 Select the MIDI Setup parameter You can do this by going to the MIDI MIDI Setup General Controls page of the Global mode or in the dedicated page of the Style Play Song Play or Sequencer mode see Midi Setup on page 102 Midi Setup on page 158 and Midi Setup on page 191 Note A different MIDI Setup may be selected for the Style Play Song Play and Sequencer modes The 1 Default MIDI Setup is automatically selected when entering the Sound Edit mode MIDI settings are therefore modified when switching to a different operating mode The current MIDI Setup is also shown in the Global mode 4 Select the Master Keyboard MIDI Setup Note Settings may change when new Global data is loaded from disk To protect settings from loading use the Global Protect function see Global Protect on page 235 5 To save the assigned MIDI Setup for the selected operative mode into the Global select the Write Global Style Setup the Write Global Song Play Setup the Write Global Seq Setup or the Write Global Global Setup command from the page menu e If needed press one of the buttons in the MODE section to go to the desired operative mode Connecting the Pa800 to a MIDI accordi
534. tom Top Note Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard range to be transposed Execute Press this button to execute the operation set in this page Pad Edit Velocity In this page you can change the velocity dynamics value of notes in the selected track PAD REC Pad Edit Delete f Copy fm Copy fm After setting the various parameters press Execute CV Chord Variation Use this parameter to select the Chord Variation for editing Value Velocity change value 127 Intensity Only available in Advanced mode Use this parameter to specify the degree to which the velocity data will be adjusted toward the curve you specify in Curve Curve Only available in Advanced mode Use this parameter to select from six types of curve and specify how the velocity will change over time Start End Vel Value Only available in Advanced mode Velocity change at the start ing and ending ticks of the selected range Start End Tick Use these parameters to set the starting and ending points of the range to be modified Bottom Top Note Use these parameters to set the bottom and top of the keyboard range to be modified Advanced When this checkbox is checked the Intensity Curve Start Velocity Value and End Velocity Value parameters can be edited Execute Press this button to execute the operation set in this page Pad Edit Cut This fun
535. track in semitone steps up to a maximum of 12 semitones relative to the chord root set in Style Record mode see Key Chord on page 111 It is advisable to set different Wrap Around points for each track to avoid all tracks jump to a different octave at the same time IM 12 Maximum transposition in semitones of the track referred to the original key of the Style pat tern Play Mute icon PERF gt PERFSY Track s play mute status Play status The track can be heard Mute status The track cannot be heard Pad Switch Pad This page lets you select a different sound for each of the four PAD buttons STYLE PLAY Pad Assign Switch za Pad 1 Fad 2 Pad 3 Pad d Crash 2 EMwindchimes 1 Rain Stick Tamb Rec 1 Note You can also assign different Sounds from the Pad panel of the main page Pad assignment PERF PPERFSU SB ini Name of the Hit or Sequence assigned to each Pad Press the box to make the Pad Select window appear see Pad Select window on page 79 Volume PERF PPERFSU gt SB il Volume for each of the four Pad tracks Pan PERF gt PERFSY SB ini Pan for each of the four Pad tracks 64 1 Left stereo channel 0 Center 1 63 Right stereo channel A Send PERF gt PERFSY SB ii Send level to the A Internal FX processor usually reverb for each of the four Pad tracks B Send gt PERF PERF9 SB ii Send level to the B Internal FX processor usually
536. tro The INTRO LED automatically goes off at the end of the intro Press them twice LED blinking to let them play in loop and select any other Style element Fill Intro Variation to exit the loop Note Intro 1 plays a short sequence with different chords while Intro 2 plays on the latest recognized chord Intro 3 is usually a one bar Count In ENDING 1 3 buttons PERF gt PERFSY SB While the Style is running these three buttons trigger an End ing and stop the Style Press one of them and the Style will stop running with an Ending If pressed while the Style is stopped they act as three additional Intros Press them twice LED blinking to let them play in loop and select any other Style element Fill Intro Variation to exit the loop Note Ending 1 plays a short sequence with different chords while Ending 2 plays on the latest recognized chord Ending 3 starts immediately and is just two measures long 9 VARIATION 1 4 buttons PERF PERFS gt SB Each of these buttons selects one of the four variations of the current Style Each variation can vary in patterns and sounds Front panel 13 FILL 1 3 BREAK buttons PER PERFS gt SB These buttons trigger a fill in Press them twice LED blinking to let them play in loop and select any other Style element Fill Intro Variation to exit the loop Note Fill 3 is usually a Break Note This function can be automatically activated by play
537. tyle Select window and select a different Performance see Style Select window on page 79 To select an STS use the four SINGLE TOUCH SETTING but tons under the display Backing Sequence grouped tracks area Grouped tracks status indicators These giant indicators show the status of the Backing Sequence grouped tracks They reflect the status of the Kbd Pad and Ch Acc parameters see Chord Acc Kbd Pad above Selected track info area This line lets you see the Sound assigned to the selected track See Selected track info area on page 171 for more information Track volume status area This area is where you can set the volume of each single Key board track and mute unmute tracks Virtual sliders track volume Graphical display of each track s volume See Virtual slider track volume on page 172 for more information Individual track status icons While you can change the status of all Keyboard tracks at once by using the Kbd Pad Backing Sequence track you can also change the status of each single track Press this icon to change the status of the corresponding individual track D Play status The track can be heard EI Mute status The track cannot be heard Track names Under the sliders a label for each track is shown MIC IN Audio inputs UPPERI 3 Upper tracks LOWER Lower track Backing Sequence Quick Record recording procedure Here is the general procedure to follow for the Backing Se
538. u Easy Mode Easy Mode allows you to use the Style Play and Song Play modes with an easier to use user interface It is recommended to begin ners and to professionals alike that do not want to deal with the extra parameters of the Advanced mode At any time you can manually turn the Easy Mode on off with the Easy Mode command in the page menu of the Style Play and Song Play modes See The Song Play page in detail on page 8 for more informa tion Write Global Song Play Setup dialog box Open this dialog box by selecting the Write Global Song Play Setup item from the page menu Here you can save various Song Preference settings see Preferences Track Settings on page 158 that are saved to the Global file Write Global Song Play Setup cancer J OK Parameters saved in the Song Play Setup area of the Global are marked with the gt GBL symbol through the user s manual Song Play operating mode Write Global Song Play Setup dialog box 161 o v c Q i o tim Q cc 162 SongBook Book List Header The SongBook is an onboard database that allows you to orga nize various musical resources Style Standard MIDI Files KAR files for easy retrieving The SongBook mode overlaps the Style Play and Song Play oper ating modes When you select an entry from the database the Style Play or Song Play mode is automatically selected depend ing on the type of file associated wi
539. u to set the Pa800 in Local Off mode see Local Control On on page 203 to avoid that the notes are simulta neously played by the keyboard and by the MIDI events sent by the external sequencer When the Pa800 is in Local Off the Pa800 keyboard transmits data to the external sequencer but not to the internal sound gen eration The sequencer will receive the notes played on the Pa800 keyboard and send them to the selected track of the song The track will transmit the data to the internal sound generation of the Pa800 Note In order to send data to the Pa800 sound generation the MIDI Thru function must be activated in the external sequencer normally active the name may be different according to the type of sequencer For more information refer to the instructions man ual of the sequencer The Sounds The song that is played back by the computer sequencer can select Pa800 Sounds through the MIDI messages Bank Select MSB Bank Select LSB bank selection two messages and Pro gram Change Sound selection For a list of Sounds and MIDI values see Sounds Program Change order on page 260 A suggestion for those who program songs on computer Even though it is not essential you usually set the bass on channel 2 melody on channel 4 drum kit on channel 10 control of the Pa800 voice harmonizer on channel 5 o 6 c Q i o B Q cc 244 MIDI Playing another instrument with the Pa800 Playing another i
540. uch afberworld Ballad H day in Paradise PoP eee The corresponding items in the page menu are automatically updated to reflect these changes see Sort by Type Name Genre Artist Key Tempo Meter on page 169 By pressing the label again the order of the files switches between ascending and descending Scrollbar Use the scrollbar to scroll the entries Commands Filtered When this box is checked only entries matching the selected fil ter criteria are shown in the Main list The box is automatically checked when you exit from the Filter dialog box by pressing OK see below Filter Press this button to open the Filter dialog box and select one or more filter criteria to show a restricted set of entries in the main list Filter Press the T Text Edit button next to the search criteria you want to edit Name Genre or Artist You can also select a Meter or a range of Tempo values Press the Clear button next to the search criterion you want to delete or set to a default value Press Clear All to reset all search criteria excluding Tempo Add to list Select an entry then press this button to add the selected entry to the current Custom List see Custom List on page 167 Select Press this button to confirm selection of the highlighted entry in the main list After pressing this button the name of the selected entry appears in the left upper corner of the display N When
541. uencer The Sequencer acts as a recorder so you can capture and play back your performances The Pa800 sequencer can function in different modes In the Backing Sequence mode each Style ele ment and each Real Time Keyboard and Pads element can be recorded on a separate track in a single pass This can be a big help in getting a song recorded quickly The sequencer can also behave as a traditional 16 track linear sequencer where each track is recorded individually one at a time The LOGO decoder On the front panel of your Pa800 you have probably noticed three logos and may have even wondered what they stand for Well here is a quick explanation of each one RX Technology is the cutting edge engine that drives every aspect of the Pa800 from the synthesis to the display and how it all works together TECHNOLOGY A variety of professional vocal effects are provided by the Pa800 including reverb delay compression and even three part vocal harmo nies All of the vocal effects apart for reverb are provided by TC Helicon the leader in vocal processing technology TEHELICON o VOCAL TECHNOLOGIES General MIDI GM is a standard that ensures the compatibility of sounds and messages between GM compatible instruments available from different manufacturers For example sequenced songs created on any GM equipped product and saved in the GM format will playback correctly on the Pa800 ENERA E 7 27 Inte
542. uencer mode the Pa800 is slaved to an exter nal device connected to its MIDI IN port The Start Stop and Play Stop commands as well as the metronome tempo cannot be selected from the control panel of the Pa800 Use the external device to set the tempo and start or stop the sequencer or arranger Ext USB As the above but referred to the USB Device port See Installing the Korg USB MIDI Driver on page 295 for information on how to configure your computer for MIDI Over USB communica tion Local Control On The Local parameter turns the keyboard on or off Note The Local parameter is automatically reactivated each time you turn the instrument on On When you play the keyboard MIDI data is sent to the internal sound generator If tracks are assigned to a MIDI OUT channel data is also sent to the MIDI OUT or USB Device port Off The keyboard is connected to the MIDI OUT but cannot play the internal sound generator This is very useful when working with an external sequencer to send notes and various MIDI mes sages from the integrated keyboard and control lers to the external sequencer and then let the sequencer send them back to the sound genera tor without overlapping See the MIDI chapter Q U c o Se o hen Q cc 204 Global edit mode MIDI MIDI In Control MIDI MIDI In Control This page lets you program general parameters for the MIDI IN like the Chord Recognition channel
543. um Pere xm 9 ue mikebrmew ormare Y Lxm 1 Ne concer Basbrum pum amp ee Y xm 9 7 Metodictom eM ormare v xm 1 meedere formere Y Lx Ow ReveseTom r SS SS we 3 pw 9 p xm 1 ws ferres eg rs ewm RER 3 o i 3 xm 9 we Fite cw sings vo o 268 Factory data Drum Kits Drum Kits The following table lists all Pa800 Factory Drum Kits in order of Bank Select Program Change number Legend The table also includes MIDI data used to remotely select the Drum Kits CCOO Control Change 0 or Bank Select MSB CC32 Control Change 32 or Bank Select LSB PC Program Change CCOO CC32 P 120 Standard Kit RX3 N NI N ojoj o eo eo Standard Kit RX1 Standard Kit RX4 N o 5 NJI N oj o N o o HipHop Kit 1 Jungle Kit Techno Kit 1 Room Kit 2 HipHop Kit 2 Techno Kit 2 Techno Kit 3 Power Kit GM Power Kit 2 Power Kit RX1 Power Kit RX2 20 23 remap to 16 Electro Kit GM Analog Kit GM House Kit 1 House Kit 2 House Kit 3 rem House Kit RX1 31 32 l N N oj CH o N N o 3 N N oj o vI 120 120 2 2 120 N elo zlrlelel o 6 D 5 3 v o 3 a u Z 2 2 Ep oc oio Ala Q 35 zs LS zl gt ojo ol 512 AIT z gt x 2 2 0 N ech o 120 120 120 120 120 N O N Di lo 3 N amp House Kit RX2 31
544. und GLOBAL Menu Each item in this menu corresponds to an edit section Each edit section groups various edit pages that may be selected by press ing the corresponding tab on the lower part of the display Note The Global mode is not available while in Record mode Style Record Pad Record Song Record Sampling Edit page structure All edit pages share some basic elements Edit mode Edit section Page menu icon GLOBAL General Controls Parameters area DA Medium 2 4 L Transp Inter Basie f cl Seale Look ICT Tabs Eeer Edit mode This indicates that the instrument is in Global mode Edit section This identifies the current edit section corresponding to one of the items of the edit menu see Edit menu on page 196 Page menu icon Press this icon to open the page menu see Page menu on page 210 Parameters area Each page contains various parameters Use the tabs to select one of the available pages For detailed information on the vari ous types of parameters see sections starting from page 197 Tabs Use tabs to select one of the edit pages of the current edit section General Controls Basic This page contains various general parameters setting the status of the keyboard the fade in out and the accelerando ritar dando GLOBAL General Controls Transp Inter Keyboard Settings Velocity Curve gt GBL This parameter sets the sensitivity of the keyboa
545. up to that mea sure see Locate measure on page 171 In Jukebox mode Sequencer 1 keep the SHIFT button pressed and press these buttons to scroll to the previous or next Song in the Jukebox list see Jukebox Editor on page 156 Sends the Song Position back to measure 1 1 e the beginning of the Song iq HOME In Sequencer mode if you set a Locate Measure other than 1 the Song Position goes back to that measure see Locate measure on page 171 gt M PLAY STOP Starts or stops the Song from the current Song Position SHIFT In Song Play mode pressed while keep ing SHIFT pressed starts both sequencers at the same time amp SEQUENCER BALANCE slider In Song Play mode this slider balances the volume of the two on board sequencers When fully on the left only Sequencer 1 can be heard When fully on the right only Sequencer 2 can be heard When in the middle both sequencers play at full volume This slider does not work in Style Play or Sequencer mode 9 SEQUENCER 2 TRANSPORT CONTROLS Transport controls for Sequencer 2 See instructions for Sequencer 1 above TEMPO VALUE section MPERF PERF SB The DIAL and the DOWN and UP buttons can be used to control the Tempo assign a different value to the selected parameter in the display or scroll a list of files in the Song Select and Media pages DIAL Turn the dial clockwise to increase the value or tempo Turn it counter
546. ut DAC audio con verters Color TouchView Graphical User Interface Two fully programmable sliders and switches 2 X 22 Watt digital bi amplification with auto loudness and fixed digital equalizer Two way Bass Reflex system for realistic sound reproduction 2 X USB 2 0 High Speed Host ports for connecting exter nal devices like hard disks CD ROM drives USB memory sticks etc A single USB 1 1 Full Speed Device port to connect a per sonal computer to your Pa800 This port can be used for file transfer and for MIDI connection without the need of a dedicated MIDI interface for the PC Live Performing Pa800 has been carefully designed to be used live The realtime word has its full meaning in this instrument Performances allow the instant selection of all the tracks on the keyboard and a suitable Style STSs allow an instant selection of the keyboard tracks Styles are the realtime backing companions for your real time playing Songs can be mixed in realtime the SongBook is the quick way to select a song from a sophisticated music data base Easy Mode If you are the kind of musician that prefers to play more than deal with technical matters you can use the Pa800 in Easy Mode and forget all its most powerful features and let them out of your way Useful links Your preferred Korg dealer not only carries this keyboard but also a whole bunch of hardware and software accessories You shoul
547. ut Drums This page lets you route Drum Kit Sounds to the audio outputs GLOBAL Audio Setup See Audio Output Sty Kbd on page 206 for more information about the available audio outputs Drum Output gt GBL This parameter lets you decide if Drum Kit Sounds will be sent to the single output or output pair defined for the track they are assigned to or each drum category will be sent to a different output Track When this option is selected Drum Kits will be sent to the output selected in one of the previous pages for the tracks they are assigned to Drum Category When this option is selected you can select a dif ferent output for each category of Drum Kit sounds Use the Drum Category box below to select an output for each category of percussive sounds Drum Category gt GBL amp Kick Bass Drum category Snare Snare Drum category Tom Tom category Hi Hat Hi Hat category Cymbals Cymbals category Perc 1 Low pitched percussion category Perc 2 High pitched percussion category Perc FX Sound FX category Global edit mode Audio Output Drums 207 Audio Output Audio In This page lets you connect the Audio Inputs and the Voice Pro cessor to the audio outputs GLOBAL Audio Setup Li Left Right GLOBAL Audio Setup Ga in to Direct See Audio Output Sty Kbd on page 206 for more information on the available audio outputs Input Routing Use this pop up menu t
548. uto matically select a differ ent Style and its settings Sounds effects Draw bar settings for the Style tracks Saving your settings to a Performance All the control panel settings plus the Keyboard track settings selected effects and Voice Processor Preset can be saved to a single Performance to be quickly recalled at a later time O Note To open the Write Performance dia log box you can press the SHIFT one of the PERFORMANCE buttons 1 Press the page menu icon to open the page menu Page menu icon Page menu 40 Selecting and saving Performances Saving your settings to a Performance 2 Select the Write Performance command to open the Write Performance dialog box Write Performance l Piano After choosing the Write Performance menu item the Write Performance dia log box appears 3 If you like you may assign a new name to the Performance Write Performance 000 010 0 010 E a Piano O00Bo004900D00 Pr als Bor ep Mo o Ba BaggBBSBSH nog mE Coe Cows ox Press the T symbol to open the Text Edit dialog box Press Clear to delete the whole string Delete to Use the and gt buttons to move the cursor delete just a single charac ter Press Symbol to enter special charac ters Use alphabetical characters to enter text Use the SHIFT but ton to switch between capitals and small charac ters When done press OK to co
549. ve Song Marker Seq 2 depending on the sequencer where you created the markers The markers will be saved into the midifile Auto Scroll Check this parameter if you want the current marker to be always visible in the display during playback by making the list of markers scroll automatically Don t check this parameter if you prefer to prevent the list from scrolling This is useful if you want a marker to remain in the display ready to be selected as soon as you want to jump to its position with no need to scroll the list to catch it out STS Name of the four selected Single Touch Settings STS Touch one of them to select it Options side tab Press this side tab to access the Options panel and adjust the various video settings see details below O bis Display Controls Use these parameters to define how lyrics are shown in the dis play To set the external display see External Display on page 209 Characters gt GBLS 9 Size of fonts You can choose between a smaller and a bigger font Link int and ext video gt GBLS 9 When checked settings for the internal display are automatically mirrored to the external video monitor Show chords gt GBLS 9 If this parameter is checked chords are shown above lyrics in the display provided the midifile contains them o v c Q i o tia Q cc 150 Song Play operating mode STS Name panel TXT File Text Follow gt GBLS 9
550. ver USB is supported so you can use this connector instead of the MIDI ports see What is MIDI Over USB on page 240 HOST R This is a USB Type A Master Host connector USB 2 0 compliant High Speed It duplicates the USB connector located in the front panel Use VIDEO OUT it to connect to the Pa800 an USB Flash Memory stick an external CD ROM drive an USB hard disk To access the connected device go to the Media edit mode see Media edit mode on page 222 PEDAL connectors These connectors allow for connection of external pedals DAMPER Use this to connect a Damper pedal like the Korg PSI or DSIH To change its polarity see Damper Polarity on page 202 ASSIGNABLE Use this port to connect a continuous or foot switch type pedal like the Korg EXP2 or XVP10 To program it see Pedal Footswitch on page 202 EC5 This connects to a Korg EC5 multiswitch to con trol many functions in realtime To program the EC5 see EC5 A E on page 202 Q MIDI INTERFACE The MIDI interface allows your Pa800 to be connected to exter nal controllers master keyboard MIDI guitar wind controller MIDI accordion to a series of expanders or to a computer running a sequencer For more information on how to use the MIDI interface see the MIDI chapter IN This connector receives MIDI data from a com puter or a controller Connect it to an external controller s or computer s MIDI OU
551. want to convert Preferences Global Setup In this page you can select a MIDI Setup and the Harmony track for the Sequencer mode SEQUENCER Preferences mn amd 9 G3 Sequencer 1 Note These settings are stored in the Sequencer Setup area of the Global file Parameter of this kind are marked with the GBL s abbreviation through the manual After changing these settings select the Write Global Sequencer Setup command from the page menu to save them to the Global Midi Setup gt GBLSe4 MIDI channels for the Sequencer mode can be automatically configured by selecting a MIDI Setup with this parameter See MIDI on page 240 for more information on using MIDI Set ups Note To automatically select a MIDI Setup when entering the Sequencer mode select the Write Global Sequencer Setup com mand from the page menu For detailed information on MIDI Setup settings see MIDI Setup on page 285 o v c Q i o tia Q cc 192 Sequencer operating mode Page menu Note After selecting a MIDI Setup you can go to the Global mode and apply any change to each channel setting To store these changes to a MIDI Setup while still in Global mode select the Write Global Midi Setup command from the page menu All MIDI Set ups can be freely customized and overwritten Hint To restore the original MIDI Setups load the original Fac tory data again available on the supplied Accessory CD or down loa
552. want to play the keyboard in C while seeing the original chords in the display set to Off the Transpose applies to Style and Kbd tracks parameter and check the Transpose applies to Sequencer 1 2 parameter Transpose Control Transpose applies to Style and Kbd tracks GBL amp Use this parameter to turn the Master Transpose on or off and define the way it is applied to Style and Keyboard tracks Off No Master Transpose is applied to Style and Key board tracks In Sync When you press either the TRANSPOSE p or a buttons the new transpose setting will not take effect until the first beat of the next measure is reached In Realtime When you press either the TRANSPOSE p or a buttons the new transpose setting will occur when the next note is played for both the Style and Keyboard tracks individually The next key or chord you press will sound with the new transpose setting applied Note that if you play a Keyboard track prior to a new chord the Keyboard track will play in the new key as the Style will continue to play in the old key until a new chord is entered Transpose applies to Sequencer 1 2 gt GBL This flag lets you turn the Master Transpose on or off for the two onboard Sequencers Transpose applies to Midi In notes gt GBL This flag lets you turn the Master Transpose on or off for Note messages received from MIDI IN Position Scale and Transpose position The Scale and Tra
553. ways equal to or a divider of the Chord Variation Length see next parameter Warning If you assign CV Length a value lower than Rec Length the value of Rec Length is not immediately updated in the display Therefore you are still free of changing the value of CV Length before the measures exceeding its value are deleted see warning in CV Length Chord Variation Length below However if you press START STOP to begin recording the real Rec Length value is changed to the new one even if the display still shows the old value CV Length Chord Variation Length PAD This parameter sets the total length up to 32 measures for the selected Chord Variation When playing a Style this will be the length of the accompaniment pattern when the chord corre sponding to the Chord Variation is recognized on the keyboard Warning If you reduce the Chord Variation Length after recording any measure after the selected length will be deleted Be very careful when setting the CV Length to a lower value after recording If it happens we suggest to exit from record without saving see Exit from Record on page 141 Metro Metronome This is where you can set the metronome Off No metronome click will be heard during record ing In any case a one bar precount will be played before starting recording Onl Metronome on with a one bar precount before starting recording On2 Metronome on with a two bar precount before st
554. y Mode If you have never used an arranger before we suggest you to At this point the Easy Mode has been activated and the ele switch to the Easy Mode Easy Mode allows you to play Styles ments in the display appear less cluttered and Songs with a simple user interface free from the many STYLE PLAY advanced parameters that you will want to learn at a later date Turning the Easy Mode on Touch the little rectangle on the top right corner of the display to open the page menu STYLE PLAY no chord EE STS 2 Mylon Guitar STS d Vibes Piano Turning the Easy Mode off The instrument will stay in this mode even after having been turned off Repeat the above operation when you want to deacti MIC IM LOWER UPPERS UPPER UPPER vate the Easy Mode T Sub soe Pas f se Switching between Styles and Songs Depending on what you want to play you must switch to Style Play mode or Song Play mode gt e Press the STYLE PLAY button to switch to the Style Play mode and play Styles This is the mode you are in when you The page menu first turn the instrument on Press the SONG PLAY button to switch to the Song Play mode and play Songs STYLE SONG PLAY PLAY SEQUENCER SOUND Ie O Touch the Easy Mode menu item to make the checkmark appear The Style Play page in detail Style name and info Touch the Style s name to open the Style Select window and choose a di
555. y Style Element using the control panel buttons VARIATION 1 4 INTRO 1 2 FILL 1 2 ENDING 1 3 Press START STOP again to stop the playback Note While in Style mode the Fingered 3 Chord Scanning mode is automatically selected List of recorded events The Style Record mode filters out some events that may cause wrong operation of the Style Here are the recorded events and the most important filtered out events Control function Allowed Note On RX Noise On Pitch Bend LEE ME NN Dampers ANI EIERE Note Some Control Change messages cannot be recorded directly by using Pa800 integrated controls All allowed controllers can be assigned to an Assignable Pedal Slider Switch MIDI Control Change messaged inserted by using a software on an external computer are imported when using the Style to Midi application available from www korgpa com Some controllers are reset at the end of the pattern Main page Record 1 After pressing the RECORD button and having chosen whether you want to edit an existing Style or create a new one the main page of the Style Record mode appears with the tab Record 1 selected Page sub header Page header Page menu icon Recording WEA Ad parame JEE ters area Element Rec Length Tempo d 128 m m Chord Yar P Cv 1 C Length Meter 4 4 Selected track info Im Jazz Kit RX1 B Drum amp Perc 120 880 833 Resolution Higa Metro F
556. y data Drum Samples reme e 95 oronkoto Boca Open mp 5 Su okonkoto Boca Open m 5 Okonkolo Boca Open f i er Okonkolo Boca Open ff EE Sw okontoto chacha Open mp 6 s okonkoto Chacha Open mf 6 S okonkolo Chacha Open t 6 556 okonkoto Chacha Open 5 SS okonkoloChacha Slap mp 5 59 okonkolo chacha Sap m 5 55 okonkoloChacha slap t 5 sa ferao s baya ne 55 baya neUpa f 557 Baya GheUp b ER GN oa SES RES SS ES 6 RS 65 Baya KaPalm 5 ECN 5 MEAN NT 59 mew e eng Ir oe JL on retama o su pewrown Ir oer ln om Ir omg Ir omg Ir m RW 99 WT 95 wires Tabla2 Na b h x 59 mms EC 59 bez 6 Sw wes f 6 55 uberes sw wee 6 sw uera 8 59 wwe e 55 muume EC 5 wr CR ma moe Jr 5 wmm 59 Timbaest to Open 6 S9 imones to Openmf 6 595 timbalest to taet 6 595 mmseslotde f 597 timbalest Lo Rimshor 6 508 TimbalesT Lo Abanico 6 59 imeat 6 59 timbalestto Mutemt 6 eor Timbalestto mutef 5 Timbales1 Lo Paila f sw rimbalestHiopen 6 A ren 95 imaisi 5 606 Fimbalest HS 5 Timbales1 Hi RimShot f ee eos opdeet 5 509 enden Abanico 506 Fimbolest Hi Abanico ai imeem Sw Timbales21o Open 616 rimbales2Lo Rin mg epes 6 632 633 634 Agogo Bell 31 Chacha Bell chachaBel eg memos 63 Triangle
557. ying Sounds 35 Playing different Sounds with your left and right hand Playing different Sounds with your left and right hand You can play a single Sound with your left hand in addition to playing up to three Sounds with your right hand 1 Press the SPLIT button in the KEYBOARD MODE section on the control panel to split the keyboard into Lower left hand and Upper right hand parts KEYBOARD MODE SPLIT FULL UPPER i 2 Be sure the Lower track is set to play If the Lower track is muted press k its MEITE icon to make it disap LE pear from this area 3 Play the keyboard Note how the keyboard is split into two parts each playing dif O in You can Ge AMNEM different Sound for the Lower part by follow el ing the same procedure used for the Upper 1 track See page 31 Lower Upper 4 Return to the full keyboard playing mode by pressing the FULL UPPER button in the KEYBOARD MODE section on the control panel KEYBOARD MODE SPLIT FULL UPPER
558. yle commands and chords played on the keyboard While in Sequencer mode press the RECORD button and select the Backing Sequence Quick Record option The Backing Sequence Quick Record page appears Page sub header Page header Page menu icon Recording B 5EQ RECORD IE no chord B parame JM ters area gt Style Meditation Bossa Kbd Pad K Rec Tempo J 128 Free Memory 99 Ch Acc H Rec Meter 4 4 Selected Resolution P High 121 003 035 area Chord ficc Track track info Trk Upper 1 gt Sweet Fretless Ebas Kbd Pad Track B S grouped tracks area MIC IM LOWER UPPERS UPPERZ UPPER Track volume status area See Backing Sequence Quick Record recording procedure on page 178 for information on the record procedure Page header See Page header on page 170 Page menu icon See Page menu icon on page 171 Page sub header See Page sub header on page 173 Recording parameters area Style This parameter shows the selected Style Either press it or press one of the STYLE buttons to open the Style Select window and select a different Style see Style Select window on page 79 Free memory Percentage of remaining memory for recording Resolution Use this parameter to set the quantization during recording Quantization is a way of correcting timing errors notes played too soon or too late are moved to the nearest axis of a rhythmic grid
559. you can see lyrics contained in a TXT file with the same name of the Song file contained in the same folder as the Song To see this kind of lyrics you must press the Lyrics tab in the Song Play mode n SongBook mode you can see lyrics contained in a Stan dard MIDI File as Lyrics events To see this kind of lyrics you must press the Lyrics STS tab in the SongBook mode n SongBook mode you can see lyrics contained in a TXT file associated with a Style based SongBook entry To see this kind of lyrics you must press the Lyrics STS tab in the SongBook mode n SongBook mode you can see lyrics contained in a TXT file associated with a Song based SongBook entry To see this kind of lyrics you must press the Lyrics STS tab in the SongBook mode In the case of Song based entries this is the priority of lyrics data shown in the display i TXT file associated with the entry overriding ii TXT file contained in the same folder as the Standard MIDI File recalled by the entry overriding ii Lyrics events contained in the Standard MIDI File Info Use the Info page to see the name of the selected entry the asso ciated resource s the total number of Songs in the SongBook the number of filtered entries the number of available Custom Lists and the number of Songs in the current list ncase of an entry based on a Style SONGBOOK T B no chord B Selected entry Associated resource Book
560. you play a CM7 When you play a CM7 Key Chord 2 CMaj with NTT Root with NTT 5th DDT AO Mer As recorded with NTT i Series When you play a CMaj When you play a C7 Key Chord 2 CM7 with NTT i Series with NTT i Series JM CHII 200 Note The NTT does not work if the Track Type parameter is set to Drum Pad Track info area This line lets you see the Sound assigned to the selected track Pad Track t Standard Kit RX E Drum amp Perc AHH B2 Sound bank Sound name Program Change Sound name PAD Sound assigned to the Pad track The triangle means you can press the name to open the Sound Select window and select a different Sound Sound bank PAD Bank the selected Sound belongs to Program Change PAD Program Change number sequence Bank Select MSB Bank Select LSB Program Change Tracks volume status area Octave Transpose This non editable indicator shows the current octave transposition To change this value use the OCTAVE TRANSPOSE buttons on the control panel While this value is not memorized with the Pad the transposi tion is used during recording For example if you play a C4 and a 1 octave transposition is selected a C5 is recorded o Jg c Q L Q ja Q ec 134 Pad Record mode Pad Record procedure Virtual slider The virtual slider in the display shows the track s volume To change the volume touch the slider and use TEMPO VALUE controls to
561. your hands from the keyboard momentarily stops the Style run ning If you play a chord again the Style starts again Start Off Stop Off All Synchro functions are turned off 9 SONGBOOK Press this button to recall the SongBook mode While in this mode you can browse through the music database SHIFT You can jump to the SongBook gt Custom List page by keeping SHIFT pressed and pressing the SONGBOOK button ENSEMBLE PPERF STS STS5 This button turns the Ensemble function on or off When on the right hand melody is harmonized with the left hand chords Note The Ensemble function works only when the keyboard is in SPLIT mode and the LOWER Chord Scanning mode is selected c 9 Siem YU O O i 14 Front panel COLOR TOUCHVIEW GRAPHICAL DISPLAY Use this display to interact with the instrument To set the dis play contrast keep the MENU button pressed and turn the DIAL counter clockwise to decrease brightness or clockwise to increase it 9 RECORD This button sets the instrument to Record mode which one depends on the current operating mode TRACK SELECT Depending on the operating mode this button switches between the various track views STYLE PLAY MODE Toggles between Keyboard and Style tracks SONG PLAY MODE Toggles between Keyboard tracks Song tracks 1 8 and Song tracks 9 16 SEQUENCER MODE Toggles between Song tracks 1 8 and Song tracks 9 16

Style Edit - Just Music

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents